0% found this document useful (0 votes)
311 views371 pages

SAMSUNG SWITCHBAORD Solutions Pour Le Controle de Puissance

Uploaded by

yann lamble
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
311 views371 pages

SAMSUNG SWITCHBAORD Solutions Pour Le Controle de Puissance

Uploaded by

yann lamble
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 371

I

NMSUN
Hull No 21't1
shi Name CMÂ CGM AR!{ANSAS
shi 300TEU Container Ves§el
IMO Nô s722851
Con No EM.24 2
Documenl TiTe :

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR


HV ttAtN SWTCHBOARD
MESSRS

Samsung Heavy Industries & Construction Co.Ltd.

FOR FINA L
sN.2l1l

INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR


r 6.6KV MAIN SWITCI{BOARD

INOUS

ISSU ED
a 2015. 07. 17 a
E IGN
CEAR

NMSU N

KIND OF VESSEL CLASS

BV
9,]OO TtU CONTAINTR VL=SSEL (AUr)
A-001

MESSRS

SAMSUNG HEAVY
INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD.

HULL No. 201 tz 13 L+ 15 16 t7

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
6.6KV MAIN SS/ITCIIBOARD
A-002

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This 6.6kV Main switchboard instruction manual is intended for trained competent person
performing such work as maintenance and inspection of switchboards.
Be sure to read and observe safety notices not only in this manual but also on caution
plates and waming plates aflixed on the switchboard.

This instruction manual is made up of the followin g chapters.


A. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR THE HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SWITCHBOARD
B. INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR 6.6KV MAIN SWITCHBOARD
C.7.2/l2kV Medium-Voltage Metal-clad Switchgear and Control Gear for Marine
and Offshore Use SSMV-7/12 Instruction manual
D. INSTRUCTION MANUAI FOR HVF Vacuum Circuit Breaker CS TYPE
E. INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR HCA Vacuum Contactor T ÿpe
F. GPM-500 User's Manual
G. User's Manual Check synchroscope type CSQ-3
H. User's Manual for others equipment(Timer,Etc...)

Beforc reading the other sections of this manual, be sure to read and understand the
safety measure explained in the next section, "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR THE HIGH
VOLTAGE MAIN SWITCHBOARD'

A CeUftOX Handling of Generator Automatic Control System

The automation control system / automation control device of a 6.6kV generator


should be included by Integrated Control Monitoring System(ICMS), and since
the automatic-control signal of the circuit breakers of 6.6kV MSB equipment is
outputted from ICMS, refer to the instruction manual of ICMS for the details.

AMSU N
A-003

Chapter A. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


FOR
THE HIGH VOLTAGE MAIN SWITCHBOARD

Before operating or working on any electrical equipment, read this manual


carefully to gain an understanding of the machinery and how to handle it safely.

In this manual, safeÿ precaution are ranked into two types;


'DANGER'and "CAUTION" these two ranks are defined as follows.

: A danger notice with this symbol indicates that


DANGER neglecting the suggested procedure or practice
could be fatal or result in serious personal injury.

: A caution notice with this symbol indicates that


CAUTION neglecting the suggested procedure or practice
could result in moderate or slight personal
injury and / or properÿ damage.

Note that failing to observe 7\ ceunou notices could result in


serious lnjury / damage in some situations.
Because safety notices contain inportant safety information, be sure to
read and observe them.

Refer to additional document


* 7 .2 I l2kV Medium-Voltage Metal-clad Switchgear and Conhol Gear for Marine
and Offshore Use SSMV-7/12 Instruction Manual(Ch C.)

,IMSUN
A-004

Table of Contents

Section l. Handling Electrical Machinery and Apparatus A-005


1.1 General Precautions -------------- A-005
L2 Precautions for Hot-line Work A-006
1 .3 Guidelines for Fire Extinguishing A-007
14 Maintenances and Inspection of Vacuum Circuit Breaker -------- A-008
l 5 Maintenances and Inspection of Vacuum Contâctors -------------- A-008
1 for Circuit Breaker Operation -------------------------- A-008
.6 Precautions
1 .7 Precautions for Replacing Molded Case Circuit Breakers
---- A-009
1 .8 Precautions for Current-Transformer Operation ------------------ A-010

1.9 Precautions for Changing Fuses A-010


I .10 Precautions for Changing Relays
(Auxiliary relays, Timer relays, etc.) A-010
1.i I Precautions for Changing Elechomagnetic Contactorc ---------- A-011
L12 Precautions for Changing Thermal Overload Relay A-011
1.13 Other Precautions A-011

Section 2. Electric Shock Prevention --------------- ----- A-012


2.1 General Information on Electric Shock A-012
2. 1 .1 The Danger of Elechicity A-012
2.1.2The Symptoms of an Electric Shock Victim ------------------- A-012
2.2 Prevention of Electric Shock A-012

NMSUN
A-005

Sec l. Handling Electrical Machinery and Apparatus


In order to prevent accidents, anyone handling electrical machinery and apparatus
must be thoroughly acquainted with the precautions noted below and with those in
section 2, Electric Shock Prevention
Most accidents should always work notes which are what can be prevented if careful
and which are described below in mind.

1 I General Precautions
Observe the following precautions when performing maintenance or inspection in order
to avoid electric shock or a short circuit. (Dropping or contact such objects as metal
tools, flashlights, or other conductive materials can cause Accidents.)

CAUTION Working Preparations


(1) Trcat electrical equipment as highly flammable materials at all times.
Do not smoke or use a flame in the vicinity of the equipment.
(2) Wear ahelmet, safeÿ shoes and work clothes when working on the equipment.
(3) Cut off the power supply.
Otherwise there is the danger of electric shock from live bus bars and other
current carrying parts when the switchboard or other electrical panel is opened.
(4) Make sure there is no voltage in the circuit before any electrical work is done.
(Use a voltmeter / circuit tester or the like.)
(5) Never work on live part. (Except in an emergency)
(6) Before working, think carefully about the steps you will take, furspect the
surroundings for any possible dangers, and inform your associates ofwhat
you plan to do. Then work quickly and efficiently.
(7) Provide sufficient lighting for the work area.
(8) Maintain an orderly work are Do not scatter tools or other articles about.
(9) Leam the proper way to use a circuit tester and other necessary tools.
(10) Read and understand section 2. Electric Shock Prevention

CAUTION Inspection and Maintenance

(i) Daily inspection. Check appcarance for any damage.


Pay special attention for noise, bad odor and discoloration.
(2) Periodic inspection.
a) Check each bus bar Tixing section, device mounting section and wfuing
section for any Iooseness.

IlMSUN
A-006

CAUTION
if any looseness is found, fasten the fixed bolts again.
b) Check apperance ofeach device (vacuum circuit breaker, molded case circuit
breaker, electromagentic contactor, thermal overload relay, transformer,
fuse, module card, etc.) for any missing or damage.
Ifany failure or damage is found, replace with thc spare parts.
c) Check each device (vacuum circuit breaker, molded case circuit breaker, electro
magnetic contactor, thermal overload relay, transformer, fuse, module card,
etc.) for noise, bad odor or discoloration.
If any noise, bad odor or discoloration is found, replace with the spare parts.
d) Check the mechanical operating section ofeach device (vacuum circuit breaker,
molded case circuit breaker, electromagnetic contactor, thermal overload
relây, etc.) for any mechanical malfunction in operation.
If any malfunction is found, replace with the spare parts.
1.2 Precautions for Hot-line Work
Never perform hot-line work unless it is unavoidable. Ifrepat of live circuits or
electrical devices is unavoidable, gain a thorough under-standing of section 2.
* Electric Shock Prevention * and obey the precautions listed below. And further electric
shock hazard. Do not touch and approach the energized part on the high-voltage side.

DANGER
(1) In the presence and/or under the supervision of competent supervisor,
perform the work while observing the following preparatory steps.
a) Provide sufficient lighting for the work area.
b) Remove wristwatches, rings, and other metal articles from the body.
'Wear long
sleeve work clothes that fit close to the body, and make sure
clothing and shoes are dry.
c) Insulate yourself from the body of the ship, and place insulating material
over any devices or structural components, which may be accidentally touched.
d) Cover tools with vinyl tape as wherever possible.
e) When doing electrical work, cover live part with insulating material to
protect agâinst dropped tools and scrap-wire.
f) Place insulation between the live section of the circuit and the section to be
worked on.
g) Wear rubber gloves on both hands (and wear rubber boots.)

NMSU N
A-007

DANGER

(2) Work with the right hand as much as possible, and take care not loses your
balance. A loss ofbalance due to the movement of the ship can cause an
accident,
(3) Station someone who can cut the power off immediately in an emergency,
and establish a signal between yourselfand that person.

1.3 Guidelines for Fire Extinguishing


In the event ofan elecfical fire, quickly perform the following procedures

DANGER
(1) Cut offthe power to the circuit or device from which the fire began.
(2) Cut off the power to other circuit or devices, which may be damaged by the
fire including those, which could be damaged if the hre spreads.
Do not cut offpower to any devices, which could cause a serious accident if
deprived ofpower.
(3) Inform your supervisor and anyone close to the area of the fire.
(4) Use a fire extinguisher (powder or haiide ÿpe) to fight the fire.
In a small room or section, there is the danger of asphyxiation from the fre
extinguishing material. Be careful to avoid this.
In the case ofelectrical fires, always cut off the power supply first.
Take a good look around and think before working.
Then work fast to stop the spreading ofthe fire.
(5) Be careful when using water to extinguish an electrical Iire.
The person fighting the fire could be electrocuted by current flow through the \&'ater
This is especially true of seawater but also true of fresh water.
(6) Think carefully when choosing between seawater and a lLre extinguisher.
Once electrical devices have come in contact with seawater it is diffrcult to
restore them to their original condition.
In some cases, a frre extinguisher is the best choice even if it requires more
time than seawater to put out the fire.

.@t
A-008

I .4 Maintenances and Inspection of Vacuum Circuit Breakers


The circuit breakers are operated by an electrically operated, mechanically and
electrically trip-free, motor spring charge operatirig mechanism.
Provision are included for manual operating of the mechanism.

CAUTION
See the operating instructions of the VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER for correct
maintenance, inspection, and replacement procedures.
For some ÿpes and mounting configurations, the entire switchboard must be
source cut olf to perform the work for "Fixed ÿpe".
For otlers, only â restricted area ofthe switch6<iard must be cut off for
" Draw-out ÿpe".

1.5 Maintenances and Inspection of Vacuum Contactors


The contactors are operated by an electrically operated.

CAUTION
See the operating instructions of the VACUUM CONTACTORS for correct
maintenance, inspection, and replacement procedures.
For some types and mounting configurations, the entire switcboard must be
source cut off to perform the work for "Fixed type".
For others, only a restricted area of the switchboard must be cut off for
"Draw-out §pe".

1.6 Precautions for Circuit Breaker Operation

DANGER
(i) Before operating circuit breaker and switches, confirm the following to avoid
putting others in danger.
a) There will be no problems if any or all devices in the circuit receive power.
b) There are no other lvorkers working on the same circuit.
If There are other workers working on the same circuit, inform them of what
breaker or switch you will be operating and advise their caution.
c) The protective deviccs (fuses, breaker, etc.) of all circuit are in order.
(2) Operate breaker and switches in the following manner.
a) Perform all operations with the right hand.
Except for operaüons requiring both hands, keep the left hand back and
away from the breaker or switch.
b) Operate knife switch and the like with one quick motion.

.@t
A-009

1.7 Precautions for Replacing Molded Case Circuit Breakers

DANGER
(l ) Removing and installing breakers.

a) Make sure the operating handle of the Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
is in the OFF or TRIP position before working.
Do Not work with the operating handle in the ON position.
* For Switchboard

Remove and install plug-in ÿpe (PM connection)MCCB's in accordance


with the instruction manual of MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
OPERATIONMANUAL
Plug-in type breakers allow quick and easy installation even if the bus bar (line
side) is hot.

b) WIen inspecting the accessory auxiliary terminals on back side of an MCCB


and do not touch the branch busline or other live part.
Other wise, electric shock could result.
c) When removing an MCCB, do not mistakenly loosen line-side terminal screw.
Be sure to use the MCCB mounting screw.
Otherwise, electric shock or damage to the MCCB could result.

(2) Selecting the right spare.


a) Be sure to replace the breaker with a spare ofthe same type and rated current.
* MCCB's with under voltage trip(IlVT)cannot be used in circuits, which are
not wired for UVT operating.
* MCCB's with shunt trip (SHT), an auxiliary switch (AUX) and alarm switch
(ALT) can be used in circuits, which are not wired for use with such
internally mounted accessories.
* MCCB's using UVT and SHT must be replaced with breakers of the same
rated voltage.
b) In the case of electronic type over current protection MCCB's to be used in
switch boards, do the following in addition to a ) above.
Set the rated cuttent value of the spare to the same value as that of the
original breaker.
The setting value can be found in the MCCB SETTING TABLE section of
the complete drawings for the LV switchboard.

.@t
A-010

1.8 Precautions for Current-Transformer Operation

DANGER

Do Not open the secondary side of a current transformer.


If the secondary side must open repair work, do not leave it opened, medium
voltage could be produced in the secondary side current flows tfuough the
primary side.
Periodically check the connections of the secondary side for tightness.

1.9 Precautions for Changing Fuses

DANGER
(1) Changing fuses.
a) When removing a fuse, use either the fuse puller supplied with the
switchboard or the fuse puller supplied with the spare part.
b) While inserting the fuse into the fuse clip, do not allow the conductive part
of the fuse to toch the between adjacent fuse clip and this fuse clip.
Otherwise, a short-circuit accident could result.
c) When changing a fuse, do not make contact with nearby charged devices or
wiü any other live part.(i.e. bus-line etc.)
Otherwise, electric shock could result.
(2) Selecting the right spare.
Use a spare of the same type and rated cuttent as the blown fuse.

1.10 Preacutions for Changing Relays (auxiliary relays, timer relays, etc.)

CAUTION
(1) Changing the relay.
a) Remove the power supply fuse for the circuit containing the relay to cut off
the voltage to the circuit.
For a starter conkol circuit. set the MCCB for the starter circuit power supply
to OFF.
b) Change the relay.

(2) Selecting the right spare.


Use a spare of the same type, rated current, and contact configuration as the
previously used relay.

.@t
A-011

1.11 Precautions for Changing Electromagnetic Contactors

CAUTION
(1) Changing the elechomagnetic contactor.
a) Set the MCCB for the circuit containing the electromagnetic contactor to
OFF in order to cut off the voltage to the circuit.
b) Change the electromagnetic contactor.
(2) Replacing with a spare.
For some eleechomagnetic contactors, the entire unit is changed.
For others, a1l parts (contacts, spring and voltage coil) ofthe unit are changed
separately.
Check the spare parts table to confirm the type of electro-magnetic contactor,
the coffect part name, etc. and follow the inshuction in Iv{-A.GNETIC
CONTACTOR operating lnstructions for proper installation.

1.12 Precautions for Changing Thermal Overload Relays

CAUTION
(1) Changing the thermal overload relay.
a) Cut off the power to the circuit containing the thermal overload relay' §o
voltage)
b) Change the thermal overload relay.
(2) Selecting the right thermal overload relay.
a) Use the spare parts table to select a thermal overload relay of the same
type and rated current as the previously used thermal overload relay.
b) Set the dial ofthe relay before using.

1.13 Other Precautions

CAUTION
(1) Keep front doors and back covers closed except when it is necessary to
oPen them.
(2) Immobilize the moving parts by doorstopper of front doors or relay racks and
rear cover of the switchboard while electrical work is being done'
(3) Do not remove protective plates or protective covers except absolutely
necessâry.
If they must be removed, be sure to return them to their proper positions

.û@t
A-012

CAUTION

(4) Do not leave any tools or work materials on or around the switchboard or
starter panel after work has been completed.
(5) Always discharge capacitors before working on capacitor circuits.

Section 2. Electric Shock Prevention

2.i General Information on Electric Shock


2. I . 1 The Danger of Electricity
(1) Receiving an electric shock is extremely dangerous.
Even a relatively small amount current can be fatal if it passes through the heart,
lungs, or other vital organ.
(2) 100V AC is more dangerous than is generally thought.
At 100V AC, 60/50 Hz, even a 50mA is dangerous and 50V l00mÀ can cause a

fatal electric shock.


2.1.2The Symptoms of an Electric Shock Victim
The symptoms described below must be treated immediately with artificial respiration
or Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) until the victim recovers.
These are symptoms of electric shock and should not be confused with death. It is
not unusual for a person suffering from these symptoms to recover even after several
hours of artificial respiration or cardiopulmonary resuscitaton (CPR).
The symptoms are listed in order from mild to most serious case.

(1) Breathing stops.


Normal breathing can usually be restored after continuing artilicial respiration for
a short while.
(2) Breathing unconscious.
In the worst of cases, the body of the victim may become rigid within two or three
minutcs after the shock.

2.2 Prevention of Electric Shock


The person who performs maintenance work of operation and maintenance, repair,
etc., or the person in the position of superintending these persons surely needs to
take the following preventive measures against an electric shock.

,I MSU N
A-013

DANGER

(l) Never assume there is no voltage applied to the circuit until the voltage has
been confirmed (measured).
Always cut off the power supply and confirm that there is no voltage applied
to the circüt before any electrical work is done.
Most accidents occur because the power is mistakenly assumed to be off

(2) Always use rubber gloves, rubber boots, and an insulation mat when doing
elecaical work.
(3) Tag the power supply switch when doing elecrical work.
(Ex. Do Not Tum on Power: Maintenance Work)
If someone tums on the power while maintenance work is being done, and
accident could occur.
(4) Operate switches wiü the right hand while holding the left hand back and
away fiom the body.
(5) Station people in such stÉtegic places as near the switchboard in order cut
off the power immeditely if an accident occurs.

NMSU N
B-001

Chapter B. INSTRUCTION MANUAL


FOR
6.6KV MAIN SWITCIIBOARD

It

NMSUN
B-002

Table of Contents

CHAPTERBl. GENERAI
Section L lntroduction -------:-- B-004
Section 2. Main Generators ----------------- ------------ B-004
Section 3. Rules and Regulations --------- ---------------- 8-005
Section 4. Electric Constructions and Mechanical Construction --------- 8-005
Section 5. Major Components of 6.6kV Main Switchboard B-005
5.1 Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCB) B-005
5.2 Vacuum Contactor (VCT) B-006
5.3 MULTI PROTECTION and CONTROL IINIT for
Generator,Transformer,Motor,Feeder (GPM-500) B-006
5.4 Check Synctuoscope (CSQ-3) B-007
5.5 Earthing Switches (ES) B-007
Section 6. Names and Abbreviations of Swbd and Control Panel ---- B-007
Section 7. Power System Diagram B-009
Section 8. Interlock Arrangement -------- B-009
Section 9. Key Interlock System --------- ----------------- B-010

CHAPTER 82. RUNNINGAND STOPPINGOFGENERATORS


Section l. Summary B-018
Section 2. Manual Control of Diesel Generator --- ------ B-0i9
2-l Start Stop Control of Diesel Engine B-019
2.2 SÂrt Stop Conkol of Diesel Engine
6.6kV Main Switchboard B-024
2.2.1 Single Unit Operation - ------- B-024
2.2.2 Parullel Operation ----:-- B-027
2.2.3 Stopping a Generator B-032
Section 3. Automatic Starting of Diesel Generator and
Trouble Alarm Singnals B-036

,IMSU N
B-003

Table of Contents

CHAPTER B3 BOW THRUSTER MOTOR CONTROL


Section 1. Summary B-039
Section 2. Bow Thruster Motor Control B-039
2. I Major Components of Bow Thruster Panel B-039
2. l. I Vacuum Circuit Breaker (VCB) B-039
2.1 .2 Vacuum Contator (VCT) B-039
2. 1,3 Auto Transformer (ATr) B-040
2. 1.4 Motor Protection Relay(GPM-500) B-041
2.2 Key Interlock System --------- ------- 8-041
2.3 Arrangement of Indication lamps and Switches for Operation ------- B-041
2.4 Running and Stopping of Bow Thruster Motor -------------'----------- B-042
2.5 Bow Thruster Motor Start Blocking Control B-044
2.6 Trouble Alarm Signals B-044

CHAPTER B4 MISCELLANEOUS
Section 1 . Monitoring of Insulation Level and Detection of
Earthing Phase of Main busbar B-045
1.1 Summary B-045
1.2 Zero-phase Voltage Monitor --------- B-045
1.3 Earth Lamp B-046
Section 2. Monitoring of lnsulation Level for Generator Circuit and
Feeder Circuit B-047
2.1 Summary B-047
2.2 Zero-phase Curent Monitor ----------------- B-047
Section 3. Preferential Tripping System and Forced Tripping System :--- B-049
3.1 Summary B-049
3.2 Kind of Tripping System B-049
3.2.1 When GPM-500 detects --------- B-049
3.2.2 When VCB ABNORMAL TRIP detects ------------------------ B-050
Section 4. Overload Protection of Generators --------------------------------- 8-050

,IMSU N
B-004

CHAPTER 81. GENERAL


Section 1. Introduction
A 6.6kV Main switchboard (hereafter refened to as 6.6kV MSB) is an assembly of
switching controls, regulating devices, measuring instfllments and protective
devices, and it serves as the s'"vitching center ofthe electrical distribution system for
efficient centralized distribution control.
This 6.6kV main switchboard distributes electric power to the various loads on board a ship
In the event ofa fault in a load circuit, an appropriate protective device will operate to clear
the fault in order to protect both the circuit and equipment and to maintain the continuiry
of service.
One or more ofthe generators mentioned in Section 2 are placed on the bus of this 6.6kV
main switchboard as necessary to cover the total power demand, and the generator power
is distributed to the individual feeder circuits from the feeder panels ofthe 6.6kV main
switchboard.
Generators are normally controlled in automatic mode.
Even ifgenerators are out ofcontrol in automatic mode, they can be
controlled in manual control mode.
The electrical generating equipment for supply ofelectric power for the elechical loads on
board the ship consists offour 6.6kV main generators, namely,
one 450V Emergency diesel generator which is automatically operated when
the electric power supply by the four 6.6kV main generators becomes impossible.

The 6.6kV Main switchboard is equipped with the following circuit breakers:

a) The circuit breaker which protect the generator from faults in monitoring and control
functions ofthe electrical generating equipment and in the generators, or other faults, and
b) The circuit breakers, which not only feed the electric power to the loads, located
elsewhere the ship but also protect the load side equipment correctly responding to
the nature,&ind of fault when a fault occurs.

Section 2. Main Generators


Type Diesel generator
Voltase 6.6kV AC 3-phase
Capacity 4300 kw 3300 kw
Frequency 6O Hz. 60 Hz.
Quantity 2 sets 2 sets

@t
B-005

Section 3. Rules and Regulations


This main switchboard designed and manufactured to the Rules and Regulation of the
Bureau Veritas (BV:AUT).
Section 4. Electric Construction and Mechanical Construction

CAUTION Electric Construction and Mechanical Construction

Refer to "GENERAL SPECITICATION (SE)" and "TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION


(TSE)" of a 6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD finished drawing for the
specification details of electric sttucture and mechanical structure.

Section 5. Major Components of 6.6kV Main Switchboard


5.1 Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCB)
* The circuit breakers are ofthe vacuum type (hereafter referred to as "VCB")
* The circuit breakers are of draw-out type with automatic shutter and eathing switch.
+ The circuit breakers are operated by an electrically operated, mechanically and

electrically trip-free, motot spring charge operating mechanism.


* Provision are included for manual operating of the mechanism.
*The circuit breaker compartment are fumished with mechanistn which will move the
breaker between the operating and disconnecting positions.
x Control voltage of the circuit breaker is 110V DC from the outside of 6.6kV MSB.

CAUTION Handling of Vacuum Circuit Breaker

For full information on their operation, maintenance and inspection, see the
relevant document of "INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR HVF VACWM CIRCUIT
BREAKER CS TYPE"
Handling of the earlhing switch and de-excitation switch, refer to the related
Ch 81, Sec 9 " Key Interlock System" below and Additional document'7 .2l12ky
Medium-Voltage Metal-clad Switchgear and Control Gear for Marine and
Offshore Use SSMV-7/12 Instruction Manual"
About the various rated capacity of VCB to apply, "BREAKER CAPACITY LIST
(VCB) BCl " of 6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD finished drawing is referred to'
+Type of VCB curtently used HVF-2042-CS4444.
B-006

5.2 Vacuum Contactor (VCT)


* The contactors are ofthe vacuum type. (hereafter referred to as VCT)
+ Used for bow thruster motor control circuit only.
x The contactors are offixed
ÿpe.
* The contactors are operated by an electrically operated.
* Control voltage of the circuit breaker is 110V DC from the outside of 6.6kV MSB.

CAUTION Handling of Vacuum Contactor

For fu1l information on their operation, maintenance and inspection, see the
relevant document of "Instruction manual for HCA Vacuum Contactor T type "
About the various rated capacity of VCT to apply, "BREAKER CAPACITY LIST
(VCT) BC2" of 6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD finished drawing is referred to.
Type of VCT currently used HCA-62CF.

5.3 MULTI PROTECTION and CONTROL LrNIT for Generator,Transformer


Motor, Feeder (GPM-500)
* TheMulti protection and Control unit GPM-500
is a control unit supplying power management system.
* This is used for generator,transformer,motor,feeder protection and
and protection functions are based on the IEC 60255.
+ This is installed on each generator,transformer,motor,feeder panel front.
* This unit supplies those requirements of customers with easy handling and operation.

CAUTION Handling of Multi Protection and Control Unit

For full infotmation on their operation, maintenance and inspection, see the
relevant instruction manual of "GPM-500's Installation instructions & Operation
and service manual".
About the protection item and the various setting value of the generator,transformer
,motor,feeder protected by GPM-500, "Parameter List & Selectiviÿ study" and
6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD finished drawing is referred to.

.e@D
B-007

5.4 Check synchroscope(CsQ-3)


* Multi function, precision LED synchroscope.
* Easy push-button programming of all set-position.
* The 6.6kV main switchboard control is using the "Check synchronizing function"

CAUTION Handling of Synchronizing Relay

For adjustment of the permissible range and handling, refer to the instruction
manual of the "User's Manual Check synchroscope type CSQ-3'
and "Parameter list & selectivity study" drawing.

5.5 Earthing Swith (ES)


+ Earthing switch are fixed type and they are installed in the medium voltage vacuum
circuit breaker and GPT unit under side(except for BUS-TIE Panel).
* Mechanical interlocks are provide between the vacuum circuit breaker and the earthing
switch, refer to "Key lnterlock System"(Ch 81, Sec 9).

CAUTION Earthing and Short-circuiting for Maintenance Purpose

For full infotmation on their operation of earthing switch, maintenance and


inspection. see tle relevant document of "INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR HVF
VACWM CIRCUIT BREAKER CS TYPE'.
+ Pay attention, electrical shock hazard. Don't touch source side of vacuum
circuit breaker, draw-out unit live part, even if vacuum circuit breaker
unit disconnection position.
Handling of the earthing switch and de-excitation switch refer to ttre related
Ch Bl,Sec 9 "Key tnterlock System" below and Additional documenl"1.2llzkV
Medium-Voltage Metal-clad Switchgear and Control Gear for Marine and
Offshore Use SSMV-7/12 Instruction Manual"(Ch C).

Section 6. Names and Abbreviations of SwitÇhboard and Control Panel


The following table shows the names and abbreviations of switchboard and control
panels used in this 6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD Instn:ction manual'

Table 1 SWITCHBOARD abbreviations are used in the following explanation

No. SWITCHBOARDNAME ABBREVIATION


6.6KV MAIN SV/ITCHBOARD MMSB
I
44ÛV MAIN SWITCHBOARD LMSB
2 EMERGENCY SV/ITCHBOARD ESB
J INTEGRATED CONTROL AND ICMS
MONITORING SYSTEM
4 POWER MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PMS

II MSU N
B-008

Table 2 CIRCUIT BREAKER abbreviations are used in the following explanation

LOCATlON CIRCUIT BRIIAKER No. & NAMF ABBREVIATION


No.I P I t-0134-02 No.l BOW THRUSTER BH
6.6kV MSB
P1 I -018-0 t No. 1 REEFER TRANSFORMER RTI

Pll-019-01 No.2 REEFER TRANSFORMER RT2

PI l-020-0t No.3 REEFER TRANSFORMER RT3

P1 1.010-01 No.l MAIN TRANSFORMER MTI


Pl l-006-01 Nô.1 DIESEL GENERATOR DGI

Plt-007-01 No.2 DIESEL GENERATOR DC2

BUS TIE BUS TIE BT


No.2 Pt2-006-01 No.3 DIESEL CENERATOR DG3
6.6KV MSB
Pl2-007-0t No.4 DIESEL GENERATOR DG4

Pl2-010-01 No.2 MAIN TRANSFORMER MT2

Pt2-018-01 No.4 REEFER TRANSFORMER RT4

P l2-019-01 No.5 REEFER TRANSFORMER RT5

P l2-020-01 No.6 REEFER TRANSF'ORMER RT6

Note : Refer to a low voltage switchgear manufactuer's finished drawing for low vlotage
switchgear-related a circuit number and circuit nâme etc
B-009

Section 7. Power System Diagram


The inboard main power circuit electric system is shown in 'ELECTRIC SYSTEM
ONE-LINE DIAGRAM' of the following page B-01 1.

Graphical indicator plate, which indicated tâg name to major electrical netwolk of this
porver system diagram, is attached in front of No.l GPT & SYNCHRO. PANEL

Section 8. Interlock Arrangement


After studies on the necessity, mutual interlocks are provided among tÏe generators vcB
, bus-tie VCB respectively equipped on 6.6kV Main switchboard.
This aims to maintain optional status of power supply throught opening or closing of each
VCB, when normal electric power supply is disturbed by some reason, or
depending on the relationship between the number of generators on-line and power
receiving or the demand-supply situations ofelectric power.
Opening/closing operation of the VCB is done by electrical closing operation or
mechanical closing operation depending on the application purpose.

For details on operation mechanism, refer to the instruction manual ofeach circuit
breaker.

IIMSU N
B-010

Section 9. Key Interlock System


For safe maintenance and checkup of the compartment v/hich accommodates each
component of the 6.6kV main switchboard, each cell is de-energized by opening the main
circuit breaker and power line charging current is discharged by closing (earthing) the
earthing switch, to do this, therefore, the interlock by key operation according to the
predetermined operating peocedure is provided between the main circuit breakers, earthing
switches and compartment rear door.
The key installation, refer to the finised drawing of "6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD'.

Table 3 Cells provided with this Key interlocks are as follow

MECHANICAL INTERLOCK PANEL NAME


DEFINITIONMIl
GENERATOR, TRANSFORMER,AMP DIESEL GENERATOR,
CIRCUIT MIz 6.6KV MAIN TRANSFORMER,
6.6kV AMP(FOR THE FUTURE)
MAIN BUS CIRCUIT-I MI3 No.1 GPT
MAIN BUS CIRCUIT.2 MI4 No-2 GPT
BUS-TIE CIRCUIT MI5 BUS.TIE
BOW THRUSTER CIRCUIT MI6 BOW THRUSTER MOTOR

The details ofthese key operations should be in accordance with the following
descriptions . Refer to 'MECHANICAL INTERLOCK " of the following
pages B-012-017.

NMSU N
B-011

No.l D/G No.2 D/C No.JD /c ù/c


6.6kV. 60Hz 6.6kV, 60Hl ?
6.6kV, 60H .
6.6kV 60Hz
4,300kw l,500kÏ/ 3,Jû0kw 4,i00kr,\,

Àc6.6kv
CE

CB c8 c CB CB
CB CB CB

ac6,600v/450v

AC6,600v/450V AC6,600v/4s0v

AC44OV SWIÎCHBOÂRD
CB
No.] GSP No.l AC4,4OV FP CB No AC4{OV FP

No.l Mo:n No.2 Moin


LEÇEND
/225v AC44tÿ /225v
^c44tÿ
c&_ rvocuum Circuii Breoke(Mv)
or An Circult Breok€(Lv)
AC22OV FP 0s
rStoder
:Molded Cose Cir.uit Breok€r
oÿ_ :Disconnect Swilch

@ :Eleciric Motor
csP

Emergency

300kw, 60H

tmerqency AC440V FP CB
Em'.v AC22W FP

T
8!ttery
EM'CY TR
ac1{N/2?5\

ELECTRIC SYSTEIü ONE_LINE DIAGRAIü


B-012
65
É=
crE a
x,"§
,-=H
\u/ 85-
-
Ès
És
8= =s

z.
L
o
æ,
zt-
o 9
= §E
b -6
=
<.,
z
=
s
à
5 t ï =
g ;= 6g c c
rë -Ê
11 ,91
::=
9^6
i! 9
éj ts5
é Éa
-5 >ô 3
o2 9- 90Ë ; PH
PÉ TA =É E*= =
5
g 9A
^=3
â1É,
Ee
jY o!
=E #È oÉe ;Ê
-Q ÉU c?Ê E;ÈË EE= Ê -a
@P 2=*Z r,,!- I
I
!É9lo t *g
Èa
vts
Ê+ Ë=ê =EE
à6 =rF
aÉ CEE !Ëa Y
f-
- t 8 È 11
Ç
,IMSU N
B-013
g6
BE EI É
Ê I 8t sl El 9l ql Èl ël Ét

I B 3 § s
a I a I
=
_l a s g È É
9q
§l
EI al Ët Èl
Ë
a I a
- E!
â 8l El Èl ;l ;] q Él EI E1
_)
I g ù Bg E5
H5 12
,E Hg ë=
6 EF È,P
,-È
& ta ta iE rê tE E
sn8 NMt
I s a 5
;l P'
gEd
êAdtsrE1*
5 :A
^ È 9 ô
E q iÈ -È e : ;
!a
5 = '- É
," -s
L z-
e ?: .ré
éa
Ê: e :E :Ë
'- Hx 5:
t-
Ë
r .sa iÊ :E :H
5 iç
ÏcËE ÉE Ë
;Ë i
Ë:Éq EÉ
Ë + p;§ :E ;:EE
i=:-
+:eà
E
:S ËE
d;
É È È :-B
;: àF;PE aE
Ë ËÊ: '=:sEgeE; êz z
Ê
t2 - à ô > '- 1-
I 3 4 ô
I) È - .
3-É .ÿ Edcfr='-
tr : ÈÉ ::: iËîi[:Ë3 Ë5 Ë
X Êâ É1:,o=?ÉË3:ËE ËE Z
Ü
= =
-
ë iÈ
Eÿ I üEË: ôJ
=aEi-ii,"6,_,_
8 - ÉEÉFg i :
2 "
i:leE32?"eà5F3: aiiË9Ë
É 1utseË;H!É'_:eE13i::i;
; É
E
9 ; ËË;ÈdE.8EÉErEéiHiËEsE
r;1
S?
:'t
e *È c s B s s È B
*t@t
B-014
Ë F
I
I
I
I
I
@ I
ü
s
@-
I
T-- É
I
a
I a
ii
I
86 I I
si
â
il
I
sg I
I
ù
a9 I
I =
8l
I
I
I
I
-lI
É
L
I
I
I
I
J I
3
I
d I
4 E
I
T
@ I
sn8 NNI!
:L
!i
ï
Ë
.lr
g
z- . I
i:q H ô i g Ea P EÉ'-,i
ë
-ce
d

|4 _tYo
iô,=
Ë
g
aÈ> i ;s
5 =:.2
Éi"; z=?rë2
EHE H99H ;:EE =
E
E8l El: jei;sâ ;.8ËÉEE
s:É .3
â:'- EBê
É
Ëi: =
ÈdEcs
É P= !
Ës.rEEË
s ü ô I a,
= =dEE EÉt
e2é :Ér9ÿ
:EE
E'xe:; :HE;H3
9ÈEEû"
xt- gr*
I e
65:
E'-g f-.ùË
eËÉ=- .t3È83=ë'
g.-E>y
L=+>
- ÿ -ù É à üE P 5:: q
e "ot
i.r-
Yê'-
;9!.È
âg§ eË;eÉEÊgiA;=
!!è!

=
.ÿ:6!,
=
!.-PÉsiHE -Qé>^^4
1 E <e'5*ê Ë=ÈI=q=E=I:!:F;âË
'ééË-Ë5!!6P-=-3q-
?
zs2 s-EFic*ëËE
S
B-015
a
! §
a
@
)
r---
@ I
I Ë
I a
+ Èl
I ** T
3;
!E -frr l
É9 il
J I
E I
-,]
a
L
I
I
I
I
I
é
.l I
6
I
I I 4 Jd
sn€ Mÿ}l
s
'3
.^J
=È ê
È d>
.l= t z
eÈ I .ir Y
e= i r .2
,E
!9tr éu]
q
a
È
i= -
É
:
È 6 â E Éed- Ë
A = *Bc sEdE
EÊ É
cEë
"P+ A e
i Ë E5É
8aE o @ 5B : E- = É
è
Ë
q:É
6È<c .ü E î.=È Ëâei'; i5=BqË
9?-'- EBÈ P>i
Et>
;P.aEqE 3.8;?g
;;É 'ÊÈ: EÈê BBdF;
x:PEÉ e E§gE
E§?;p E:;Ë;:
ê,AE3dÿ
êrO É=â E!C
EE= Xt'ô Zs- 9ÉEspef;:;3É
E
ËEÿ Bs!? r"'.9 É!.ÿÈ ô: H -<P 5 5: ! !
ô e
i:E Ë5ls'. ?9Ë -6 = -ône'àY
-e>fiÈozJa<ËÉ
rl - ê9'- -.
z
isE,È=iE sEq c-_9È-.1
d9HÈee
-Ë€ r=
É
i T;:;;e:É TAi ü5È5BEE;ÉqFcEE
É ù *E r È ff.6;'Ë
2 Eg3ÉgdEÊ AâÉ
d ÈB
B-016
snE NIi,l e-!x
a Él
!
a
ô 5 a
Ee!
é
"r5
3t s
È
d a
I =
=
e L q
È
5
I
û
snstYr ttt
i
.:e â .. Ër E
â1'E 3 É FE 3 A E: e !=gg
3 Ë
: e§ * E
ËË5 ; i ês ËoE Ër E EËE,E
g=;
5Ei ËË ËEi iei§- rËa:Ë
=
EËË EËË EE âEElË §ÉEËg
=EEË
ËEs ËiÉ iEHËEËE grÉiË
o
cËÈËË
9
= ËEl*ÈEiei=ËËEËEEiËËËilEËEË É
: eEH;EEËFÈEeia;J*E*ËËi9=EÉ* Ë
= 5
bÈÈ
t
.û@t
B-017
q ê
I à
8 il
E
â a
FÈ z
à
3rd -. ? +l
a
s
a ?
§ ël
e
È
é E 6
À
3
Ê
g
!jg
É E
tr =
Ë
c
a
n
sn8 NMt Z oi{
5 Ed'
uu
;qEÈ- ! Étr =É tsÉ
È 9=Ë ?l:g :Ë sf
ËF,g
É. 1zé ^É;8 z= bj;
tt- Eii Ed
' E ÉÈ: EtEÉ
@f,È
'!
a-=E 5H Xô ÉFÈÈ
É P:é ePiB 2- à:ai hé E= â=
i
, - i -. - =
* 'z' L5o' âd l-ts XtsA 9e 9e â3-oP
r, 5 êËP ÉP:Ê ,jE *e' È=- :ôa Ê.- Ê.@ Êêÿ:u
2 _ôà ËE-ô 2Z -xE B6E gr- e.- 9qBêg
3 .! Er(= rdÈ<*?-
Èqé ".9!-,éà;
4dË
itrE à.ÉE eÈ -EÈ_ Ê5Ë=ë
é É;É3ËËÉEËËEÉ;â. É=E É!-P ÉxâËEsÉxËEË
L i-LË'LEHEà
e q > B È, -: e É; Ë §: \ 3.* ? Ê .- YB
e É? ,É 5 t'.iaE 56Ëë- Éro ËeE ==a=EFEEF
= I
i
Ëii:FËte:ËcEEai
r55qEsP,ZrZ
"-yâ29
1oElX6
6qâ:d;9eÉa;àÉ
iri ;;É
---
EqËEEË58ÉËH
iEE lF=!E;ii5ËË
;,z8 -tsÈÈ3raE3<
=
=
E
z
=
s
d!@t
B-018

CHAPTER 82, RLTNNING AND STOPPING OF GENERATOR


Section l. Summary
The power plant of this ship contains four diesel engine driven generators.
Usually when the ship is at sea, one or two sets ofdiesel generator is operated.
At the time of calling,4eaüng ports, and cargo loading/unloading, two or three sets of the
generators are put into parallel operation for the power demand.
The diesel genemtors may also be set as stand-by so that in the event of a feeding
trouble the stand-by generator will be automatically started to replace the generator in trouble.
6.6kV Main switchboard is not equipped with this gcnerator automatic control system.
The instruction manual of ICMS is referred to about the details of this generator automatic
control system.

CAUTION Handling of Generator Automatic Control System


The automation control system / automation control device of a 6.6kV generator
should be in included by ICMS, and since the automatic control signal of the
circuit breaker of 6.6kV MSB equipment is outputted from ICMS,
refer to the instruction manual of ICMS for the details.

The " CHECK S\IJCHROSCOPE CSQ -3" has the followine feahrres:
It provides function, the 'Check synchronizing firnction (Synchronous detection control
function) installed on each.
The CIIECK SYNCHROSCOPE is used to perform the synchronous closing control over
the bus of the VCB for a generator.
The voltage and frequency is measured, and the differences of voltage,frequency
and phase are detected.

CAUTION Handling of Check Synchronizing Relay


For further information on this function, refer to ttre instruction manual for the
"User's Manual Check synchroscope type CSQ-3'(Ch G).

CAUTION Generator Control by Division of a Main Busbar


l. 6.6kV MSB A-Bus and 6.6kV MSB B-Bus are controlled independently when
BUS-TIE VCB (BT) is opened.
2.6.6kY MSB A-Bus and 6.6kV MSB B-Bus are controlled totally when BUS-TIE
VCB(BT) is closed.
3. BUS-TIE VCB is controlled only from 6.6kV MSB,
BUS-TIE VCB control from ICMS carmot be performed.

,IMSU N
B-019

The 6.6kV main switchboard panel arrangement, refer to "OUTLINE VIEW (OVl)" and
"BACK VIEW (BV)" of finished drawing of 6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD.
Various indicator lamps, meters, operation switches, etc, of the 6.6kV MSB face
of a board are explained.

Section 2. Manual Control of Diesel Generator


2.1 Start Stop Control of Diesel Engine ---(FC02XFC03)
Start stop control of diesel generator engine may be made either rernotely ffom the 6.6kV
Main switchboard (MMSB) and Integrated Control Monitoring System (ICMS) or
locally from the Machine side(M/S).
The latter has a "CONTROL POSITION" select switch(COS-M)on the machine side diesel
generator engine local alarm panel(M/S) to prevent the simultaneous control fiom both
control positions, above select switch "CONTROL POSITION" select two positions.
One of the "LOCAL' (machine side operation) and other position "REMOTE" (MMSB
operation and ICMS operation)
However, control and operation ofgenerator engine in automatic mode can be done
via the ICMS.

CAUTION Diesel Generator Engine Control

For the diesel generator engine control details, please refer to a generator diesel
engine manufacturer's instruction manual.

(1) For remote Diesel generator engine(hereafter referred to as the Diesel engine)
control from the 6.6kV MSB, the following conditions must be satisfied:
l) 110V DC control power is supplied and "DCl10V SOIIRCE" indicator lamp
on the 6.6kV MSB is tumed on.
2) The alarm and trouble indicator lamp is tumed off.
3) The diesel engine to be controlled is ready for starting
4) The "CONTROL POSiTION" select switch (COS-M) on the machine side diesel
generator engine local alarm panel is set to "REMOTE" position
Note: (FCXX) --- Flowchart number : Appended flowchart is referred to.
B-020

5) The "MODE SELECTION" switch (COS-P) on the Gen.panel is set to


"MANU(MMSB)" position.
(a) Start Control
On satisfactory confirmation of the above conditions, tum the "ENCINE CONTROL"
switch (ECS) on Gen. panel to 'START" position to start the diesel engine.
If the diesel engine does not reach the predetermined speed within l5 seconds of this
start command, the START FAIL signal rvill be produced.
This signal cancels the start command signal and at the sarne tirne, causes operation of
the diesel engine stop control circuit.
By which the diesel engine is stopped and the alarrn indicator lamp "START FAIL" on
the ICMS is turned on.
The disable staft control circuit will be reset by pressing the push-button switch "ENG
TROUBLE RESET" (ETR) on the diesel generator engine local alarm panel and the
"START FAIL" alarm indicator lamp on the ICMS is may be tumed off.

(b) Stop Control


Turn the "ENGINE CONTROL" switch on the Gen.panel to "STOP" position to stop
the diesel engine, after the generator, is removed fi'om the 6.6kV MSB bus.

CAUTION POSITION MODE SELECTION switches (COS-M) and (COS-P)

The DC engine control and VCB control funtion for a DG are controlled by
POSITION MODE SELECTION switches, selection in the control mode follows the
setting position of COS-M and COS-P.

COS.M SAil COS.P SAil C0NTR0L FLINCTION and CONTROL POSIflON


0n M/S 0n MMSB DG engine conhol VCB control
Setting position START STOP CLOSE OPEN

MANU r,{/s N,I/S, MMSB MMSB MMSB,


LOCAL
AUTO(RIMOTE) &ICMS ICMS & ICMS
MANU MMSB MMSB
I\.,I/S, MMSB MMSB,
RIMOTE
AUTO(PJMOTE) ICMS & ICMS ICMS & ICMS
B-021

(2) For remote diesel engine control from the ICMS,


the following conditions must be satisfied:

I )0V DC control power is supplied.


1I

2) The alarm and trouble indicator lamp is tumed off.


3) The diesel engine to be controlled is ready for starting.
4) The "CONTROL POSiTION" select switch (COS-M) of the machine side diesel
generator engine local alamr panel is set to "REMOTE" position
5) The "MODE SELECTION" select switch (COS-P) on the Gen.panel is set to
'AUTO(ICMS)" position.
(a) Start Confiol
Same as above mentioned (a) of 5).
However, the start control can performed by "START" control switch on ICMS

(b) Stop Control


Same as above mentioned (b) of 5).
However, the stop control can performed by "STOP" control switch on ICMS.

CAUTION control operation from ICMS

Refer to ICMS construction manufacturer's instruction manual for the details of


the control and operation from ICMS.

(3) For diesel engine control from üe Machine Side diesel generator engine 1ocal
alarm panel (M/S), the following conditions must be satisfied:

I ) 1 i 0V DC control power is supplied.


2) The alarm and trouble indicator lamp is tumed off.
3) The diesel engine to be controlled is ready for starting.
4) The "CONTROL POSITION" select switclr (COS-M) on the machine side diesel
generator engine local alarm panel is set to "LOCAL" position and. the "READY TO
START" indicator lamp on the same box is turned on to indicate this switch setting;

(a) Start Control


Same as above mentioned (a) of 5).
However, the start control can performed by "START" control switch on M/S.
(b) Stop Control
Same as above mentioned. (b) of 5)
However, the stop-control can performed by "STOP" control switch on M/S.

FLOWCHART SYMBOLS(FC0O) used for explanation and OPERATION


and CONTROL is shown in the following pages.

.4@D
B-022
ZE
àJ =
j à I
9-
g!4 !2
éz d I 5 È

u* Lg Ëd
E< qd à
E {i
,i;
I
ao =#a
<Ëô -t
§ a i?=
= + N\\1e d2
E.,,
8 à c ÉÊ
È Ea*
æ 9l= < 9a
a i-s
ti t=
6 ë==

rz
Ë RE A*
I ôË-_ pé? 9z
e o=ÿ 3=E
z qlg *q
H= (Jj= :
a
J
O
m
d
I
s
I 9r
I
3
z6
tn
l-
E
I
() Ëé
O q
J = B
ô=
âo s?
I E5 È
l!+
â@
,-a !É = =
@zi {x ô- É
ô= à< ?;
gÈ È 6È c
Ëdc
== aë
É E3
a a2 É--- q de
="
49 o.t4 ibl Ez
=à 9-
35
5E
9-t 6=
o3Ê
E= z<> -3
<g
TOH
=4 <{,i ;; oÊ =r

==
Ê= ôé
B+
9= 3§
a
s I
v s 5
c
,IMSU N
B-023
3 t80Nv§
( )EE
'sod .luvLs
'tvl01
ltflls 01 \9-
l0Y3x )aa
H
.=
E-
ég
E=
<q
J 12

uJ LJ lrJ
co= -J
r3 3e E9
E: I
E
3
z
+*
Jt-
=
à
J
o'É
4<. o é9
É.
z.Lt) F
o
OO TJ

!?
o
=
(J B
l-
Lr= +ô J a
F<
ô =E
ü, 8-'- h9
O
:=Ô
tJJZ. o
)
cÈ<
,I MSU N
B-024

2.2 S1,art Stop Control of Diesel Generator on 6.6kV Main Switchboard.


Control of a diesel generator is performed {iom 6.6kV Main switchboard

Preparations; Required --- (FC03) .(FC05)


1) The diesel generator VCB is opened and connected(service) position.
2) The manual voltage regulator (VR) for diesel generator is set to specified position.

CAUTION Manual Voltage Regulator Adjustment


For details ofthe manual voltage adjustments, refer to the diesel generator
manufacturer's manual.

3) Each generator diesel engine is ready for starting and the alarm or trouble indicator
lamp is tumed off.
4) l10V DC control power is supplied and the "DCl10V SOURCE" indicator lamp
on the GPT PANEL is tumed on.
5) The "CONTROL POSITION" select switch (COS-M) on rhe machine side diesel
generator engine local alarm panel is set to "REMOTE'' position
6) The "MODE SELECTION" select switch (COS-P) on the Gen. panel is set to
"MANU" position and the "READY TO START" indicator lamp on the Gen.panel
is tumed on to indicate this switch setting.

2.2. 1 Single Unit Operation --- (FC02)


The following describes, as an example, steps to place diesel generator onto a dead bus.
(l) Engine Start
Start the diesel engine for No.1 diesel generator from the MSB in accordance with 2.1
[Start Stop Control of Diesel Engine] (1) ofthis chapter.

(2) Voltage Establishment


As the diesel engine accelerates to synchronous speed, the generator voltage will build
up and the "GEN RUN" indicator lamp on the Generator panel will be tumed on and the
"READY TO START" indicator lamp on same panel is turned off.
B-025

(3) Voltage and Frequency Check and Adjustment


Check if the required generator voltage and frequency is reached by the voltmeter and
frequency meter on diesel generator panel, operating "FREQUENCY & VOLTMETER'
switch (FVS-2) on the diesel generator panel is set to each phase-to-phase position.
If the generator voltage is other than specified, adjust it with the manual voltage
regulâtor controls.
If the frequency is higher than the rated value, tum the "GOVERNOR MOTOR" control
switch (GCS) to" LOWER"position to decrease the genemtor frequency and adjust it to
the rated value.
If the frequency is lower than the rated value, adjust it, to the rated value by setting the
"GOVERNOR MOTOR' control sv/itch to "RAISE" position.

(4) Feeding to Loads.


set the "FREQUENCY & VOLTMETER" switch (FVS-2) on the Gen panel to "Bus"
position and read the bus voltage by voltmeter, the bus voltage should be zero.
On confirmation of this, tum the"VCB CONTROL"switch (BCS) on the generator panel
for diesel generator to "CLOSE' position to place diesel generator onto a dead bus.
After confirming that the bus is now energized to the rated generator voltage.
Tum on the necessary feeder circuit breakers.

(5) Manual Frequency Control


On closure of the generator VCB onto the bus, tlle generator frequency is
controlled to 60Hz by the "Governor motor" control switch to "Lower" or to "Raise"
at "MODE SELECTION- switch (COS-P) is loacted to
"MANU(MMSB)" position.
(6) Automatic Frequency Control
When the "MODE SELECTION' sv/itch (COS-P) on the generator
panel is setting from'MANU(MMSB)" to the "AUTO(ICMS)" position after
closing the VCB of the diesel generator to provide conxection to the bus enables
the gerrerator to under go automatic frequency control.
As soon as the generator is put on line with its VCB closed, the ICMS control device
automatically controls the generator frequency through the governor motor control to
maintain the bus frequency at the rated valuc.

,IMSU N
B-A26
3
t2
'lY.J
luYls
ÀrY1S 01
r0Éu r)q
a?
eû E
-ô e ^93
Ë,. a gt6
UE
HÉ IrJ
E ÊË
Lr-
z.J-
P
b =i
9e
tJJz éz H
Ê
HÉ 3z gE
a* d
æ.o ÉE ôo
Ol.JJ
=o<
É:s L Éa _"1
He
Bd
,É.
<s Ea
a 6'
!l
P =t
-eæ iY'
P E=
=# 9 1
s
qs
,I MSU N
B-O2'7

2.2.2 P arallel Operation --- (FC03XFC04)

CAUTION Conditions for Generator Paralleling

To place a generator onto a live bus served by another generator at least the
following three conditions must be satisfied:
1) The incoming generator voltage is approximately equal to the bus voltage.
2) The incoming generator frequency is approximately equal to the bus
frequency.
3) The circuit breaker (VCB) for the incoming generator must be closed at an
exact instant when the generator voltage is in phase with the bus voltage.

The following describes, as an example; steps to place Diesel generator onto a live.
bus served by No.I Diesel generator.

CAUTION Generator Control by Division of a Main Busbar

l 6.6kV MSB A-Bus and 6.6kV MSB B-Bus are controlled independently when
BUS-TIE VCB(BT) is opened.
2.6.6kV MSB A-Bus and 6.6kV MSB B-Bus are controllcd totally when BUS-TIE
VCB(BT) is closed.
(1)
' Engine Start
Start the deisel engine for diesel generator from the 6.6kV MSB in accordance with
2.1 [Start Stop Control of Diesel Engine] (1) of this chapter, and let diesel generator
voltage establish.

(2) Voltage and Frequency Check and Adjustrnent


' 'set the-" FREQUENCY & VOLTMETER"sv/itch (FVS-2) for the diesel generator panel to
each phase to phase position and compare the generator voltage with the bus voltage by
voltmeter or
Set the "FREQUENCY & VOLTMETER" switch (FVS-2) on generator panel to "Each
phase to phase" position and compare the generator frequency with the bus frequency by
frequencymeter. Ifthey are not equal, adjust fte generator voltage/Ïiequency to the
bus voltage/ frequency (assumed to be the rated value).

(3) Closing the Generator VCB at Manual Synchronism

CAUTION Synchronous Closing Operatron

To close the generator VCB while voltage is applied to the main bus, be sure
to perform synchronous closing operation.
Closing the VCB without synchronization may cause abnormal tripping of the
VCB.

,I MSU N
B-028

The generator frequency is to be made slightly higher than the bus frequency in this
step and next step.
The generator panel is furnished with synchroscope and synchronization check lamp
enable manual synchronous closing of the VCB.

(a) The synchroscope pointer rotates in FAST (clockwise) direction


This condition indicates that the generator frequency (diesel generator's) is higher
than the bus frequency §o.l Diesel generator's).
In this case, set the "GOVERNOR MOTOR" control switch for diesei generator to
'LOWER'until the synchroscope pointer change its direction of rotation from FAST
to SLOW.

(b) The synchroscope ofpohter rotates in SLOW (counter-clockwise) direction


This condition indicates that the generator fiequency is lower than the bus frequency.
In this case, set the "GOVERNOR MOTOR" control switch for diesel generator to
"RAISE" until the synchroscope pointer changes its direction of rotation from SLOW
to FAST.

(c) The synchroscope a pointer is stationary


This condition indicates that the generator frequency is exactly equal to ttre bus
frequency and the position of the stationary pointer indicates the relative phase
angle between the generator and bus voltage.
ln this case, set the "GOVERNOR MOTOR' control switch for diesel generator to
"RAISE" until the synchroscope pointer starts to rotate in FAST direction.

(d) The synchroscope pointer points to 12 o'clock position

Whether the pointer is moving slowly or stationary, this condition indicates that the
generator voltage is in phase with the bus voltage (synchronism).
At this instant, the synchro lamp is completely dark.

@t
B-029

(4) Operation of check synchronrzer

CAUTION Manual Synchronous Closing Operation

Do not close the generator VCB unless. it synchronizes point with the generator:
a) Close the generator VCB within. range of approximately l5 "on both the
FAST side and the SLOW side, with the synchroscope pointer
synchronization point as the l2 o'clock position.
b) VCB synchronous closing operation outside the range described in item a)
Above may pull the generator out of synchronism and cause abnormal
tripping of the VCB.
VCB abnormal tripping may result in no-voltage on the-main bus.

By using the check sl.nchronizer (SYNCHRONIZING RELAY CSQ-3), and failure caused
by closing the VCB at the out of synchronism can be prevented.

Then, while observing the syncbroscope and synchro lamps, perform the VCB closing
operation.
If the VCB closing operation is done in the state of out of synchronism, the VCB closing
becomes impossible, as the signal is not transmitted from the check synchronizer.
The permissible range for synchronized closing is +7 ât synchronism.

CAUTION Handling of Check Synchronrzer.

For adjustment ofthe permissible range and handling; refer to the instruction
of " User's Manual Check synchroscope. type CSQ-3"

II MSU N
B-030

Turn the"VCB CONTROL' switch (BCS) for diesel generator to"CLOSE"position a-little
prior to the synchronism.

When two generators are on line, you must operate their 'GOVERNOR MOTOR" control
switches simultaneously to "RAISE" (frequency up) or to "LOWER' (frequency down),
operation of only one switch transfers load from one genemtor to the other rather than
changing the frequency.

(5) Automatic Load Sharing Control --- (FC04)


When the VCB for the diesel generator is closed while the "MODE SELECTION"
switch (COS-P) is in "AUTO"position. The automatic load sharing function of
ICMS controls Jhe loads on both the generator to be identical, and ensures the
rated frequency of the generators.
As soon as diesel generator is put on line, the ICMS is automatic load sharing control
function starts to control the govemor motors of No.l diesel generator and other diesel
generators, so tlat each generator will be loaded to the same percetrtage in reference to
thet rated kW oulput values and that the bus fiequency will be maintained at the rated
va1ue.
Although th6 generator !ÿatt meters on the each GPT panel indicate the kW load
values on the respective generators.

(6) Manual Load Sharing Control and Load Shift Control --- (FC03)
Normally, the load sharirg control is automatically performed as mentioned in step (5)
above.
In this case, the "MODE SELECTION. switch (COS-P) is set as
'MANU'position.

,TMSU N
B-031

(a) Manual Load Sharing Control -- (FC03)


Àher diesel generator is placed onto a live bus served by No'l diesel generator set
the "GOVEITNOR MOTOR. control switch for other diesel generator to "RAISE"
so that other diesel generator will take an kW load.
This lightness the kw load on No.1 diesel generator and increases the bus frequency,
provided the total kW load remains unchanged during the control.
Therefore, it will be necessary to set the "GOVERNOR MOTOR" control switch for
No.1 diesel generator to "LOWER"
It is recomminded to operate the "GOVERNOR MOTOR" control switches for No.1
diesei generator and diôsel gen§rators simultaneously as mentioned for the purposes
ofboth speedier load sharing control and bus frequency control No.1 diesel generator
and diesel generators are to be equally loaded by this control.
The load division - between No.1 diesel generator and other diesel generators, once
determined, will remain unchanged, but the bus frequency will change if the total kIW
load is changed.
In this case, the bus frequency is to be controlled by simültaneols opelation,of the
both generâtors' 'GOVÉRNÔR MOTOR" control iwitches to "RAISE" (frequency up)
.LOWER" (frequency down)if
if the bus frequency is lower than the rated value, or to
tJre bus frequêncy is higher than the rated value.
When two or more generators are on-line, you must operate their 'GOVERNOR
MOTOR" control switches simultaneously to "RAISE" or to "LOWER" , operation of
only one switch transfers load from one generator to the other rather than changing
the frequency.

(b) Manual Load Shift Control -- (FC05)


The following describes, as an example, the case where diesel generator is removed
from the bus when No.i diesel generator and other diesel generators are on line.
Set the diesel generator's "GOVERNOR MOTOR" control switch to "LOWER" and
No.l diesel generator's to "RAISE"
This lightens the kW load on diesel generator and increases the kW load on No.1
diesel lenerator i.e, load on diesel génerator is shifted to No-1 diesel generator.
When ihe load on diesel generator is reduced to about 5% of it's rated kW output, set
the diesel generator's "VCB CONTROL" s'ù/itch (BCS) to "OPEN" to remove diesel
generator from the bus. Then, adjust the bus frequency to the rated value as
necessary by operating No.l diesel generator's "GOVERNOR MOTOR" control su/itch
to "LOWER" or to "RAISE"

CAUTION Manual Load Sharing and Load Shift Control

1) Pay attention to variations of the bus frequency during the load sharing
control or load shift control, and take the necessary action to maintain the
bus frequency at the rated value.

,IMSU N
B-O32

CAUTION Manual Load sharing and Load Shift Control

2) Pay attention to the kW load on the generator to remain on line during


the load shift conkol, and restore the original parallel operation if the
genetator to remain on line is expected to be ever loaded.
3) If the kW load on the generator to be removed is reduced beyond zero
during the load shift control, the reverse power protection function will
operâte to trip the generator VCB.

2.2.3 Stopping a Generator -- (FC05)


The generator diesel engine stop control is performed in Machine side (lWS) or 6.6kV Main
switchboard (MSB) and ICMS.
Stop the diesel generator after it has been removed from the bus as follows:

(1) When the generator is in single unit operation, remove tle unnecessary loads to lighten
the load on the generator.
(2) Tum the"VCB CONTROL" switch (BCS) on the MSB to "OPEN" position to remove
the diesel generator fiom the bus.
(3) When the generator is in parallel operation with another generator, perform step (6) @)
[Manual Load Shift Control] of Section 2.2.2,
(4) Tum the " ENGINE CONTROL" switch on the Gen. panel to'STOP. position to stop
the generator diesel engine.
The diesel engine may be stopped on the machine side or ICMS.

CAUTION Generator VCB Abnormal Tripping Occurrence

Manual stop or abnormal stop of the generator diesel engine with the
generator VCB closed will result in abnormal tripping of the generator VCB.

.@t
B-033
E
3
I q
]ü üvls
üYrs
IOr4
01
(/ \a
,a
d
CL
?iY' 6
69
t- I BÉ è
BËÉ
a
E er3
ts,15 H
Lû=
âa Ëà ==

.-B
65
g5
xdJ
s-'
Ei
lrrË l"-ÉH--àl
fra-
t96
,2.
e< o9
=
z. a
I *É
p a Ê
a=
o9 cg
E
à g
Ê,
à E
,E è 3
.qÉ
,:,
3<. 3P
6
§ JI d ='-
ég
EL
za
6zJ EÈ
a' eF

-ni=
-=
e3
,IMSU N
B-034
3
4
t
ga
l- a 7É
É
É I eâ
tJ) b
ry9 \
E
tDz,
2Z
lrJ
É.
É
=
t1 ü? Z*
55 3Ë ;= 5{
<1
tuJ o=
3a
Ë#
ÉÉ à t-tt-r
<-:9 c9 c4
.3
E< t
o
=
F
=
e5
P

àE
,IMSUN
B-035
3
I
o
F
C!
LJ
o-

ô'u,, d*
EUJ 69 9a
39
iv,tn =s
cÉt
5*
\g TY,
-< *t Fg
trs EE
É8 6
anfr
^(9
6e q9
É.t) I
HE EE §g
J
B
* 9' ë
=
=
Eb'
Ë*
:i,,
,IMSUN
B-036

Section 3. Automatic Starting of Diesel Generator and Trouble Alarm Signals


The bus voltage and frequency during the service are monitored by the ICMS is
monitoring function, and abnormal trippine of the generator VCB and trouble or delay
in generat6r control before the generaidr iiput on fine are monitores by the ICMS
is generator monitoring function.
The diesel generator (DG) can be set as stand-by when one or two diesel generator is in
servlce.
If abnormaliües occur in the busbar under power supply, or a generator, a stand-by
generator will be started automatically and the change to a stand-by generator will be
automatically performed from the generator Lmder operation.
Should the stand-by fail to start or its VCB fail to close, with no 2nd stand-by available.
Then no further automatic corrective action will take place.
The stand-by will also be automatically started when two generators in service is one
generator VCB abnormal trip or generator in sevice is overloaded, in which case the
started stand-by is automaücally paralleled to service generator.

CAUTION Automatic Generalor Running Control Functions

Since a series ofconhol operation of automatic starting, an automatic change,


eûc. is performed by "lntegrated Control Monitoring Systems(ICMS)" fi..rnctions,
control details refer to the ICMS manufactures instruction manual.

Refer to attached detail alarm drawing -* (FC07)

.@t
B-031
r I t1 € E
q
=
AH
I
,
Eg c
E
e
E
E
EH
!2
9: I
É9
=
H
ê E
à
o
.J
J É, F
LJ
É 55
=
V
5 ô a
o
z. ÈH È
*r
(t) o-
æ. È
U'
!2 I-
=
E) = s
g É.
Lr-l
Eq
a
\z
fi i
E2 É, EF ô
è
m
§
\ G ;
di;
à4
uÉ_
gr
É1
li9
àà5 ÿ
Ë 3
E
B
s I
.û@t
B-038

Footnotes:
1) The VCB abnormal trip refers to an automatic opening of generator VCB other
than by operation of the "VCB CONTROL" switch (BCS) or as a result of the
automatic load shift control.

VCB abnormal trip may result from one of the following:


- Generator diesel engine emergency trip/manual stop
- Over-current (including a short-circuit fault)
- Under-voltage
- Reverse power flow
- Mechanical houble VCB itself

l) The VCB NON-CLOSE means one of the following conditions:


(Refers to for setting value details. It ICMS instruction manual or drawing.)
(a) VCB NON-CLOSURE
The stand-by generatorrs VCB does not close within Initial setting value seconds of the
VCB close command signal.
(b) VOLTAGE NON-ESTABLISHED
The voltage of the stand-by generator does not reach 95o of the rated value within
Initial setting value seconds after its diesel engine speed has reached a predetermined
value
(c) AUTOMATIC SYNCHRONZING FAILLEE
The automatic synchoronizing (generator synchronizing and its VCB closure at
synchronism) is not completed within initial setting value seconds of the auto synchro
start command signal.
Although ICMS centralizes the generator automatic-control firnction, only the
automatic synchronous control firnction has adopted the function, which
GPM-500 has.

3) START FAILURE
The START FAILURE means a condition that after the start command signal is given
the diesel engine speed ofa diesel generator does not reach a predetermined value
within 15 seconds.

.û@D
B-039

CHAPTER 83 BOW THRUSTER MOTORCONTROL

Section 1. Summary
Two Bow thruster panels (control panel & compensating transformer panel)
are an assembly of circuit breakers, measuring instruments, indicator lamp,
protective device and motor starting device, and it serves as the control center
of the high voltage 6.6kV 3000kW bow thruster motor.
In the event ofa fault in a load circuit, an appropdate protective device will operate to clear
the fault in order to protect motor circuit and motor and to maintain the continuity of service

Section 2. Bow Thruster Motor Control

Type Svnchronous motor

Voltâge 6.6kV AC 3-phase 3-wire


Capaci§ 300okw
Frequency 60 Hz

Quantity I set

2.1 Major Components of Bow Thruster Panel


2. 1 .1 Vacuum Circuit Breakers (VCB)
* The circuit breakers are of the vacuum type
* The circuit breakers are of draw-out type with automatic shutter and eathing switch.
* The circuit breakers are operated by an electrically operated, mechanically and
electrically trip-free, motor spring charge operating mechanism.
* Provision are included for manual operating of the mechanism.
*The circuit breaker compartment are fumished with mechanism which will move the
breaker between the operating and disconnecting positions.
* Control voltage of the circuit breaker is 110V DC fiom the outside of 6.6kV MSB.

CAUTION Handling of Vacuum Circuit Breaker

For full information on their operation, maintenance and inspection, see the
relevant document of "INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR HVF VACUUM CIRCUIT
BREAKER CS TYPE"
Handling ofthe earthing srvitch and de-excitation switch, refer to the related
Ch Bl, Sec 9 " Key Interlock System" below and Additional document "7.2llzkV
Medium-Voltage Metal-clad Switchgear and Control Gear for Marine and
Offshore Use SSMV-7/12 Instruction Manual"
About the various rated capacity of VCB to apply, "BREAKER CAPACITY LIST
(VCB) BC1" of 6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD finished drawing is referred to.
*Type of VCB currently used HVF-2042-CS4444.

@D
B-040

2.7 .2 Y acuum Contactors (VCT)


The starting control circuit contactors are of the vacuum fype, the vacuum contactors
are operated by on electrically operated,and draw-out mounted for maintenance
purpose.
The control powers supplyl l0V DC from the outside of 6.6kV MSB.

CAUTION Handling of Vacuum Contactor

For full information on their operation, maintenance and inspection, see the
relevant document of "Instruction manual for HCA Vacuum Contactor T type"
About the various rated capacity of VCT to apply, "BREAKING CAPACITY LIST
(VCT) BC2" of 6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD finished drawing is referred to.
Type of VCT currently used.HCA-64CF.

2. 1.3 Autotransformer (ATr)


Used for reduced voltage compensate starting transformer system, the reduce voltage
transformer namely 6.6kV 60Hz 300OkW aulotransformer type HATO-63000.

CAUTION Handling of Compensating Transformer

Don't attempt more than two (2) consecutive -bow thruster motor starting fiom
cold condition, or one (l ) time motor starting from hot condition.
Wait 20 minutes for cooling down of the bow thruster motor after having tried two
(2) consecutive motor starting.
This is dispose of the compensating transformer overheating protection.

r@t
B-041

2.1.4 Motor Protection Relay (GPM-500)


* The GPM-500 Motor protection relay is a microprocessor-based relay to_protect
(hereafter referred to as GPM-500) is operated by on electrically operated.
* The GPM-500 incorporated two main functions.
1) Motor protection. 2) Supervision and communication.

CAUTION Handling of Motor Circuit Protection Relays

For full infonnation on their operation, maintenance and inspection, refer to the
relevant document of "GPM-500 lnstallation instructions & operation and service
manual", About the protection item and the various setting value of the motor protected
by GPM-500, "Parameter List & Selectivity study" drawing and
6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD finished drawing is refered to.

2.2 Key lnterlock System


For safe maintenance and checkup- of the compartment which accommodates each
colnponent ofthe bow thruster panel, each cell is de-energized by opening the main
circuit VCB power line charging current is discharged by closing (earthing) the
Earthing Switch to do this, therefore, the interlock by keep operation according to the
predetermined operating procedure is provided between tle main circuit earthing switch
and compartment door.
For details ofthese key operation should be in accordance with the following described
6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD finished drawing " Bow Thruster Circuit
Interlock MI6" .

CAUTION Handling of Earthing Switch

- For full information on their operation, maintenance and inspection, see the
relevant instruction manual of "INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR HIGH-VOLTAGE
VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER AND VACUUM CONTACTOR"and Additional
document "7.2112kV Medium Voltage Metal-clad Switchgear and Control Gear for
Marine and Offshore Use SSMV-7/12 Instruction Manual"
- The VCB cannot be closed in the bow thruster panel rear door while open position.
- The bow thruster panel rear door cannot be closed in the earthing switch close
(earlhing) position.

2.3 Arrangement of Indication lamps and Switches for Operation


Refer to "BOW THRUSTER STARTER drawing" for arangement of the switch
and indication lamp with which No.l 6.6kV Main switchboard
and Wheel house (W/H), ICMS are equipped.

c@D
B-042

2.4 Running and Stopping of Bow Thruster Motor


The high voltage starter, this ÿpe of starter consists ofa reduced voltage(Auto
transformer type) start and Under-voltage protection method.
Start-stop control of bow thruster motor may be made either remotely from the 6.6kV Main
switchboard (6.6kV MSB) and Bow thruster remote control panel (WÆI) or locally from the
Machine side local control panel (M/S).
The latter has a "CONTROL POSITION"select srvitch (COS-P) on the 6.6kV MSB bow
thruster panel to prevent the simultaneous control from both control positions, above
select switch COS-P selected two positions, one of the "LOCAL" (6.6kV MSB and M/S
operation) and other position "REMOTE" (WH operation).
The following describes, as an example for bow thruster motor control from the
6.6k MSB.

CAUTION Bow Thruster Motor Starting and Stopping Control

- For full information on their operation from the It{/S local control panel or WÆI bow
thruster remote control panel details, refer to the each manufacturer's
instruction manual.

Table 4 Bow thruster motor start/stop control positions

Control position Operation Remark


Motor Starter
Position COS-P Start Stop
Bow thruster X
M/S Locâl control LOCAL
panel -- x HYD oil

WH Bow tbruster Bow thruster x


remote control REMOTE _ HYD oilpuma x x
panel --
N

Integrated Conhol Bo'"v thruster


Monitoring REMOTE Iÿq q,l ptf-t
system (ICMS) -N

No.l/2 6.6kV
Bow thruster x
LOCAL HYD oil
Main switchboard

Note: x operation is referring to the operation manual of a shipyard or bow


thruster control manufacturer manuals.
>< : Enable : Disenable

The "CONTROL POSITION" select su/itch(C0S-P) must always be set in


"REMOTE" (WH) position.

,IMSU N
B-043

For bow thruster motor control from the No.l 6.6kV MSB Bow Ïuuster Panel (hereafter
referred on as BHP)

The lowing conditions must be satisfied and these switches, and indicator lamps on
the BHP

1) 110V DC control power is supplied and the "CONTROL SOURCE" indicator lamp rs
turned on No. 1/2 GPT Panel.
2) The alarm and üouble indicator lamp is turned off.
3) The CONTROL POSITION select switch (COS-P) is set to "LOCAL" position.
4) The BOW THRUSTER HYD OIL PUMP motor is running and oil tank leveÿ oil pressure
is normal state.
5) The"POWER AVAILABLE iNTERLOCK" by -pass switch (BPS1) is set to" NOR"
position and "POWER AVAILABLE" indicator lamp is tumed on.
6) The bow thruster motor is ready for starting (zero pitch) and "READY TO START"
indicator lamp is turned on.

(a) Start Control


On satisfactory confirmation ofthe above conditions, tum on the "START" control
switch (MCS) to staft the bow thruster motor and "BOW THRUSTER RLIN" indicator
lamp is turned on.
tf the bow thruster motor start circuit completion does not reach the predetennined time
within l5 seconds of this start command, the "START FAIL" signal will be produced and
signal transmitted to bow thruster remote control panel.
This signal cancels the start command signal and at the same time, causes operation of
the bow thruster motor stop control circuit.
By which the bow thruster motor is stopped and BOWTHRUSTER ABNORMAL signal
transmitted to bow thruster remote control panel.
The bow thruster motor control circuit will be reset by pressing the push-button switch
"ALARM RESET'' (AR).
If the bow thruster motor trouble is occured, the OVER LOAD, AUTO TRANS HIGH TEMP,
MOTOR START FAIL signal will be produced by which the bow
thruster motor is abnonnal stopped and alarm indicator lamp "ATR HIGH TEMP" or
"MOTOR START FAIL" on BHP is tumed on.
(ATR HIGH TEMP, EARTH FAULT, OVERLOAD,VCB TRIP signal
is transm itted to W,lH)
The disable start control circuit will be reset by pressing the push-button switch "ALARM
RESET" (AR) on the BHP and alarm indicator lamp "ATR HIGH TEMP" or "MOTOR
START FAIL" on the BHP is turned off.
B-044

CAT]TION Bow Thruster Motor Starting Conditions

Don't attempt more than two (2) consecutive -bow thruster motor starting from
cold condition, or one (1) time motor starting from hot condition.
Wait 20 minutes for cooling down of the bow thruster motor after having tried two
(2) consecutive motor starting.

(b) Stop Control


Turn off the 'STOP" control switch (MCS) on the BHP to stop the bow thruster motor
after the bow thruster main breaker VCB is open and removed bo'*, thruster motor from
the No.l/2 6.6kV MSB bus.

2.5 Bow Thruster Motor Start Blocking Control


If the indicator lamp "Power available" is not turned off, bow thruster motor starting
supply power is insufficient and start impossible.
In such a case, the number of the generators to operate is increased, oT "POWER AVAILABLE
INTERLOCK' switch (BPSI ) is set as a "BY-PASS" position, and start bow thruster motor.

CAUTION Bow Thruster Motor Starl Blocking Control

The details of Bow Thruster Motor Start Blocking Control are the referring to
the instruction manual that is ICMS and Parameter list.

2.6 Trouble Alarm Signals


The BOW THRUSTER ABNORMAL signal transmitted to w/H bow thruster remote
control panel and ICMS and alarm lamp on 6.6kV bow thruster panel.

Table 5 Bow thruster alarm List


6.6KV MSB BOW CONT
ALARMNAME PANEL ALARM ICMS
AI,ARM I,AMP SICNAL ALARM SIGNAL
MAIN MOTOR START FAII- x X
2 MAIN MOTOR OVERLOAD X
3 MAIN MOTORTRIP x
4 MOTOR EARTH FAULT x X À
5 VCB TzuP X
6 ATR HIGH TEMP x
7 BOW THR ABONORMAL x
I CONTROL ABONORMAL X
9 OIL LOW LEVEL X X

Note: X:Enable, -:Disenable

(Û@t
B-045

CHAPTER 84. MISCELLANEOUS

Section 1 . Monitoring of Insulation Level and Detection of the


Earthing Phase of Main busbar
l.l. Summary
The Over voltage ground relay (64) which is one of protection relay GPM-500 functions
and earth lamp (EL) equipped respectively on both GPT panel, detect the insulation level
and earthing phase of respective 6.6kV system.
If the system's insulation is deteriorated and the insulation level is reduced than the
predetermined set value on ground overvoltage relay alarm is generated.
Then, after stopping the alarm, detect the earthing phase by means of earth lamp.

DANGER Insulation Level Low Alarm Occurrence

Stop supplying power and take the appropriate recovery action of deterioration
point if an insulation alarm occr[rence.
Otherwise, short circuit and/or electric shock may result depending on the
extent of insulation deterioration.

Table 6 Protection Item of PROTECTION RELAY GPM-500

Ground over Over voltase Detection


CIRCUITNAME Current relay Ground relây
(67) (5eN) by

DIESEL GENERATOR x x GPM-5OO


MAIN TRANSFORMER x GPM.5OO
REEFER TRANSFORMER x GPM-5OO
BOW THRUSTER x GPM-5OO

7.2 Zero-phase Voltage Monitor


(l) Insulation level monitoring of 6.6kV main busbar
This monitor consists of Over-voltage ground relay (59N) of protection relay GPM-500
and ground potential transformer (GPT).
This enables continuous monitoring of insulation level.
This relay monitoring the high voltage 6.6kV main switchboard No.1 andNo.2 main bus
system giound fault ànd monitoring the zero-phase voltage (Vo) generated at complete
ground fault.
For settings ofthe Over voltage ground relay zero-phasc voltage, refer to the finished
drawing of 6.6kV main switchboard "PARAMETER LIST & SELECTIVITY STUDY"

.@t
B-046

This relay indicates the active state of zero-phase voltage (Vo)


when the setting value is reached and automatically goes out belovi
the setting value.

Handling of Multi Protection and Control Unit


CAUTION (Feeder and incoming line Protection Relay)

For full information on their operation, maintenance and characteristics, see


the relevant document of "INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR GPM-500"
About the protection item and the, various setting value ofthe feeder and
incoming Iine protected by GPM-500,"PARAMETER LIST & SELECTIVITY STUDY"
of 6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD finished drawing is referred to.

(2) Judgment of insulation-deteriorated circuit


While you carry out the open of the electric-power'supply circuit breaker one by one
after stopping an alarm since an alarm will occur if the setting value ofa ground
overvoltage relay rises rather than the value ofan initial configuration, check the circuit
of insulated degradation by GPM-500 Over voltage ground function.
In addition, distinction of insulation-deteriorated phase can be checked by earth lamp.

1.3 Earth Lamp


The Fig .1 is a simplified ctcuit diagram to show ground fault detect arrangement.
The "EARTH LAMP' (EL) consists of a display lamp having-three transparent lenses.

( 1
) Three earth lamps are open delta connected arnong the phases ,.

Each earth lamp is h.rmed on with the same degree of brightness,

(2) When'GROLIND FAULT' occuIrence:


(a) Ifground fault is occurred in R-phase.
The brightness of earth lamp for R-phase becomes lower, while the brightness of
earth lamps for S-phase and T-phase becomes higher as compared with that of
R-phase. This indicates ground fault ofR-phase.
When R-phase is being completely in the ground fault state, the earth lamp of
R-phase is tumed off.

(b) When there is no ground fault in any of these phases.


Three earth lamps continue to show the same degee of brightness

NMSUN
B-047

RST
EL Other GPM-500

GPM-5
(5eN) To Alarm circuit
GPT
R
I o

E
GROUND E E
FAULT
6.6kV Bus

Fig. 1 GROTIND FAULT DETECT CIRCUIT (59N)

Section 2. Monitoring of Insulation Level for Generator Circuit and Feeder Circuit
2,1 Summary
The Directional ground over current relay (67G) which is one of protection relay GPM-500
f,rnctions equipped respectively on Diesel generator cfucuit,
6.6kV main transformer circuit and 6.6kV reefer transformer, then Directional
ground fault current (67G) which is one of protection relay GPM-500 functions equipped
iespectively Bow thruster pump motor circuits detect the insulation level of respective 6.6kV
system.

2.2 Zerc-phase Current Monitor


(1) This control uniÿ relay consists ofa directional earth fault overcurrent relay and zero
phase current transformers.
This enables continüous monitoring of insulation level. This control unit relay
monitoring the each generator circuit and feeder circuit system ground fault and
monitoring the zero-phase current (Io) generated at complete ground fault.
For settings of the directional earth fault overcurrent relay zero-phase current, refer to
the finished drawing of 6.6kV MAIN S\MITCHBOARD 'PARAMETER LIST &
SELECTIVITY STTIDY".
This conffol unit/ relay (GPM-500) indicates the active state of zero-phase current
when the setting value is reached and automatically goes out below the setting
value.

(2) circuit
' - Judgment of insulation-deteriorated
Whèn the insulation values are comes lower than the initialized alarm set value, alarm is
generated and VCB abnormal tripping for this ground fault circuit.
Àfter stopping the alarm, at the same time, check the zero-phase current indication on
directional earth fault overcurrent function, and take necessary measures.

,IMSU N
B-048

Handling of Multi Protection and Control Unit


CAUTION (GeneratorÆeederÀ{otor/ Transformer Relay)
(1) For full information on their operation, maintenance and characteristics,
see the relevânt document of " GPM-500 Installation manual and
user's seryice Manual"
About the protection item and the various setting value of the genemtor
protected by GPM-500, . PARAMETER LIST & SELECTIVITY STUDY"
of 6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD finished drawing is referred to.

UV !v
ll
tt Other GPM-500
tt k
tt GPM-5OO
ZCT (67G) To Alarm circuit

E
GEN or FEEDER Circuit

Fig. 2 GROIIND FAULT DETECT CIRCUIT (67G)

.Û@t
B-04S

Section 3. Preferential Tripping System and Forced Tripping Systern --- (FC07)
3.1 Summary
When the 6.6kV main diesel generators on line is overloaded or generator
VCB abnormal trip state relatively non-essential load or forced tripping load is -
tripped from the sÿstem by the "preferential tripping system" or "forced tripping system"
to reduce the load ofgenerator.
Thus the operation ofgenerator continues and the feeding to load circuits,continuously.^ .
The trippirig system of this ship has two kinds of Tripping", namely, one by ov-erload of the
generaior (Preferential tripping system) and the other by abnormal VCB trip ofthe
[enerator with main busbài stàte ofbeing alive and during parallel operation ofgenerators
(Forced tripping system) and abnormal bus-tie VCB, hip of short circuit.
When main bus"bàr is séparation (No.1 6.6kV MSB sidè and No.2 6.6kV MSB side), it
detects bv each bus line.

3.2 Kind of Tripping System


There are two kinds of systems among the preferential trip systems:
(1) When protection relay GPM-500 detects. (Preferential trip)
(2) When VCB ABNORMAL TRIP detects. (Forced trip)

3.2.1 When GPM-500 detects


Non-essential load is separated from a power supply system dtte to Generator overload
(By Overcurrent and By low frequency).

If the load current ofgenerator on line becomes higher than tl-re preferential trip set value
* 1st stage: 105% over current or 90% below frequency more of5 seconds
--- OVERLOAD (PREF TRIP) tunction of GPM-500 in 6.6kV MSBD.

* 2nd stage: lst stage tripping value +2 seconds.


* 3rd stage: 2nd stage tripping value +2 seconds.
PREFERENTIAL TRIP function among- the protection relay GPM-500 device functions
operate to trip the 6.6kV Main switchboard (No.1,No.2 6.6kV MSB), No.l/No.2 AC440V
Main switchboard (LMSB), feeder circuit breakers and for non-essential load.
For the feeder circuit breakers designated for non-essential load, a thin Yellow plate (1st
stage: PT1), Yellow plate (2nd stage: PT2) and Yellow plate (3rd stage: PT3)is inserted upper
its nameplate specifying its application pupose.
This indicates the PREFERENTIAL TRIPPING designation.
B-050

3.2.2 When VCB ABNORMAL TRIP detects (Forced tripping system)

The forced tripping also when the generator VCB ofone or more unit out of the generator
VCBs in parallel operation is tripped by a trouble, or bus-tie VCB trip by short circuits,
then. main busbar state ofbeing alive and voltage generated.
For the circuit breaker designated for forced trip load that including PT-l, PT-2 and PT-3.
This indicates the FORCED TRIPPING designation.

Section 4. Overload Protection of Generators


After the preferential tripping as described of section 3.2. 1 above tl-ris chapter, when the
generator is further overloaded, Long time delay trip (LTD) function among the functions
of overcurrent tripping device of GPM-500 operates to hip the VCB of generator to
prevent damage in the generator.
For settings ofthe Preferential Trip and the Long time delay trip refer to the finished
drawing of 6.6kV MAIN SWITCHBOARD
''PARAMETER LIST & SELECTIVITY STIIDY'.
c-001

Chapter C. 7 .21 1,2W/ Medium-Voltage Metal-clad

switchgear and Cootrol Gear for Marine and


OffshorE use SSMV-7/12 Instnrction manual

.@D
RMSUN
SA\4SUNG

7.2/12 kY Medium-Voltaee Metal-clad Switcheear and Control


Gear for Marine and Offshore Use SSMV-7/12

Introduction Manual

-1-
This Introduction Manual was r ritten to give information about safe operation and maintenaace of the
Model SSMV.7/12 $\,itchgear system. Read this lntroduction Manual and other relevant documentations
thoroughty aad become completely familiar with the switchgear before using or servicing it,

This Introduction Manual uses the following safety alert symbols. When you see those symbols in the text,
follow the safety message to avoid personal injury or death.

Safcty alcrt sÿtr bols anil signal wonls 956{ i11tri5 mermel.

c DANGER
Indicates an immineutly hazardous situation which.
will cause a serious injury or <leath.
Ifnot avoided.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation !ÿhicù, if not âvûided, may


,4\. caulor.t result in minor or moderate injury, or damage to properties.

Remember that if you fail to follow the instructions in messages, À ceurroN it might also cause a
serious acsideut or consequence.

o_
CONTENTS
Pag,e

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION.. 4
1.1 Outline........ 4
1.1 Operating condition 4

2. TECHNICAIDATA 4
2.1 Specifications ... L

2.2 Oûer dimension


2.3 Construction ..... 6

3. INSTALTJ,TION 6
3.1 Délivêry t)

3.2 Storage...... ......6


3.3 Transportation........................,.,....--.-. 6

3.4 Installing panels......-.......... ... 11

3.5 Connection. 11

3.5-1 Connecting frames............. 11

3.5.2 Connecting main busbars... 13

3.5.3 Connecting top boards. t4


3.5.4 Wiring between panèIs...
3,5.5 Connecting earthing bars outside the pane1s.....,...,.. ..........15
3.6 Connecting externâl eables... .-..16

Cleaning and inspection..,.. 19

J.O Power on...--.--.. 21

4. MAINTENANCE A,ND INSPECTION 22


4.1 Outline-.....-. ......22
4.2 Caution ts be taken when performing live-line lÿc,rk....-......--.....

4.3 Caution to be taken in the event of a fire


4,4 Servicing and inspecting the slvitchgear... ....24
4.4.I Periodic inspection........
4,4.2 Checking for grounding . 24
connection
4.4.3r ChÈtkinc for external -.........-24

4.4.4 Checkine inside the svÿitchgear...,....."- .....,-......,..,,.............24


4.4,5 Checking component parts of the svÿitchgeâr ..-..........,.,,....24

4,5 Operating proeedùre for maintenance èo

4.6 Servicingandinspectingvacuumcircuitbreaker............... ......,.,,..35


4.7 Servicing and inspecting vacuum electromagnetie contactor,.....-...............--......--....37
4.8 Servicins and inspecting grounding transformer uhit .........--........,.................,.....,...,37

5, CA.UTION TO BE TAKEN \ryHEN HANDLiNG DEVICES..... ............ 38

5.1 Carrtion to be tâken ÿhen opelating circuit breaker..-. .....-.....-......38

5,,2 Caution to be taken when replacing wiring circuit breakers..,,...,.,,................,.,,....-.38

5.3 eaution to be taken when handline cuirènt trànsformer


5.4 Cauüon to be taken when replacing fusès.....,.......,.,.,, ...,............,..39

5.5 Cauüon to be tâken when replaeing relays(auriliary relays and time-linit relays) .39
5.6 Caution to be tâken when replacing electromagnetic côn'tactors....,.....,,-.-.....-...-...,.40

5.7 Cauüon to be taken when handling protective relays and automatic control unit....40

5.8 Others

6. PREVENTION OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK ACCIDENT 42


6.1 General knowledge about electrical shock........-......... 42

6.1.1 The risk of electricity to the human body............,..............,.,...,,.,..................42


6. 1. 2 Siens of electrical shock...-..................

6.2 Preventive meÀsurés against electrical shôck accident..

7- ACCESSORIES
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.1 Outline

The model SSMV-7/12 medium-voltage marine-and offshore-use swilchgear system features arc tesistance,
air insulation and metal-clad construction and can be applied to and altemating yolta5e of 7.2/12kÿ.

The SSMV-7/12 has been subjected to a variety of tests according to BC 62271-200 and standards and
regulations of various classification societies and obtained a type approval from the LRS, GL, BV, ABS,
DNV, KR Classifisation Society.

In addition, due considerations a.Îe given to ensure safety of the system: the circuit breakers can be inserted
and removed ûom the switchgear system with the doors closed and related compaitments are mechanically
interlocked.

1.2 Operating conditions

The SSMV-7/12 is a medium.yoltage switchgear system for marine and offshore use whose normal
operating conditiôn conforms tô the IEC 60092.

Ambient temperaturdmax): 45 t
Relative humidity: 95%

2. TECHNICAL DATA

2.'l Specifications

Table 2.1

Rated voltage AC 7,2 kV AC 12 kV


Rated ftequency 5O/60 Hz

Rated ftequency dielecffic stength 20 kV/min 28W/mn


Rated lightning impulse dielectric strength 60 kv 75 kV

Rated short-tirne withstanding current 25 kA for I sec-

Rated peak withstanding curent 65 kA


Internal arc witfutanding cu[ent 25 kA for I sec

Rated main busbar current value 1250 A 2000 A 1250 A 2000 A


Rated load curent ÿâlue 600 A 600/1000 A 600 A 600/ 1000

Constructiôn Metal clad


2,2 Outêr dimensions

Figure 2.1 shows the outer dimensions of the SSMV-7(panel widü: 700rnm). lable 2.2 shows a list of
dimensions of the panels.

$l

H2: lnduding pteesre


relidflap

Frcrt üow §ftle vieu.

Fig. 2.1 Exemal view(Example: Panel width 700mm)

Table 2.2 List of extemal dimensions

Panel W(mm) H1 (mm) H2 (mm) D (mm)


Generator panel
Feeder panel
Incoming panel
GPT panel '100
Motor pânel
Soft start motor parel
2300 2800 1660
Bus'tie panel
Bus"tie parel 1

Bus riser & GPT panel x 800


Bus-tie paael 2 x 1000
§ynchronizer panel 1000

ATr pânel 1000


NOTE x: In case of 12kV

-6-
2,3 Construction

16

1?
1 2E

2 18
27
3
19
4
20
5
14 21
.to 22 28
15
23
T IT 29
24
12
I t3 25

Front view Side view Reâr viêw

Ris.2.2 Construction(Generatôr panel)

1: Upper low-voltâge compartment door 18: Main busbar


2: Meters 19: Surge arrester
3: Protective and control devices 20: CT
4: Switches 2l: Load-side busbar
5 : Circuit breaker compartrnent door 22 : Power cable connection teminal
6: Operating handle hole for insertion/removal 23 : Earthing switch
of vacuum circuit breaker 24: YT
7: Circuit breaker position display 25: ZCI
8: Interlock key hole for iasertion/removal 26: Upper cable compadment door
of circuit breaker 27: Upper cable compartment door key hole
9: Lower low-yoltâge comparürent door 28: Lower cable compartment door
l0: Emergency release device 29: Lower cable compartrnent door key hole
11: De-excitation interlock key hole A: Low-voltage compartment
12: Earthing switch operating handle hole B: Circuit breaker compartment
13: Lower cable compartment door key C: Main busbar compartment
14: Vacuum ctcuit breaker D: Cable compartment
15: Vacuum cicuit breaker cradle
16; Pressure rclief flap
17: Insulation bushing

-7 -
3. INSTALLATION

3.1 Delivêry

(1) The product is subjeaed to a variety of mechalical and electrical shipping tests at out factory before
being shipped from the factory and delivered to the customs with the entire unit covered with
protective sbeets.

(2) The âcceptance of the product should be performed in the presence of a person in charge of acceptânce
and a person in charge oftransportation.
At this point, the delivery should be checked for any damage to the product during transportation and if
any defect is found, it should be noticed to the trucking company.

3.2 Storage

Ifthere is some time between the delivery of the product to you and the start of installation work, it is
advisable to store the product in a proper manner observing the following conditions;

A CAUTION
V{hen storing the product, observe the following conditions:
(a) Store the product indoor§-
o) store the product in a dry place where there is good ventilation and no penetlation of dùect
sunlight or rain and wind.
(c) Keep the product at a place higher than floor level to en§ure Sood ventilation'
(d) Do not remove the protective sheet to protect âgainst du§t.
(e) The product should be slored undel a condition which allows easy sewicing
(f) If the product is to be stored for more than a month, perform periodic maintenalce ald inspection
and measure insulation resistance.

3.3 Transportation

If lifting the product with wires for transportation or any other PurPoses, reffl to Figules 3.1 and 3,2. If
rollers are used, refer to Figures 3.3 and 3.4.

-8-
DANGER
If you lift the product with wûes, observe the following conditions; otherwise the product might fall
causing a serious accident.
(a) Each panel of the SSMV-7/12 system has a weight of âbout 1100 kg(paael width: 700mm). Use
proper wires with a capaciry enough to lift the weight. For mo're information on the weight of the
product, see the as-made tlrawing ofthe produa.

O) Ifthere are lifting lugs, check them for looseness.


(c) Lift the product $,ith üe opening angle ofthe wires less than 60'.
(d) Use safety hooks or shackles for all lifting holes and hook the wires to them.

A cnunoru
If rollers are used to transport the product, observe the foüowing conditions; othenvise there is a danger
ofcausing damage to the product,
(a) The rollers should be slightly longer than the product width and they have the same diameter.
O) Do not pull the product horizontally in such a ï/ay that undue stess is applied on the entire
product.
(c) If the product does not have a chamel base or angle base, make sure to use wainscots to prevent
the bottom frame of the produa from deforming due to locâl skess.
(d) Carry the product to the plane where the products is to be installed, and then using a crowbar or
jack remove the rollers slowly and carefirlly.

-9-
gir! o!!rlit arllr
0.60'
br 60'
liftlB àol

ct "-f ET

! t I

fr.rl rlat Sl& rl!r

Fig; 3.1 Example of lifting method - 3 panels

{ir! ôr!rir! .û!l!


r.60'
1.80.

"E -r -r

Fr l rl.r Siaa rin

Fig. 3.2 Example of tifting - 4 panels

- 10 -
E É E

0 I l

CI E E)

I I l
Slapper ÿls lnscot
Rollcr
Floor Gongp lon k
eurfoce

Fig. 3.3 Moving pâtels v.ith rollers

C=

I I

E Etr E
I I
Cro{bo r !{si nsÊol
Rollcr
Floor ongp lo nk
Êurfoc,!

Fig, 3.4 Moving panels with crowüar

- It -
3.4 lnstalling panels

Figure 3.5 shows the dimensions of the standard panel. This view is given for the standard panel. The
locations of the control cable and power cable irüet ports and mounting holes may vary with different
prôduct specifications. See tÏe as-made drawing ofthe product

Fronl ÿiar Bo I lon Reor v ier

a ! v
200
llounlitrr holi
4-it4 Conlrol coble Pùrlr c(Ùlt
inltt gorl inlel lorl
Fig. 3.5 Outer dimensions of panel bottom

Taülc 3.1 Cable irüet dimensions


Panel width (mm) Dimension B (mm) Dimension C (mm) Dimension D (mm)

700 500 400 350


800 600 500 450
900 700 600 550

1000 800 700 650

A clunon
Observe the following conditions when installing the product.
(a) Do not install the product in a place where high temperature, high humidi§, dust or severe
vibratioo is anticipated.
(b) use caution to keep üe mounting base on which the product is to be installed horizontal;
otherwis€ undue süess will be applied on the product frame to cause any of the following defects :

. The door may not opetr normally.


. The meters ma fail to

3.5 Connection
3.5.1 Connscting frames

Connect the frames, referring to Figures 3.6 a:l,d 3.7, The connecting holes have their respective decal§.
Check the desciption of the decal before connectilg,

- lL -
A cnunoru
Insert tightening bolts to the connection holes specified and tighten them securely. Failure to do so will
caue a deformed frame.

I O Hâns

@
CoîrÈct

llans tùo D6fisl yoü v!,sni to DornÈsl,


using ÿrirʧ. And, Çorlnact tampüârit

Fig. 3.6 Connecting panels - step I

flu
ffi

Conn€dirn hoûè
Conmd pansb Y{ith bons, For lho
boll si26 tô bê u6êd. §ee connêdirfl
holÊ d€Êals.
Ther6 ârê thr6€ connGdlon holeE on
the lront snd 5 on lhs iÊar.

r1lolEfrt!: Ël-E

MI O,( 25

Fig. 3.7 Conneaing panels - step 2


ConnÊctlon 0oint

Fig.3,8 Panel connection points (LV compartment)

3.5.2 Connectlng main busbars


Connect the main busbar using the procedures shown in Figures 3.9 to 11.

DANGER
Using bolts and ruts suppüed with the product, install all condu«ors to the main busba$ securely. An
improperly or loose main busbal will cause a serious accidertt,

Rsar oflt E oÊng!


Ç
s o

lthin busbar
Mg bdl x It cdnp t sepâralor

Fig, 3.9 Removing separator

-14-
Rcar ofth6 osn€l
o o^ ô
q o oo oo
Condudor

Mâin busber

Mâifi
busbar
I
lns€{t coarductfi lntô
lhe lin6 hole in epory I
bu3hiog,

@@4sgsre
12504râlino:3 I
2000 A rating: 6

Fig,3.10 Conneai.Dg busb s -step I

Inâidi cÊblô ôofipl

CcnduËlor
Ml0 hârd lo6k rut

Mein
hrsber

M10 bdt

Fig, 3.11 Connecting mair busbars - step 2

3.5.3 Connecting top boards

Connect the top boards, referring to Figure 3.12.

CAUTION
^
Install cover plates on the top boards and coDnect them with set screws securely, Without cover plates,
there is a danger of water droplets entering the panel

- 15 -
P"anêl too cov,er Éâtâs

M5 nut

I ThetE srsfolr
csrnætifi hoa.ô. lnâtfl
boü3 hto the hdes Ênd
in§âll éoÿêr plâtê§.
j

à45 bdt

Top boâft|§ -ü

Fig, 3.12 Connecting top boards

3.5.4 Wiring betweên panels

when connecting comecûors, make sure the moving-side connectof number agrees with the fixed-side
connector number, and insert the moving-side connector into the fixed-side connector. Connect the wires
to thei respective terminals, making sure the ring malk (wire mark) of each wire agrees with the ring mark
of the corresponding termüal.

A caurorl
All connectors should be comected to properly and the power aud contol cables shoutd be coDnected
to thek respective teminals correctl otherwise the might fail to operate

3.5.5 Connecting earthing ba16 inside the Panâls

Conaect the earthing bars located at the lo'i ,er part of the panels's back side, referring to the earthing bar
comection method shown in Figure 3.13.

A CAUTION
Connect all the earthiag bars prope y. Failure to do so will cause ally panel which is not grounded to
the hull

- 16 -
o

I
I

-1 -1
F F
I I

Ct
t I 'I I I
o o 6 o
\
Inler-prne I eorlh ing bor
Eor lh ing bor
Fig.3.I3 Conaeaing earthing bars(Iop üew)

Inter-panel eartling bar

Fig. 3,14 Cormectirgpoint

3.6 Connêcting êxternal cablês

. Typical power cable connections ate shown in Figues 3.15 to 3-17.


'WTengroundingthecontolcâbleorpowercable,useanearthingbarshowninFigures3,lSand3.19.
. lvh€n adjusting the location ofthe cable hanger used for securing the power cable, loosen the bolt shown
in Figure 3.20.

-17-
A caurroru
When connecting the cables, observe the following conditions:
(a) Secure the cable firmly ushg the cable hanger of a fire-retardant synthetic resin cable duct to
prevent the cable ftom getting dâmaged due to vibration.
(b) When the cable passes through a steel plaæ or when there is a fear ofthe cable coming in contact
with it, use a rubber bushing o,r something like that between the steel plate arld cable to prevent the
cable from getting damaged.
(c) Bending radius of cable
. High-voltâge cable: The inside bending radius should be more than 8 times greater than the
outside diameter ofthe cable.
. Low-voltage cable: rüy'hen the outside diameær ofthe cable is less than E mm', flre inside bending
radius should be more thar 2 times greater than the diameter.
'When
the oueide diameter of the cable is more t}ran 14 mm2, the inside bendi.ng radius should
be more than 3 times greater than the diameter

Têrntael

CaHe sl.rpport

Psvvèr câble
Bsttom plals {ihh-vollaoa cabls)
/

Fig.3.15 Tipical connection of power cable

-18-
Cut the ghte into a !rcD€r eÈê
*cordlng to thc csbb d:e

Boüom flat€

Fig. 3.16 Cutting the bottom plate into a proper süe

P§$rË üslê

Bo(dfl platâ

A4u3t th! hotldn plab glde


podtlon and eecure the porr
dlê.
SIrlé

Fig.3.17 Instâtling the powei câble to the bottom plate

Fig.3.18 Cable comp't earthing bar Fig. 3.19 Lower low-voltage comp't earthing bar

- 19 -
Fig. 3.20 Line wire cable hanger

3.7 Clêaning and inspèctlon

A-fter performing wiring work, clean and inspea the panels. Prior to fiming on the power, make §ule
that

there is an insulation resistance of more thar 30 MQ per panel, using a DC 2000v megger. For items
to be

chec*ed before tuming on the power, see Table 3.2.

-20-
Table 3.2 Items to be ch€cked before tuming on the power

Location Items to be checked Remedy


General (I
) Check comections and mountirg parts . Retight any loose bolt or screw
condition for looseness or missing screws. . Remedy ifany defect is found
(2) Check the doors can be opened and . Clean any dust of foreign matter
closed smooth.ly. . Remove any wiring tool.
(3) Check for a deposition ofdust or foreign
mâtter,
(4) Check that no wiring tool left inside the
panel
Panel (l) Check that all component parts are . Replace any defective compotrent
surface present. parts with a new one.
(2) Check the connections and mounting . Retighten any loosen bolts and
parts for looseness or missing screws. screv/s,
(3) Check the insulators for damage. . Replace any damaged if,sulator vriti
(4) Check for the adherence offoreign a ne\Jÿ one.

matter. . Remove foreign matter.


(5) Check the côntols and signal lamps for . Replace any damaged control or
damage lamp with a new one
(6) Check the structure for damage or . Adjust properly.
malfunction
Busbars (l) Check coDrections for looseness and . Retighten any loose bolt or screw
and wiring saews for missing. . Replace and defective insulator or
duct inside (2) Check insulators for damage and devices device and adjuit
the panel for malfunction . Replace aud defective structure and
(3) Check structure for damâge, adjust.
(4) Check power a:rd control cables for ' Reconnect pfope y,
\4TOng Connection . Replâce any damaged cable with I
(5) Check cables for damaged coating and new one and perform wiring again.
breakage. . Replace any defective component
(6) Check Component parts for damage. part vrith a new one
Line wire (t) Check the terminal boatds for damage . Replace any damaged terminal board
cables (3) Check the connections for loose bolts or with a new one
inside the missing screws . Retighten any loose bolt or screla,
pânel (3) Check for the adherence of foreign . Remove foreign matter and
mâtter. reconIIect.
(4) Check cables for damaged coating and . Perform wiring again.
breakage. . Perform wiring again ârd retighten
(5) Check for wrong connection of the lead- properly.
in wire or improper comection to . Rework or replace.
terminal.
(6 ) Check structure for damage.

-21 -
!

; 3,8 Polflêr ort

Brfrrè ÿou. try h itsrô on th.Ç ûO§iB-r 9f.ü!e §ÿlilt:tp, EÉke.' §urg 16 qtiÉente thc cautioos d€sët.ibed in "5.
.AATTIIÔN TÔ BB.TAffiN WâEN TIÀNDLINC P.EYI@§.,
Âfter æning:'on lbe Powr, chcrlk âe foltowing iterEs sho$.tr in Table 3,3;

(1) §èqutrls aüêe&


(r) Vibiâtioq nôber.opcration sf &viedÿee T.aDhr3.3.)
(3)Eotatiqe dirærion of t!r: uster,

T.blc r,r Iem to,bè û41@d afrèi tutuing onlhclorvtt

IfE{u§ üo bê eûe*Éd Ritûledy

Ch«& lol vr:bndiqrr, ford aqlill 6r'riqirÊ


i

Chec} üÊt &vices ate operaring pmpedy and Â4iurt ar iqh{e


.4i*glay in a
4, MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

The electrical devices must be handled only by qualified personnel. In addition, personnel who try to
service aad inspea the electrical devices should thorougtüy read all the precautions in this chapter and "6.
PREVENTION OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK ACCIDENT".
When servicing and impeaing the electrical devices, observe those safety precautions to prevent âccidents.

4.1 Outline

When you try to service and inspect the electrical devices, observe the following conditions to prevent
accidents due to electrical shock or short<ircuiting(which might be caused by a metal tool, electric torch,
conductive material dropping or touching a live part).

A crunou
Preparations
1. Do use naked flame near the equipment.
2. During mahtenance and inspection, wear a hard hat, safety shoes, and work clothing,
3. Make sure the power is tumed of.
Before opening the front or rear door, make sure the busbars and devices are not live.
4, Using a voltmeter and circuit tester, check thât there is no voltage before starting servicing or
inspection.
5, Except in an emergency, do not try to perform liveline work.
6. Make a work plan properly and check for the safety of the surroundhgs. Perform servicing ald
inspection in an orderly manner, getting in contact with people concemed. When working in a
group, make sure everyône understands the meaning of hand signals and the communication
methods thât will be used,
7. Have a suffrcient amount oflightning.
8. Before stafting to serrice or inspect the system, organüe the work area. Arrange tools ând
replacement parts so they cal easily be reached.
9. Leam how to use tools arrd circuit tester before using.
10. Read the cautions described in "6. PREVENTION OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK ACCIDENT".

4.2 Caution to be taken when performing live-line work

Unless absolute necessary, do no try to repai the circuits or devices in ûre low-voltage compartment- If
unavoidable to p€rform live-line work, observe the precautions described in "6. PREVENTION OF
ELECTRICAL SHOCK ÀCCIDENT" a.Ild those described below. In addition, never try to perform üve-
line work in the high-yoltage compârtment. Make sure there is no voltage before starting to service of
inspect the circuits or devices in that compartment.

2.1 -
(. oaucen
'When ir
low-voltagc comPartmcDt
scrvicing or inspectiag
L Before performing liveJine work, observe the following conditions.
a. Have a sufficient amount oflighting.
b. Do not wear a wrist watch, ring, or metal articles.
Wear tight fining clothing with long steeves. Make sure the work clothing ând shoes are dry.
c. The worker should be insulated from the hull. Devices and structure the work might come in
contact with should be covered ÿ,ith insulathg material.
d. Tools should be coated with vinyl tâpe or others.
e. The live parts should be covered with insulating material to prevent an accident due to a fall of
ary conductor such as a tool.
f. Put an insulating separator between a live Part and the pârt you are about to work on.
g. Wear rubber gloves and rubber boots.
2 . There is a fear of causing ân accident when you lose balance due to the ship rolling. Support your
body securely and use your dominant hand as possible.
3 . Have a helper ïvho can tum off the pov/er immediately in an emergency. Make sure everyone
understands the meaning of hand signals and the communicarion methods that will be used.

When servicing or inspecting in high-voltagc compaûfteot


There is a dalger of causing death due to atr electrical shock accident if performing liveJine work in the
high-voltage eompartment. Ifunâvoidâble to work in the high-voltage compartment, make sure there is
no

4.3 caution to bs taken in the event of a fire

Take the meâsurcs in the even of a fire from an elech"ical device

DANGER
1 Tum off the power supply to the equipment or circuit which causes the fue.
2. Turn off the power supply to the equipment or circuir which might be affected by the hre. If there
is a danger ofthe hre sPreading to the devices in the vicinity, tum offthe Power supply to them and
related ctcuits. However, if hrming off the power lead§ to a severe âccident, do not tum ofl the
povr'eÎ.
3. Let fellow workers know the occurrence ofa fire and report it to the designated supervisor(chief
engineer).
4. Put out the fge using a fire extilguisher (powder or halon). Use caution to use a fire extinguisher in
a small area or chamber. You might suffocate ifyou spray a lot of fue'extinguisher agent in such
an area, If an electrical fire break out, frr§t tum off the power supply. After that, try to put out the
fire.
5. If water is splashed ov€r any conducting circuit, electricrty flows to give an electrical shock to
seâ
persons who are trying to put out the fire. If fresh water is used for Puttilg out fire, there is a fear of
câusing a similar risk. Use due caution when Putting out file
6. If sea watel is splashed over equipment, it is difficult to repair it. Therefore, if a fire breaks out, it
should be determined at first whether should use sea water or fire alone

-24-
4.4 Servicing and inspecting the switchgear

To ensure safe operation of the system, make sure to perform periodic inspection. Check comections for
looseness and retighten if necessary. Clean where necessary. In addition, if the switchgear is placed out of
sewice for a long period of time, check and clean the entire system and each device; otherwise corrosion or
dust might cause the maLfirnction of the system. When performing servicing and inspection, some terminal
might be loosened or removed. If you forget to retighten or reinstall them, it will cause an accident. Make
sure all the terminals are securely tightened after finishing with the work. For more information about the
procedure for servicing a]ld inspecting, see Table 4.1.

4.4.1 Periodic inspection

Test the devices inside the control uûit for operâtion and check each panel for foul smel[ and discoloration
at least once a year, Clean where necessar5r,

4.4.2 Checking for grounding

Remove the grounding wires which protect the cicuits such âs the secondary side of the ûansformer and
measure the insulation resistance between a conducting pafi and the ground. Make sure the DC 2000
megger reads a insulating resistance of more than 30M9, Measure ilsulating resistances on the wiring, too.

4.4.3 Checking for external connection

Check the following parts for proper connection:


l. Busbar connections
2. Connection of the power cable to the power cable connection terminals
3 . Connection of the control câble to the lower low-voltage area.
4- Grounding ofgrounding wire

4.4,4 Checking inside the switchgear

Before trying to check inside the pa:rels, make sure the lires are not live. Check üat the earthing switches
for the vacuum circuit breakers and vacuum electomagnetic côntactors are turned ON.
Check the following items:
I. Connections of elecnical parts and clean if necessary.
2. Condition ofcontact ôfelectrical pârts

4.4.5 checking componênt parts of the switchgear

Table 4.I shows the items to be checked on the component parts on the switchgear. Fot items to be
checked on the vacuum circuit breakers atrd vacuum elecfomagnetic contactors, see their respective
Instruction Manuals.

-25-
Table 4.1 Items to be checked on the switchgear

ô a) o o
ÿ ô Èô ô
5.
F_- ô 6ô 9ô cl
:t
* s êJOi^! a
,ç7( 'ËB É+
ed ô' 3 a ô'
o EA
t ! d tr5 À
|d o 5
a o
o
:, j
dd
g
È i a a s a o
o
5 a :!
a a o- o o o
È o 9
rc 9. o o T
Ë
Ûq
s B
o r ô
q it
o'
ô ,to o B
!, ?
Ê t
o t i'
a h g
tr o B o
n
E il
I
o o ?' l,
Ûa

Horizomal busbar o o o o o o
vertical busbar o o o o o o
Busbar
busbar suÊport
o o o o o
insulator

Main circuit cable o o o o o


Contlol cable o o o o o
Wte suppod o o o o
$r'iring ô o o o o o o
Circuit breaker o o o o o o o o o o o o
Contactor o o o o o o o o o o o o
Auxüary relay o o o o o o o o o o o o
IDstlurnent§ o o o o o o o o o
Cable Conkol
o o o o o o o
Eansfo!mer

Curlent
o o o o o o o
transformer

MCB or FUSE o o o o o o o o
OpeBting switch o o o o o o o o o o o o
lndicating lamp o o o o o o o o o
Terminal board o o o o o o o o
Terminal o o o o o o o o

-26-
4.5 Opèrating procedure for maintenancê

This switchgear has a mechanical interlock mecharüsm required by 1E.C62271-200 to ensure safety of
personael during maintenance work, Disengage the mechanical int€rlock in the following manner when
performhg maintenance of the system. Read the explanation thoroughly ald become familiar with the
interlocks and the procedure for disengagement. The procedure for disengaging üe interlock may vary
with different product specifications. For more information, see the as-made drawing ofthe product,

Cable malntenance

Step 1. Operate the BCS (breaker control switch) to open the circuit breaker Gig. 4.2).
Step 2. Insen the circuit breaker ilsefiion/removal iaterlock key into the key hole in the operatiou panel
(Fig. 4.l) located at tlle lo]vff part of the circuit breaker area door. Tum the key to open the
circuit breaker operation hole (Fig. 4.3).
Step 3. Insert the circuit breaker insertion/removal handle into the circuit breaker operation hole and
tum it cou!.terclockwise to remoÿe the cirsuit brea.ker to the DISCONNECT position (Fig. 4.4).

A clurorrr
Yacrrum circuit brcaker
The circuit breaker insertion/removal interlock key câûlot bc tumed unless the circuit breaker is
opened.

Vâcüuln elc c{romagûctic co[tactor


The circuit breaker insertion/removal interlock key can be tumed with the circuit breater not ôpened,
I{owever, If the contactor is not opened, you cannot hsert the circuit breaker operâtion handle into the
operation hole.
Step 4. Open the upper low-voltage compartment door and tum the de-excitation key to remove. Insert the
same key into the operation panel and tum it (Figs. 4.5 ard 4.6).

A CAUTION
The use of the de-excitation key is needed only for working on the generator panel. For more
information about the procedure for disengaging the interlocks, see the as-made drawing ofthe product
Step 5, Insert the eafihing switch operation handle into the hole you want to handle, and turr it
counterclockwise to tum on the earthing switch-

A caunor
Turdng onloff eartting switch
The earthing switch should be tumed on and off with the door completely closed. If tle earthing switch
is turned on or off with the door opened, the intedock mechanism might break. You need to put your
full weight on it for ruming on and off the earthing switch . Stand firm and keep your waist low.

- ?al -
Step 6. After the earthing switch is n[ned on, you can open the vacuum circuit breaker compaltment door
Vy'hen vacuum circuit breaker needs to be dralt'n out for maintenance, see 4.6 Servicing and
inspecting vacuum circuit breaker(Fig. 4.8).

,A CAUTION
when removing the vacuum circuit breâl«r (vacuum electromagnetic contactor) ftom the cradle, make
SUre to remove the conhol cable connectôr from the conkol

Step 7- Turn the lower cable compaltment door key on the operation paael and remove. Move to the lear
part of the same pane(Fig, 4.9).

Step 8.Insert the key brought from the front part of the panel, into the key hole in the lower cable alea
door and turn it to open the doo(Fig. 4.10).

Step 9. Turn the key for the upper cable compartmenl door inside the lower cable
compartment door. Tilt the level to remove the kev(Fig. 4.11).

CAUTION
You caffIot close the lower cable compaltment door t'hen the lever is tilt€d. When you want to close
the door tum the and retum the l€ver to the tron

Step 10. the upper cable area door key removed in steP 9, into the key hole in the upper cable
Inse
compartment door and turn it(Fig. 4.12).

Step 11. Now, you can open the upper cable compartment door (Fig. 4.13). For the procedure for removing
the separator in maintenance of the main busbars, see the procedure for removing described in 3.5.2
"Connecting main busbars".

A CAUTION
Closing vacuum circuit b'reaker (vâcuum elechomagnetic contactor ) When you want to close tÏe
vacuum circuit breaker (vacuum electromagnetic contactol) again after finishing with servicing, follow
steps I to 1 1 opposite sequence. Do not try to clo§e the circuit breaker with the key not retumed to the
original position aad the circuit breaker compartment door kePt open. There is a danger of damaging
the interlock mechanism or causing a serious accident.

Erûh0 §trEtr
ooc.lnrrn mb
ClruJlt trÉ64.!,
PçEltb.,

crer- t bad(êr
Oe-extt*6r
iûærbd( ksy ltlè
t|ôndb hoh
Ls$iEr ceblé cs(IË't
ctcut txE*er dot, l(lÿ
lma{tbn/rcrürÿd
intÊrtr* kBy HË
Fig.4.1 Operation Panel (for vacuum circuit breaker)
FROIIT PAIIËL

oPg{ OLO§E .fu


m:
'ei

BcS {drsull t[oeksr


û(EIld sü,ilch)

Fig.4.2 Interlock release step 1

MOXT PâI,'EL

ffi
. Dii

Circüil brêâkêr lnsertion/rallpv8l


interbêk têy

Fig.4.3 Interlock release step 2

-29-
FROITIT PATiIEL

ots
æNN
Circuit br€sksr CirG|l brEâkgr
inËsd ixûErnoval hardh qPorating

4s
m.p
'Ea

,,.-

Fig.4.4 Interlock release step 3

FBôlttï PtllEL

Ds.excilâtion key

Fig.4.5 lnterlock release step 4

-30-
FEO}.TT PâflEL

Dè€xoitâliofl k€ry

Fig.4.6 Interlock release step 5

FROilT P*I{EL
Ëarthiry urdloh operatlrn

Earthing sEtus

Fig.4.7 Interlock release step 6


FRONT PAI.IEL

Fig.4.8 Interlock release step 7

FHotilT P !'lEt

LowÊr cable srÊa door kêy

Fig.4.9 Interlock release step 8


HEAR PA'{EL

Loeer oable area door *ay

Fis.4.10 Inlerlock release step 9

REÀR FAIiIEL

-)

Uppêl câble ârea door key

Fig.4.11 Interlock release step 10

- aa -
8ËAR PAT'IEL

Upp€r cable ârêe &or kây

Fis.4.12 Interlock releâse step 11

EAR PAIIEL

Fig.4.13 Interlock release step 12


If you cânnot open the circuit b(eaker compartment door for any reason and thus you caffIot drarv out
the vacuum circuit breaker (vacuum electromagretic contactor), release üe interlock in the following
manaer and open the door,

A caurron
Releasing interlock
Usiag a special tool (to be supplied in the accessory tool box) showa in Figwe 4.18, remove the bolts
(4 bolts for the vacuum circuit breaker; 2 for t}le vacuum electromagnetic contactor) on the loïrer part
of the ckcuit breaker door (Figs. 4.16 and 4. U).
After servicing, make sule to tighten the bolts securely with fittings (Figs.4.16 and 4.17) and close the
door.

Fig.4.14 Emergency release of vacuum Fie.4.15 Emergency release of vacuum


circuit Breaker door interlock electromacnetic contact door interlock

Fig.4.16 Fittiug for emergency release of Fig.4.17 Fitting for emergency release of
vacuum circuit breaker door vacuum electromagnetic contactor door interlock

Fig.4.18 Emergency release tôôl interlock


4.6 Sêrvicing and inspecting vacuum circuit breaker (vcB)

'When
servicing and inspecting the vacuum circuit breaker, remove the VCB in the following manner. A-fter
servicing and inspecting the VCB , make sule to insert it in the reverse order of removal-

A caunoru
I The procedure for servicirg and inspection varies with di.fferent models- For detâils and
replacement parts, see the Vacuum Cùcuit Breaker Instruction Manual.
z The switchgear is provided with a mechanical intedock system. When opening the door for
ot the VCB, observe the maintenance described ifl 4.5.

the vacuum circuit breaker (vacuum electromagnetlc contactor)

Step L Tum the li.frer stopper at the bâck of the lifter and tighten it (Fig, 4.23)

Step 2 Move the lever at the back of the Iifrer (Fig-4'22) to the right aud left to li.ft the platform to a
height which makes it possible to put the circuit breaker on the cradle (Fig, 4.19),

Step 3, Hold the lifter handle firmly with both hands and move the lifter to a position which allows the
removal of the circuit breaker. Hook the hotes (Fig. 4.25) in the lifter platform on the pins on
the qadle (Fig. 4.24).

Step 4. After moving the lifter to a ploper position, tum the rear wheel stoppers (Fig 4.25) to the ON
position to park li.fter (Fig. 4.20).

A cauron
Make sure to engage tlle stoppers. Failule to do so might cause the circuit bleaks to fall off the
platform if the ship jolts

Step 5. pull the cùcuit breaker position handle while squeezing and removing the circuit breaker. Draw out
tl1e same onto the lifter, matching the circuit breaker wheels along with the lift guide rail (Fig- 4.21).

Step 6 After putting the circuit breaker on the lifter, engage the stoppers (Eig. 4 26) to prevent the
cicuit breaker from falling,

CAUTION
When insertiug the vâcuum ctcuit breaker (vacuum eleckomagnetic contactor) onto the cradle after
com maintenance, follow the above procedure in te sequence

-36-
Fig.4.19 Removing the circuit Fig,4.20 Removing the circuit Fig.4.21 Removing the circuit
Breaker-1 Breaker- 2 Breaker-3

Levar Fig.4.23 Lever stopper

Fis.4.22 Overall view of Iifter Fig.4.24 Pin

Fig.4.25 Lifter stopper Fie,4.26 Circuit brcaker stopper and hook hole

-37 -
4,7 Servicing and inspecting vacuum olectromagnetic contactor (ycT)

The procedure for inserting and removing the vacuum electromagnetic contactor is the same a§ that for the
vacuum ckorit brcâker. See paragraph 4.6 .

A crunou
1. The procedure for servicing and inspection varies with diflerent models. For details aad
rq)lacement parts, see the Vacuum Electromagnetic Contactor Iüstnrctiofl Manual.
2- For servicing and inspection, the fixed-type vacuum electromagnetic contactor needs to tum off
the entire switchgear system; the insefiion type requile§ to shut down only the paael on which the
vâcuum elecüomagnetic contactor i§ mounted.
3. The switchgear is pmvi<ted with a mechanical intedûck system' WÏ€n opèning the door for
or inserting the VCT, observe the maintenance descrüed in 4.4..

4.E Sorvicing and inspecting grounding Powêr transformêr (GPT) unit

A crunoru
Make sure the there is no voltage before trying to remoYing the unit-
When replacing the gounding Potver rânsformer or fuse inside the unit, pull out the unit to the
DISCONNECT position and them remove the protection cover (Fig. 4.29)-
(For the procedure for fuses, see 5.4

41 at

Fig.4.27 Vacuum circuit Fig.4.28 Vac uum electromagnetic Fig.4.29 Grounding power
brealer coDtactor traDsformer unit

4.1 Maaual charge input hol€ 4.6 Countet


4,2 Maûual inl,ut hole 4. 7 Position handle
4.3 Manual tripping button 4. 6 Control plug
4.4 Charge/discharge lamp 4.9 ON/OFF lamp
4.5 Open/close lamp 4,10 Protection cover
5. CAUTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN HANDLING DEVICES

5.1 Caution to be taken when operating circuit breakêrs

A ceurott
L Before trying to operate the cicuit b,reakers or switches, male sure:
a. There is no problem when aü devices connected to the circuit you are going to tum on are
energized.
b. There is no one working on the circuit you are going to tum on. If anyone is working on the
circuit, let him lclow the circuit is going to be energized.
c.AIl the protective devices (fuses and circuit breakers) for the said circuit are in good working
condition.

2 When operating any cûcuit breaker or switch, obserÿe tlte following conditions:
a. Except in the case of operating a device which requires both hands for operation (such as

disconnection s$,itch), use your dominant hand, keeping the other hard away from the device.)
b. The knife s'/ÿitch should be operated as swiftly as possible.

5.2 Caution to bê taken whén replacing wiring miniature circuit breaket (MCB)

A cnurrou
Removing aIId reinstalling
a. Whcn removing or reinstalling a wiring midature circuit breaker (MCB), make sure to tum off
the circuit breaker. Under any circumstarces, never Fy to work ou MCBs which is ON.
b. For the procedure for replacing, see the MCB Instruction Manual.

,,
Replacing with spare parts
a. When replacement of an MCB is required, replace it with a new one of the same type and
capacity.

5.3 Caution to be taken when handling current transformer (cT)

1i\ ceunon
Do not open the secondary side of the current kansformer. If it is opened for maintenance or for any
reason, do not keep it open. If an electric current flows with the secondary side kept open, a high
voltage will be induced to the secondary side. Check the secondary-side connection of the current
transformer at periodic intervals ard tighten securely where necessâry, to preÿent ar accident.

- 39 -
5.4 Caution to be taken when replacing fuses

CAUTION
1 Replacing fuses
a. When replacing aly blown fuse with a new one, u§e the fuse removal tool supplied together
with replacement fuses.

b. Use caution not to short-circuit between two fuse clips when installing a fise into üe fuse clip
c. Use caution nôt to touch a live wire such as a live part or busbar ofperipheral equipmeDt. Thele
is a danger ofcâusing an electrical shock accident.
2 Reptacing with a replacement fuse
W}ren of fuse is uired it \ ith a new one of the same and cap

5.5 Caution to be taken when replacing relays (auxiliary relays and timêJimit relays)

CAUTION
l. Replacing relays
â. Tum off the MCBs or remove the fuse for the circuit in which you are going to replace the relay
and make sure there is no voltage in the ckcuit.
b, Replace the relây with a ne\ one. Note that some type of relay requtes tuming off the
switchgear before replacing the relay with a new one.
2. Replacing with a replacement fuse
When of ts ted, it with a new one ofthe sarne and

5.6 Caution to be taken when replacing the electromagnetic contactor

CAUTION
Replacing electromagnetlc contactor
Tum offthe power supply (MCB) of the circuit in which you want to replace the electromagnetic
contactor alrd make sure there is no voltage in the circuit, and then replace the elecnomagnetic
contactor with a ne\ry one .

2 Replacing with a new one


The replâcement procedure vaties with different models. some models of the electromagnetic
contactor need to be changed as an assembly; some models may be repaired by replacing a
defective component alone, such as contacts, springs or a voltage coil, with a new one When
replacement of the elecüomagnetic contactor is needed, check its model and cornPonents âgainst
the replacement parts table. For more information, see tÏe Electromagnetic Contactol lnsmrction
Manual

-40-
5.7 Caution to be taken when handling protective relays and automâtic control unit

The followhg protective relays and automatic conüol unit usually come with the switchgear. Some models
ofthe switchgear may not have any ofthe rlevices. Check against the as-made drâwing ofthe produ«.

. Generator protective relays and automatic control unit ....HIMAP-BCG or GPM-500


. [æad- in cable and feeder line protective relays ....HIMAP-FI or GPM-500
. Transformer protective relays: .,... .....HIMÂP-T or GPM-500
. Motor protective relays: .......,...... ....M?R.6-DGF or GPM-500

A cauroru
This switchgear system is a precision machine. Exercise due caution when handling it. For operâtion
and maintenance ofeach device, see their relevant Instruction Manuals.

5.8 Others

1.
A CAUTION
Keep the front and rear doors closed except in the case ofperforming maintenance.
2. When closing the cable compartment door, make sure to attach the sepârâtor (if the separator has
been removed for maintenance),
3. When servicing any device with the door open, lock the moving part with the stopper,
4. Do not remove the protectiye plate and protective cover except lvhen their removal is requi.red. If
removed, they should be retumed to thet original position.
5. A.fter inspecting or replacùrg components, make sure there is not any tool or mat€rial left behind
inside the panel.
6. When you need to touch any capacitor circuit, short{ircuit the capacitor terninals to dischatge
the charge-

-41 -
Fig.5.1 Grounding power transformer fuse Fie.5.2 HIMAP-BCG

Fie.5.3 HIMAP-FI/T Fie.5.4 MPR-6-DGF

Fig.5.5 GPM-500
5. PREVENTION OF ELECTRICAL §HOCK ACCIDENT

6.1 General knowledge about electrical shock

6.1.1 The risk of êlectricity to the human body

(1) Electrical shock are dangerous to the human body. Passing ofeven a small amount ofelectric current
thrcugh any important orgaû such as the heart or lungs might cause a serious accident or death,

(2) Generally spea.king, you are apt to be câreless when workirrg with a voltage of around 100 VAC. In
the case of 100 V 50/60H2, an electric curent of about 50 mA is very dangerous aIld if üe amount of
elechic current is more than 50 to 100 mA, it miglrt be fatal.

6.1.2 Signs of èlêctrical shock

Some of the signs of elecrical shock are shown below. They are temporâry symptoms due to electrical
shock and do not mistake it for being dead.

6ive first-aid Eeatment to the victim, such as artificia.l respiration or heart massage, until the victim
recovers consciousness,

Keep practicing artificial respiration or heart massage for a few hours might bring the victim bâck to life.

(l) The victim might stop breathing due to an electrical shock. If this is the case, practice afii.ficial
respimtion to the victim to restore the respiratory center- This will make him or her it possible to
breathe norrnally.

(2) If the victim's symptom is serious, his or her face look pale and the pulse very weat or nothing

(3) The victim loses consciousness and the body might become stiff withia a few minutes after the
accideût.

6.2 Preventivê measures against elêctrical shock accident

Aayone who are engaged in operation, maintenance and repair of the switchgear system arld supervisors
should observe the following conditions:

DANGER
1. Before tying to work on electrical components, make sure they are de-energized. Many of electrical
shock accidents are caused by mistakenly thinking that the power circuit breaker has been tumed
off. Using a voltmeter or circuit tester, make sure there is no voltage in the circuit you are going to
work on.
2. Wear rubber gloves, rubber boots and insulation mat (rubber mat).
3. Use caution when tuming on and off the chcuit breaker. When tuming off the circuit breaker for
maintenance, put a caution sign on the cùcuit breaker switch.

4. When operating the circuit breaker, use your dominalt hand with the other had put on your back.
5. Have a helper near tlle switchgear, who shuts off the power supply immediately if you get an
electrical shock accidentally.
7, ACCESSORIES

Here are tools and accessories nectssary for mainlenance (FigÉ 7 .1 - 7 .4)'
They are delivered with the switchgear or contained in fte Àccessôry box. Check that all the
necessary tools and accessories are supplied,

Fie.7.l Lifter Fig.7.2 Earthinc switch operation handle

Fig.?.3 Circuit breaker insertion/removal handle Fig.7.4 Circuit breaker charge handle

-44-
I

I
i

§ATII§UT{G FIEATfÏ INDU§TRIE§ CO" LTD"


D§ltal B.usinesÉ D-iùinioh
§.lfxchûÈtr D- ê81gir Par!
493, Baü/eol-Dorg, Hwaoung-City, Gyeounggi-Do, Korea,t45-330
TEL] +X2.31.229-l ?65
Fi{Xr +.s?-31-229 12d9
URL: ih,t(Ù:/ii!îwnù*ri§itirirÈs:Èir,Lr

-,45 -
D-001

Chapter D. INSTRUCTION MANUAL


FOR
HVF Vacuum Circuit Breaker CS type.

NMSUN
§ Global Leader ilJ t'N.
r,tflLsli.
iIÀ ltl24

HUF i HAF §eries

E!ËI]Ë71*,**n,
Vacuum Circuit Breaker I tnstruaion lülanu;rt

.&ilJ;

&HYUNDAI
HEAVY INDUSTRIES CO,,LTD
Safety Practices qld ëàJ

ôJ.d 4rJ
Safety Practices
This instruction manual applies only to HVF Series vacuum + +lÉë8.À]= H\r'À1713 ÊrÎ ar.i}Ê7l9 Êd "; ltd.ll +6J
circuit breakers regarding installation and maintenance âs-T] 'I*€ 71Ë6t âq4.
procedures. ,I!6€. +4âôhï èiloÿlLl +4.È+^lôl= ilq4.J.JB
'lô1
I
Installing and maintaining these products improperly mây ,th} êêol +gçJ + { o E ? +,âd14. âÈ, z}i', +e +4 . È+€
result in serious personal injury, property damage, or even àl^l?l 1141 tsJF-^l q +lÉ{qilE='i+61 9]r ôlàï6}Àl?l È}zJ!]r+

death. Therefore this instruction manuâl must be read and


.€il "i +zl . H+= +zl4?i+ dË Àl4g s,?il i36l-{^ls.
^)*.1
understood at any step in unpacking, assembly. operation,
and maintenance of the breaker.
Only qualifled persons who are familiar with installing and
maintaining circuit breakers are permitted to work on
breakers, and this instruction manual should be accessible
to those persons at any time-

Signâl Words 7lÉ èE


Signalwords used in this instruction manual are divided by
DANGER, WARNING and CAUTION depending on the
situation.
ts TÉêqllol^j:
rîelJÊ +S,rln
td
9lÊ1]EL
+qÀ}ùJer +lÈJ tç_"ï n}zt r9lÈr, râil.
o
Ionr'rcrn A +t ë
lndicates an imminently hazardous point which, if ignored, r+9 +t f .q ê j .l.J aL Ë I c .J 3,JEôJ ets +LrlE. qEtLrl
will result in death or serious injury. r!. z}âl 9EùJ âI*gLl4.
This is the most dangerous point.

lndicates â potentially hazardous point which, if ignored, rqôIzl g-q{ ,r}o} Ets Édg .J9 + "J: +,}r 4.J 9lil dEllë=-.+4
could result in death or serious injury. Ë qE+.

Icnurroru A -ol
_T_
-l
o
lndicates a potentially hazêrdous point which, if ignored, qôI,l lil-qg, "+J àèÏ,I /"rà"1 È,9È'! ! e= *,131.J 9le ^"IElË
may result in minor or moderate injury. This signal also LIE+dr]+ E+ q {Àl: ÈôJdÉJ üJE"l rrlE! âa"JqE+.
warns operators not to work unsafely.

Safety Practices During Moving olE4 +q^lùù

. When the breaker need to be noved ' dlqôlÀl ifÈ71É +E qE^l {5Ê ân
on flat area, grab the handle ànd q5Ël: aq oJililq+
move the breaker. . -ë-EË ol+dq iIÊ71É €ôlgÈ a+ +4
Icewou . When lhe breaker is lifted bythe rope,
it can lean to the Lerminal side.
A â,gel ôlEsç- i}Ë7lzl âêÈ.4+ +!-e
zlÊôlâ + ô,1ô E e ôJ4l+ 4+el q.ïi}
L4ake sure of nol making any damage flE+ +elÈIlïLl4
on person and products.

o
? v:.'trrd an.',ir R,.r.kà lnsn,diôn Àlâ.ràl
Safety Practices During lnstâllation è;l(à+, dâ^lgl +e.lÀ)s

. Do not work on the breaker unless the ..ÀJilôl q,î s,q d$ê 7IÉà1.71 +lill "JË9
primary clrcults are disconnected. iIÊ71+ r?lÈ +É9 llÈ€ ÈJsÀl c,pen
. When connecting bus-bars, tighten +.1q 9]Ëôl flâqEÏ.
^l7tC^ls
,ti}
bolts using our standards, bolÈ ÉË,{ë |DIcues qêEl.il aol
. The product should be installed and dÀlc. 9â.]+
n+7lel +lEq
tighened on the plate area. .e 1l+e î€6ln 4q{! ts"I ÊÊ4d T+
. Do not installthe breêker in areas with ;+ôl n4^l7laÀ]e,.
high Iemperature, high humldity, d!st, 'n-c, qâ, ft]. +4â 7I., 1lE, i'4 5
Imuroru corrosive or vibrating conditions. À+rr +Àl *i}
e4ql Èilôl.i1 Efg,À19.
. concrete dust orany other dust 4,r1, É4 9*"1 È,8È + g+q4
should not be inside ofthe product '{21, 7}+, eË 5el
"lËê
=r4E ql+ôl Eô17}xl *i:-a ë.il
I 9lB
when it inslalled. lt can cause fire or F.l ë;{Éq
misoperàtion. +BÀlg.
. Connet the controljack tight, +,11, Ë4 Ë?.1 È.JË + "Jâqq
othervr'ise it can cause the ' cont'oljackâ 4è4il d+àl-d^lE.
misoperâtion. 9+zl€ gsA + flÈr]4

Safety Practices During Operation E4^l +!]^Ï1I

. Do not touch the main and contiol .5{9J 9l!.f +qË "l dqElB Èzl+41:
crrcuil while the productis in operatign. {+àl8l 'l!^lg 'Jde.l elË"1 9Ë!r}.
The hazardûus voltage can cause . al;ovrneaon +l:l€. F2;"J 4+)LI "JÉ
'serious problem. gilql4 !r ock àrll(C;.J 4+)e. 4l+-â
. Do not let the product stay in the sJil+,I sl/dÀIe.
Ionnorn DISCôNNECTION position wilh UNLOCK [+r e . al-ôl â{€'olss '+}Àl d4+ ^}a q
state. ,rl-* ê*el 1lÈ"1 9.1+Ll4
. When the heavy product falldown on
thegound, itçan cause lhe serious
accident or product dâmage.

Safety Practices During Maintenance +Àl . g+^l +g^ItJ

. Before doing any màintenance, always .8,'Èe S*.9] ulÊ71É Els.^l operl^]71tr
open the breakerand make sure that
+rle, jÀ qôlÿl s+ +drlq fl! *e
the mâin and control circuits ore not aÊ q"Jt +41 !3àH^lg
charged.
àdq +lE"l tlË.1q.
.
ïhe voltage can be hazardous.
'q+ êêe ë alËôl cpen àEll'J 1€- q'J
Discharge the sprinqs and open the
È + àJ6l{}1E. +7tEl * #71 71+:nl
,l\ceurnu breakers before peforming any
breaker maintenance, inspection or
A+"1 zlq që flÈq {+Llr+.
. ÊÂ[ bo]rE 471 49q $Ë 4lA rorque,É
repair. Char0ed closing or tripping 3ôld^le. boü Ë83 r+,I] gcg s.J'l
spring can cause serious injury.
. l]se the standard
€q+
paessure torque to
tighten the bolts. Loosening the bolts
can cause flre-

.!ÈrlÉ4 â"âS4 " 3


OontêntB ++

§afety kacticcs 2 ,Jd a* 2

1. ProducttEnr§èoFe 5 1. ilt* §
'fl+

2. Technicât Dâta . Â e 7lÈi4 qrlËl 6


2,1 §ervire Go-ilditioiri 4d
.zl ÀI*
2.2 [ c&r Drivq 2? sq €4
?,3 Multiple Aut§-REcla6ing iz.3qË ilF.q.
^IE
!.4lteftork MeqlrâÛ§r,1of thÈ DiBu^o,iÎ Typé Brêâk€f z 4 .ji:q .+g7lr_l .Jqq *4
?.5 clôsing fYgJ and Ar:ïti-F.urnpiry (l{ l ) 2.s.+ÈJ{ÿ9i+ 4FB i,.}el qs, 1)

?|6r,ôpài1§ôlern:ild ff1) iz.S EÈ â!1Yôl5fù


e7 Aluilian §,4,itçh §.i1 l'
,etf sê &Plil§l)
2.8 CàndehsèT Trip DÉvieê til edd E* *àl
2.9 Under Vol!â§g Rel€65é (lr) ?,9 ++-r1*.éiÊee|f4
2r0 ?nd o en §olErprË $tl elq Èr| eg âilrôl:fê)
?r11 Oùtoul §wteh err âÀl* à§lil
2,i2 "ebsino §pring eturgd§ignâl erz" 5.J 4§g.i4" 4In

3, Bàndling ând hgtaüing lhe Élêsker 11 3. {rèÊ u


3,1 Unlqading ând §pr€ge g.r *È lcs
3.U Unpatckin! à.2 s*4al
3.3,lnsFp.{.}bn Àfter Unpækinq 3l3 Ea4*l + da4s
3.4 li1§tallatibn 3! §wtrclgca4l ênl
.i3.5
3.5, lnsÉ&tiôn Bêfoie pFi{â$ôn Êê ê êê,41*
jrq Manuql ôperp{qn 3:6 âlÉ7141 +5 âèl €B

4. §tructure and Operation 13 4.+ag*4 t3


4l ,§omp§nèft Li§r oT HAF 4.i HÀF É]Êrlq ++ E ++e
4, z tôm-Êôneni Llll ôT HVF 4t2 HVr,itEt?Ig +â .f, ++g
4ll Qpaûtisn Mpde 4.3 E4 êE
i4,4 Dra\rÿ ln & Ouf OpÉrâtlôn of HAF VCB 4.4 H,,F [email protected] !là"J "JE
4.§ Drcw ln,& 0!l 0pè. rafion ôf HVF ÿeB {5 rfi/F \rcBe.l ôJâg *B
Referi cÈi omw in & out sFerallqn Wth vÿsrrn *a ëi.l ,ffiqâq clës *B
geâr qpÉ oi heahani§m

5J MaintêiiàîreË rfid h§poetion 21 5. È+. dë ?r


5.1 VlÉu l lnspe§iôn 5.r 4* {a
.5,? ÊÉiodicâl lnsÊe.tkn s24-7]l4ë
5.i e],ftàct Eao16iôn Lirm 5.3 fê ,'is §ù41

5,, Tr§.rlbtp.shooting Gujde 5.4 Ë.âl +Ë ila]E


5.5 tubritâtiôn

Appendi3À ri ++Â ?5

AppendirE 26. ++B 2a

Maiffisnanirê R§anrding 2:1 É+ eë 27

Memq q'g

_ Vdclurfel|cÙit EieakéiïiilflrôIon Mânljâl


4.
Product Scope ,.]l4 À}"}

a HvF Type (HVF !!!E',)


a Table 1-1 / .S I-l
Itated Bnra!ùB Power Fæq. Iryubê Red Cunem / 44C+ (A)
Apdjed
Voltage Cr.û€r1I WHlsand voh Wilhstard VoL
ggâ !1d'J Stardard
T4d"J :lËdf, +€+4 "llt"J 630 1250 3150
(k\4 (<A) 0(V. I ntrr) 2000 2s00 3874
0(\1 (6Do) 0 200) {3r)00)
't
25 041 1042 1044

7.2 31.5 20 60 r051 1052 1054

40 1062 '1064 '1ô67

25 28 75 2041 2042 2044

3',],5 2051 2052 2054 2056


28 15
12 40
(36r', (es)''
z0Ë2 2064 2067

50 zil? ?414 2011 tEC60056

'l 25
6011 6012

75 50 125 6041 ào42 6044


24
3',1 5 6052 6054 6ü56

40 50 125 6062 6064 i


6067

31.5 80 150(1701', 1052 7054 1051


38 ANSIC3T
40 BO 150 1062

O HAF TYPE (HAF lDtrtr.!')


aTal]/ê L-2 / &1-2

Rated Breaking Pows FlRl. l,.}puhe Rated Cunent / A4d+ 6) Applied


Votage Cunent WiûsEnd Vdt lml]stard vblt
iIÊàl+ Stardad
4 4d"J *8+!t "l]d* 'J€a ,lA"J 63u 1 250 3? 50 4+n4
(k\4 (kq) ((V, I min) (kv) 2000 2500
(600) (1 200) (3000)

4.76 50 60 1072,3 1074-3 1ô77.3 ANSIC3T

25 1041,4 1442-4 1044-4


rEC600s6
3t 5 1ô51,4 1052-4 10s 4-4 1056-4
1.2 20 60
40 11623 I 1164-3 166.3 1',l67-3 LEC6005ô

50 1172-3 1176 3 1117.3 ESB15O

25 1541-4 1542-4 1544 4


1
31.5 '1756-4
1t 51.4 1152-4 1154-4
12 2A 75 EC60056
40 116?-3 1764 3 1766-3 1767-f,

50 1712-3 1116-3 1111.3

25 2341,4 ?34?-4 2344-4


1Ec60056
'15 31.5 ?351 4 ?352-4 2356-4
95 2354-4

40 2362-3 2364-4 2366-4 IEC6005ô


ANSIC3T
12.5 6111-4 6112 4
'16
24 6121-4 6122-4 tEC60056
50 125
(25.S1
20 6131-4 6132-4 6134-4

25 6141-4 6142 4 6144-4 6146-4 t8C60056


FSR15n

1) Type No Sufflx in the 'trll]tr"


and "ntrtrtr,n"shall r)' nllrlE" "+' Llli lll-ll"e {^lFl +..8e 44 â4d+ 5J+.û
be listed as shown in tie column of rated current. ti= +i}"l iflBÉLltl.
2) lnpulse withstand vollage "1 )" ts avaliablc on roquest. 2I ( fq .JÉr'.IdlI ûe.z4e-l -ù-Cql elsii ,l+ 4àè,lq4

4l*:kPl +;È{rl " 5


Iechnical Data 7lâ4 Eïôlq

2.1 Sêrvice Condition z.l ÀI* 4d


'1)
Ambient Temperaturer NIAX 40 / NIIN -25' l) ?9 $E: MÀX 40 / IülN -2ÿ
2) Relative Humidity: Less than 95% 2) t4l âr: ss% ola[
3) Site Altitude: Less than 1000 m l) rf$ ir.É: l00O nr olài

À cnirlon  +e
Consideration of site altitude:l! .]i,,tl Lrlt: tl.,I 'tl4lt I

lf Lhe site altilude is h gher thân 1000 m diêlectric r0r'r0 m


"l{"tlrl
Àf8.^lqli-. *71!l êtqq.l "++çlEÈ 7i
strength ol the breaker wi be redlced according to Ê7lel t.85-,,I lldo} P à4 LId*iÉ 4q.r+ êôl stÉI
the altitude. Therefore, the val!es of power frequency q cq4q+ ÈJqEI
withstand voltage and I ghtning impulse wilhstand
voltage should be selecled âs following
> Rated withstând voltaoe accordingto rated vollage
X k(k Refer ro Table 2'1.)
+ > 44tx'.rl El= àl€+4 ? Ë4 lrlîôJil x
&' E 2't9 +*41';^1q1
k

For higher humidity. rt is r-équired to use a heater in the iL/I Y.Él à3 I"l4 .f8"l.rl+ eÈË.r ,g E
"là
switchgear to prevent dewdrops on the insulation ê!1 qlÈ x,lÈl€ 8JCùPI ,.1,Û èlE.lÉ tslldÈJ4l ëil6ll"t ilq
rnaterial and the conseortjve decreâse in dielecric slren$h 4

+ Tabie 2-l coIle(ticn Fadcr as a Fttr].dcn of SiE Ahihrdê / *. 2-l i1Eèll "IÉ CC al+
Applid ,a,trit](te / 4* nç 1000 m I 500 m 2000 m 2500 m 3000 m

C.onecion Factor 0d / lJd 4l+ 1.0 1.05 1.1 1.'t 5 1.2

2.2 Môtor Drive 22.Eq+4


.l TaHe 2-2 Speciffcariors fcr L,lobr Ope.alicn / .E 2-2 F"J âzI+ EEl +t
Rate Volage Opera&g VolËge M P,r,i/er CorBnrptiôn Cunrart Ircr Moicr F1:æction MCCB
44 d"J dq ÀÈl d"=. Rated Ctr'Îenl (i{)

M Mâx Mtr1 0\) (VA) 6) -EEl È-Ê+ MCCB 44i11+


'15
24 DC 25.6 2A s00 21

4B DC 53 41 s00 10.5 8

60 DC 66 51 500 I I
110 DC 121 93.s 500 4.5 5

220 DC 242 187 500 ?3 3

1]O AC 121 s35 700 64 5

220 AC 242 187 700 3.2 3

HVF & HAF VCB have motor-spring type stored-energy H\.î / r{AF vcB= tr& aEB '"f44 .rlqa 1+B 7l++= 7}zlj1
operating mechanism. The closing operation can be done 9o '" F9l À-n*Êl oJd6l il,l{ + +E tz}"I 7l'..ür-lq.
only after the closing spring is charged. s 2-2ôll= tszi É I-Elg î+âÈl:l-É- +Eiqlîeû1, 51ldÊ ôl+
Consumption during the operation is shown in Table 2-2, d'g
^ltÈ
71+4Es -Ë^l"J
9IâLIEI î
and the inrush current may be disregarded since it lasts for E=34s t, 2§1 "Jrl41 ï{
TlSbl ôJ7}qÉ sElMl)ôll elàl F"J ar
only a brief period, 4ôl "J+çlq rl^14 *,q€q4 r
_a. rirkôl gÈtl ultssl= 4ElE

The closing spring is fully tensioned by motor (Ài]1) with the +lil S2t, 522"1 gÉl sÉlq +E+ îÀlq1 rB 2-l+ Èôl aIÈ
rated voltage applied through terminal no.1&2 of standard EÀl7l:'SPFî.IG CilArRGm',P=- Sililqr+
control cjrcuit. Then the limit switch (S21, S22) stop the rlÀl7l +É€ ilBTlY' F_È Ë"J -tr?'el E7t9 s+4e3 È + Ll
motor, and the spring indicator shows "SPRING CHARGED" sq EË ts4 +",lrl gt.l Èl--E F.J 4 EÉl Eêr"l 7lÈ*qEl
by link activation as shown in Fig. 2-1. The charged VCB rÈ gËôl ilalg
+F,g 2-l Stæ d SFrirB CIlaBâI / 2-1 àEll
can carry out the open-close-opên sequential operation
and also the next close-open operation without delay.

SPRING CHARGE

6 Vn.rrhatrrrl B«riker .srùcrion ManLra


+ Fig. 2-2 Srarxiard Circxrjt Diag-drn / re 2-2 EÉ ,llôl Ele§

(4NC+4NC) {7NC+7NC) (1oNC+10NC)

1 3 5 7 911 13 15'17 192123


911 13 15 17 1921 23 27 29 31 33 36 13 5 79 11 13 15 1719 2123

lî rrîilU,, D[[[

ô,À tï tï ï.ï ï ï ï"ï
,,,J'hJ" J: l'J: l'h J'l;i' t thili ïrI,rIJI, S
Jt
à,ô ô,ô
;lL
À,ô ô,À
J[ J [ ;ll;ll
ô,ô

T'rI,rI'flI'ili'r'r'
10 1e 14 16 1A ZO 22 24
I I"il"I lït'îr'T"r'
2A 30 32 3zl 35
IrIrIrffil"rr
246 8 r0 1?1416 1820æ24

Slandard / s= êle(Dc) Exiencêd circuii / +it qe

x0 1 ô

13 13
1
T6 s6
§21
'l
s1
s1 54
D1

a
i*,
lrs s41
s2 R1
z §1

!r
XO 2 7 5 I

M] Molor Operating Àlechanism Yl Open Solenoid S1 Auxlliary Sv!ilch

K1 Anti-PUmpingContactor Y2 2nd Open Solenoid S3 L mit Sÿvitch (Kl Control)

R] Resistor Y4 C.T operated Release Llmit Swilch Supplied Wrth the Lockout

S5 (Paevents Closing by Elêctrcallveans When


X0 Plug Connector Y7 Llnder-Volta'geRelease
Lock-0Lrt Fffective)

Yg Closing Solenoid 56, 57 CLrtout Swilches

Lim t Switches
s21,522
(lnterrupt lvotor Clrcuit After Spring Charged)

s+i.llz Pos tion Switch §prinq Chêrged SÉtus Signal)

1 Lrlorr(lrll (i rcu L lpêc & c()olr.rcl or rae nul'I]il\:a arc .i.!l .rli 4 ljr,.l' iL''lll rî,1 rrlrl È-J5l + ii.Llrl
1 :i:71
d{tf n.rC by (rsir S rcqucSt 2.iii"l :1il4l ull-il^l l. 'J +l ?: ,1 Érl-ilLlL:l
;\('
2 [or lh(] .arnir.l clrclii. iha ic.t f rr shoû al bir 3 ;!)l ôlrz 1ir,/,I liÉ /rr?:il r;.+î i.E 9l;Llrt
inaclrùd^Co r thÈ :,1âlr(lâ-d crrcrrl
3 St0ndàrd curlact5 c6 bc rl5ulf(:irrlllot tlxr req(rea,t
of the extefded cr[cu i.

ilrrikl?]4!'ÈE^l'- 7
Technical Data 7là4 EllôlÉl

2.3 Multiple Auto-Reclosing æ qâ a+ ïl+ôJ


HVF & HAF circuit breakers are capable of auto-reclosing l]\tr / r{AF itÊ71= illF"J 71Ëôi .Jeq, 4'J +B-9 E4 ,ÀAÀorl

and can also be used for multiple reclosing for the ûl+ r+Ë ;lFo;_o_-eË Àl€"J + 9lâqq
following operating sequëncê O-o 3s-CO- lss-CO-lâs-CO. ... (o; EÈ C; FêJ)
o-0.3s,co-1 5s-co- 1 5s-co..... (or tripping; c: closing)

2.4 lnterlock Mechanism of the Drâw-Out TyPe Breaker 2.{ slàÈ i}È7lel .Jq+ +zl
The draw-out type circuit breaker has an interlock ôJ€i€ ilÊ71= .ç_Ezl-e_-É êJq!,rlrg EiTl +lôï {qq tilË +Èlàf
mechanism which prevents trouble due to misoperation. n elËqq.
The sensing parts check the position of the circuit breaker ôl â|il=;.}Ê?lel 9iÉ 4ô+âIq ilEJTl4 oJÈÉ 9lilôrl
.*Ê olÈ ;lçPle.l +gg Ë71=" 44 Ëqq.
and prevent it from closing if the associated disconnector is "Jil
not allowed for safe operation.

t
A cALrnoN A +e
Misoperation or careles5ness may resllt in j,lnl !1: :5.:1.1 iÿ r+ 1ll1.1 "ilil,:: tq1 ; !l+'-lr+

serious injury or property damâgè. :ÏÊ7l7l F.JË àrETôrlrl: oJgô]4 ôJâôl Ê'l="+'-lE+.
With the breaker closed, the draw in & out opetation i5 È*€ ,JH.llÀj ilË?]q qlôrlr+ OÉ-g +etal flsÊ E4
El..dÀl_{
imposslble. Do not push too hard on the breakel under ^l7l^l
improper condilion

2.5 Closing (Y9) and Anti-Pumping (K1) 2.5 FôJù§)!+ ,lF.J qÉ6t)
'àlÂl
When closing authorization is applied through terminals no. EËaÉ 6. 7È Ê.71.fl +T t.Jg F'J +laz1 912199. â-4!ôljl Ye

6 & 7, Solenoid Yg unlatches the closing spring, and thus 7I +49q iltJTlTI C7l49s F"J9XI €q':+.
closes the circuit breaker electrically. lmmediately aiter the ,IÊ?l7I FErl4ElxI. Èatî sre F{ ilÉÉ ?riÊ}Àl7ljl, aElE
breaker closes, Aux. SA,{/, S1 the closing clrcuit. snd limit L9rl $+ illFr.J ,J*l Èelq KLg È+ FE a]d3ôl è1Ë q,411 Ys
switch S3 and anti-pumping relay K1 switch affect tô Yg so 4 4Àl 5.49x1 9*F_q Èl+
qÈ11] i}Ê?l= EC4lÀl s+âl= 4+.J EÈ Eol^l ?l:.!f oJil
that they can not be reactivated until the continuous B.trlr+

closing command is interrupted. ilLl4.


Thus the breaker can meet the IEC requirements for anti- 5^l4l coffâcr p"essure spnng9 :IÊ:)z| F?! àrtrl"lÀl il+ 'Jë9
pumping and trip-free opeation, At the same time, the 7].E Tê"rl 4+_È d+SÈg +"l,\l7l71 9ô[ ."rËEl.l, EÈ 4geôi,E

côntâct prêssure spring is compressed properly lo maintain El*el 4i s;+-9 9iÏ .J+9 Xl çJqq.
sufficient contact pressure on the moving contact of the
vacuum interrupters while the breaker i5 in the closed
position, and the tripping spring is compressed for the
opening operation,

2.6 Open Solenoid (Y1) 2,6 Ets âüïTÔIE(YI)


7lll .J7içlÈ ts-Ê êrllôlE. Yig EB ]-sBel 9lil= tlal6J
When the opening command is applied, the tripping spring 41:e-7i

is unlatched by the trip solenoid Y1 and the force turns the !-É keaker i'ltàl-q ;IË?liI4+rlEra *q+
striàlt7t

torque to rotate the brake shaFt to make the opening ,1-E7l7I 7l-+5lB /llrl .itÀl7l= open d-EI= e^làIr,q-.d1l Sig
position. lmmediately after the breaker is open. the ?Ï+§lÉÉ ?lÉ^lrJLltI
indicator displays the open state and Aux. S/W, S'l open
the opening circuit.

2.7 Auxiliary Switch (s1) ?.7 !À


^+iil(sD
The standard auxiliary contacts for external connection are el+g eâg 9'l"J SÉ.Èjdd€ alül * aNCË çlq fleq, 'l !€
composed of 4NO+4NC. These contacts are wired to the 5-e 7J!rlEl(xo)41 s,J5l.l *âq':l
=-?lr
control.jack (xo), , E4ÈEI'J AC,DC 25O V
. Rated lnsulation Vôltage: AC/DC 250 V ' S+al+ r l0 A
, Continuous Current: 10 A .5gd+ 30 A
. 4tl11li 2 A (ü1220 v. r=æ rrlsql)
' Making Current: 30 A
r=20 ms . +7I 1dôl ll-?51= id+ 4il toNO+t0NC4il 7Ë;fiLlq.
'Switching Current: 2 A at DC 220 V,
* The maximum connection 10NO+10NC is available on request.

I " Vz.rrr cir.!r Rrêâkêr lnrrr!.1iô. À,,1ànuàl


!

i Fig. 2-3 Aian8enÉn cf Ccntrol lack ,r .:* 2-3 4qElg Ad


Pixed T)pe Ccntsl Jaok / nX€ C..rxrôl Jack Draw-Oü Colrûi Jack / "Jàë C.niplJack
(AÆ Trpe) (CÆ Tvpe)

NO
11

NC NO
E 12111 1019 716 iJ4 2J-1
NC 22t 2',1

35 2'l 1g 't/ 15 æ 12111 êt7 65 ,ll3 2t1


31
= XB
2212',1 20 19
34 r6 26

2.8 Condenser Trip Device 2€ eB^l EÊ 4nl


It is recommended to employ the capacitor trip unit for a E_ü ,Told*+ ACs ÀI*È a+ -É-È dq+ d.Je Bdoll qlÈlô[71
gil oJt 4+zlÉ 1+1 etll^l Eq âilÉ ô;Ë!]
trip operation of the breaker when the control source is
^l+ë1,1 ^l-tË +
lost in the AC control systêm. EL P,aÈAlôl Ryq BI, B2(1.5sec ,leE+ tIl)É rgr+

lf contacts B'1. 82(1.ssec delay contact) of auxiliary relay +"1 =È+ +^lEltsr} *Êe €AÀ171È ?3d^l ;l+71Ë E l+9e
are connected with tripping push button as shown below, *^là î É:l
'J9,q, 5,7e cbsing Ei
sElclË.I ÈË9q ôJû AC
;1r-îlqe
the breaker can be opened automatically in case of power ^|*Ê flàq4.
+
failure and terminals 5, 7 can be used as AC power supply
connecting to the motor ôr closing circuit,

t
À cmo,ù A +r.l
This dcvice can maintain 30 seconds for the voltaoe F-Ê +à= At^l :lË7lE L!{ _EBÀlg + 1]= dS
which cân trip thc brcakcr.just one time. =dl1
Ê. 30à +9t fr'lÈ + {âLlE}.
It cannot be operated properly if used for othc. ol t:lÉ EIC +§s ÀI+àlillï ElÉ= EJ'^Iel Eq Sq
purposes or if the circuit is modufued without {cà14 ^l*i} ë+ 5.4à}zl *e + q+q4.
consulting the manufacturer.

+ Fig. 2-4 Condercer Trp Device / :r 2-4 eÊ!^l EË 4nl


80

co DEl{SEn np DÊ!1CE

6
r ]lYUilDAl

112
118

+ Êrg. 2-5 Ciûrit Diagram d Cordeser T@ Device / :19 2-5 éê/'] EÈ *ilgl d7l §lEE

tl
6
cLosEPB 6
+
I
+
I
B1B?

su/ c.1:NL

5
l
5
34

.r+ilrlrlA;!,àil " I
Technical Data 7lâ4 tll"lEl

2.9 Under Voltage Relêâse (Y7) 2.9 +É-dS release(n


The UVR (Y7) having a spring-energy storing mechanism, is ag"J alq,l 2]* !J4l qlïqËg 7Id i+d.J rereaseü7)ê â*
used for the continous monitoring of circuits, and can open €+4e-a ,J^là14 ilC t"J") arcp out d.J:r4 ÈeÈ :lÉzlÉ zl
the circuit breâker automatically when the control voltage + EÈÀl'Jqq.
drops lower than the drop-out voltage. , old"Jol pict up dêJ!.ü]. ÈÉ ?dr.-, ôl relea-se9 41rl "ll7lL1â.1
And the latching mechanism of the release can be excited qTlElc.l -ErôJàEtlÉ +ÂlÈ + 1lë.1+.
to hold the cloisng condition of the circuit breaker when . Dlp -out \,oLtâge: ,J 4 d"Jel 35 - 60"..6
the control voltage rise than the pick-up voltage. . Pick up voltagei â4 d'Jq 75-85%
. Drop-out voltage: 35-60% of rated control voltage
ê? F"-C +lèll'l 'JsÙ A"t, 'l releaseg lcck si:!eln,Ë f-g 2-64
. Pick-up voltage: 75-85% of rated control voltage
{"1 î+ee ç1r1^1,;e3:}s}i7} *e dôJill.il EË9zl *5.5' Ê
lf it is nêcceary to lock the automatical tripping function of + fl94 rË 2-7rl 'Jôl L+ÀÈ= ol.i.]]qqa elTlÀl7lÈ lock 7lËôl
the release at the lower control voltage, you can place the ilTlj;JLlEl.
lock-screw as shown in Fig. 2-6.
And the release can be operated âgain by shifting the
screw down as shown in Fig, 2-7.

+ FE. 2-6 LDcked Srare / fg 2-6 T]4 cÉll + Frg. Z-? l-ldtrl(ed Sla!ê I :14 Z-7 *.4 7È *q

+ r|

2.10 znd Open Solenoid (Yz) z.to 2)l 9e âal.r.ol=ffa


2nd trip solenoid (Y2) can be attached to the HYUNDAI ëLT t{\E/llAFë C-":}Ê71= 4llEq â4!qÉ(il+§l.s rrip) ei"l
HAF/HVF circuit breaker putting aside the 1st trip solenoid 2:i Eü âilÿ,qE= +zle i4=")nl ilrtlÉ L çlrl?Jqe/il El qlrJ
(Y1). so that the circuit breaker can be opened with more I E4lc +TB + fl+q4.
safety,

2.1I Cutout Switch 2.11 a6H, à9lil


The cutôut switch consists of two limit switches, which are !z a+lil ÉulB impùrseîêg iIË./19 Tlldl ât doseâ +
Srôi
connected in series with the impulse contact of the 9f,1 open9È dd"Jul4. "1 1ê9 "l+*l"i i}Ê7lel l7l4ql trg^l
auxiliary switch in the alarm circuit. ql
aag #,*lJÀl? + 9E+ taèFl Àl-âÊ i. fli-- 4gilôJq
When the VCB is opened locally, the cutout switch E+. 4ùltr.9lil s6. s7e ;IF]7lel ++ ++Àl 4lEÉ ÈJilE
< +Ll ol*I 7lôlr lrl
interrupts the tripping signal.
* Closing time of impulse contact is more than 1oms, .,mpdse lE9 clc,se lt3 l0 nrs ôl'/Jg.

2.12 "Closing Spring Charge" Signal 212' 5ôJ âEË ilzf' tlÈ
Using the âuxiliary switches 54'1, S42 operated by the :tÉJ?lel il;(l à4"1l 44 .."t1-È 4ulE r:+lil s41, s42g ûl*d4
closing spring, the spring charged indicator is displayed for rrl+ql.Àl 5a"J r},l àIÉ1.= "J + 9lÈ+ d.l4
visual checking,

10
,' Vacuum circur Brèaker nstrlrction M.rual
Handling and lnstalling the Breaker àÉèE

3.1 Unloading and Storage 31 ++ qsB


A carmox À +9
Êxcessive $reight will câuse the seriôus injury, ,+',.ir ?:illf ,-f7li. ri*-.r ;t 4llI rÈl .tr,i rl,l:

4
property dâmage, or even deâth. il.t.ilq r I

Io j-- ,lË3-Exl
avo d this sitlration, do not transport a crrcuit
"l àq€ .344,1 +16llÀl ëEllÉ =ô1€,tl
breaker on a lift lruck or other lifting faciiity in the àI{.11.! t};},| EfllÀl e-
raised posilion.

When unloading from the vehicle, avoid turning if over. +++ il:È"llÀl ,lt7lâ L]]g qts +ul= qilqlÀl ulülgd àIq,
Special care should be taken to avoid shocks. +4* +^l q.d^ls. 5-61 ?î!É4 étôl 7I^l gç:- i-el6lq î-.!Àl
lf vacuum circuit breakers must be stored prior to use, they g d=:iIÉ717I ë_il5l7l a"ï .È1++ iî+ "JEIÈ, ùe^] l a8IrL gil
shôuld be stored only in dry, dust-free and wellventilated zI fl_o,q +,lzl È9!.: ë!l âaql È+ô1d^19 olq :tÊili EË
rooms, with the breakers in the OFF position and the (oF8àE.rl"lq. À]IËe ôJ=-rl4 "*e àE{"lq+ 3}Llr+
storêd"ênergy spring mêchanism in the released position.

+ Flg 3-1 HAF VCB / r3 3-l HAF \tCB + nq. 3-2 rl\f VCE / rË 3-2 llvF V(E

SPRING RELEASED H i! -l

..* i
OPEN

Sk]Uld Lxj skIEü h dry an l dust Ëee with ttler;e condÏirrs.


olel te ^JEIÉ 4",à1i1 $,1?I îl: il4l -{È;ldÀ19.

3.2 Unpacking 3.2 s+614


When opening the package, also avoid turning it over and rd6l]4lÀl EtCg ulg 9:lôl Yj1 ,IÈ71ô r.1!9 +,1 SË+ +el
special care should be taken to not damage the breâker. àldÀ19. 5àl êCË, 1l*Ftr, fenule conracl fiont coler4] î9
Handle carefully disconnectjng unit, front panelând so on, 4d^ls

3.3 lnspection Aftêr lJnpacking 33 -E*Èlill + ddÂlÈJ


'1)
Check the type rating and quantities with the I) ,{+ lisr"rl û}È} È4. 14, .l]+É E"JitqÉ}.
specification sheet. 2) ES^,ig à11, j+â "l {€Ê d?É}:r 4 -"r+ bolt=el q*}â
2) Check the ci.cuit breaker for any damage or missing d,Jï+q+
materials. 3 SÉ r"++, "lÈ1t"1 el+ a+ +'*9 îdâIr 4è 4i€ dllilLlr+
3) Check all accessories and spares supplied. Also, check
to see if these parts are damaged.

3.4 lnstallation 3.a Swirlgêer"ll ë:i


Before installing the circuit breaker into the switchgear, ilÈ/lÉ ![d{3] è:l {.+Eilel È.1, x4 H êt l+= ,ll+J4
check the typê rating and for any signs of damage again. ii ,lE êrlÉ È,1 q El4g .Y++ !]"ltsqEl
Wipe the breaker with a dry cloth to remove dirt and dust, ?ÉÉ ,fË,lel "Jà.J .3!lE: +'J ârl7f +ÀlElE+ ë7lqq+ è'l
Mount the draw-out unit (if it is used) on a level floor by q îrl{i}7} 1 mrnÉ nr}rJ a+ ?},+ 5€' .(l-3-6}q +.rj !Ji}É a,j
means of screwing through the mounting holes on the È+d^lg
bottom, Then, the tolerance on the level should be within
1 mm. lf required. adjust thè level using a liner,

'irË l$1 i;nq! I1


Handling and lnstalling the Breaker AË^Jq

Wipe the connecting surface with a dry cloth to remove dirt {=€ i}Ê?1 €il +' +1: È}(Blr5'ba4 SË 'i {71 4gÊ à},,1. +t
and dust before connecting maincircuit bus-bars and earth Àl i}Ë71.]l T-?-l"J ,'Jôl ë , ÈE+ iel 6}dc!-
terminal and be careful not to shock the draw-out unit and
breaker,
llote ii|,., LL).rlr cirta LraL a
I AT&rlirI Vi]cLru rr a icLrri ., . . : '.'.
.1. ô' r: 1.r.u... l. . i i.
Llr,.'irlxJ' lor nitul rll rlil )o ù 5lir oi ill('i)iir-rlillrr,4, !Llr ll.{l \I"l)rr.)' il-l:., j rl,i,.}}r- r' I I \:arlÀI .,.ri rf rl ri

tu rl âfil ai ilt Itr't-l] titl ! 5 ze a'nL:Lrir iri, rl,.t r" tll{:ilril (lli

f
[,ri:,tll Àrt
Heavy weight!
Lr
+ T,trl rl,l. ,:+.r! iir zi'Jrlr .j,i: llL,}ô..J.'il,lrI
,jfr,:r,r
;l

Please use lifier to remove or installthe breaker in the ;I.JzlÉ switchgear"{ H4* zl'J âÎ4lr; ÉJt lifterE al€.
upper position of the swiichgear. àl-! jl.s.
Do nol slând below thc lifted breaker. ilFtTlll rl"^l,l ,l.dÀ19
=rldql: "l-.irlql

3.5 lnspection Before Operation -ë-rl d Àlrl16l


"<
1) Check to see if the breaker is installed properly. rl ifÊ717I ulezll +9{q+ ë{rlî:4
rlolÈlÉql +!tlg +É617
2) Operate the breaker a few times manually to ensurê 2) È7j +r.r.ô_É:.zlàE
"là!"1 t?g ^l
that the breaker is closed and opened smoothly. Er+C rJ q 4
Then, operate the breaker using the motor operating 3) j.lâ. t,J.3
6Ir Èilotl -;./. 7ktl7l ç'44 {=*l ,l1lî}q4
^It?!
mechanism with the auxiliary power, and check the 4t iIç]719 r]= d,l l, E Ê d,l*.1.1
ON/OFF indicator and charged state of the closing spring
3) Chêck that no tools and materials are left near the breaker.
4) Ground all possible parts of circuit breaker.

 r)',\i.r.r.l A;t ,r

Chargêd closing or tripping spring cah câuse .if /l i .!= rrl l: lr -.. tr{: ;: i!:,rr., :l i: .i.iirr'r}
serious injury. i}+7le+ TfÈàu +t+ nlÀl7l î"11 rlt .il7lqé ++el lxlÊ
To âvoid this stuation always be altenlrveto the a-zrolôr o
=01;lÀlri
mechanism of sudden movernent belore tôking any ,lç!/l,ol.\i+ ,JÀf= ùlÀl7l î.rl ù.^l F.J aseJq ilzlÉ
act.oT o
.'le c"curl oJerkcr D sLha'gc hc spri.gsio' à11314.n iIÊ717I r,Èfl ,Jr.l"rul 6ï+C+qq.
ênd open the breakers before performing any breaker
maintenance, nspect on or rePâir.

3.6 Mânual Operation 3.6 iIÊ714 +Ë44 êB


1) lnsert the handle-crank in the hole and turn it clockwise ll +F d=3 rer+ ê"1 il"ÿl 118 î5 ÙE-+ +.ll B-r1,\lâl Ü..:l
until the indicator displays "SPRlNG CHARGED". -ee ErlB âtrr3q i{Rlt + sÊ"irg drarÈed ir,dc.rcr7l SFEI.6
2) Press the "ON" button. Be sure to check that the breaker is C]H^RCLD"= ta^l glLlEl.

closed and the ON/OFF indicator displays "CLOSE". 2) tsE BIL- è9e \.P-E TlLJ?l7I +oJg + oN/Oi'F idicâtc/I
3) Press the "Ott" button. And be sure to check that the " CLOSE"=- nÀlÉtLlr+

breaker is opened and the oN/oFF indicator displays ' oPEN" 3) El-Ê EË ÈlF--É
-â!É ïi..8 ilÈil7t EÈ51r. ON/OFF indicarrr
4)Operate 2-3 times as mentioned sequence. 7I', OPEN -g É,ll *r-l L+

Finally, check that no tools and mêterials are left near 4) +Àl /flqlF+g 2-3Ël È+àlq ii+7lel q+"1 fl+g- +"JÈ +.
the breaker. ilETl +Pl"ll ++4 TlEl .+,114 hlôlll:l ",ilr+ qlqrt
+ FrE 3-3 Charging the Spdng + Eg. 3-4 CtIârBirE Èe Sfrirg r) Fig. 3-5 Open OpeEli,:,l .) 3-6 Clcee @ratior
r+ 3.3 â44 i}?l rB 3-4 égB .i}:l rg 3-5 @û ii4 :rg 3-6 Clæe EzI

m
t,--t,
I
t
:i§ I

.\*7 o
.\i+ tor hffdle

t §
$
I

I?
,, vâ.L!m an.[i Breâkér .srrù.ti.. v.nua
Ê
Structure and Operation +â "f E4

4.1 Component List of HAF 4-l HAF ÈlÊ7lel +r 4 +ËS

NO Iterf ÈJ+
10 Hous ng Box
F:€.. 4-l / :t7à 4-l o 4+ ?l+ùJ

11 Clôsinû N,le.hânisrn
o @l
12 CI osin! Spring ql
6
13 Tri p spr ng
l @
@
14 Link o @
eJl
éà
t5 Coupling Bar E 7lÈèJ Èl

6 @ e gellôlr rlgE
@
11 Dâsh Pot rll+l sE
t0
]B Colrntêr (6, 'lgEl
T9 ôN/'OFF lndicator ux oN/opF E.rl7l

2A Spring Charged lndicator


o@6
21 Closing Butlorl

22 Trip Bltton ËB HIÉ


F:E. 4-2 / :14 4-2
,È+
23 Name Plate
fl*-r
24 Hole for 1\lênual Charging î-E :t1d5+ È
I
31 Ilotor q€l
w @
32 C o5inll Soleno d 6 FrôJ êdllCE
19
33 Trip Solenoid .qÈ â41!olE

34 Limit Switch (S3, S2l, 522) elElE 49il (S3. S2r S22)

35 Ant -Pumping Contâcl (K1) @


€ù
,[F"J .nil dê (Krl

36 Auxiliary Swilch (Sl) lla :çlil (sI]

41 Vacuum lnlerrupter

42 Upper Female Arn'l

43 Llpper Pole Support âf+ *l^l+


FE43/rH4-3
44 Lower Pole Support @ ,41 6l+ .14+

45 F exible Termlnal +!]È 1l++


@
46 Upper lnsLriator @ .rl

47 Lower lnsulator o d+ "l +


@
48 lnsulator CoLrpler @ Èe ,lÉq
@
19 Contact PressLrre Sprnq d+gq .4È
@
@
50 Cross Arm

5',i Struts @ al4rI

52 Eal(h n9 Term nal ?11 È,l.

Cenler ng Ring
x +]E] B

60 Hole for Draw out Operation @ (} .JÉ.,1+ È


61 lnlerlock Handle 91El+ flÉ

L1++È/l ilÉl-it^l ' 13


Structure and Operation +a 4 E+

4.2 Component List of HVF 4.2 FrlT. i}*ze) +â I §+e

NO Itern -q

10 Housing Box Frg 4 3/fH 43 o zr4 7l+11

11 Closlnq N,4echanrsrn
o
12 Clos ng Sprlng 6 È

13 Tr p SIJrinq
t4 0
4 Lrnk @,
Én .J"
tîÀ
5 Coupltrrg tsar €] rl+r, Hl

I6 UrF:aker Shaft ûl n
a4
17 Dash Pôt
09
lll Counler l!
19 oN/Otl- lnd cator rr oN/oFF .tr"] ?l

20 Spring Charged lndrcator :sË tE E^l?;


@[iiD
21 Closing Button
FiB 4-5 / rB 4-5
22 Trip Bulton
1
tr È15

23 Name Plate =J+

24 Hole tor N4anua Char!lng +F 471§!É+ è.

31 I\4.Jtor srl
32 Closirg Soleno d r,L
FE È;lkôl!,
a
iûp Solenoid 4rl,

a
I "!i'n:"ri
rlllt:
34 I Lrmrr Swilch (S3, S2l, S22) .çl:l (S3, S2t. S22)

35 Ant -PLrmp ng Conlact (K1)


UJ
I ,ll+E ÉJ:l dê (Kù
@
:16 Aurl iary Switch (S1) E-â.:gil (Sr)
I
€]
4',] Vâcuum nterrupter 1l+4 t
42 llpper Female Arrn
Frg40/1440 (}(?
43 tlpper Pole Support @ €rt t+,1,i+
44 Lower Pole S!ppoft èl+ À1.11+

45 Flex ble Terr inal +4s Ë++


4S Conlacl Press Spring @

54 Femôle Contact +9e J r."


55 I è{ =?ll'J
56 Rear lnsulâlion Cover @ +sl te rl'rl

57 lns!lation Rod @
6!
58 Spring Guldc
ÀrÊ ?lôtr:

5o, Coupling Bolt


È
62 Position lndicator 9l.il f,Àl7l
@
63 Draw ln & Oul Device îlâ"J â,rl

14 la.urm Ctrcu: Brêâ $ lnÿrlct on 1,4ên!a


4.3 Opêration Mode 4.3 H ,,gq

+ FE 4-7 / :14 4-7

1) Charging l) CharElE
lr-1
When the charglng mechanism +84? B*ôlL]. sEl(sUôÙ !l8tl
is activated by hand ûr motûr clo6lng spnng(iaol i['i]rlÈ
(31) the charging shaft (l1l) clrargng shaft(]l l)7l BÊarLl
lurns by the gears and the driverol -2)"1 EÈ]] E")71Àl +"J
driver ('l I 2) so that the closing i.gBê SêitlEl d.Éing +,ring
epring (12) is tensionêd. When "l $dal 9à!8, chsr,ae Fawl
lhe closifq sprinq is fully (11'3)9 closing qrringôl ÉAzi
lensioned, the closing pâwl *sq -zX.t1r3qq
{11,3) makes the closlng spring
be latqhed.

2) Closing Cha.ging 2) Clo6ing


When closing command is F"J,IË"I É498, dæi,g spnrg
gal
applied the closing spring is ") ckxirg çnwlql ';lËÈ ë4
unlatched by the activation of BLI+ q .lLlzl"ll 9"ï couplng
lhe closir'tg pawl. Through the bâÿI clÉrgûrg shalel canê *+
energy from the discharging of q ,r[l]l +4e 4A7f/I €qE]
the closing spr ng, the coupling êrl:î 9g breaker shaft 06)E
bar is powerfully pushed down rrcving conhcÿl +I]àl +Ê EIrt
via the charging shaft and the xl jldÉI4 qq. rp pa\À(2s-ral
cam, e.ldl g+ldtl4. Erl4l contaa
Consequently, the breaker shaft gessuie spdnB(4g)g ilÈ717t F-oJ
is turned unlil the moving +Ell4lÀl ff!4ng cqlâcl"ï 1î
contact is fully Closed and ôJe€_ +71 +lôt .J"txl
"Jà€!]E|.
latchcd by the trip pawl (25-T). Closirig Eip spftr1g(lSg opening Er+g
At the same time. the conlact elôl "J+*J.l+
pressure spring (491 is
compressed lo insure gufflcient
contact pressure on the rnovinq
contact while the breaker s in
the clqsed position, and the
trlpping spring (13) is
compressed for the open ng
operation

3) Recharging 3 ,xFq EtlTl

After the closlnq operation, the F J Fzl +al, dcsr,rg spring.l


closing spring can be qEl LI +Eo !-a tl^l oÀ+g + 1l
immcdiately recharged bya Recharqrng Ëqq. ol= ,llFôJ .j!Èôt lrtzl sB
motor (311 o. hand so that the q^t :t]F"JÈPl 9i]]^] ELI+
breaker imned ately re-closes
in case lhe closing authorizalion
re-closes is applied

4) Opening 4) Eq
When opening command is E jrlËol Ltld4È, Eippirc
applied, the trippjng spring js sprùrg"l rip paüql el.ll 'J+ôl
unlatched by the activation of Éqil:Z, brenker stÉft= 7l+ +lil
the trip pawl, and the breaker _É E,jl"sll EJq4

shaFt is returned lo the open


pos tion.

Opening

{+{t,l itë.âÎ 15
Structure and Operation +4 "l E"zI

4.4 Drâw ln & Out Operation of HAF VCB 4,4 IIAF !CB9I OJàÔJ ll}B

HYUNDAI HAF Type Vacuum circuit breakers have several €']] rlNr gpe d*.it:J/lg .JË.J T7l: n,_4el .$î.rl f+4 q?l
versions of draw-out mechanisms and the breaker types â"r7I d+g + oJ+Llcl. Else 'J^PI..j *ÉqÉ Àf*â}f îl:
which were produced according to customer requests. nonn gear'&al9 "Jë *il"ll rll"J ?liêB'Jqr+.
The following procedure is for the circuit breaker of our À: ryI)eol o'Lr à?o':- Lj{rL +elàr{, 9
standard version having worm and wormgear type draw-out
mechanism. For the instruction of nonstandard version,
please contact us.

À t) \'\(,1 ri a ,t ,rl

Hâzârdous High Voltage will cause serious injury, ',,'. : I . J.r .i


ProPerty damage, or even deâth- iiÈ?l= "J.J,
éJ=.Àl7l'l côtl itEJTl= lr.iE{l E rl(operi
Before inserting or withdrâwing, the breaker shoL.rld be â\È"1,:. !!É"J i!+ I
lidl mtpricrk lev.rÈ ill
9 =cl
:ôlrlolq+ rlLlEl
open. BeFore turning the handle, lift up the lnterlock Ëô1 Tl
Handle. lf excessive power is applied to the handle iI+,17I -ErôJ trll"lTl+ "JEl+ dE"l +,+?l ",1*l È'il3 *ll,
vÿhen the brcaker is closed or the lnterlock Handle is +el6}4l 6Jg 7Iô14 EÈ ilôl= 4lÉ'.9q+3 7l,l€+ ôJ+LlEl
not liftcd up, il can cause damage to the bleaker.

Make sure that the breaker and cradle have same 7l,f : I iî:.1 111!. !,1 ll rl'--/l !1 r' Àl }ltr6,ôl
,l f l +11 r.l1
rating when inserting ând withdrawing the breaker. f l,E-,-I ifÊzlôtl ,l+el -^l."r.l X^lrlôl 9.1+.114
The sticker and narne p ate with rating are attached on rrE^l nl9l + oJilàfÉ= àIdÀl{
^l-ôJol
the product.

Jl- ,l\ 1t .i

rlt:û r+r14 ++ ,rl"='-È tlrli+,J,: lli| ;l!l .Llrr:l

4
Excessive werght cân câuse serious inJury or dâmage
To avold this sitüation, Do not transpon the breaker on
.:l!'tr + ,ili:r lri
a lFtinq lac lity in the .a sed posltion and do not stand tsrl €-Él al
,ÈEl4l.\l ilç171Ëa ôlEôl.rl +Àl!. eûl ifçl/l
helow the lifted tlreâkêr 9ôll .J.1 gi"i.È ôjr!+
^jôJ7lr+."1+7È

1)Checklng beiore inserlnq the breakerta + FE 4-8 Êûa\.ts, df$F/:18 4'8 MFel 'tÈ.E l) rllllll *€ cradle"l ëil4/l A Vcurl û1lck
the swtchqear or Çradle Checkfirst +!l4l *= .j:i7f rÈ 4, t0e) êôl +ijtLl
whether the link is hoflzontal as shown in J1
'lî | -4ol o}r J o,ô,t:- hr.k {q
4LLr

Fig. 4-'10 lf not, put the l]andle inlo the


.l5gql +5 d=€ d.Jâl.l
"lrrl+el "JË.J
hole and turn it any direct on to set the ++Ç nl11^l7l 3r7l +EJ *E.ll7l çlE+ ,lal
link horizontal. Aftcrthat checktosee fthe
+ .lq ,Itr'l ,|,.l. !Ff"'l rl §Lo.léPJ !a Ô^.1,

breakcr is open. +

2) lnserting to the disconnectiof postron


Put Lhe breaker to the switchgea. so that
the wheel ofthe breaker is exactly on the
HI T
a Disconrcctrc,n
tnlk7t î*
àrLI7ï §lûJ î+-qÈ vcBg
+lrle ?+

dbrrnnecüon posirjonzFrl "Jq';âtlEI


quide railof switchgea.. Altcr lhat lilt up
/- a- 4 Èôl rail
ol4l ruck r.heel ôl -reJ
the intedock handlc fr-r ly and push il c*.tl !4ôl cÈd r1=*l q"JàH"È
slowly untll ilslops. When the breaker 1s 6}rt, ùÈ1o.k hardleg 9.C-.1 ÿle:êJ jl
in the cofrection position, check ùùck€' dtsconnc.c[on prsition ,lrl "Jô] B
whether the interlock pin is securely + Fe 4-9 Siè !ie\.v d HAF/rB 4-9 I-AFel +ÈE "l re 4 llr+ ?LIôl ulred.3.-k pin.l L,ckrng
dropped rnto the lock ho e as showf rn çl:-,1 llôJ àllô | {È!-lr+
Flq.4 l l. lhis is the Disconnection q7l7I dis@nnection lrGfionq Ll4.
position

3) lnsefting lo the connectlon posit on 31 C.orr,rerltm 9;1.?, âzl


Alter checking to see ifthe breaker is i}ç]7l7l 7ll1El9l:.,1 +.JÉJ.6' î-5 ?]3"J
opcn in Lhe dlsconnection posilioû inseft {+g E o-d nlg intcrlock lunlleg Sdàl
Lhe crank handle lo the hole to draw oLrt 5.13 ,.1 iIË71./f connecborr çlrlÈ :/lE+
handle arrd lifl up the lnlerlock hêndlÊ 1lËîl îtEg rl4l *6Jqa Eg!r+
-ûmê.Lon9,l" o- ol:ol rxelô k
frrlly. lhen, turn the crânk handle frô /rB
clockwrse so that the brcakcr moves lo e-+ ôI4rê_ _e_E 9o1 d Ll +
the conneclron Posil on
Whcn the breaker s in the connectiorr
posilion, check that lhe interlack pin
drops into lhe iock lrole

I6 vrtrlm atr. rir ,Èrar.krir ln\lr!.r ô. lvl.ûNa


F

4) Withdrawing the Breaker 4) :lÊ7lri t1+


After checking that the breaker ls open, inse( the crank ;lÊ7lz EB+] iJE|]4lÀl +à {ùÈqrlHlÉ EqdÀle.
handle in the hole and lft up the rûlgrlock handle fully. frtcdock hanclc9 llC6l ilÈ7lzf discoillccbon glzlÊ
Then, turn the crank handle counterclock\,1ise so that the ./f.E.+ ctaù hallr,leg ^l?l=ôlgirlrl
plll] $nJ!-E
breaker shi'ls ro lie disaorrecroi pos rion =qcc9.

I Flg. 4-10 Setùe &eak€r on ûÉ SwitclEear or Cradle. + Fg 4- tl Dieronnectior P6itiotl


rÈ 4-10 EIdÈJol+ rrllÉ4l iiÊ71 €471 rÈ 4-ll Djsr-J,-mectiol +lil

tlole Èr daw-ot ôÉâIiJn rbi,onhliry / +{à4


ôJÈS+ *'
a

kûerH tEndle Urk / Ba DiscoffPdion Fsitjo

+ Flg. 4-12 Irlsstng to d-E CorrrFdion Pc6ilitrr + Fg 4-13 Corl,rccriolr Pcsition


r? 4-t2 Cornecdon g.ile ôJEËP] rq 4-13 Connedi gil

C.êTEcTon posilim

4.5 Draw ln & Out Operation of HVF VCB 4,5 IIVF VCBg] OJÈôJ *H
,Èrll
HYUNDAI HVF Vacuum Circuit Breakers have several HlF {è-ilÉJ?lel 1,É"J â;ll: i1,.lel -sa ": \aB ÿ.pe.ll n}et
vèrsions of draw-out mechanisms which were prôduced 4?l ++,I ,I+'J + ôJ+rq.
according to customer requests and the breaker types. q++ "J^I"ï^l *É!3
^l-8,Èlri
1l= .r+ rù4el
"J-â ?il"tl dl.,J

The following procedure is for the circuit breaker of our ,T+èB"Jq+


standard version having screw draw-out mechanism, É+ y!-ol ol,,l i ?d1: Ll(r\: telulÈrrl
For instructions on nonstandard versions, please contact us.

liote For lhe i(orm gen: lyfril ai rna:chan 5îr ref(rr 1o llre ,"11 r: / ô: Ei,.l1, "{ilLrr:{l Étliil,,lr ôl 1rl , ;,1'rl. il:a",li!:
'Rrilerrrrce' tÈiL ai ai this c1lpl!r r,L'!,,l,1.

,l\ I ri:'.r;t,,, À;l ,t

Hâzardous High Voltage will cause serious i4jury, - tl-1 i;i , ! -r" :,r. 1 .... ..1-i I

property damâge, or even dèàth. ilETlË ?l.J qr=Àl7l?l tôl ilEJTl: rlE^l LeJ(open)
Before insert ng or withdrawing, rhe b.eakcr should be lrrloll. bckerÈ ÈJÉ-^l Lrnkrk l)osrdr]Iloll 9lqol
m.anual
open, and also before turning the handle. the rnanual +114. zl.Yi7l7l +ôJ àrEÎôlz]4 nunLral iocl<.erzl' L.uiock
Locker should be stay in the unlock position +È **ql^l +ilÈJ.J.oe
CEnrl d=--,3 EejÈ al-Fel
ll excessive power rs âppl ed to the handle wheô the q+€ 7l49-i' '"]+qr+.
breaker i5 closed, it can cause damaqe lo the product

tl4rl,l +;r,a,l '17


Structure and Operation += "i É. z+

À lr |ia, .li

Excessive weight can cause serious injury or


damage.
To avoid thjs s tuatlon, Do not transporl the breaker
on a lifting facility in Lhe raised position

A _)','.( Itl
t i,:t,1rr ,;"I;rf

+ô11 -{.l ,lli illl?l=


À "l rl
Lfl+ ,x..i-i r:lTlirr er!lJ rlrll ,lrl ,4fll;r
.:;1.1I l,.tlr.irl':l
+4 +? 1 .tEll4lc *EJ7lÉ ôl+6}'l EI^lr, èrtl ilÊ71
gêl flq+ *'1.}.

À ,it ,it
Mâkê sure thât the breaker and cradle have ;irl,lÇ'f tiliiq ";9. î), i+i.r \lr.rl !l1l;i.l iilrll
same rating when inserting and withdrawing the
breaker.
The sticker and name plate wtth rating arc attached on
the product.
+ lelÉll
ÊJ!,.1 q"J
;lÈ7141 41.*9 r.i.È"]
+
^tJ.l
s^lqq .^lâq+
?,IôfE..a 4+l^l?..

'l) Checking before insell ng the


+ Fig. 4-14 FÉrt VIe\À, of lI\,F D èilïl vcB tf.i +ôJ
breaker in to the swhchgear rÈ 4-14 HVFeI AÈÉ esll5"l.I Èll1]!J.rl il'Ê71É tilèt7l côll
Before puttlng the breaker into the ifÉ7lel tEllr,r +S"+ ,J.l çl"l+ {}Ll+
cradle or swtchgear, check whether all . Tlli{ g^171" oPEv
parts ofthe breâker are in the righ . 9I,] EÀIII ' DISCO\\ÈC1ION"
position as follows. . N{ânual t ckerl' LNLOCK"
. CLOSE/OPEN INDICATOR
displays OPEN'
. POSITION INDICATOR
displays'DiSCoNNECTION'
. MANUAL LOCKER:
located rn uNLocK' position

2) lnsening to the disconnection posil on = 2) Discormcction 9l7lÈ 1lèl


Pur thc breaker to lhe s\uitchgear or ;lq+71>a ül]îH1nl4:l?lÉ +lql +n BÉ ull

cradle and pLJSh it slowly unl I I stops.


EOS1TION INDIC R
411 {t!ûl "Jqr+ 7}Ê7171Bi.È. ûrârual
Whcn it is stopped, sei the rnanual lock
handle lo the LOCK posrti.xr.
I Lock
ôl ïél
hancleg []CK 9i]4 +âLlE]
ilTI disconr-Éricn 9rlo;Ll4
This is lhe dlsconnectron posilion.
MANU^:. LOCKER:lxlNC SCiiE!\i HEAt
3) Corrr,eruon 91:l? ôJ'J
3) lnserting to lhe connection position
After checkinq rl'ral thc break is open disl.rmecrion çlilq,{l ,}È71/f oFer t4
in the d sconncction posit on, insert
+ d H\,F
Fig. 4-15 Sile View g +Àt ÉB +{ + dË3
rÈ 3- "J=.J+
4-rs tNFel +ËE L;a Àl1l
the handle nto the Fxing screw head and lùurg scre,À heâdql *ùJqi E;l
turn it in a clockwise directiofl so that the È i}çt7l7I conæcdon 9,lilÈ ôl+ôlll
breaker moves to the connection 'JLlq conne«ion 9il.l EÈ4tl
ilÉJ7lT[
pos tiof When the breaker is in the !1.J, el.l .i\14,'" CoNNrr.tO\" 3 d^lÈL
coônection posrton check thât the q4
position rndicator
dlsplays rhe' c0NNECTloN.'

4) W thdrawlng the breaker


First ofall. open the breaker and putthe -?-'tl 4ç1715 openÀlA + 11='J+ {=.+

handle into thefix nq screw head and f- lixrrg soerv læadol YlZ 'ù^l7{ ÈJÈJg
turr) in a coLrntclockwrs direction lo -- .ll
:JÈhl ilEtTlTI gr++ àf7l 1lr+llqq
withdraw the breaker The position alÊ7171 dlq1j1rlùreL1ion 9lrlôl gS 9l.il gÀl

indlcatorwilL display DISCONNECTION ü 7l+t' DSCOTNECTOI\r'= .g.-Àl',iiqE|


when the breakcr rcaches the ilÈ?l:É. rdl:q+ xldu.l.Irl +tàl .J=
disconnection posrt on. Àlll7l 9lôl^li: rnanual læker= UNLXIK
To wlthdrawthe breaker iully from the +r7tqt '?,r ilFl,l= À1.!Èl 4gLrEI
crêdle put the rranuaL locker Lo the
unlock stàte and pullthe breake. out
slowly

1B Vac!!m Ctr.urt ttreâker lnslr!ciion ManuaL


i F€. 4- 16 S€l dÈ &eêlier on tle Svitdgear or Odle .) FrC. 4 17 toak stâE in ùe Dscorm€L'bon Pc6ition
rts 4,16 ÈlldLÈlq r4É"1 ;lË71 94i rB4 l7 Dis,:rnnetlon 9-alôI4 tcch *El]

t
\ ffi
"-"
.=j

H:r ta
'l
I
I
I
\\
ii

q
t

,
t t4
!
, t n:
.!
tr
)t Fsine ScI.w fbad

a Frg. 4-18 InserfinB tc fE ,:(,îedbn po6ïiol + FlB 4-19 Cônnedifi Po6iti:n


rË 4-18 Comedicn +l:lB aJE6lZ re 4-19 Connedion 9il

I
I
t ! t
a !
a

,
l See h€.El
q"Jàt4c.l

;)
J
À cnlmor,r Tte Head d Frorg Suw_- À
"el
lmproper operâtioh of the breâker can ,rr.r., ! îJrE /li :i::1"1( ?j: Àlqlij 1n""!t
casue the product demage. ,ril.-9.1!qtl rÉ 1t.ar. LIL:t.

Fixing screw head should bc located in the 9lg-g flilil + head d fxurg soen9 eo*
proper position as shown in the rlght figure. ôl $+ rÈr+ +lêl HlsTI rlêlôl ÈJqq. E-ô-!
And also, after withdrawing the breaker into 1Ë€ tB- {- cii"rnrne^:tion 9lilôlÀJ îxrnc
the disconnection posiLion, the Fixing s(rew
heôd must be located in lhe proper position
otherwise lhe manual locker cannot Tflove
o S@Fer
srew head9 lXtol ùIi.a '*qH. rnanual
irxrke/Ï Lnùd(ol çl:l ôtôI il.J?lÉ dldsJq
L+ ctadteql.{l È4^l? + îiËLl+
to the unlock position. "J'J. 'JË.1 +Ê€ F4lr; ÈJài 6.xing sc:eu,
Olherwise thc rnanual locker cânnot move headTl lrls4l çlôlôI ôfr, slopperT} ëPu]èJ
to the unlock position. 9_È LlqôI Bqq
Howevêr, afler []nishing insefting and
wilhdrawing the breaker, the fixing screw
head should head shoùld be located in lhe
proper position and then the slopper should
be come out.
Always be caulious oflocating the hcâd of
the fixing screw For precise operation ofthc
lrreaker

îl:.ilÈ71 àJâç,] - 19
Structure and Operation 74 "f E4

ReIqsÉe

Drâ\,! in & out operation urith worm qear lype ol mechanism


g,l.l 4arliïrl "JÉ-E
,nB

t) FE. 4-æ Nan)ès of d-le Pans + Fig. 4-21 Belb,"e lrsedng t !lg. 4-22 DbconrEdiorr Po6ition
f4 4-æ 4 ++9 ôlÉ re 4 2r ÔJEEPI 3 l{ 4-z Disslrnectiù'r 9l7l
rflr TI
'.kt-
;:wr

I i
'l qa{
't
t
I
, ü
,
{
Crank

I I
a
I t
a , ,r
Ë

Âfter_ p-shr,ng dorn dre lack }Éndb, pLLSh Ihe lack handle \!dl narve ilself to dÉ
d-re breaker slorviy. dbconnecti.)l pcjitioü.
4 d* ie; 4't'1t1 "3q4. cLsr:onerrion Îl;lllil q dEg +E.qa
g+,J'l+

i) Fg. 4 æ lrEdü]g tc tE Coft'Edirr PcÉilcn + FE 4-24 (È1ng fÉ f{â.de a Fig. 4-25 C-,:rnection Pcsition
rfl a-æ Ccrnection gilg "J? rÈ 4-24 {# q+d4 ôJôJàP] rB 4-25 Cornedion +lil
3! *r :Éë, ,r '
§e, I
'f

û a
t

t, I t'
4 ..c
I a

'lb irÉefl ûle brp;rker rno ûÉ c,rlnectict-l \{hen \,()u cELmrol prshjnEl arrJn,oÉ Tlæ hck hrrlle a]so ulll nElle uF b-v its€f
Irc6itiolr, push lhe Éck hardle again and use lhe ha,.d.le. h dle cormection prsition
slorvÿ
pLr-sh itÉ?lql {"1 ",i"1 :24r1.j. 4=* EàJ ormecdorl 9rloû^J .,1 d-Eg ,l+.!e
cornecrion +lilÊ 7I7l 9lèll sl der€ 4^l "1t.61{ ^l
-ç, =q+*q4
risn rl.Àlôl DJL-lr+

[]otû For v,,ihdrn\., nc ll-re break,.ir'rrlrrr tht:.r''i:ah,lr crldlc ù Jf rù r,f :,' l.::ll ir if\l /lrr,lr ::!l tr,] 1' I j ."111!l

krlûL/,, I lo Tavers.r ilTÉral or oai i. irrl::llallrra "i l-:,1 ;1111i.i,

Z0 Vaclum Ci,ft: Broêke/ l.slfucion Mânuâ


Maintenance and lnspection Èî. â4

HYUNDAI HVF/HAF Vacuum Cjrcuit Breakers require little ë!l t{\,Fl{AF rl*i}çl7l= dnq! 7lT+Ë 7}:ln îl"l +il. É+4
maintenance because of their simplified operating ,ll+ tililllÉ+. ÈE[ CE].! ?lÈ E]e+ !!t
^l+9 916l Aâ] 54] É
mechanisms and robust construction. ,l I + 9lE ++"rl rrlàl/.i"J "_itq +zt. È+zI es+ XÉêJqL+.
ln fact, only the parts subject to normal wear and aging +,1. s+q tsq El êë 7lûg ilÉJTlel ^JErl, +91 {}4 5. q€- ^}.}
need to be serviced to ensurè fuily rêliable service, .l û)+ trË + 9.1âq+
The interval at which thesejobs should be carried out and
the amount oF work involved depend upon .Èq?l+ 7lÈ q+
. The number of short circuit interruptions . Tlltll -'lf
. The switching frequency . ê^È+ 7lt
. The actual service time ' ++l ë4
. Environmental conditions

But, the service intervals indicated below arc only


approximate and should be adjusted to suit particular "l?.li4l
L+4Ê dd î'tL qtq4.J dqq Feû 5.4ot.+ +z"i ,rl4
operation or environmental conditions.
Under normal condition the vâcuum interrupters need not t+ilgl t++ tFrl"rlrl tii"Je= +zl. q+7t gs flâq+
to be serviced.

A cArmoN Â +el
Failure to maintain the equipment could result in ri !1.1;,1 .il-/r. -Lt.,j.i-; 7i,'!ri"J ôJt tr;i.ü nltr 1..ri!1 llii "il
death, serious injury or product failure ând cân
preveît successful functioning of the connected iIÉ71=' connecrion" 9lilolÀJÈ +gèIil !I.d^lg.

+
apparatus. ,Iil5lfl7lLl, 5E *Ell"ïC= 4iÈÈ),1
-?q 'ld^lq
Da nol work on a breaker in the connection" posilion. iI'J7l +9.11 +lÉ +ôl+zl lldÀle.
Do not work on a breaker with springs charged or sf 4.dllql= È-a^l c= 4qîl+le #gq^l=
contacts closed.
Do not lcavc mainlenance tools around the breêker.
While the work is in progrcss, all aurilary vollage
sources must also be disaonneated.

5.1 Visual lnspection


The purpose of visual inspection is to check the exterior of 5.19È dd
the breaker in usual operation, Once a year, a general el+ 3ëg iIË719 Êd sl+q qâ jj
^jEïÇI.Àl î^le dë61-:-
=
visual inspection is should be carried out. And, the outer ,loJLlEI ,5El Èil7} *e *ol^l Àl-4. -\l4l= ,ll\l Ètg Éô]l È*lel
insulation parts should be wiped with a rag more frequently ++ âLEIÉ ëBèH qÉ eôiïô| "JL]+.
if the breakers are exposed to a dust-loaden, $ b-lC a]+ dr;^I6JÊ ++!rl!]r+
aTatde 5-l TheVi âi Irspectiôn L,ist / .g 5-l qÊ de^Iiù
lnspection Description 4^l "rl +
ON/OHr 7lÀl4l7I iîrlle 4Eàl-e-rl ,JÀl-Bq4
Check il0N/0FF ndicalor is normal
Clrcuit
,tÊ71
il"ùl +9"I "J,ILI â71 E9 qi€ d^lÉ,tLl4
Check for the prcsence oF dust or moisture
Breaker iIÊ71 +*l"l "làIÈ Àel 'J"l], È4 E9l 4+€
Check for unusual noise, smell or discoloralion
A,ÀI6JL]4

Check inside ofthe switchgea.lor normal


Temperature temperature. .+lil?lôl (s^,irctBearj ql+ gÉ?t 3èt4.J"l
Rise
eExâ
Check maln-circuil terminals for drscoloration a.{}ÈJq+
or lrâces ôf overhealing.

Control
Voltage
Check the ôperatinq voltaqe and lhe control
voltage with vollmeler.
4q 1.", lô;ÈlÈ ol+6ld I, {18,4 4lq J.J i J/.leqll

{+i}Ê71 +;,-4941 " 21


Maintenance and lnspection È+. drJ

5.2 Periodical lnspection


Periodical inspection is generally made once every 3 years ?71 êa-o ,IÉ7lg E4elql qr+ E}!-_,lrl, .JÈJ4,ss 3Èd Ès4
though it depends on the operating condition of the circuit dl"iÊqEi. E+
breaker. dlilqÉ€- 'l to\l,IEI 4e s,û[q oN/oFFEq +41!-- ËC +9q1
The operating mechanisms should be oiled and lubricated +#= uo*o. ++al+ ü.qq
in specific parts or every 10 yea.s or after 5,000 make- s. 5 zi_ A7l ÈêÀÏôJ+ Cêi7lÉ 44ts114.
break operations.Table 5'2 shows items and intervals of
the periodical inspection.

+ TêIre 5-2 The Lbb ard InENal of *rè Psiodical hspecton / .S 5-2 4?l d^|*+r+ A^IÀ}6J
lnspection
Description
lnterval a4 14^iÈJ
ù4
Items Remark âJ+ tsl a
1. Clean the insulated surface with a r d$Ë"1+ è€4q EEql fl= Èzllï â?lÉ
dry cloth to remove dust and E|É ires +ôt
moisture. 'IIôt Bq4.
2. Check the exterior for damaqe 2. el+ q+ q+€ dÀÏôl.dÀ19.

General
3 Check for loose bolts and nuts in rl 3 4E 4l?ulâ !r9 "l el+ql o;: ÈEL+ LiE
,ll
the operaling mechanism and the 3 years .,"191=4 3",1
Check 4 7I :èiilTlzl dAilLl+
external pafis.
ôJ

4. Check stop r ng and stop retainer 4 j* BhoP rins)4 1* ?]'rlqq FbP


lor damage. retainer)elèàr 4*Ë 4"Jil!4.

5 Check the connection bel\,leen s El"l'J!l,E"ll tsl î+ àrrlÉ Tl,JiI-]4


Lerminâls and conduct5.

1. Operate a few lines rnanually and 1. 41714. +É4!e q il?rlg 5zl!.ç- .lât
electically and check each part for 2,000 q+É +116l.'1 E"J 4 ÎËÉ"1 q".8I211
proper Functlon. operations E.i'"1=! d'Jil'-l4 ,[ 2.m)Ë]
E
or l0 ,lgrr?Ï 3ul.a. F 1éll
Operation 2. Check ON/OtF indicator and
zl 2 oN/oFi 1 .l ,lLï H^],
operations ,l d,Jil''t4.
Test counter lor Proper flrnctron.
of short ^l
,d ;lÈ^l
10q
3. Check lhe compressed length of circuit
3 d+ÿq .EËel ++ 71471 Y+ A. Bq ]r
contact press sp. accordlng to cürrents Àl€ *êl çl=l qr.ôJ*L]4
appendix A afd B.

N,4eâsure insulation resistance


bet!1/een phases ând between
t0OO V r.re-EgerÉ *ù +rll^lllq êg ?lÈJ
pole-earth wilh 1000 V megger, + +c;14 sm 4gÈ 3lôJfrq
r,,!'1 01..1È.
il the measured value is less than ê q 9,1 ilqr+.
500 M8 check the cause. e
lnsulatiôn 3.d
3 years "Ï
Resistance 2. Check insulalion resismnce
4
between * 2 5,D V neggerÉ rî4§lË +el !È ;(liJg
controlcircuit and earth 500 V +calq 2 r.4!2
"16lÉ +cÈ {.JErl"l gs
megger.lf the measlrred valuc is
less thân 2t4Q . check th-ô causc

Wirhstand .l
Tesl the breaker with power .id"J r. += A. B.l Erl€ d"Jse dr€+r+ 'ï.1"J
years ,u 3È
Voltage withstand valtage test accordrn.q 3 ÀlÉ+ à,+Ll4
Test to appendix A and B.

1. Lubricate each part of operating


rnechanism
r +41 4 +el4l +i€ el.lq,
10 years Dl loE, +e
Lubrication 2. Clean disconnection unil wlth a or 5,000 z. qqË EiTÉ
"Ie {!s ,lliôl q"}.rln 4
"l 5,000q
dry cloth and a srnall arno!nt of e %!9 s,dt _f.i4.Èq !E q+ +4.Àl
operations "?
grease lconductive greaser lithium (EÈ^,1 tr4.€rease):
soap based grease). lifi ium $ap- bastrt gleasc)

1. Check the contact erôsion. dd "fE 4r;-É +.Jàl1lÀls


(ln closed condition, Vlshould be 1l (i}Ê?l7t iôJS tÉllqJÀl \4 stem-l \\4-iire
replâced il half ofthe wh te mark rs
s.üloll
Vacuum
visible.)
5,000 martTl 1,2êE .!rôlÈ r4ldl+ çlLl4) "ll
lnterrupter operations É'.IÀl
2. Wilh the circu I opened, check 2. ilÉ717} 4-ï€ âÉIôllÀl vacur.nn cl:ed<erÉ
vacuum degree. ôl€-ô}q TI+r= d46ȧÀls

?? " vâcurm Cntrril Br.âker lnrl(rnon Manlal


5.3 Contact Erosion Limit 53 âd "Is +Àl
Since the contacts are contained inside the interrupter, {ê"1 A*,éù gq 4*à}4 +ilslq ]ài7} Eâà}il ôd4oJ, i}
".r'.ll
Ê71.11 --Ee (i+71 qÉ 4 t1l ÉB.lÀl âEJgl
thêy remain cleân and require no maintenance, However, "lE7l "J,J + 1.1âq
during high current interrupters there may be a minimum +. à.l] îÈ ,|s.},!l= 3 rnrnôJqr+ d+ ,[s CEÉ +J8]AÈ, +
amount of erosion from the contact surfaces. Maximum C F.J^IZ +Erl"rlÀ] iIÈ71 l{ 4l+,JÈel 7|b Ëal +ë9 â4 lr}e
permitted erosion is 3 mm. To determine contact erosion, (mâd<)-É ÈdC-s.
'J+ €ÀI 'Irq ü :+
r ,rlàl7l Eg U ++:ll
.+qEI
close the breaker and observe the vacuum interrupter É,JÈË
"l4lil+
moving stem from the rear of the breaker. If the WHITE
MARK on each stem is visible, the erosion has not reached
maximum value thus indicating satisfactory contact surface
of the interrupter. lf only the half of the white mark or less
is visible, the vacuum interrupter must be replaced.

r) F1g. 5-l Ch€cklng üIe Coxact Er6lon / tre 5-l 1A "lgel qôr

3rlmr

r
ClEckirBdr @E s!§qî
d3"le9 q.J

5.4 Iroubleshooting Guide I s.r +al .ta ,I.l=

+ Table 5-3 / .É 5-3

Siîptcrn / Ë"J Callse / +,ls! Adbn / 3il


À,4otor swilch off sEl 1lôl- üIa +€ çtl] Check the Cable of Motor Line FEI al.lË Èt q"J

Breaker win not CIHARGE


No control power
^llôt
11$"1 tt+ Breaker in Disconneclion PosiUon j1lÈ7171 discomecrion 917.1

âE?dôl ilil4 9.xl *9.


Motor will not run Replâce the l\lotor gEl ;ril

Sprinq charqed .{'Bôl i}rl§J Check the Spring Cha.ge lndicator è=?d _.JEll E^l7l dë

Clos:ng spring not


FôJ^u?q ilzlstil g€_ Charge Closlng Spring +'J 4r?€- itil^l?
charged

Breaker closed ilÉ?l: +Eqfl+ Check the 0PEN/CLOSE lndicator ?l4l É^l7l d?
Breaker r,rrn rrr CI-ôSÊ
i}çÿl7l FôJq,l ô**- ,+È7171gÈle 9t]7] djsconrec! test E=
Breaker is not rn Set lnlo the Disconnect, Test or
proper p05ition +"J Connect Positlon connecijorôl rlEJTl el il,(l'J
No electricâlclose Veaify Conlrol Power Available rrlôl1t{ s+J. =
d7l4 FErlÈ7} Êl+
signal Check Close Solenoid ËôJ âdlrrolÉ +oJ

Breaker open :lÊ?l: E !lî+ check rhe 0PEN/cLosE lndicaror


Breâker !\,r[ rct OPEN
;IÈ?14 7fl+El,l *Ê No elecLrical oper] Verify Co trol l'ower Available 4lqdg q.J.
rrl14 E+14rn7l Ét* Check the 0pen Solênoid +.J È4lk"lÉ q"J
signal

rl+rl*rl +lJ3B4 " 23


Maintenance and lnspection Bî. dd

5.5 Lubrication 5.5 +fr

+ Frg 5-2 lxb,ricatim Poi.,ts / :a4 5.2 ++ 7\à

Lubrication of the operating mechanism is necessary only É3+ 4ilqËrl ?+- "ï 10.J, ++ s oooil"l oN/ol,}-5n+ +.ll
every 10 years or every 5,000 operating cycles. g.s*qEl.
ln general, the circuit breaker requires only moderate 9ÉJ4-ee i}Ê?l= +?1411 t4!e rilq +i€. g§E 6lq, Bôl
lubrication at regular intervals and all excess must be i+4 5l9l€, trl-! ,lÊÈ d-ol_ HrlÀJ r+èrtl â7iL) ts,i7I +4151=
removed with a clean cloth to prevent any accumulation of ,tÊ "+I.I ilLlr+.
dust or dirt. Avoid any lubricant on insulation or other ++^lÈ.ê11 +9tri a71.1ôJ ++li rl6f,!lÀlg.
electrical parts. +4"l= ++]ts ++ +"ll +:+4eg?8 ++É Éa-er tlal?ll àfj1
Moving pans should then be moved slightly to let the 2lç!71= +çd!e q sl ç;zlafd^I9.
grease penetrate and become properly distributed. nl-851ôl,li- rq.= shel albaria No.zÉ +d!]L]4.
Now operate the breaker Several times manually. +ftirl+ B +9: rg s-2"ll +4'llflâq+
Our recommended grease lor lubrication is Shell Albania
No.2.
The points to be lubricated inside of mechanism housing
are shown in Fig, 5-2,

24 " Vêclum Crclit Breaker lnltruction tlaarâl


Appendix È,É-
I-r

Appendix A, Basic Specilicâtion of HAF vCB Series ++ À lrAF d*.iltPl tlçeE 7|È À16*

Conucl Cirorit lltlsgrd


Stârdâd
Prwer Frequency
Voùage
Conpressea Ugû cf
Tlpe V!,]ÉEtard Votàge \1Trpe Vl Cap (md Coitad SP.
Ê4§1.?- lrld"J
^l#4 *++4 4dàJ(kvilnrin)
&V/1rrin)
ô*+a el{nrn)

HAFlù41/2/4-4 ESB, IEC 20 2 HVS01214 6r1 6-1i

HAF 1051t2/4-4 tEc 20 2 HVSo12014 6t1 6'11

HAFr056:4 rËc 20 7 HVS10007 111:'l 5-9

HAF1151/2/4-4 IEC 20 2 HVSl0005 11il

HAF116-4 IEC 2û 2 HV510007 11!1 5-9

HAF1162/4-3 ISB- IEC 20 2 HVS',]0007 6t'l 8-12

HAF1t66-3 rEc ZA 2 HVSl0007 6i1

HAFI t 87-3 2A 2 HVS10027 '11al 5-9


EsB. IEC

HAFloTU 4/1 ANSI HVSlû027 8.5al 5-9

HAF1172/6/1-3 tEc 2A 2 HVS]0027 8.5{ 5-9


l

P,4F1541/2/4-4 IEC 2E 2 HVS12014 ôi1 6-11

HAFllsl/214-4 IFC 2B 2 HV510005 1'l='l

HAF]7s6-4 IEC 2 HVS10007 1111 5-9

HAF It6? / 4/6/1 -3 rEc 2A 2 HVS10027 1li1 6-l1

BAF1t72t6/1-3 rtc 28 2 HVS10027 8i] 5-S

HAF2:4UU4-4 tEc 2 HVs',r0005 11!1 5-ç

H4F2052.4 G81S84 42/49 ? HVS10006 1l1,1 5-9

HAF2067 4 GBr984 42/48 2 HV510029 I 1:1

HAF2351 /21 4-4 tEc HVS10005 1'l11 5-S

HAF2356-4 lEc 36 2 HV510007 1l!1 5-g

HAF2362|4 3 ESB, IEC 36 HVS10027 11.1

HAF2366r'7 3 rËc 36 1.5/? HVS10027 I1+l 5-S

HAF6111t2-4 tEc 50 2 HVS2ô005 16-i1 6-11

HAF6121/2-4 Itc 50 2 HVS2DOO5 16r] 6-T1

aAF 6131 t2/ 4.4 rEc 50 ? HVS20005 1611 6-1',]

HAF6141/2/4.4 tEc 50 2 HVS20005 16i'l 6-11

HAF6146:4 tEc 50 2 HV52D008 l6a1 6-1',r

AËi+71 1;ÈB^l " 25


Ap,peaÜrr

Âppêüdr B. Bâglc§peeifiÉàtion of trlvl'ï§B§eri§: +q'B lüF.4ffittr.t §Pd§ r]ë.+tr

'&@.§qrü
kveSreegjsÿ iooti{jrclied !&ü1d
&ædaad U6@it 'Vl 6àp,û@) reà.&dr$l
Lyee §lrü'i6d.vokt8â \T TÿPê
§lE§IÉ tiâ§l- tà4881'Mr
Si!+4Èà*lf](Âr/ksj'-,
'{k!fi1n*i:

HVFI@llan IEü m 2 HV§Oi 6Èr 6-11


'16
r'lvFi-d§1/Êl{ LEo, s HVs'§]?1r§ 6[1 6-1i

HVFJ 0ô?r4/? Ee.l 4§ a HVWl,530 rq$ 5;g

r-rvF.?04vari4 tEe, 8g 2 H 50121§ 6É1 §-11

HVF;2â42 !881.§84 '42t46 È H\ri§or J6 &1 §-11

I+VF?06?11 Etl 2â 2 uvsû1t3û 1ô{ :5"â

Hvr2?53/4i 6ET98' .43t18 r{v§o1582 101.7 À-§


.

HvfaôBal{/7
IEü fr 2 H!601,5.3t 10$
t'{v.Ê21ê,

?s 2 l{vsol55û ''lor1 5!,9


wt2fia4n IE.C.

lÊB i36 ? r-{!Eï,llæ6 10eî ç-§


l{rr,i§&/41,

r,ryÊÂ011p EE s0 à H!§q2406 1Aa1

HVFm41/?1416. tL6l ,0 z. H\§û242§ 1ÊÈ1 6-11

ÀN§ .40 1,5 Hvso,364§ ià0È1 F-g


flvr7e§2114/

6 "' uàourn ê,rcutt à'eâçr trisüctii,ll ùi,niiitl


ù
Maintenance Recording Hî drd

Maintenance Recording Sheet s+ d4s.

Date I r*2 5rÎFlAnae .)1 5e-t\,ir)" Serlte Agent EngirÈêr Coct/Rire Rp,rda,4(s SBnature
.JiÏ +4 qq +?-lil 7l^l { E +rù/+t Éli?
^lE

* Pleâse gét thÈ signâure *,qulaÉ Èed +, 7l+ /iBg ÈJE^l Us.Ullg
Every tme thls recording sheet §tblld be filêd for maintenairce bfthê keâker zl7l9 +4. {q 9 A/SÉ 9lè11^l È 7l+À13 È.ùàl4lÀle.

Menrc (41g)

A+*IÊ?l +i'à94 " 27


-I
fitr
m

i.J

o
e,

8.
,g
o
q,

â
ô

www.hyundai-elec,com

HYUNDAI ELECTRO ETECTRIC SYSTEMS

H.ad omce l Jeonhâ{ong, Dong{u, Ulsan, Koreâ È^l â,J,j4"1 t+ t."-tt LE,t
Têl 82-52-202-a101-a Fâx. 82-52-202-810ô â4l',rEl-(r52)2æ-8452-? F.A,X.O5A202-8450

Seoul 140-2, Gye-dong, Jongno-gu, Seoul, Korea À5:1]-(05i,)tlo2-8,a7a FA&.1üaZ)2ü2-A4a0


(Sâbe A lrârkêüng) Tel.82-2-746-7510. ?589 F - a2-2-146-1648 +tgg: ]!L.(05a2o2-8lol-8 F,{Xto5A2a)2 8lm
Orlando 3452 Lake Lynda orive, Suits 170. Orlârdo, Floridâ 32817, '{t*^l+è 4â5È^l tË+ 1l* r4o'2 €![M)
U,S,A. llt;,ly'gg: TEL.OA746-7491-c tAXOA746-747s
Tel. 14§7 -249-73æ Fex.1 407-21 549rû qE
A/S ,üE]
"Jd8qÀl +7 771 lo4-2P1'l
2od F,oor. Th6 Triângle, 5-17 Hammersmilh Grovê London,
'IEr {æa888-4483. 881-OZC6 FAX.(032)881-m86
London
W6 OLG, UK +{Àl^} i++qÀl F i.]l+ 1056-2H71 *ôl&'D 4?
Tal. 4+2047414501 Fex. 44.20-8741-5620 TFr.(rEl)463 d382 FÀ\ (Osù4æ,€a43
6th Fl., YuÉkucho Denki Bldg.l-71, Yureku-cho, Chiyoda{u, +T^lÀ) *++'4Àl ).1+ *d+ 4r5-12È1 ÈqlBD€$ 3+
Iokyo 100-0006, Jâpan S]ET
TEL.(0ri2)368, FAX(ma336-ÙOS7
rel at3-3212-2c76, 321u715s Fax. 81-3-3211-2093 L't=+l'l t,J. B42S 23. r'I/l +94!ÈB'D 6+
4 +,1
Cairo Apârtment No. 503, 5th Fl., Bldg. No. 7 Block 2, gth Division, ^I 'ill-o53)74rj-0555-6 FÀ{(O59746-O557
Elnâsr Roâd, New Maadi, Câiro, Egypt
T6l.2q'2-5204140-9 Fax-20-2-75+7528 +{ zl ,r} âcÈE
'È-
+11^l c+5 al{4 drI{*iE",D3+
(051)286 43il FA.X (orrlsc-4r.,o
Sofia 1271, Solia 41, Rojeo Blvd. Bulgariâ
Tel. 35$2-938-1068, 936-0300 Fâx. 359-2-936{742
qdal4 4I9qÀl 5+ â;t 5cr.zÈ! È4,It,lBD 3Ë
]E- (O4a62?-4rCO F,{X O4a625 4r7s
Yangzhong Lianzhong Av€nue. Xinbâ Scientillc ând Technologic Zons,
Yângzhong City, Jiàngsu 21U1 2. Chtn,a
Tel. 8&5'l 1-842{666, 0500 Fax. 86-511-842{668, 0231
E-001

Chapter E. INSTRUCTION MANUAL


FOR
HCA Vacuum Contactor T type.

.@D
1
6 Éujldbr . !.rw rùuP
Globel Leader

HCA Series

7l*,=ëB^r

W#HtrA

HEAVY INDUSTRIES CO.,LTD,


safety Practices EË! â-d

Safety Practices
This instruction manual applies only to the HCA Series E +lË ëB^]ts HCA rlalô tsrt1 ?oJ {]8ë+7tE E{1 ",{ .Jtoll
vacuum contactor regarding installation ând È-.J âÊ6J LIEÉ 7tâôfHêLtEt
+!é61âl êil6}71LI 9rl . E+Àl0l|: ilBêoJ oJB trl;t1 9l
maintenânce Procedures. À11ËÊ

lnstalling and maintaininB these products improperly mây tl{l êè01 ç8JE + lle-sÉ sétÉ[i.]I, 4c, ArE, ?rl . E+Ë
=e BIèJLILI.
Él lrl t01l üq,Àl 0l îlAêE^1É ëËôl ?]-r 0l6llôt^l7l
result in serious personal iniury, proBerty damaSe, or even
dêath. Therefore this instruction manual must be reâd and èit Et 9r1 . E+È +rt4rlLt EE rl^l€ E?Êl BJôlë^|g,
^PJol
understood at any step in unpacking, assembly, operation. 0l +18ëE,qE HCA]'t4x roJ T]ÉE+7lo1tpJ 4€Eq.
Ê!q1
and maintenânce of contactors-
èiiLl 3Àl . .E+otl ÉÈE ëit7t s+ s-g5lol o;xl oJes-e rllËql
Only qualifled persons who are familiar with installinB and rIô|1 q "êe êHË -JçÈ ôtrlE a+q= É^te Eelôt^l7l BËqEt
maintaining contactors are permitted to work on
contactors. and this instruction manualshould tle
accessible to those persons at âny time.

lf further information is required, please contact Hyundâi


Heavy lndustries Co., Ltd.

signal words
signal words used in this instruction manual are divided by
7lË ëg
E +lË ëE.qqtÀl= u8 +et^tÈrË ilÈ ëE0 trt4 t9ler, %:rr,
o
DANGER, WARNING and CAUTIoN depending on the situation,
r+glJe +Eôtii 9.]êLlci.

Iorruern A st ol

lndicates an imminently hazardous point which, if ignored, rirr-q rrq *[.q 7ro rror E! = ].9 ols olèl r lElrll
^rbrÉ] ^lEll-=
will result in death or serious injury. q, 7l8 ?lëË èrâoJLlEl
This is the most danSerous point.

Iwmulllo, A ë3
lndicates a potentially hâzardous point which, if iBnored, E{6lrl g.ets, ,EÈ È3Ë gÊ + 1,l: ar[r1"J 9]A àrEllE LtEt
^El
could result in death or serious injury, HLIEI.

Icnurton A 'T'
^ôl --l

lndicates a potentiâlly hazardous point which, if iSnored,


may result in minor or moderate injury.
This signal also warns operators not to work unsafely.
trlÉtÀt
LtE+tsLlEt
ÈeE, .f'"J âÈl]Ll ,Àâ0t g.s.$t ç-Èts â4qe] 9le àEll=
sEI 0l E-ÀE E9]lel dç-oll tll-d ,lloJLltrL o
safety Practices During hstallation âi(+t+, ë+)^lel +g^tèr
. Excessive heavyweight could câuse he ' r.|Ë olE.(l qële Ee! ê?-riJ 4n 9l rllË êà
serious injury,0r damage. To avoid thls 0 e4ELq. 0E uJrlôl7t 9ôlol rllË 05^l
situation, please donl transport a contactor E0 grid SEllÊ olEiôlIL ?lEg ôHÀie.
on a liftingfacilily in the raised position. . êxlol ?^'1 EE .dgE itttrlTl +16ll "JEE
. Do not work on contactors unlessthe primary ilË7lll rèl-Lf ê+el 4LëË EIE^I open
circuits âre disc0nnected by the visible breaker. Àtrtèt,\l-q eÈ9 9ë01 11êq4
. when connectin8 bus-bars, tighten bolts . É^t boltÈ Eêilê torquee 4êôtrll
according to our standards. §lÂlE ç]dol oJêUEl
Icnurnr . contactors should be ugfitly rnounted ôn â A+"1 p rlLËe +EÈfr EEEI E0 3Edl7 +l+
. ^ol+l,tLS
horlzontal plane. ô|q râ^lrlë^lq
. ra .!4 B^l E^l^1 ,l^ Erl q
' Do not inslallthe contactors in âreas with ^lç-
high temperat!re, hiSh h!mldlty, dust, tr E"J Sëot ê^làt^l Et.§Àlq
corrûsive 0rvibrâtinB c0nditi0ns. EFll, Eul ËËol gë6J + ?lâqE[
. concrete dustor any other dust should not . Erl, 7f+. ëg 5E ol=5é "! Hl=
3lrtr
o
be inside of the productwhen ir instâlled. =3a1tr
EoL Ei{tË.q Lli+o
odEq è^
It can cause f re or misoperation. ôtc^]ç. El^tl, E+t EèJo g8È + oJêLlEt

2 " vacùLrn côntâcror .sÎüfiicn Manual


safety Practlces DurlnS operation ëq^tsl +9^lB

. oJe +Ae
' Do not touch the primary circuit and EEçln '-r llûl§le Erl+oll=
the control circuit. Ë+"_1^l ol'S^lq
Ionnorn [+i ": âE0ll s.lEi i1lË ê-80 LI oJE rfnel 9l--J0l
ÔJêLIEI,

. oJÉÈ.rl BJ9.l ë4;lÉ


' Do not insôrt & drawout the contactor open.tlrJF
'{v!imuuii in thê closed condition.
 àa ?lËoJ= ëô|q +d^te,
ë4"J rl? "t rlË +âet ?È01 oJêqr_]

. Do not leave contactors in an . .E+ 0lcl9 9.lilol^l {lËË gil6t^l


intermediate position. ^l-È,
Dl+l^19
Always plâce the contactôr in the test . GAel ,j+ oJÈ?^lol^.1 untock
ëETe
Icruroru or connection position- [+et rïë='g sJ^lôf^l !ld^|q
' Do not leave contactors of G cradle in àEJ=ô !-e qô è4Éi "l
unlock codition. ^jËo
4Ë ê-§q 9=*0t glâLl+ ^l:ù

safety Practices During Maintenance erl . g+^l +E^lÊf

. Do notwork on contactors unless the . ç^l H+ +83 .J.Jg +ëÉ ilBTlÉ


primary circuits are disconnected üE^iopen .{l7lr +Ele0ll d+7i #çl^l

Àwl,hNtNc
by the visible breaker.
. Replace the vacuum interrupter when
r[âa frtq êlElq g^t ?Je a= qEë +
!gË 6Jôlê^le, âà9 9É0t qtêlËt
the wipe is below 0.5 mm. . Wlp€7I 0.5ol6rf çlE {]EBe= ril nû
+d^|9. rltË êâol g8g + t{ÊLlEl

. Failure to maintenance the equipment . È*E erl e+ lEe è4Ë "; rIÉ9
could result in serlous injuryand product ê39 g/8ôlr1r,+ ^ta AfEË
ë3 +àtE ÈaÀloJ
failure and cân prevent successful B:.113 +
..]êqE[
f unctioning 0f c0nnecæd apparatus. . iÀl q+ qgE "J à+ üq^l oJ.Je]
^llol
. Do not work on contêctors with pôwer ElÉ open rlTE eE= ËÈlrÉ
beingsupplied to the control circuit. g0l ^ltrJ7l=
al=É=719 rllold?= ilEôila+
' Do not leave maintenance t00l around ô1"§Àlç,
the contactor. ' +xl e+ 4rE+ æ7t E+71 +9011 Hol
oJrl gç+ 6Ër.19.
' Do not work on closed contactors.
. Be sure that bolts are tightened . ts 7 7 q olàe-e gëo1fs.q
accordin8 to oür standards after ^fn7l Ëâe{ +Hêee
âill-l
95J
Icruron replacement and check the tightness [+et ^ttrle
-qÂul^1
^l:r
ëoJB + uE ë?0li
periodically. Ei^toil^1E EoJÊ ÀtÀ ^^tâ
tjêL]r].
.lt is impôrtânt to replace theVacuum . cJrl botÈ ë71ê-se së illâ rorouee
lnterruDterfor the faculty of the Âol.!^lg
contactor. bol ËÉe qd 'Jëq B?]ol Eq+
so should consult us to guarantee . Tlê BJrrll itilE 118ë+71 éSll êrl1É1
proper replacement. Bâ= +!Ë 'J^loll Ee.l+ zlg 6ië^|q
. Note ênd check tlre relationship beh/veen . ç5 cableÊ IüC3"J A+ Së
eôch wire ênd its associated auxiliary 9tit7f^gilE
tsëçtxt odç+ +gôl'u^lq
switch terminal. a, bdEel E39e gëÈ +
OJêLIEI ^l^É0ll ^lr7t

l*e+:ra;*9,! " 3
Contents +it

safety Practices 2 z

1. General . 5 1. ÈEJ^lë 5
1.1 Specificâtion 11 ,(lg
1.2 Operating Time & current r,2 4ul al+ ? 5q
1.3 .rl8 âA
^171
1.3 Application Condition
1.4 ordering Syltem 1.4 +P
^1111
1.5 Applicâtion Considerations 1.5 aEè=7 el dâ-{l +el^l.J
1.6 Fuse Sel€ction 1.6 +^ U8

2. ReæivinÿHandlinÿStôrdge and lnstàllation 2. E+/+Ei/ES È ëil


2.1 Receiving 21 9+
2.2 Handling
2.3 Storage
2.4lnstallation 24 ë^ 1È
2.5 tnspection Before operation 25 ?E t ÉàÀi-J

3. Structure and Explanation of Operation 10 3. +4Jl ét#4 .


t0
3.1 Structure el +ô
3.2 Explanation of opemtion
3.3 Structure ofthê vacuum lnterrupter e ? ÀtnÉlÉ :rr(
,) / OlÉ,.1 fx El -f 4r}+l
3.4 Structure of Cradle Type and lnterlock
3.5 lnsertin8 & Withdrawing 3.5 9ËB sJg
3.6 Control Circuit Dlagrams 3.6 11101 êEE

4. lnspection and Mâintenance 11 4 ëÀlel *rl§+ 11

4.1 Visual lnspection


4-2 Periodic lnspection a.2 é) É,J
4.3 Chec(ing VâCJLm and tne Contacr E'osion L mit 43 l8gqel !=àEIcl llE eloJ
4.4 qeplacerents for l\.4ain componefts 44 +Ê +.Ë Énl
4.5 TroUbleshooting 45 EllE 611ËE

4 " vacwmcontâctrr hstrucllôn Mânual


General gt!^t-d

HCA-Series Vacuum Contactors are suitable for switching HCA ,r,lel^ Ërl1loJ ël€ë+7tÈ r"J EE7l, Eg7l, EEl.q Eel
and controlling 3phase motors with squirrel cage of slip 4nll7l?tr^l lf8ELlrl.
ring rotor. capacitor and transformer which are dried and E IllËE ç+=ct 71414, fl714 +g '! ÊIl H+-È TELltl
molded type.
These are designed and manufactured for the high frequent
switching, especially taken account of safety and quality
assu rances.

1.1 Spêcification 1.1 ÀlôJ

Râted voltaSe Ratêd Current BIL lnte operating cycle


I turllgryqvryo4vryl Category
âa +n+ qlds 7li4l EtE

1.2 RV 200 A 400 A 20 kv 60 kv 4.3 kA 150 [,rVA) AC3 1 200 operalion gil/houri,r ar)

1.2 Operating Time & Current '1.2 âBl ËF "J Eâ Àl?l

Control voltage closingcurent (A) Holding current (A) Tripping Current (A) ClosingTlme (ms) TrippingTime (ms)

4101ëoJ f,II dF FE EÈ 117]


^I?}
DC 110 V Z5 10
Conlinuously DC 220 V 1,6 0.7
ÊnerQized ÿpe 80 40
AC 110 V
â^1 q^Él
1.5 0.6
AC 220 V 10 o5
DC 110 V Zl 5.0

Lâched type !q 22qv 1.1 4.0


120 25
êÀt qIËl AC 1r0 V 1.9 3.5

AC 120 V 1.2 3.0

'1.3 Application condition 1.3 ll3 4z


1) Ambiênt temperature: -5"C-40t 1) +9 €E: -5'c-4ôt
2) Re{ativê humidity: below 85% â àr4 êE: 85% olôf
3) Altitude: below 1000 m from sea-level 3lrl€ 1E: 1000 m 0làl
Please côntâct us lor the special applications
oJE E nCf UBË+7|E olâir-l Et= â40{^l rta-ixl g
Ë+011E
.Jr.Ul Ëel ulËLlE[

Do not insurll contactors in the high ng Efê,Eàl +Aêil+ !8, E êÀt ÿl


Iuunon temperature, high humid, dusty. corrosive
and vibrating condition.
A+tt E6J Së0ll
ë|111.
ë^ àF 0 fl!!q
E4l E#ol gdg + *êrlE[

l]=â+ï flAêB^1" 5
General gHJ^t=-J

1.4 Orderin8 Systêm 1.4 +E iltlt

HCA
2 3
I 4
L!
56
IIEtr 7
[trTf[trL 8

Digr ltem Specrfication c0de


3.3 kV 3
l Raled Volage / ê4 Ig ô6 kv 6
200 A 2
2 Rated Currenl / ê4 §ç 400 A 4

Conlinuou§y Energzed / ë^l q^l C


3 Energlzing Type / qrl BJ^l
Lalched / +Il Grl I

Flxed withorl fuse / Fuse nëB


olts.l
Fxed wiln Fuse / Fuse Fæl n6ë
4 Frame Sliuclure / ?l+ B^l
Draw-!ü wlhoul Fuse I Fuse ol+at "JÉÈ!
Draw lul wlh Fuse / Fuse +Et E=È D

DC 110 V
oc 224 \,/ ?
5 Conlrol Source / rllol EoJ
AC 11ô V 3
AC 220 V 4
Class E E

CJâls F2 F
6 Crdle Type / Cradle ËEll
Lnerlalion Shude. / Eg §ruher G
Class G
tÿlelêl Shlier 1,4

1 Fuse Râling / Frse llB Fuse Ralings


r10 v T
CTD (Condensor irip Device)
ZûV B
oJElE.
Elecirical lnlerlod( / d7l4 L
tuse Meltna lMicalor / +^ tÊ ëÉ71 [,1

Po§tion Swilch / giL àê 49^ P

I Accessories / 948 3.3 kV / 200 VA

1 §Er 416 kV / 200 VA 2


66 kV / 200 VA 3
PT (Polenlial Translomer)
3.3 kV / 200 VA 4
2S 416 kV / 200 VA 5
66 kV / æ0 VA 6

+ DiSit 7 iS d-êscribed âccordinS to ôur cataloSue * +5 CèE ÉJ.{f cala ogueE ËÀôld^19
"HCA-series Vâcuum Contâctor'

'1.5 Appllcation Considerations 1.5 rlëë+71e1 dé^l +el^iël


verify that the voltage and curreflt is within the 1) rl8Ë+7lE àlÈ doJ, E+EEI tsotot "JqEi.
1)
specified ratinSs. â U:iëë71É ^lge
+Eolà
^lt 1

# fl01 É+= SEEI


^lgôtflZLt ^lEl
2) The vacuum interrupter should be replaced after âgol|: T]A'JEË adôtqoi ËlL.{El.
'1,000,000 operations. lf the contactor is not protected
by fuses, the vacuum interrupter should be replaced
if thèy have interrupted fault currents at or neâr their
maximum interruptinË ratinS.

6 " vacuu.rr côntâct$ hstru€t on Manuâ


1.6 Fuse Sêlection 1.6 +À Câ
Fuse selection tâble (4^lE +4 dë-g)
& Motor (kw 30 Transfomer (kVAl 3z Côndênsêr (kVAR)
L0ad
3.3 kV 6.6 kV 3.3 Fÿ 6.6 l{,/ 3.3 kv I
6.6 kV
Fuse maker SIBA SIBA LG SIBA LG SIBA SIBA LG SIBA

6.3 5
10 10 15 10 25

16
20 7s-160 s0 20 100 50 30 30 60 50

25

30(31.5) 80 30 160 t5 50 50 ' 100 '100

40 100 50 200 100 75 75 150 150

50 90 90-200 1éO '185-400 125 75 25) 150 100 100 2m 200

63 100 2æ 160 315 125 - 25A


80 125 250 200 150 400 200 150 '150 3oO 400
Fuse rated

current (A)
r00 r60 220-4m 330 450-80ô 25û 2@ 500 400 M 300 4m 600
125 2oo 400 315 250 500

160 275 45ù630 550 900-1250 400 3oo 800 500 300 4û0I 650 800
200 315 710-8@ 650 1500 s00 400 1000 750 600 75A 1000

250 4æi 830 63ô 1250 500 r000


315 5(I T m0 750 1500 600 1200

355 600 1200 9m 1800 700 - r+oo

2x1 J 50û '1000 lsæ 160ô 6m - 1200

2x2û 650 1300 1000 2000 750 1500

2x250 750 15oO 1250 2sît) 1000 2000

'Thistable is mâde hy câtâlogues ôffuse mâkêrs. . E UëE= 4 +5 câtalosue9 iU8êqlLj Ëâtt ?iolEÈ cl ll.{llÜ
Please contact fuse makers for the further details of applicâtion L-üte 4 +À calalogueE d^ EtüLlr].
data. . sBA,ttE -"8+ +ôt8 tësts 7tE{A0l 15a0LLUo a ilEâ+7[

'5tBA's rnotdf selection applies t0 tl]e 3-phase motor witn starting 2ql ÉEo! ülq rzoÉqq,
time 15 seconds and staftin8 irequency2 times per hour.
^lrJ-q ^€
SlBAIloll,r.lE 6.6 kV condengof +àig ë9 l2 kV +a= ,{le*tr+
slBA recommend to choose fuse from the nê)d highervoltâge àtn o.tâLtrt
range in the condefsor load.

r=a+,l +Ëëgrl " 7


Receiving / Handling / storage and lnstallatlon E+ / +lE / !r+! g ëil

HCA Sëries vacuum contâctors are subjected to complete HCA Ëq r.J d8ë471= êiâ0À1 ÊlÂE +. EâEl7lE
fâctory production tests and inspection belore bêing ÀlE I^tàt.
AÀLE
packed. They are shipped in pâckages designed to provide 0l rJEe Êâ ^lÈJ6tflÊqÊt
"l E- â0ll trlêç14 tj5= s8çlq SBJEqEI
maximum protection to the equipment during shipment
and storâ8e.

Excessive weiSht can cause serious t= ott^t L+E[E oJËt âzltl * 4tE
inj[ry or dâmage. êâol 9atÊLlEt. ^t!
Icnuron To âvoid this situâtion, D0 NOT tran§lort
a contactor on a lifting facility in the
A+e olE dJrl6lT
tso 34!
9làu^1E eEj âilB rlË
âEllÈ OlEôlÀl Eld^lç.
0l-qÀl

râised position.

2.1 Recelvlng 2.1 0J+

when contactors are delivered, receivers should examine À13êà7tE i1Ê E+rJ 4ii eüEâ r]Ë9 Etê, êâ "! êqE
the contents for any siSns of dâmage such as broken, +Ë Etol 11ÈIl A,\1610{ +èÀ|q
damage. missing or loose components, 018 6fxlË gEàlHg + l TlrfÊ gtsolLf xl^|e E+ôtÀl7l
^1,
ll damage or loss is detected, notify the nearest HHI office ulÈlLl+
or representatives. xllË Îl+e +=, êâôld^Lq
lnspection after unpacking I 84 +È^lEtÊ
1) Check the type rating and quantities with the a xTB ^t€Ft
trlêolL} +al Àlx( q+
specification sheet. 3) +4ë0lq qlHËel trtêolq +el q+
2) Check contâctors for âny damage or missing materials.
3) Check all the accessories and spares suppliêd,

2.2 Handling 2.2 4A


Contactors must be hândled with care to avoid damage. uëë+7l0ll E+ê "l êâ01 "Jrl "dçE +e]ôll^1 +lÈ61ê.119'
Ensure that vacuum contactors do notsuffer impact or +tÉ Eâ, rllËqâ,lE 7l6Fl 0IèlÀIç" xllËoll 7fôll{.1â4Ê
Ll ?ldo ë4Ê! ê3Ë gë + ÎlêLlE[ =ë01
other injurious physical strèss during handlinS. Damage
could cause serious damage to both persons and property

2.3 Storate 2.3 sB


lf contactors must be stored for a period prior to use, they CEË+71 .J+ + êutË ëÀlçlll ?ltsElB, EIlTf U4 Ê717f 4-q
should be stored only in dry, dust-free and wellventilated q æl ëq=
=41
open âq1e !{È6ld^le,
rooms, with contactors in the open cohdition.

concrete dust or any other dust gxl. 7[+. êË Esl 0IËë


=qèl!. 4+o1l ËolTtrl
! ,,]E
should not be inside of the product Eot Er{lËel sEq
Icnuroru when it installed. [+et
It caTt câuse fire ormisoperation. Efiu, #t EÈ01 ,JëàJ + 9êq.+.

8 " vacuun contactor tnsùuct on Manuâl


2.4 lnstallation 2.4 ëil Àlg
1) Confirm the type and rating, make sure no damage 1) IÈë+71Ë ulllBJoll ëilôf7l É ë+7lel rÿpê. é4 'J êâq+
and clean contactors with dry cloths, before instâlling É 4qt]ôln, EiEëèitE Erl ot q4a +EË E+oHqEL
contactors into the switchBear. 2) +BEitTl 1 mrn oltfl7l ç]çC ëilElolol ôIq. ëil ÈÉ il+:
2) Mount contactors on a level floor referring to "HCA Vâcuum Contacloil CatalogueE êl4ElaJqEl
Suidelines for mouhting dimensions in our catalogue 3) Eê +?E "+ols+ Eë "l ërl 4tgÊ Ëtq, 4g^l 4lË
'll*01
"HCA Series Vacuum Contactor". 0ll +al6J ë0t ,J4rt ôJE= +Eô1.8,\19,
3) Clean the connecting surface with dry cloths, and then
connect main-circuit buses and earth terminals.
Be careful not to shock enclosures ênd contactors.

' D0 notwork on contactors unless the ' ?I] qE !38 ifcJipl îà11 ôJÉJg
ëil01t
primary circuit are disconnected by the ë+!l lllËE ÜE-dl open
xlË7lLf ralEt
visiblê breakêr. Àlz +t.rle.
. When connecting hus-bârs, tighten bqlts ,Jète] 9tE0t o;Èr,l+
Icnurnrl by the our standard. À="1 .
-Qrl boll: s-êiïê lorqueÈ +èElZl âq
. Contactors are mounting on the fleol flêq4,
+d11,?. é$lle]
horizontal plane tightly. ' E ÂEe +Eôlr gBÉl Eoll ÉtrJo=lxl ê+
ôlq nS,rlrl +d1lç.

2.5 hspection Before operation 2.5 Êë fl ëÉ^tg


1) Conlirm whether contactors are installed properly. , ë,!01 ê+ô$l gel6lr, èilÀl =-E .l LlETl rïq{È Âq*EÂl
lfnot, install contactors each a8ain according to clause 2.4. q?l6lc,\le,
2) Operate contactors a few times manually to ensure 2) +EoE 44ErlÊ Êiq Eâel 0là3+et ôN/oFF xlÀlàel
that contactors closes and opens smoothly. FlBqflôru^E
Then, operâte contactors electriCâlly in the test E7tïee E4el 01.3ç+E qfla+Jrtç"
position, and confirm that the ON/OFF indicator works 3)
^t-d.?1it01t^1
dEë+71 +go|
^lg
#7t .JoI *ÊrtE +oJôld^le.
properly,
3) Confirm that no tools and materials are left near the
contactor.

al.ë+, 4tërË^i " 9


sÛucture and Explanation of operation +4ei qEflel

3. 1 Structure 3.1 7â
The Fig. 3-1 i5 the section-drawing ôf the mechânism part Frg. 3-1P HCA Ëq aoJ LEë4719 Lll++âE gqôqtrl
^lÈ15
in the HCA Series Vacuum Côntactor.

rl Flg. 3-1 §ruclure / .fB 3-1 +:S

@
@
O Closing .Coi (F"J êêillo q)
@ Moving Core (àÈ is- J)
@ @ N/ain Shâfl (+-)
@ Pressing Plale (78É)
@ @ @ Tripping gpring (Fg 4gË)
@
O Præsino Sprins (ôJ+E 4-sè:)
r.u)
@ O Vacuum lnlerrupler (flBgg
@ lnsulalion Frame (àEsêlLg)
@
g Plsher (Hæ ëê ?Hi)
6 @ ALxiliary Swilch EÀ êé)
O Rear Cover (EEÉ)

3.2 Explanation of Operation


.) D Erl 9lr I

1) Closing
. when the Closing Coilo is energized, r FEE igo 0l xtçtçlE EE +#!@E 37lll Er, E^loli
the l\4oving coreo move§ toward the closing coil EÈt 6ol oJ+gqEL
^EÈ
EàJ ?E+OË êêqe Ëlq à+ T€Ë@01 "JqE
and compresses the Opening SprinSO.
At the same time, the PressinS PlateG), \4rhich is fixed IE"JEO sl 7lE+Ë oJol
Ea1 FoJ âtEl17f gqEt,
^eeoq
on the Main shaft@. pushes the Pressing sprinS@, r ê^lqIH (7ldl4 latchins) ë+71011^1= ÂlË 6lE0ll éilB latch

so the Movable Stem of the Vacuum lnterrupter 7F7t Fg sË ,\lEoll EE IE+JE FôJ ?lil01l^1 7l,4l4eË
O is moved up to make the condition.
CLOSED N8^IA FOJE +IEIq+
r For latched type (mechanical latchin9, the latch device 0t qi 4loi 5Ë*e dEë+71 Lu+011^1 ilEELlLL
holds the I\,loving cole of the contactor closed against
the closing coil after the contactor is energized (closed)
and the control source is removed-

10 " vacuum contrctor hsnucuon Manual


2) opening
. For continuously energized types, if the closing coil is ! âllqrËl È+71ts Fg igos.l rllol tëË *oE rl§}7l 4xli
de-energizêd by the oFF signal and the opening qn "Jâqq fltrJ ÈèJ3 6 0l +7518,{ EzJËq+
spring is released to the OPEN condition. r +ÀtqÀÉl ë+71= EËt ^EË ioJooll tlËË u7l6lE =^l
ëE +EE
then the opening of contâctor is completed, @Ê ré6tn 1,1.i tâtch 7l?t ôl1rTEln, 5^l0ll "J+ qrE E"J
r For latched type, if the trip coil is ênergized by OFF I4Eà€)ol ell çlol 4e âq7l Er-]ll.
signal or the trip button is pushed, the hook roller of ëë lollE EèJ 81Ë0lLl Eç-e ëÀtE0l flE eElÀl EÉ71+
the latch dêvice is released and the moving core (cTD)oll Eèt] EÈ01 TlSElLlrt.
moves to OPEN condition by the openin8 sprin8.

3.3 Structure ol the vacuum lnterrupter 3.3 t!-!gri +E


a Fig. 3-2 Structure ol ihè Vacuum lntenupter / rÈ 3-2 tiëlgE ?:É

Tne vacuum lnterrupt.êr has, the contact UEE+, E alB"JEÈ Fis. 3-?n+ ËoL
Stemo, the Contacts0, the Bellows@ Ed §6t+ srem@nl8E0)ol "J2,
and the ceramic lnsulator@. À1rl+É Éê61= ëe9ê@q 1l+q
The mntact is desisned t0 Suarârtee 1 ë93@e +€E ùl glêqq.
million operations and to restr8ln thê +|-d ëëÀ[ëg 100üel âç ,15
transient recovery vqltage under 1 A o ôl4l ôfq, 1 A 01"=19 .t3 =t
ÀI].JEFE rlE6J
choppinB current. asrg ,JëË qrl./'taq+.
The low pressure in theVacuum alSBJq Lü+: r0 "lmbarlolàfel ?Il8E
lnterrupter is maintained for over @ olq, eË +B= 7fÀln TêLlcl.
30,€êrs of service, so the Vacuum ôiÂloJ Etlxiel oJlE Elq 7 ôf7l +l.ll
lfi terrupter is msintenanceJree. -JrD .r1 al=a.r'l?l (HVT-l)e
Eut if necessary, it lscheck€d bythe
=ëç.1=
HYUNDAI VACUUM TESIER (HW.1),

ar*Éâ7 àëàs " 1l


structure and Explanation of Operation +Âet EtEËal

3.4 structure of cradle Type and lnterlock L,r olàài .lx .Ll
=4xlil
1) Structure of crâdle tYPe 1) .JâC +4
The Fig. 3-3 is the cradle type of HCA Series vacuum ?!ËËÊ Fig. 3-3tr1 'Jol ?ëçlo'l 9]êLIEI
Contactor.

+ Flg. 3-3 Slructure ol cradle lype / :IÈ 3-3 flÈë +ô

o o @,@)

€!e!HcÀ

o o

@
o

O ON/OFF lndicator (7llnll xlÀl7D @ r/anuâl closing Hole (+5 FoJ?


@ Côunter (Il+71) O Fuse (+^)
OTrip Button (EzJ blE) @ Fuse N4eltin8 lndicator (+4 sLJ )
'Jà7
@ Positlon switch (9il
,éê aqil)
@ Control Plug (z,trÉ Ë4r)
O Position lnterlock (811.! ?lEl9 @ FUse Barrier (+4 ullaol)

O oN/oFF lndicator O 7i1tr11 rlll7l


ON means Closed condition, OFF means 0pen condition ON3 +'J, OFF= EÈ 3Eü= LIEIÉLItrI.
€) counter @ Aë)t
The Counter shows how many times the contactor oN/oFF 7ll4lq+= Erl Ll+ llË ët + èà elôG
^lEoll
has operâted since it was made. eJ 1009 ëEe 7[4] Élol âir Eq+
The Counter may read 100 when you receive the
contactor. because it was tested in our factory or in ê^lêollEJ 91= zË EËE ËlEgLIEt,
other place after manufacturing. @ ilEÉ Ëar
O Trip Button pinol 1l:
2171ie-.1 ,JtrE ËzlrE EÉ|1 xïojIlËo| ëëElr E-^
only the latched types have the Trip Button which is x]x{^l ,]Éç]l lrl

used in emergencies. 6 qrld Eq+


(4 Control PluS tl3ë+717t rlë. EoJ +liloll^J'J oN/oFF çl.E= ôlÊ 7l7il1
The control source is supplied through the Control lack
ô1dë x]+rorr lrI

€) Position lnterlock
The Position lnterlock makes the contactor operate ê^lÊ0"J .Jeq, +E-F.JdlEI= ë"J6q +E-e-e +oJ.tl'JLlct
only in the test ând service position and prevents the +rl e+^lo E,lE!Èü .rlEELlEl.
contactor from closing mechanically between TEST
and CONNECTION position.
6) lvânual closing Hole
Only latched types have a L.4anualClosing Hole which
is used to close the contactor manually.

12'" vacuum co.lactor hstruction Manual


f) Fuse ô+I
Fuses prevent the ma8niflcation of the short-circuit current. 9q^Iz= E7l +lsl SIlgLlEL
@. Fuse Melting lndicator @ +5 ttrJ à=7t
The Fuse lVelting Detector can show electrically +4e.1 g"JqF=È ïl2l^1s.e ëÈ61È ëtlBLlEL
whether the Fuse was blown or not. O 91xl ÈÈ
€) Position switch oJëoJÀl ^9lil
TlEiëë717f .Jg tl! 9l^l0ll glEIlË !71!
The Position Switch indicates electrically where the ^lÉ.
o-P gü+ts àrilgLl+
contâctor is in the TEST or CONNECTION position.

2) lnterlock

No. lnle ock CoMilion / ?+ â2J l erlcck Action / ?+ âil ltE BJE lnterlock Release / ?+ *il ôllrl Remàk/ Hlr

lf the contâctor is closed.


The Interlock Pin,
it cânnot insert and
attached in frame inside,
withdraw contactor
prevent§ the contaator from Open the coniactor Standard
in the TEST or
insef ting mechanically. Irl,i:, e ôE
coNNECT|ON position ^
r 17 {+^loJ
Ei{oll 488 éJEt=8ol
5.JAEllôi.{ I:Ed+7t: 7El4ee oJoJË
ë+9li|e E'Jol oJE "J3

The Interlock Pin prevent the


closjnB mechanically.
standard
Eillo r,ll8E ôJEl=Eio|
Eë^PJ
The contactor cannot be È9lir7f otu ë+ hrove the contactor to TEST
7lr1l.le4 E46t^ ?J3
closed duringthe process or coNNECIION pôsitiôn,
2 of insêrting ând withdrawing and then close the contactor
o.lÉE EâolE TlÈië=7 Ilad+71É OFF"J +
17 |
The Al'ulliary Switch cuts off "!

E+gite oËrta + FoJ
the controlsource
Option
(electrical interlock)

Eiioll LH8ÉJ EEiqëo1 ë?Àl7t


ôJÊ
otLJ 3+ Ttrl4e.e EÀ6t^t

at*ë471 à;ÈÈ^l " 13


structure and Explanation of operation +!sgl rlEËÈl

3.5 hserting & withdrawing


1) How to iîsert thê contaclor in the E, F2 cradle 1) E & F2 Cradle ?lË9 UE

r tnserting + Fig. 3-4 / rÉ 3-4 r oJ?.]

Set the wheels oi the contactor exactly 4lg9]0ll IIBë+71= ëqo=ta Êa1ë01 +êÀ|9
on the Buide rail ofthe cradle. 0tq o.Jt= 9ôuÀ1 üqrt ç80t.301 Eà7
At this time, more than two person I EolEeld^9. =
have to lift up the breaker for full I ëê71Ë +Ege "Jol -JqÈ nlerlock everol
safety. tfthe contâctor is pushed to the Ê'JE "JEl= E0 lntedock plale0ll ëÈl tr-10 ë
TEST positjon. the lnterlock Pin i
prevents the draw-in atthis position.
I 0l qJ inlerlock leve€ ælgelr E?l oJol
'Jol
Hôld üp the tnterlock Lever (Éi8. 3'4) nlerlock plale0ll gq tsI É'1 U+à47lE Èq
ând push the Contactor to the +lÀl0ll^l É4rl7l lockELltrl
CONNÊCT|ON pos(ion. lf the contactor =qE
ol ^lE
+ilolll= flollÊ€ Eê6|q .J.B.r L[+
is in tfre correct position, put thê EleÉ .{lÉJ"J + ?.]âLltl.
lnterlock pin puts into thê holê 0n the E+ îlie d.Jôi, ?àll,{l= interlock leverÉ
guide plate and the Femâle Contact +^ EolEeln gol EâL,E+,
will be inserted fully into the terminal. Interlock Ugo lsolatlng conlêcuf (lal 3-4)
-eiÈElE
rerr nalû ê=ô èoJÇ,r] ortri nlê'ock lever=
ide.krck plaleE ë4 9l; holeoll
=99
oJEl+ E0l ++ Er.lr+.
=0l7fE^l

. Do not insen and withdraw the contactor . 9rË?lP frçol ëê71= ooen^lz+ È!ôlq
in the closed condi on.
ê4pl .$r .l
[wlnrtr'io
' Hold up the lnterlock Lever during the
inserting and withdrawing Ia n
6iêÀ19.
^llË
' cJ=oJl intedock leverÉ
+.3s1 +lë0
=ûl=Ji:l
91êL Lf
9Ê.J

ê4È 9l rlÉ èAo ,Jè!È + .JêLlrl:


^tr

r Withdrawing r oJë
When a contactor is withdrawn, the contactor cannot
be operated because oI the interlock. CradleeB+Ël ë+rlË E4ôlül 3J qE EgàE|]ûll,q
ln OPEN condition, hold up the lnterlock Lever interlock leverE Er ëê7lE gTlE ëLlEl.
(Fig. 3-4) and pull out a conkctor to the TEST position

+ Fis. H / fË 3-5

o o

l=
I
I

,I
n-- æ
o ero o^o
o-o lp--! 3l ovo
IEST / CONNECTION / +]+
^l-d

14 " vâcuurn Contrctor rnstrlcuon Manlal


r How to insert the contactor in the M cradle. r M Cradle oJËoJ üts
The interlock, which is screw operation type, Screw IEBJ^19-e^1, 1lë, ëâ ,-r giloilÀts inlerlockol
will be conducted automatically in each Test and rtteÊ ol+olëqEi.
Servlce position separately,

+ Flg. 3-6 N4anual Lock Handle / lÈ 3-6 + Fig. 3-7 Reck-in Handb / rzJ 3-7

E Stoper
oB
illi,o
a"

hsefting Rack-in Handle

O Before inserting contactor (ù êB


. Make sure that contactor is open. . È1toJ9l0l rl-+71É Ëqôlxt Eq*ol +dÀ19. olq oJEË +lôu^l
. Set the Manual Lock Handle to the UNLOCK position. H-'e.r F B olâol !Së+7'= EolBal!"19.
@ lnserting to the TEST position ' [ranual lock àEli7l unlock ?iloll oJ:rl q"JËlë.\19"
. Put a contactor into the switchgear and push it slowly
@ r,tÉ qile 0E
untii it stops, This is the test position. ' U3Ë+717t cradleel EÈA-5E0ll +9ë ë"J01 "JE 4rlxl
"Jol g.qd^le.
. Set the l,4anual Lock Handle to the LoCK position,
Pleâse refer to Fig. 3-6. ' lranual lock handleg "JËee Èo1L[oi lock à4E üsêrlç'
G) lnserting to the CONNECTION position @ 'J'J
. hsert the Rack Handle to the head of the Fixing Screw. . usËë71: ë, É+ 9rildl^i rlEei 7+ r:301
. Turn it clockwise direction. ol+olêLl+ ^
lf the contactôr is inserted fully, the Fixing Screw ' Rack-in handle= §'Jôq 9=+ 8J"J (^lllg-d)e-e E4E Eo!01
cannot be rotated and the Position sticker indicates the E+0 gËçlE Râckin handl€ El 0lë Alqxl ?JêL El
^lqçlq
6)Eê
@ coNNECI|ON POSTT|ON.
, When you pull out the Rack-in Handle at this position,
' Rack-in handleË êoJô|G 3+ B-d {ü^iXlgd)eB E4Ë
the Stopper is pushed out to prevent the unexpected Eè:01 ll4qn 9lÀloll,(ts oJËÔl ÊÉslE Rack-in a.{EP
moving o{ the Fixing screw. rl olà E:lEç$l ^FJ
oJêLlrl.

Do not touÇh the primary circuit and EEEi ";: +Éle .,1 À11o1èlÈ .JrlPoll:

E@ the controlcircuit.
[+r * E+àlrl old^le.
âuol 96û rlLËg èëolLl oJB Àtu17f

. Do not leave contactors in an . ë+ olesl 9liclÀlÈ IllËË ÈJil6ill


intermediate posit on. ^lÈ
Df.!1C.
GËq 'J+ Eë9hloil^' lÿatural Lock ôJEE
Imuroru
Alwavs plâce the coftactor in the test or
connection positi0n. À+rt .
u.lock dEle rlE€ tü; ôlÀl ElC,r.lg
' D0 not leave contactors 0f cradle in ÀllËo E-e qôf^l è?-tEJ
^ll ":
G
unlock coditlon. =ÈfEo
rll+ âàsl 9É01 *êLlrt

a€ë+7 nËëg]i " 15


structure and Explanation of operation 7âq +EiflÉl

3.6 Control Circuit Diagrams 3.6 I{IOI Ê]EE

+ Conlinuous energÈed / DC conlrol FOR EIXED TYPE

Mô CONTROL pLuG

+ Continuous energized / AC oonlrol FOR FIXED TYPE

1ô 16 coNrRoL PLU6

+ Lalched / DC contrd
t
I

2 3r0 12 14

+ Latched / AC control

CONTROL PLI]G

+ Accessories

II
II

20 21 ceNmoLPLuG
TEÿ CON NECNON
PT 1SEl PO5m0N swrc! FU6E MELTll,lC INDICATOR

V,: Closing Switch cc: closing coil xi Relaÿ CTD: CondensorTrip Device
R: Resistor 7:TNR TC: Trip Coil AUX, SW: AuXiIiary Switch

16 " vacuLrm contàctoT nstrucricfi Manuêl


lnspection and Maintenance zJ^tet +rl.H+

IMâintenânce shâll be carried out to preserve trouble-free ë+7lsl H+E gEAtÊ B^lôfq, geJ 7lA E9! EiltÀlrl7l 9-"11 É9'
operation and achieve the longest posslblê working life of Ëqrt
c0ntactors. ËEll HCA roJ àgë+7l: aaEl ?À g 3rl . E+71 z!trJËl
^tulÀ
HCA Series Vacuum Contactors are châracterized by their xl ç.lqflgq eÈ +EE 7EE aol E-êgLlEt
simple and robust construction and they have a long life 7t4t41.! Eut 7F= ZËË 3rlë+.É "JeÈ 6tq. tB'JEE +Ê7t
expectancy. Their operating mechanisms have a low ,J1l 9)1Ën$l H+)l71el DJÊ flÊlEL
maintenance requirement, and the interrupters are çrlE+: ë+7lE +91È'à, Fl*+o EËl] 4ër{ iptT} 9]âLlEl
maintenance-free durin8 their workinB life.
The maintenance is determined by envirûnmental
influences, switching frequency, and so on.

. Failure t0 mêintain the equlpment coL.rld . ëEE ?Il H+ 1Ee ê4:"J lln * rlËe]
result in serious injury and product failure êêiË ,JêôPlLl +ôtet ëâ§oJ
and cân prèvent successful functioning =3
ôf connected apparatus. e+ 1gÊ É â+ EJE t ôJtrJE
' P^t
.Do not work on.contactors with power r.lqae iFJTlÉ ZE= ê=alr=
open,l.lT[n
being supplied to the control circuit. é+71!l 8101a1Ë= ifËôfE-,È ôfd^g
.Ël0f
. Do not leave maintenance tools around . 3rl H+ 4tg+ €+7 | ë+7 I +?o
'Jo I
ôJrt ?l.E= êtà^Lq
Icruroru the contactor.
. Do not work on closed contactors. À="t . ll+ É?JP E rl Ëo I open 8tli.J
L ,lB 9ôJ
' Be sure that bolts âre tightened bythe Éf + B6ld^ 9, doe *eÏül.rl Éëê
ôl
our standard aftet replacement and ooenol E 8+ ê7El 7l+çoll
check the tightness periodicâlly. , q qé ?È01 g]êLlEL =+7t
. trJ^f ë7l4le_e EÈ itlê torquee
=Ets
EE ËÈ8 Ël^fl 'J8st BUol Eq+.

4.1 Vi§ual hspection (every 1-6 months) 4.1 "Jà É2à (0ll 1-61113)
The purpose of a visual inspection has to be done gàr Éêe T|tsEI rl+ ôt: ?iol ââr-lcl.
whenever you can. []ê.ë+7I?t Bl5àqoJ EEtÊ àtzLt, àEoit 0ld0l ârlÉ qE
C+àl €+,(tÈ Eèlolq ëÉ lil=
BJe,.l7l BtËLlÊ[

rl Table 4-1 /g 4-1

No. llenê / ÉZ1lâ Procedure o, ChecKng / ë2J HJg

Check 'eacl sare ol ON/OTr rs ide^rled a:c'J'aeÿ


1 0N / otF lndrcalor
Fgll oN. EËÀl oFFE s^ /l 8qÉ^ qoJ 6JLlr.l.

Ll^Il Check ll lhe Closing Coil is overhealed or birrned.


2 Abnormal smell / 4ÊolLl
I âèf4oJ 430 L,+ É^ll7l rltsrl q?] ÈjL r+.

Check the crac( hreak, and discoloration.


3 Damage / êê
üË. trfêolLl ts401 1l=^l +oJ È,rL Lf.

dêëÂ_rt +lÈêgrl " 17


lnspection and Maintenance z^tgl ErlH+

4.2 Periodic hspection

+ Table 4-2 Periodic lnspeation / g 4-2 ârlêë


object Items
Standard
interyal
check procedure Èâ +71 ëë ëii
. Clean and dry when the dust or , oJ=+lEtio1t,\ ,il*EJ Ejeee
lnsulatlon 3 years 3Lt
Main humldity is extreme Ei1 4 +Ësl È^Lel ê7t rlllà
body . lf a compônent is badly 6F . elg qê q+ +oJÈ
overall 6 years
damaged, replace it. . strikerel Eëq+ q.J-d (+a tü^
Srkedt +a tE+0 rl
check ifthe ltrike pin of fuse is out . StrikerE 389 +4
-8)
FUse
3 years
luse is
'
' lf it is b1own, each iusefor 3 phases -sçE -À ,trll'J
lrÊrupled ^ll7lqE
should be replâced atthe sêfirê t re.
. +4 3Ê A=7 E
FUSe FUSC . Check ifthe fuse melting E- q+E êse Eq =ât
3Ll -4oJ"J
N4elt ng 3 years ind cator operates smoothly, 8ÊlêÈ71 . lndc€lorÉ ÈèJE q mrcro swltch

Indicator . f noi put the greâse on the rnoving pafis. !É e+ 4"J"J


Fuse Nolder 3 Years . Check and tiShten bolts , rtë01 !l6J 840 L.l
EÉ f,êg 0igq§ IPJB
3 years, . Check ifthe contact eroslon is expired sLt ![ ' !3Éë Éëo llEÉfal oldeE
contact per Conlacl
wear 5000
. I it s exp red, eacir vlof 3 phases
vÿear
5000q ûtEE
'J+ ùllèl
VACUUTN
q/cles should be replaced at the same time EÀI^I . {BcJq il81^l 3d P+E irrlÉ
interrupter
. Check vacuum by u§ng lhe . at=?:^frlÉ 0t8ôlq r13ç +?È
Pressure l=.É . tlèigE inlrl 3à e+E Ti{ll-.J
Vacuum Testet

TlShtness 1 years ' check and lglrten bolts. ]E ' clPlE 4ni0l !l6N ilS 0lEqY +Jg
=Eel
Sprin8 3 years . Check for scrâtches or rust. . çr+ elo Ll EÈ, iË gd q+ qL.J-"J
oFen ând
close . lfthe coil discolored, replace it. E4t) + , cotre É^{. i1ê ol$ 3'oJâl
mechânism Closing . Check and tighten bolts. =E9
3 yeârs 3Ll . ÉoJ 85-110%0ll^1 ë3 EEt
Coil . one should be operated
q+ qOJÉJ
ôt 85-110% of raing.

. check for scratches or rust. . Ërolc sE +4lq+ E?B


. PutSrease on the moving parts. I
. botË i€;:Eg EfÉ++loll êcJ
-g ôJel grease +g=d
Hook
years ' The gap between the roller ând B]IOIÈ 3Ll
Roller
3
the operatin8 plate should be .+E F?S E6l] brlolËr} ÉE+E!-J
Latch 0.2-0.5 mm. f not, replacê the Lêlch rfo el 140 0.2^05 mm 0 rll7f
mechanism I atch Device.
)l+
. licoil is discolored, replace it. . coilel E^L it= EEel ols
Trip Coil 3 years . one should be operated . 84 r{o{Ugel 75%ol8o1lÀ1=,oJÉ
ëâ
at 85-110% of ratins.

Auxiliâry Switch
' The resistance of contact of
3lr ' ëë gEJr 4*ol 200 mo o ôl

Swtch,
auxrliary swrtch should be below
4çlil. 4rl
3 years 200 mo. f noL clean the contacl
ClosinB .
. The conrection plug js compl€tely ^llolE Eè E9 5Àl Èfl-"J
Switch Wiring u.! 3Ll
. Cable ëC àEll goJÈ
inserted. ^+lrl
. Put Srcase on the movinB Parts- . lsolatng contactoll 436J 99
lsolating lsolaung
lnsertinS 3 Years . The female contact should be 3fi grease +"i-J
contact conlacl
nrechanisfil inserted above 10 mm. )l+ . ë+ 10 mm olàlt!^ qÔJ'J
'J0l7l
hiejld neclraf sn 3 yeârs ' check if it moves smoothly ++8^l 3LJ . ?té? €4'0 3g"Jrt qflg
I'lain
3 years ' Above 1000 N.4 o
betlveen line-
+ç1tr
'â471 +qet qlÀlrJ 8rJ ëE
conductor earth, electrodes, and I ne-earth 1000 lÿo olâoJ 7l
lnsulâtion ^1â01
resistancê . Above 2 Nlo between the . liolôlÉE tll^l7lÊl EÈÀ]Éo
contrôl rl ûlElÈ
3 yeârs 3Ll )j
aircu t control line and the eafth. 2lrc 01Ëg]

'13 " va.lum c.ntactôr nsirLrction Mânùâl


4.3 Checking vacuum and the ContaÇt Erosion Limit 4.3 ïlëig_H,el {!ëâtlle} ots qJ
'1) checl(ing the vacuum
The low pressure in the Vacuum lnterrupter is d8ë+71ts Tln-E î+-É ëEqqoll EËll ëËiol +rlElr
maintained for over 30 years of service. ?reeE {}8EE grlrl lllp ËeElLlrt a.E,JEE t!ËE7l
That means the Vacuum lnterrupter is maintrenance-free. pachen9 ëE LIal g4lil (1x10" mbâr)o1.1Ë g01xl.=. ë+,
But if necessary, it is checked by the HYUNDAI xlË * /llEEiqol rl6IE + 9lo- 871ëëÀl +3 ofl 3Ll
VACUUM TESTER (HW-1), +7le tEë^t7l= flEçË qoJàlo{ +,r.lE â01
^t8ôlq
2) checking the côrtact erosion alBU lple Eèr +§1tr trülr-to dgE ?]rlôq merer ?
since the contacb are contained inside the interrupter. lampoll 9ôll +ll oJ+ëEl0ll ElÈl ËË01 7lËCfL]EI.
they remain clean and requirê no maintenance. (!â+ âdzf ql8e gçE {1. z,$71 ëg^lÉ âr àlrïq)
However, during high current interrupting, there may
be a minimum amount of erosion from the contact .\ rlrEHa ôr n!ô Érol

surfaces. To check the erosion of the interrupter !E0l taëE û0 .Jol ,[l1^Èt4t +xtE]e.Ë c+7t gÊ.ôFl
contacts and carry out the following operations. Brlol Ee t+7i ëË q ëësEoll^J !fs7l
^lË7l0ll
r Close the contactor.
^ÈJsl
r opefl the Rear cover. EiBel Ê,q0 û14 ëë EleÉÊ âëÈt^dÀle_
! Measure the distance between the Dish Washer r É+71Ë EÈ ÀlaLlE[
and the Pressing Plate. r +EÉË ËqtsqEI
with new interrupters fiis distance is âbout r Dish wâshergl ,I"JEJ 14 (--wipe)Ê âëËq+
^lôlE
1.0-2.0 mm. dÉE Aç ol lJ4P 1,0-e0 mmoJLlEt
lf it is reduced to 0.5mm, the thrèe interrupters oJof wipe7l0,5 mm 0lô[7[ E]E ElEll 3àE UË'JEÉ
must be replaced. q+ ElLlEl lFlo 4-1 âEl
"i1l6lG0l
checking the contact erosion is important to Èë otEÉtË4= É+71 êâ 3rl0 !li+ âg'sLl+
evaluâte the efficiency of the interrupters
(Refer to the FiB. 4-'t).

t Fig. 4-l Checking tlle contact erosion / traJ 4-1 {IA'Jtsg 0l9 qu

Pressing Plate

1.ô-2.0 mm 0mm

Dish Washer

. Replace
the vacuum interrupter . Wipezl 0.5 rnmolôl7l çlE alB 'és= iill
when the wipe is below 0.5 mm. aq +!119.
flmnurlo '[. = ëÉ ËfE7t 4çei ë+ Eft Ëâ o;l 1lË
Br,(rl olf
^.À rl
^^lô

l-Eà+rl +ËïëE/.1 " 19


tnspection and Maintenance ,J^Igt f,rl!Ê+

4.4 Replacements for Main Components 4.4 +A +ë . i{t


Remove the contactor from the enclosure to ensure that all !i1l 4EË ëôPl +lôlll1= +d T18ë4zlË ?]561fi enclosure
hi8h voltaSe sources are disconnected. YteÈ tlËLlcl n8ëoJ â?dlE ëEd4 ground.!Ë ÉolgLl4
talr ÀllË tE cover "i ëE l{âEË ËûluLlEl.
1) Replâcing the fuse 014 oteÉr1lsl éE Eë-$01 êàElrl êJEË +elôlq +d,r,19,
r Remove the fuse bafriers.
r Loosen the upper fixing b0l6o and Supportors@. 1) +À jrlll
r Loosen the lôwer fixin8 bolts. I +5 àz ËE ullzlolE rllzËLl+.
r Renew the fuses, r +^ ÉE]OE EË I +B 27ll^el d+ M8€)Ë ËûiÉqE[
=E
r +Â ttrJ ZÉ7171 11: â901l: += EÉ
Thè fuse must hêve the strikêr facinE towards U Ë719 suppottorË

the Front Cover. +^ EÉ aÊ7t7t fl! a9oltE ôI+ E=E tü6oc Ëûl.JLlql
I lf new fuses âre longer thân old ones, r =olllta
+À= üÏLlta !18Ê +rE 7lÊLl4
rear FUse holders move the'100 mm backward. +49 8ÉE q"Jaq ^=461f7ï EEÊ ËôI1l
0l qi üFol
lnsert new Tuses and tiShten the bolts. ô101 îd^le.

r Reverse the action in the previous step, I 41eÊ +Â71 z e?qE F"Jg +^ ÉEl :rët ËE= Ëol
i! + ?+-sE oJ 100 mm olE lfl illêBJLlEf.
r 991 â].1= q4oe +ÈëiÙLI

+ Frg 4-2 Redadng the Fuse / rÈ 4-2 += -ûill

o
Strike /
^Ezl0lf

-i
@

@
E o
o

o E o

0 Fusè Holder / +4 @ Upperfixing bolt / à+ EiE


O Supportor / =El @ Lower fi.xinB bolt / àl+
^lcEI =

20 " vàculrm contâctor tnstuctLon tianual


2) Replacing the closing coil 2) Fg i"Jel iill
The contâctor employs ê pair of magnet coil for each FoJ ?oJ3 zrlll]ÀE qE 1,1âL.1r[
contactor. ! rllË EE lEtr-J= ËolHl14 (Fig. 3-190)
r Remove the moving core (Fig. 3-1€)) I +EËt ëo]ËLlrt
. Remove the rear cover I 5g igq flë wreÉ è8Ê!4.
r Cut off the leads oI the closing coil after marking the r L-wrenchË .^.laoôlq Fg ?tsg rlÀlâlÈ ËE€)E Ë01ËLlÉL
leads and noting the relationship between each lead r êàfE ?oJ@É iflËL]+ olq âè{rolE 301@c} rlrlrl0
. Loosen the boltsO, fixing the closing coil, 1l0l01l Ëên+Ë@ 'i rear phteOË + 7lg ÀÉa}^l7l BlgLlct.
r Remove the defected coils toward the front cover. r ?ôJ ?}l@91 sap plate@, sus plateo: 7lê +ËÊ r4tr
r After reassembling, check the operation of the 7EI gFEoll üE-Àl sus plalerl i{ërlol o ô101 gLlEt,
contâctor electrically, . ^EÈIq,
4lgÊ êJLlEl olq
Bl1.§ 110 Voil^1ts EÈ Eë, 220 V0^1: 4ÈEë
r Connect the leads of the closing coil Ë ÉB Èl+ ioJE Ëeq de qe ?oJel çü4 ënl EÈ5lqoi aqEl
r Reverse the action in the previous step. | 9lE êÀ1= qêee r[ÀË + ô& 0l§ 8+Ë qoJ:-JLlEl
^lë4r€€
+ Fig. 4-3 / reJ 4-3

@@@ oô @ o @@@
c) coil support/ rlrlEll
€) closinE coil / FgioJ
o Rear Plate / !àâs
@ Coil Core / ?oJ?ûi
Htr O Bolt / j]ë 5E
6) Gâp plate / ,JÂëE
@ ÿâinless / âÊEJ
@ Rubber Plate I n+Ei

3) Replacing the Auxiliary Switch 3)r-ô 49lil ;1i11


r Release the pusher@ . r EÀ âÊ lEtrJ@ Ë ËolgLlEt,
r Release the suppono and remove the wires from r ÈÂ 491;l xlxl4o el r8 ËE o ËolHLlEI.
the auxiliary switch. r d01t =
Ë rÂJIEr â?olt= ËE@) el Eë cabteË ËqE
r lI the closing switch needs replacementO, ^+]it€)
+ Èi1l8Jq+
loosen the bolt@ ând wires. r Ea 7l Ë*9J ,J9ollE Eq Ma(§ el EE cableË
. lf need to replace the auxiliary switch@, release ^î-lilO
Éolu + EË ,r{l"JLl+
the bolt6 and cable, ! 9E ê^18 ^+l^lE
qêlE rrt4È +, +E +"J6.!=€) Ê 0i36tq
r Reverse the action in the previous step ând check the +80È rlÉôlq 0H ç58 EloJgLlEl.
operation of the switch manually usin8 the closing handle@. . trlrleE ,rtÉôlq 0.à î?= èf]"Juq_
r check the operâtior of the switch electrically,

+ Ftg-4-4 l1A 4-4

o @
o 6 o Auxiliary swtch support / E.ô 4?il rlricll
F @ Auxiliary switch / ts^
^gil
o clûsin8 switch / Àllot8 4+l^l
+- CLOSING @ N44 Bolt / M4 tE
@ N44 Bolt / W EE
6) 6) Pusher / ç^Éè IEE
o t\ts Bolt / M5 EE
€) closinS Hândle / +€FoJ Ë!=
+t+
a
@ o@
. Note and check the relationship '.VÀ cable lllEâ^l glil7l HAEIII
Iceuroru between each wire and its
associated Auxiliary Switch terminal
A*nt otEe^+lilel
ab
4C)| âl^lr lo

ëësl -qâQc rl^EJ0ll .{trrl 'JdC + êqq

rEë47t +lÈëgl " 21


tnspection and Maintenance E^lst +rlE+

4) ReplacinB the vacuum interrupter 4) tl8 ËE9 Èill


r Release tlre pressing plate. r 7-EE i1ëËE([,16 470Ë Esl Ts-JE àtli1lËL]trl.
. Release the lnsulation rod from the vacuum r c8gri 7lE+ àtEt0Ï Eëc g=EË Égee@E
Eal^laLlq.
=q
lnterrupter, and separate the flexible connëctoI@ . Ilexibte connector@
r Loosen the upper flxinE bolts from the upper connectorG) r àIElts9 upper =
connector@ BE lëE=EÉ Ëol EoI=JLIE+
r Replace thB new vacuum interrupter. r {ÈË TIBBJEO= upper conneÇtoroll E'zJêJLlrl.
t Reverse the âction in the previous step and check the r qêqË ÂÈÈl e t]*gtsel -dé (5-s.5 mm) g
stroke and wipe of the vacuum interrupter. wiæ {1.0-2,0 mm)E éë'âL]cl.

a Fg.4-d / rÈ 4-5

o
o @
O Vac.uum hterrupter / aLlgg
@ rn§ulation Rod / êtÊq
@ Upper Connector
M6 NUl @) Flexible Connector

WIPE

. Iis impoftântto replace the Vacuum 'l]tgeg.ùi= t*Eâ7i ésl gdÊ


hterrupter for the faculty of the contactor +se Br.lô{ eel + 6ld^lq.
Iuurnn 50 should consult u5 to guarantee proper À ^lÈ
replacement.

22' varur,m ronuctortnsrructoa Manuêl


4.5 TroubleEhooting 4.5 eSlE .1Èe

Do nol clûse / FôJçlrl gEEl


Do nol ooen / -qÈçl^l ?JEEf

Llt lncrease li€ vollage more thên 90% ol lhe raling.


o o Oontrol volta!€ is 1oo low / ëiÉâoJo Ll+
#ÉgÊ 849 90% qC f olàae. kg
'rs Decreasê the vofragë lôwer lhan 110% oi the râhng
o Control voltage tco high / E+-d'Joi Li+ ts8
#TloJB r10% olôie *â
o Delecttve control cirorit / -sÈd Check lhe ccnlfol ctcuil dlagrams- / êeçÉ Éë"J
^I0]è{eql

Check lhe helgtrl ol € rolLer. ll rleces,§ary


o mÊédêd lâch mechanÈrn / Lâtch meehanism gEzl adlusl the heishl ol a roller by releasinq the bdt
Rollerel tsolË qoJÉEr, +^lË Ëq rollerg ts01É
^ë.J
o Locise bolts / q^PI ËÉ Check the tightress ot bolls. / r.l^t7l rT+E 4q*:^l ëAÉ

Çheck lhe winng ând cleaf the contâct


Dejeclûe operalion oi the Cqnlrol SlwilÇh
o iî co,rlacl resslrnce is high. Replace li il necessary
zl0lE 49^lsl 951t
ë+^]ôJol EsE, Ed3 e'oJàln EëÊ ,|1*ôl êf

Rerôove lhe cauSe 0l lâult and rêplace the fu6es.


o Bbwn irse / +a7fEËE
AËE SOJE E4 + ,iIÉ
o Delechve resLslor / Reslslor ÉË q]eck lhe contimriv 01 the resislorl Resislor Ëè +. 4["J

Check lhe vacuum irienupler. ll necessary, replace


!B rtê
I.
o lnlerrupter wilhoul vâÇuum 1 t18uJe.9
ca'JE qoJ + 'J9^ ülÈ
Check lhÇ rêctilier. ll necessâry, repace il.
o Puncluæd rectilier / rlêE
êË7171
ë+rl ÉroJ +. Es,\l iiiÉ
Tte conkol plug is nol conneÇled Connecl lhe conko plug
o o ,JEE ËeÈ71 EÈElxl ?Jt gEsJ
flEÉ
=alr=

195471 ssggri " 23


F-001

Chapter F. GIM-500 USER'S MÀI{UAL

11 MSUN
SAM
Electronics

2 lnstallation lnstruetions

Generator Proteetion Module


GPM 5OO

Dok. 2Z,1.s5996,BGe, Rêrisioû:-{208 §/qA)


Fêt fih diroumoftly{s rE§ênraranfigh.f!§ âl§orin the q*Eiltotpâtê{it §|anting or registrarion
ôf e utilltv modsl. DuDlication o, thi§ document and its utilisâtrlon in soms other }t/qy and
G dicfâsu." to Uiri parties are nÔtp. ermtted unlæ- eÔçres§ly auüloli§€d by u§" Sub-
Fot4o Émdi[catbrË dêrui]ng tt]etsdmlcal prog'6§É;

§AM Elêctiotti§§GmbH
D " 227i9 ttatünurg

Fhorisl + 'l!t F) 40 8û2§"8276


Fâx: + 49 (0) 40 8825'4100
E-mail: inlo @ sam-etêotronics'dê

nar-$!iiQ!-!Etnlr?Éla]ri
GPM 5OO
Llst ol conlents

List ol Contents

List of Contents .. .. _n
-
ListotFigures......
List ol Abbrsviations -Il

2 lnstallation 2-1

2.1 General Satety Notês . ,, z-l


)-a
2,2 ldentilicâtiôn of the Module§
2,1 Scope ot Delivery ......... 24
2.4 lnstallâtion ol the Modulês
2.4.1 lnstâllation in General .. ....,2-5
2.4.2 Mounting Position 2-6
2.4.3 f\4ounting on Top-h at Rait lncluding Establishing ol lhe Bus Conn6ctions 2-6
2.4.4 Minimum Distances ..... 2ô
2.4.5 Modulê Arrangement ... . .. -.. ...2-6
2.5 lnstallation ol thè BAT
2.5.1 Scope of Delivery 2-10
Preparing the Mounting cutout . . 2-11
2.5.2
2.5.3 lnstalling thô Sêal ... 2-11
2.5.4 lnsêrting thê BAT500 into the l\4ounting Cutout 2-12
2.5.5 lnserting the Memory Card 2-12
2.s.6 Activating the Battery .. .. ... 2-13
2.5.7 Removing the Protectivê Film . .. 2-13
2.5.8 Cleaning the Surlace 2-14

2.6 Wiring o, the Modules -. . 2-15


2-15
2.6.1 Description of the Terminals
Description ol the Connectors/Coding 2-16
2.6.2
2.6.2.1 NEG500 - Terminal Asslgnment
Terminal Assignmênt NEG502 and Combined Power Supply Modulê N Ec501/510
-
Bespectively 2-17
ZKG500 - Terminal Assignment .. 2-18
2.6.2_4 GOV500 - Terminal Assignment 2-19
2.6.2.5 OlO500 - Terminal Assignment 2-19
2.6.2.6 SLE500 - Terminal Assignment. . .... 2-20
TRV500 - Terminal assignment 2-21
2.6.2.5 DlF500 - Terminal Assignmenl 2-21
2.6.2.9 USS500 - Terminâl Assignment 2-22
2.ô.2.10 DCC5o0 - Terminal Assignment 2-22

2.7 Connection ol the BAT500 Operator Control ând Display Panel 2-23
EMCNotes.... 2-25
2.8

Oôk. ?71.1s59sa.4G2/ - (?005.03 / 02)


Kao o2-qbl\rz.lm / 25.02,05
GPM 5OO
Llst ol Flgurss

List of Figures
ffiâie-r#iirt6æffiwffiÈffi§#4q*!ffii.1j'#rî- !, iii,l§§ErldlsrstrrÉffiwltsisei{d;1iÈÉ'1g#iËt"}-Ëjïir{ê+trqç}-lrEs$à&'ftii${''âr

Labslling lields ol the SLE500


Abb.2-1
Labelling lields of the uss500
,'.,24
Abb.2-2 ,-1
Abb.2-3 Modulê lnstallalion (1 o1 2) ..
Modute lnstallation (2 oI 2) . .
....2-8
Abb.2-4 2-S
Abb. 2-5 Mounting and Dismounting ,-o
Abb.2-6 Connect-ing lhe Modules Using Grooved Pins " ......2-10
Abb.2-7 BAT500 Accessories
Preparing the Mounting Cutout . ..
..._..2-11
Abb. 2-8
Abb. 2-9 Fitting the Narrow Seal 2-11
Abb. 2-10 Fittino the Broad Seal
2.1?
Abb. 2-11 lnseÀnq lhe BATSOO into thê Mounting Cutout 2-12
Abb. 2- 12 Bèar Side of the BAT500
Abb. 2-13 lnserting the Memory Card
Abb. 2-14 Baltery with the Red Plastic Strip
....2-15
Abb. 2-15 Stripping the Line Ends
... ....2-16
Abb. 2-1ô Dêtailed View of a Plug-and-Socket C onnection .
. .. 2-16
Abb. 2-17 Position of the lndivldual Connectors
Abb. 2-18 Ports on the BAT500 2-2
Abb. 2-19 Power SUPPIY Cônnectors
Abb. 2-20 Earthing .. ..

OoX. 271.1951S8.8G?]_ (2005'03 / 02)


Kao O2-atiAVZld / 25 02.05
GPM 5OO
Liet qf Abbtêviatione

List of Abbreviations
i\}'fi;1s;æfrH'&&tffiÆ&
rBtltffisffiffi&8lri@tF-ÿ+rrum!Èrffii§ffiffi§B*j&'li*ÿÂ
AO Analogue Output

AC Alternâting Current
AI Analogue lnput
ANSI Americân Nâtional Standards lnslitutê

BAT Bedienungs- und Anzoige-Tâbleau (Touch screên Displây)

CAN Controller Arsa Network


CPU Cantral Processing Unil

DO Digitat Output
DC Direct Currenl
DCC DCiDC-Converler
DI Digital lnput
DIF Dit erênzslrom-Ertessung (Difierênlial{urrênt Dêtêctlon)

Dto Digital-l/O card


GOV Govârnor-Motor Control

GPM Generator Protection Module


IP lntôrnet Protocol
LCD Liquid Crystal Display

MBM Modbus Mastêrbaustein (Modbus mâsler unil)


NEG NeEgerât (Power suPPlY unit)
OV ObiektvBrzeichnis
PDO Prozessdaten objekt

RTU Remotê Transmissioû Unit


SDO Ssrvivedatenobjeld
SLE Stlom und Leistungserfassung (Current and Power Acquisition)
SPS Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung (§torage'Programmable logic controller)
TCP Transmlssion Control Protocol
TRV Trennverstârker (lsolated Voltagê Acquisition)
USS Unterspannungsspulensttitzung (Voltage Backup for Undervoltage Coils)
ZKG Zentrâlkade (Centrat unil)
ZM zentralmodul (Central Module )

Dok. 271.1959S8.8G2 - (2005.03 / 02)


Kao oeAi(z-qrlln / 25.02.05
GPM 500 lnstallâtion

2.1 General Sâlety Nqle§

2 lnstallation

2.1 General Salety Notes


trxrss6@,issÉëiq{dÀü{iiil*li*.iHrisbàiil!tuugt$j#Frs*:1ài'rE}j&ri,*!";g+r:il&#d4gif@ôjii
only'
1. The GPMsOo modules must be installêd by the responsible, lrained pêrsonnel
obeyed'
2. The aPPllcable safety, environmental and oPerating safety regulations must be
g. Ths constructor must obsêrve the accidenl prâvention regulations in accorda ce with
the statutory
provisions.
been specially
4. The repair work on and in the units must be canied oui by the personnel only having
trained lor this PUrPosê.
5- lt is to be ensured that the meâsuring inputs of the GPMsOO are voltage-free and dead respectively'
Spêcial cate is to be laken in connection with the terminals marked red'
lf maintênance and repair v,rork can be carried out only if parts of tha unit / of thê equipment
ârê
6.
underlension,thenatleastthslollowingadditiofialmBasuresarerequired:
- lnsulating cover of the parts being under tènsion-
-Prêsencêolasecond,trainedp6rsÔnwho,incasêoldanger'canswitchofithsequipmentand
provide aid.
- Use of insulated lools.
- Working on an insulated standing surface'
T.Whenreplacingtheassembliesthêlollowingsafetyregulatjonsarêtobeobsêrved:

CAUTION
Èi""troni" assemblies can be damaged, if they âre replaced during oPeration.
Assemblies are to bê teplaced only with po$rer offl
i;;;i;g it must bà bornê in mind that the GPMSoo has got two redundant
Eupplies. ".,
position might cause
Due to the tacl that the installation of an assembly at a wrong mounting
dâmage to the equipment, the lollowing procedure is to be applied:

- Replacê ônly one â§sembly eâch. Bêfore lnserting the new assembly it is to bejumpersmade sure that
are corractly set For lhis purpose' the must be
thê jumpers of the new assembly
compared to the corresponding Tigure§.

- means of an adhêsive
Defective assemblies must be mârked as such at the front panel, e.g. by
labsl,

2-1
Dok. 271-195998.8G2 / - 12005"03 / 02)
l(ao-o2-qb,lm / ?4.02.05
GPM 500 lnstallation

2,1 Generâl Satêty Notes

CAUTION
This unit conlains electrostatic sensitive devices'
Observe the precautions during handling in âccordânce with DIN EN 61 340"5'1!

The GPM50O modules contain componênts (MOS) being sensitive to eleclrostatic discharges (ESD).
Thêy might ba destroyed or pre-damâged in câsê ol an improper handling' The pre-damage does
nol iecJssarily lead io an immediate lailure, but it might pêrmanently change a component and
considerably sîorten its life. ln order to avoid this, they must be protected by appropriâte technical
and organisational measurê§.
Tho corresponding handling rules as per DIN EN 61 340-5-1 are to bs observed'
Further fundamentals with respect to the handling ol electrostâtic sensitive devicês are conlâined in
DtN EN 61 340.

L Fuse-links may be rePlaced only if the circuit has been switched oil'
9. Spare fuse-links must have the same electrical values.
10. lf a luse.llnk has beon replacêd or a miniature circuit-br€aker has been switched on again tor thê
first timê and lhe equipment tails again, then the cause ot the failure is to bê eliminated belore re-
starting thê equiPment.

Sarety and Wârning Notes Concerning lnstallation and Commissioning


use
Please read the complete instructions so as to ensure a satê operation ol the unit and to be able to
all functions!
lnstallation and commissioning must be Performed by the correspondingly qualified personnel only' ln
doing so, tho relevanl national regulations (e.9. VDE, DIN) are to be observed'
ln particular, prior to commissioning it is to bê ensured thal:

- All connections have been professionally established!


- The protection against electric shock is guâranteed!
- The unil cân be switched under otf-circuit conditions in accordânce with the prÔvisions of EN 60950
(e.9, by the primary linê protection)!
- All supply leads are §ufflciently lused and dimensioned!
- All oulpul leads are dimensioned acêording to the mâx. output currênt of the unit or separately
fusedl
- A sutficient vêntilation is ensured!

The GpMSoO is a built-in unit. After the installation thê terminal area must be covêred so as to ensure a
sutficient protection against the inadmissible touching o{ live part§!
This is achieved by the installation in a switchgear cabinet or distribution box'

Dok. 271_195998.8G? / - {2OO5-O3 / 02) 2-2


Kap û2-gb.lm / 25.02.0s
GPM 500 lnstâllation

2,2 ldentlricalion o, lhs Modules

2,2 ldentification o{ the Modules


l:nratf *i§q6r{!âslaÈa:H$fl Ère8ffi

are gluBd on the slde


The individual modules of the GPMSOO are idêntified by means of labels. The labels
and on the top sidâ of a modulê each.
The side labols are always glued on ths side with the protruding bus conneclors'

The side label contâlns the

- Module designation
- Terminal assignment,

Thê iront labsl contains the


- Terminal numbers
- LED status displays
- Notês on fuses installed.

The sedal number label êontains:


- Manulacturôr
- Manufacture/s code
- Modul€ designation
- ldentity No.
- Serial No.

oI the
ln thê following thê side and lront labels ol the SLE 500 modulê and
USS 5OO modulê are shown as examples,

(200ÿ03 / 02) 2-3


Ook. 271.195s98.8G2 / -
Kao,o?-§Eld / 25.01.05
GPM 500 lnstallation
2.3 Scopo ôi O€liÿ.ry

_l
SLE 5OO I
?
10
3 1 E9!
11 l2 '13 14 t5
B

2rt,t95 Gto

WOOG CONTÀCI .1/l/3


uFÉF B 10,/m
ug1 lI . 17 !E -a o
u§2lt{. 1l
C.B. TFIF T I/A rBaÈ
Ofir " l4rl3
DIN 2 ra/15
tl44 5
= .D
olN9.21iz
DIt{t È 2312.1
C,B IE.EAIE :34
C.B. CI{ - 2,,3o / 3i

, t2=nl8 fi$$?o21 n8
I 25282f?8ææXl
L_-ls=r2l11
2-1 Labe ing fields ol thê SLE500

T uss 500
lr
ri 2 3 4
e7 E
I

"rl.l05
040
g
u1ll.1,lrl3)
rr2 G1l2t3) - 1D111112

col (+) = r/2 I


ro
coL (-) ' 3I4
ü,
56 ü,
f
It{PUT
1, H
côtttllcT 78 I 910 11 12
__l lgîr 1E G I
2-2 lields tl the USS55o

2.? Scope of Delivery

The scope ot delivery comprises:

- l\4odul€
- Grooved pins
- lnlormation sheet (lor module lypes requiring special treâtment)

Ook- 271 .195998. BGz / - t2o05-03 / 02)


2-4
Xap-o2-§b-tô / 25.o?.o§
GPM 500 lnstallation

2.4 lnstâllation of th6 Module-l

2.4 lnslallation oI the Modules

2.4.1 lnstallation in General

Prior to the Beginning ot lhe lnstallation Work


- Disconnect the switchboard from the supPly.
- Provide a safeguard to plevenl unintentional re-closing.
- Verily ths sate isolation from supply.
- Earth and short-circuit.
- Cover or saleguard adjacent pârts bêing undsr tênsion.
- Observe the given mounting notes.
with respect to this univsystem operator action l§ allowed by the correspondingly qualilied personnel
-
onlY.
- During the installation work attention is to be paid that the personnel is statically discharged before
it touches the switchboârd.
- connecting leads and slgnal lines are to be installed such that the functions are nol atfected by
induclive and capacltive interference.
protective rglaying oquipment and its controls are to be installed such that they are protected against
-
the accidenial operation.
- To avold that a break ot a lead or oJ a conductôr strand on the signal side can lead to undsfined
precautions on ths
conditions in thê proteclion system, there are to be takBn corresponding §ajety
hardware sld€.
As lar âs the 24 V supply is concerned, a safe electrical separation ot the extra{ow voltage is to
be
-
ensured.
- variations and deviations of the system voltage lrom the nominalvalue respoctively must not exceed
fhe tolerance limits given in the Î;chnical data. Otherwise, functionâl failures and dangerous condi'
lions cannol be excluded.
- EMERGENCY-OFF devices in accôrdance with IECiEN 60 204-1 must remain eflective in all opera-
lingmodêsollheprotectionequipment,UnlockingoftheEMEBGENCY.oFFdevicesmustnotlead
to an uncontrolled or undefined râstârl.
- Take precautions so that aftêr voltage dips and voltags failures the interrupted program execution
can bà conectly resumed. ln this co;nection there must not occur any dangerous operating condi-
tions, not even lor short time ll necessary, EMERGENCY-OFF is to be enforced'

WARNING
Open equipment

The GPMsOo modules are open items ol equiPment, i.e. lhe modules
must be installed in casings, cabinets or in electricâl operating arêâs
only and thê casings, cabinêts or oPêrating areas must be accessiblê by
means ol a key or tool only.

The access lo the câsings, cabinêts or electrical operating areas must be


possible tor instructed and authorised personnel only.

ôôl 271 1959S8.8G2 / - (20O5't)3 / 02)


r(ap_02_!ù.16 / 25.02.05
GPM 500 lnstallation

2.4 lnstallallon ot tho Modules

2,4.2 MountingPosition

The preterred mounting position of the modules is a horizontal one on a horizonlally mounted top-hat rail
on a vertical wall. If the ambient temperature is restricled and if a suificient heat dissipation i§ guaranteed
respectively, then all other mounting positions (e.g. on a vertical top-hat rail on a vertical wall) are,
however, poSsible in exceptional cases, too.

2.4.3 Mountlng on Top-hat Bail lncludlng Estâblishlng ol the Bus Connections


T&i!ü6sn \lq*!..,@È.@FÉË1ffiweeffimi8
WARNING
ll avoidâble, do not work with powgr ON!
Apart trom that, observe the regulations tor work on live Parls.

The modules can be snapped onto 35 mm mounting rails as per EN 60715 (EN 50022-35).

Make a large-area, low-impêdance connection o, the top-hat rail to thê mounting plate.
Use commêrcially available, corrosion-resistanl lop-hat rails.

2.4.4 Minimumllistances

CAUTION
For a sufticient cooling â minimum di§tanco to the othêr modules ol 3
cm bslorv the GPlll500 and of 2 cm to thê side of the NEG510 must be
comPlied with.

2,4,5 ModuleArangement

ll the module typss bêing listed in the following are usêd, then the order ol the modules is mandatory.
Modules lypes which are not used (optional) can be omitted.

Arrangement from the left to lhe right side:


NEG5Oz or combined power supply modulô NEG501/510, zKG500, GOV500, DIo500#1, DlO500f2'
(optionally DIO5OO#3, DIO5OO#4, DIOSOO#s, Dl0500#6..'), SLE500, THV50o/501, (optionallv TBV502,
optionally DlF500).
(Fig. 2-3 and 2-4)
Thê modules from NEG5o2 ôr NEGsol/s'lO to SLE500 âre to be conneotêd to one ânother via lhe
internal cAN bu§. Modules SLE5OO to DIFSOO are plugged together in order to connect the ânalog bus,
i.e. the analog signals of the modules (current and voltage signals).
Optional modules DCCSOo and USS500 do not need any bus connection lo the other modules and can
be arrângêd at another place. lt can e.g. be advanlageous to arrange the Dcc500 module behind thê
front in the dlrect vicinity ol the BAT500.

Oôk. ?71.19s994.8G2 / - {2005-03 / 02) 2-6


K.p,o2-!ù.lm / 25.02.05
GPM 500 lnstallation
2,4 ln§tallatlon ot lho t odules
i r/ zl Àn
-*---r--
L
ai
r=
.:l
:i:=r _ -iuuT-I.TUIi dÏ-
§3Ë Ë9
Éà
T
r
ü L
C
-T= r -1
L
-'l
ô-rri.:ûil
PI
Er
L I L---J
Abb.2-3 Module lnstallation (l ot 2)
(2005{3 / 02) 2-7
Dot. 271.195998.8G2 / -
xâp-p2 !ù.lm / 25,0?.05
GPM 500 lnstallalion
2-4 lnstallation ot thê Modules
T-.-l
;§_=r;
:+#i
L__
i/Ët
|,r/ I)ll L
.-----{----+,-a
l
.'ÿ a)^
r-.s tr' \:È
.---r-#J .. :
l -_-$
ef-*+-':l:
I ÿttl
z
e
.,/e
;t
,!-_-..-....rr-§rrr
o!r--J-----rrrt
*fl
.;: .
l---+ :Ê:!
L -I flIT
J
T--'--
e-B a
Abb,2-4 Module lnstallalion (2 ot 2)
Ook. 271,1S5998.8G2 / - (2005-03 / 02) 2-8
Kap-oz-gb.,fr / 25.02.05
GPM 500 lnstallâtion

2"4 lnstallatlon of thê Modulos

Scopa ol Delivery, Unpacking lhe Modules:


The scope ol delivery includês the module and +
grooved pins as accessories kit.

Mounting:
1. Put the module with the top-hat rail guide onto
the top edge Ôt lhe toÈhat rail.
2. Press the module down and let it snap into
place.

Abb, 2-S Mounting and Disnounling

Dlsmounting:
1. Pull down to open the clip-on calch with lhe
aid ol a screwdriver.
2. Detach the modulê at thê bottom edge Ôf lhe
top-hat râil.

Connectlng the Modules


1 . lnsert the grooved plns (DlN 1474 3 x 16 mm).
lnsert at loasl 2 grooved pins into thê uppsr
two blind holês. lt would, howêver' be bettêr to
insert 4 groovêd pins into thê upper and lower
blind holês.
2. Push êach modulê against the neighbouring
module until the module§ liê next to one pin
another.
When the modules are connected to one
another, lhèn lhe internal CAN bus cÔnnection
is established, 1oo.

Abb,2-6 Connecting the Modules Using Grcoved Pins

2-9
Dok. 271,195998.4ô2 / - (2005_03 / 02)
Xao 02 !b.lm / 25.02.05
GPM 500 lnstallation

2.5 lnstallation of the BAT

2.5 lnstallation ol the BAT


M;i: .:r:,15r îi.iri.11, ï#tüïLn- Tn"r*i§iiÈÈ.{âi,*&r,i1r3T-'i"ÈlÉ.'x-:T:'$§§iiiËii":Yffi'";i'1t)idi

CAUTION
The BAT must not be Permanently exposed to direcl sunlight because
this might câuse the premature ageing of the protectivê lilm ol the
su rfac€.

Do not use any etching chemicâls during tho in§tallation.


Ch€ck thê pr;teclive film o, the §urtâce tor the reaction to chemicals
used before starting with thê installation.

Do not use âny tools (screwdrivar or similar) to work on the display ol


the BAT500.

2.5,1 scope of Delivêry

1 2 3 4

K@):
"v
'1
I

5
6 rrou
ullfirmi

Abb.2-7 BATS0OAccêssoies

D on
Clamp with tasten ng screw (4 sets
2
arrow seal
4 road
5 prot on (insta
6 Battery ed)
7 Seal
I N4emory

Ook. 271.19599t1-BG2 / - {?Oo5{3 / 02)


2-t0
tup_olgb,lm / 25.02 05
GPM 500 lnstallation

2.5 lnstallation ol thê BAT

2.5,2 Preparing the Mounting Culout

The BATSoO requires


mounting cutout.
a prepared r6ctângular
r#
Tho dimensions of the mounting cutout are 176 x E
E
136 mm (w x h).
The edges must be smooth.

Abb.2-B Preparing the Mountiîg Cutout

2,5,3 lnstalling thê Saal

lwo strips (1 x narrow, 1 x broad) of sealing matêrial are used as seals'


Narrow sêal:

This strip is inserted into the mounting cutout into


which the BAT500 will be lnstalled later,
'1. Start to fit the nanow ssal approx. in the
middle ol thê lower edge.
2. Fit tho seal in the clockwise direction. Make
sure lhat the seal has a sulficienl clearance.
1t2
3. The lr,./o ends of the seal musl not overlap.
4. Rêplace the seal every time the BAT500 is schmale Dichtung
dismounted-
Abb. 2-9 lhe Naîow Seal
Broâd seal:

This strip is ftted at the BAT500 dlrêctly behind lhe


bezel.
1. Start to lit lhe broad seal approx. at Ône third
ot the lower edge.
2- Fit the seal in the clockwise dirêction. Mâke
surê that lhe seal has a sufficient clearance'
3. Tho two ends of the seal must not overlap.
4. Rêplace the seal every time the BAT500 is breite Di chtung
dismounted.
Abb. 2-10 Fitting the Broad Seal

(?005'03 / 02) 2-1 1


Dok. 271.195s08.8G2 / -
KÀp-02-9b.lm / ?5.02.05
GPM 500 lnstallation

2,5 lûEtâllatlon ot thê BAT

2.5.4 Inserting the BATS00 into the Mounling Cutout


fiÈ?,riiÈlt*:r'}'"'i5i}aër:lïrB*!i
ffi!$t{ey.i,flffi;illdi ffiiii:{iT}s}#fld r}i a;n'$!-r4tbÊil/:&P,iHic*âÉ}-Ji}",

lnsert the BAT500 with inserted memory card


into the mounting cutout.

Abb.2-11 lnseijng the BATSOO into the Mounlng


Cutout
2 Attach the lour êlamps with Tastening screws
(rig. Hyperlinkparanumonlyelault I Fonul )
and tighten them. (fig. Hyperlinkparanumonly-
elault I Fonÿl).

rl

o o

t !:g u-e u+-o

Abb. 2-12 frear Side ol the BAT500

2,5.5 lnserting the Memory Card

is to be paid to
lf the BAT50O has not been delivered with inseried, programmed memory card, attention
the following \,ÿhen inserting the memory cârd:
- Handle thê memory card with care when inserting it jnto the BAT500'
- prior to the installalion the contacts on ths memory card must be clean. All impurities caused by oil
or grease must be cârelully removed-

CAUTION
lmpurities on the golden contacts of the momory card can leâd to
mallunclions ol thE eleclrical conlacts.

The memory card must not get in touch with any chemicals because in
câse ol contact this mighl cau§e a permanent damage.

The use ot synthetic cloth might câuse â permanenl dâmage to the


memory card because electrostatic discharges are câused'

Do not touch the contact §urface with your lingers'

Dor. 271.19s998.8G2 / - (2005_03 / 02) 2-12


r€p-o2-gb.lû / 25.02.05
GPM 500 lnstallation

2,5 lnstallalion ol the BAT

carried out in an
lf the memory card is to be removed and to be transported, the transport is to be
anti-static container.

1. lnsed the memory card in the slot provided lor


this purpose on the rear side ol the BAT500
Trom below. ln doing so, thê contacts must be
visible from thè rear side'
2. Following the insertion the interlock ol thê slot
is to be closed-
t
Abb. 2-13 tnseding he Memory Cad

2,5.6 Activâting the Bâttêry

as delivêred the battsry is dGactivated


ln the scope o1 dêlivery there is included a battêry. ln the condilion
by means of a red Pla§tic striP.

't. Flemove the rèd Plastic strip.


This way the battery is activatêd.
2. When the 24V DC voltâge has bèen applied,
the red LED is illuminated twice and lhen
extinguishes.
ln case the LED is llashing the battery is lo be
checkêd.

Abb. 2-14 Batteîy with the ned Plaslic Süp

2.5.7 Removing thê Protective Film


;{F;f iitiJàim[ri&Ê-r.!i]tEg!ÈT*§*S$ï.Êi.:jar]ÿdt-Wieffi,,l]$1üffi6;8+trrinËiii

NOTE
The BAT500 cân be oPerated âlso with the protective lilm on it'
For this reasôn, do not remove the protectivê tilm until afler comPletion
ot âll !ÿork stePs.

"REMOVE" and complelely remove


1 Loosen the protectivê tilm at thè lront at thê places marked with
it.

riôt i20O5-O3 / O?)


2-13
271.1S59§8.8G2 / -
xap-02 ot'.lm / 2s.02.05
GPll! Slo1ûsrâlatiatr

2,5 làttr[âtfün ofü» alf,

2.5-g clcaning thô §urta@e


.ffi*sdrâffi§*
CAUTION
Thè.EAT5oo must be ÊlênaêÉ using a §rttl ,
...............1!it1t ând â rr.utrl êlèâlting
'âg nt onlY;
üo noi uso ân{ rrqliElib.,

,..-.1#*- 1-',1'--- .f-W

Dor, àr1.1q$.9q.Èeâ i - .(?ûê!-0àr'iÊli 244'


t@:d?rit-iin /ri.e,€§
GPM 500 lnstallation

2.6 Wi,lng ot thê Modules

2.6 Wiring ot the Modules

WARNING
Do never vÿork wlth power ON! Danger to lifel

Thê modules are êquipped with connectors. This way the units can be quickly connected and visibly
disconnacled in case ol nêed.

CAUTION
ConnBctors must bs pluggêd or withdrawn in the deenergised conditlon
onlyl

Usê a screwdriver with an appropriate blade width


L [mm]
ol approx. 3.5 mm for wiring.
Strip the line ênds according to the Tigure to obtain
a reliablê ând shockproof connêction. d-
Abb. 215 Stripping the Line Ends

Cross-section of the flexible line Tightening torque Stripping length L

lmm"l AWG [Nm] !b inl lmml


o.2 -2.5 24-4 0.5 - 0.6 4.4 - 5.3 7

2.6.1 Description oî the Terminâls

tvtodutes ZGKSOO, GOVSOO, DlOsOO, TÊV500/5O1/502, DIFSOO, DCC500 and USSsoO


have gol 16
êxtemal terminals êach.
Module SLE50o and power suPply module NEGsO2 and combined power supply modulê NEG501/510
respectively have got 32 extemal têIminals.

Dôk. 271.195998,8ô2 / - (2005-03 / 02) 2-15


K@ 02 ob,lm / 25.02.05
cPM 500 lnsrâllation
2.6 Wiring ol the Modules

2.6.2 Oescription ol the Connectors/CodinE

All GPM500 âssemblies are equipped with â plug coding.


All GPM5o0 modules are connêcted by means ot 4-pole connector§. Wh6n coding with two coding pairs
each (clip/coding pin) lhê lollowing 6 possible cornbinalions are obtained:

Ierminal
Coding numb€r 2 4
I
B U U Ft
ô \
R FI U U
4 U H U R
5 U R H U

6 B U R U

Abb. 2-16 Detailed Vrew ol d Plug-and-Socket Connec-


tion

R = Clip on the board connector


U = Coding pin on thê connector

ln thê opposltê figure thâ position of the individual


connectors is shown.

Abb. 2-17 Position ol the lndividual Connectors

ln the followlng table the coding of the plug-and-socket connections is given by the above.mentioned
coding numbers (1-6).
NEG5O2 SLE SLE
Plug-and socket DCC 510 / 501 ZRG Dto GOV TFIV DIF USS
conoection left righl
lett right
,1
5 3 1 5 1 5 3 1 5
B 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 6

c 1 3 1 5 3 1

D 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2 6 4 2

Dok. 271.195998.8G2 /- (2005-03 / 02) 2-16


Kap_o2_gn.lm / 25 02.05
GPM 500 lnstallation

2,6 Wlrlng of the Modulês

2,6,2.1 NEG500 - Terminal Assignment


Ei,ntra"É#9tiü#'lfüW"i6l
$ttS*f*t*SËiffi fi iÉffi ÉhdîI:!!&i6Tlritlli-S$îiiffi

No. gnmEnl
1 +24 DC supply vollage
2 +24 V supply voltage
3 0v( suPPlY vo
4 suPPlY vo
5 19 V AC suPP (11

6 19 AC su (12)
7
8 n unused
+24 output red an -up

10 +24 V output for digital input conlacts stor..)


11 OV -24 output vo
12 +24 output p
l3 rnal CA
14 rnal
15
16 n unused

2.6.2.2 Terminal Assignment - NEG5o2 and Combined Power supPly Module NEG501/510 ResPoc-
tively

NEG 502 Letl and NEG51o Respeclively - Terminal Assignment


o.
+24
2 +24 stor-prôtectêd)
3 +24 V (varistor-P rotected)
4 +24 V (varisto
5 +24 protêc1êd)
+24 (varistor-protected)
7 4 V (varisto
8 +24 V (varistor-Prote
+24 varistor-p
1 +24 ristor-prol€cled)
'11 +24V(
+24 (va or-p rote
+ 24 r-p
14
15 .r24 V (varistor-prote cred)
+24 V r"protecled)

2-17
Dok. 271.195S98.8G2 / - (2005{3 / 02)
Kap-O?-&.rô / 25.02.ot
GPM 500 lnstallation

26 Wrhg of the Modules

NEG 502 Right and NEG501 ResPectively - Terminal Assignment


o. ss gnment
1 t24 suPpty vollage
2 +24 supply voltage
3 0 -24 supp
4 0v( SU voltage
5 V AC supply (11)
6 19VAC
7 19VAC
I nassigned / unuse
V output red and backed-up
o +24 V output input contacts
t1 0v( output voltage
12 +24 output (lih€red, -up)
'13 bus:
14 bus:
15 al CAN bus: ND
16 Unassigned unusâd

2.6.2.3 ZKG500 - Tsrmlnal A§signment

o. Asaignmênt
1 contact open contact)
Exte 1-G D
CAN 1

4 bus c
5 slic relay contact no rmalty open contact)
6 iNAI CAN ND
7
I Extem bus: CAN2-H
I nput channel 1 -t 0...+10V)
10 n input + (0...+1
1'1 input nel + (0.-.+1
s channels 1,2,3 - )
.S/E
14 bus:
15 S-4ES bus: Ft

16 igital output +24 optocoup

oôr 271.19599a-BGz /- (2005'03 / 02) 2-18


Kâ! 02 Ob.rm / â532.05
GPM 500 lnstallation

2.6 wlring ot the Moduleg

2,6.2.4 GOv500 - Têrminal Assignment


f r.r+Tâ1':ft Ëi?r-fÈjâ.rri"*f:;!+11ùlȧtrn*C*i'aH +;ryæ#j;iê!i+ï{t{râq?}';TtW;

No, gnment
1 GOV motor connection i AC motor)
2 molor connection ACm
3 motor connection motor)
4 motor connection ( motor)
+24 backed-up)
6 OV
7 motor supply tLl
8 motor su
9 put ânn€l 1 +24 sensor contact connection
10 rg ital input l1 input) sen§or contact con nection
'11 ital input r24 V) sensor conlact co
put chan inpu sensor conn
Analog output 1 potential
14 An og outsut 1

ouFul 2 rererence
16 g output

2,6.2.5 D|O5Oo - Terminal Assignment

No. signment
d contact or norm opÊn contact)
I output ne 3 contact normally
contact or no open contaÇt)
gltal output chan nel contaci n or mally
4 contâ61 (no v contact or open contact)
D outp
annel 4 contact ( contact or no rmally opEn contact)
4 output
Digital output 'I contact (nor contact or normally open
Digital output 1 contact rmallY contacl or normal open
7 output chan contact ly contact or no open
or normally open co ntact)
I Dig output chann 2
I ch an nel or open cl rcu c 1

10 Di input 2 or open cl rcuil 2l


'l 'l ital input ch 3 (or open rcuit channel 3)
tn put chàn 4 {or open circuit t4)
np ut chân n el or np ut valu cha n ne
'14 al input annel 6 or input e channel 2)
15 gital inPut 7 or inPut us chan 3)
iTal input channel I o r input value channê 4)

2-19
Dok. 27r.1959o8.8G2 / - (200s_03 / 02)
(ap-02 gb.kn / 25.02 05
GPM 500 lnstallation

2,5 Wiring o, th€ Modules

2,6.2.6 SLE500 - Terminal Assignment

Assignment
'1
og relay contact (normally d contact)
2 relay contacl nôrmally open
relay contacl common)
4 D
- Not ned -
6 lerm
Circuitàre contàct
I reaker contact
I gned -
10 assigned -
1l nlernal currenl tran slormer term
12 nternal current t ranslormér le
3 Digital input channel t +24
4 nput ch I
5 D I nput +24
16 chan 2 nput)
17 nput r âmplifieo
't8 of r amplifier)
19 analog nce voltage
20 r€lerence voltag€)

22 input el 3(+24
ital input channel 4 (i
24 input nnel 4 (+ 24
ntêrn current translormâr term L
26 lnte current têrminal 1
27 current transformer lermi L2
2A current trânsformâr
29 -breake r (no contact)
30 rcuit-b r ON (common
31 Circu reaker ON norm ally open contact)
32 irc aker O enabling

Oot. 271.195998.8G2 / _ (200ÿ03 / 02)


2-20
8ât oz-gbln / 25.02.06
GPM 500 lnstallation

2.6 Wiring oI thê irodulee

2,6.2,7 TRv500 - Terminal assigôment


#tr4rffi, ffi*Tri!E#ÿrTlrr{4@*â;ÿ4,'4â!i*!-çlÿ***ffi,ffilgffi'râ

No. gnmert
1 Analog outpul channel I
2 log output 2
output ch
4 rence voltage ) lor outpuls
5 - lnput annel 3 (v
6 -U
7
I + nput 3
I + chann 2
10 nassigned
11 -U
12 nput
13 + lnput 1 1

1+
'15 asslgn€d
,|
16 nput chann )

2-6.2,5 DlF500 - Terminal Assignment

rmer put 'I


0t=
2 urr€nt translôrmer lnput 1(1 =
CurrBnl t er input DIF.I 02)
4 Current translormer put K2 DlFl z = lDz)
urrent trânstormer nput L3 = tD3)
ô nl transformer 1(
7 - Not con
I
9 unenl lransformer L6D
10 rrenl rmer input K6 (rs =
11 - Nol connec'ted -
- Not connectsd -
13 current translormer L4D (11 = lEl

14 urrent rmsr input K4 F2 \11 = 1


15 rr€nt input L5 F2 \12 =
16 rrent er input F2 lt2 = 2)

Dok. 271.195994.8G2 / - (2005_03 / 02) 2-21


Kap,O2 gb.ftn / 25,0?.05
GPM 500 lnstallatlon

2,6 Wrlng ol lho Module3

2,6,2.9 USs500 - Terminâl Assignment

o. ment
1 Unde co terminal (+)
2 ndervoltage (+)
3 odsrvollags col al (-)
4 ndervoltago coil tBrm
nput contact suPPlY
nput contact supply (-)
7 nput côntact (coil sids)
I n conlact (

- Not assign
10 L1 system 2
L2 system 2
L3 syslem
13 ot assigned -
14 I system 1

15 system 1

16 system 1

2.6,2.10 DcC500 - Terminal Assignment

No gnment
1

2 +24 extern supply


0 extern suPPtY
4 exlernal suPPlY

6 +24 V supply
7 0 V extern
8 0 externalsuPply
0 isolaled output
10 0 V isolaled output
11 +24 V oulput (with thermistor)
12 output therm
'13 0 isolated oulput
14 0 V isolated output
15 +24 V isolatêd outptî
6 +24 V output

rlôk.27 1 -195994. BG? / - 1?005-03 / 02) 2-22


ÿ€p-02-9b,ld / 25.o2.o5
GPM 50O lnslallation

2.7 connêction ot the BAT500 opêrator

2,7 Connection ol the BAT5OO Opêrator Control and DisPlay Panel


,êEEMHÀF-d4üM1ffiEB?wÈE{'!â*ùE&{H§{-l*riiHt.:jr}++:il,iiB'ÿÀ@Bffi+"i§q*i.rÿ.'"+lt+iiÈ

On lhe r€ar side the BAT500 has got onê power


supply connector (POWEH) as well as three furthêr
ports:
û IE
- AUX porl (for the CAN bus connection to the
zKG50o)
- PLC porl (not used) o o

- Po/printsl porl (lor programming)


È E
ÂUX POHT PTC PORT PC PfiIN]EB

Abb. 2-18 Pons on the BAT5O0

Thê power supPly connectors arè shown in lho


opposite flgure. +24VDc L+ @ 1 L+

The BATSOO must always be earthed.


Common M o z M

PE@ @ 3 o

Abb. 2-19 Power Connectors


The powèr supply must have a double or a rêin-
Iorcêd insulation.
All êlec'trical components of the system must be
earthed.
Earthing must be in accordancê with the valid,
applicable regulations.
NOTE
ln case ol non-eârthed 24 V systems the
BAT500 is to bê supplied on â floaling
basls wlth a DCC5o0 because the BAT500
estâbtishes a connecilon between M and
êâsing,
Abb. 2-20 Eafthing

2-23
Dok. 271.195998 4G2 / _ (2005_03 / D2)

xap,oâ-gbJh / 25.02.06
gPü i00 IÿFtâI.tiër
â.fL G6rrnÈiiiàû ol rltr Eat@ §p€ninr

êannacting the,ÀUx Polt


The AUX oort is a spole qrb D porL Thê cablê ol thê CAN bus (t'o lhe NEG modulo, CAM) is t0 be
connected to thê AUi pqt
The bys is to be terminated via a 120 O rssp1or at the BAT500. The use ol
thê.§sfêbfiôsêd CÀ$lapên çfiblê {.Lsg*hlttÿ lrtê. e7l:1.S8,À&l) wlth ihtegrated tennlnâling.te§l6tui i§ t$Sin-
fnonalird.

Plfr
e OAN -L
E CâN * ENû
I CJAN - H

d.-''.

aq- hr2lT.tgÉe8Èry11- t(s&{Élrnzl *2*


kn!;ôz,t$.!m I ȧ,4*&
GPM 500 lnstallation

2.8 EMC Notês

2.a EMC Notes


aâ+-+Jl8üüiÀ;,âë!-iili§Ül+ëarit$ KÏriJùr4liEr Hiltll$â{@CplMml'j
e§Jlà.§e§Ë#t SgÆ9ffi.ïIffiBàEiHeil§{.É{e§An$ÀSl&ÉtiËffd.tEfl!:Jil'ilfJ:i:i';'l

Using screened Cables


The following lines must always be screened:

- Bus lines
- Analog lines
The cable screen must bê earthed as closêly to the connection as possible

Producing thê Relerence Potential Surfaces


Always connêct the cable screen to thê earlh potential at both ends'
points'
Bear in mind that the earth potential can have a dilferent potential at the earthing
mrn2 is to
ln this Case an additional equipotential bonding conductor with a cross'section of at least 10
be inslalled.

Connection ot Exlemal Screened Cablês


Eslablish the
connâct the scrêened cable coming from extêmally to the local referênce potential surfacs.
atter the entry i;to the system (switchgear cabinêi, rack' mounting plât6)'
connecüon direcüy

NOTE
The cable screen must not §efle as equipotential bÔnding' The frea
cable ends are to be kePl as short as possiblel

connection of Screened Data ând Signal Lines


l.RoutethêscrêeneddatâandSignallinestolheleftortotherightsidèofthêunittheshorlest
possible way.
2. Lstablish a low-impedancê, large-arêa connection of tho screen braid to the rêlerencê potential
-use
surtace. ln this connection the of springloadêd §creen terminals on a scr€en bus is recom-
mended.
3.StripthescreenbrâidendascloselytothesignallineenlryofthaunitasPossiblê' plug.
a. whàn using metal plugs the screen braid must be connected to the metal sleeve of the
a low-impedance connec-
S. fne optimim EMC'chàracteristics are achieved, iI the cable screens have
tion to the trame polential al both ends
earth polential'
6. Establish a low-impedance connêction ol the top-hal rail to the switchgear cabinet /
Because the potentials of thê modules rBler to the poiential of the top-hat rail'

Dok. ?71 -1959§8-BG2 / - (200s-03 / 02) 2-25


r(ap-02-9ô.lrl / 25.0235
GPM 500 lnstallâtion

Z8 EMC Not.e

Low-impedance Connection
A low-impedance connection is achieved as follows:
Large-area, well conducting metal-metal connection;
Use of llexible grounding strips (RF litz wirs);
Short conneclion cables wilh large surface and contact surface;
ln case of varnished, anodised or lnsulatsd metal pârts the insulating layer is to bê removed in the
area ol thê junction.
Protect the junctions from corrosion (e.9. by greasing).

A CAUTION
Uso appropriate grease only.

When connecling lhe reference surfaces the relevant regulationg are to bê observed,

o NOTE
A usual PE conductor urith a small cross-section is insutliclentl

Dok. 271.195998.8G2 / - (2005{3 / 02) 2-2É


lGp-t2-gb.ftr / 25.02.05
SAM
Electronics

Operation and Service Manual

Generator Protection Module


GPM 5OO

Doc.271.195 999 BAW EN Rsvision: - (200+03 i Ô0)


Fôr this do6lrftênt wê reÆervê all tigtflrt aB6' in the'êÿÊht of paterû granting orregidr-afion
ofa ultfty, màdel Dupliôaton of thË dôsurænl'ànd ih utilhaüon ln somê oltler wêy and
thê diÈd;iurê @ thlId Fàrtiss ârê n§t pÉrriiiled unls§§ êxpÎê§§ty altthsri'§êd by us §ub'
isol hl môdlicâtiôn§ sêIÿing'the tenhnièal pECIc§§'

§À11! Eleetronièe §mbH


D - u,76A Hamburg

Phone: + 49 (01 40 884S0


Fa$ + 49 (!)'rt0 88'25'4Ô00
E.rrl6it'ïnt9 @eam.ê{eatrohiêÉidé
ItèÀrSrqr§8 rn / ô1{406
GPM 5OO
Li§t ol conlenls

List o, Contents

'l -l
Lisl olContents .......
.1-lv
List of Figures
.1-Vl
List of Abbreviations ..

1-1
I Description
1-1
1.1 Putpose ..
1-2
1.2 oesign
General Design
. 1-2
1.2.1 . 1-3
Module Descriplions .....
Functional DescriPtion'...... .. ". 1-5
1.3 '| -6
l.é. t Functional Description of the Assemblies
, 1-11
1.4 Functions
't.4.1
....1-'12
Proteclion Functions
1-12
.4.1.1 Short-circuit Proteclion (ANSI 50)
1
Stâtor Protection (ANSI 50)
....1-12
1.4.1.2 'I-t2
1.4.1.3 lndeoêndsnt Overcurrent Protêction (Definitê Time {DT)' ANSI 51)
1-12
1 .4.1.4 ô"pand"nr overcurrent Protsction (lnverse Time (IDMT), ANSI 51) l_tâ
1.4.1.5 cunent Asymmelry (ANSI 46) .... . 1-13
1.4.1.6 UndeNoltagê (ANSI 27) -
'.. r-13
1.4.1.7 Overvoltâge (ANSI 59) .
'..... . 1-13
1.4.1.8 Phase FallurelPhase Sequence (ANSI 47)
1.4.'1 .9 Unds iêquency (ANSI 81L) '..... .... 1-14
1-14
1 .4.1.10 Overlrequenry (ANSI 81H)
1.4.1 .11 Reverse Power (ANSI 32) ...... 1-14
1-1L
1.4.1.12 Underload (ANSI 37)
1-14
Undêrexcitation (ANSI 40) ... '.
1.4.1.13
1.4.1.',l4 Load Shedding
...... 1n5
-..... l- lf
1 .4.1.15 Optjonal protection f unctions
1-16
Control Functions
1.4.2.1 Blackout Start (Mains monitoo . . . .
... 1-16

Start Attempts
...... 1-16
1.4.2.2 1-17
1.4.2-3 Start Failure (ANSI 66) '..'. .....,1-17
1.4.2.4 SÎàrt Passing on/ relay
Automâtic Start and Synchronising
......1-17
1.4.2.5 1-18
Synchronislng Failure ..
1 .4.2.6
'l..4.2.7 Circuit-breaker Failure
.... 1-18

1 .4.2.8 StopFailure....... ....... 1-18


1-18
1.4.2.9 Frequency Control .
Power l\4anagement Functions
.. ... . 1-19
1.4.3
Fundamental Têrms
...... 1-19
1.4.3.1
Power Cônlrol
......'l-20
. 1-21
1.4.3.3 Topload Functiôn
'1.4.3.4 Lôad Monitor Functions (optional) , ... .
... . 1-21
1-22
1.4.3.4.1 Load-dependent Diesel Start
.1-22
1.4.3.4.2 Load-dependênt Diesel StoP
.. .. . 1-23
1.4,3.4.3 Load dêpendenl Start ot big consumers
Net Synchronisation ......,.....
-
....-1-24
1.4.3.5
1.4.3.6 Nêt Separation
,.,,.'.,.1-24
1 .4.3.7 Connection to a Control System . .'' .....1-24
1.5 Technical Data; lnterfaces

Doc. 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (200s_03 / 00)


Kao,o5-lblvz.lm / 01 .o,r.05
GPM 5OO
Lisl o, Conlents

't-25
1.s..1 Environmenlal Conditions
t.a,z Mechanical Datâ ôf the GPM50o Modules 1-25
BAT500 lor Dôor l\.4ounting 1-26
't
.5.4 Electrical Connections 1-26
Data Bus Connections ...1-27
1.5.5-1 GPM Bus ...1-27
1.5.5.2 CANopenlnterface... 1-27
1.5.5,3 Modbus . , . 1-27
1.5.5.4 Optional Fledundant l/odbus Connection . . 1"28

2 Operation
2,1 Salêty notes ...2-1
2.2 Operating and displaying elemênts of the BAT500
2.2.1 Menu struclure on the BAT500 2-3
2.3 Display pages on the BAT500 2-5
2.3.1 General ...
2.3.2 Overview page .......
2.3.3 Measurementpâge....
2.3.4 Alarm pâgê 2-A
2.3.5 Setup page .... -. ..2-9
2.3.6 Number block . . 2-10
2.3.7 l\4ênu Pags Parameter 2-11
2.3.8 ldenlily pagê . .. .... .......2'13
2.3.9 Nominal Values page ...-... 2-14
2.3.10 Power Control pagê .. . ,.- . . . 2-15
2.3.11 Example for protection parameter page . 2-16
2.3.12 Profêrential Trip page 2-17
Synchronism cheçk page .......2-18
2.3.14 lnternal failures page ... ._.....2-19
2.4 Switching on GPM500,.....
2.5 Operation sequences
2.5.1 Slarting and Stopping of a DieseFGenerator-Set in manual rnode .. ....... - - 2-21
General ...--.. ....2-21
2.5.1 .2 Stârting a DG-Set in mânual mode via the BAT500 2-21
2.5.1.3 Starting â DG-Sel in manual mode from the Switchboard panel
,-r,
2.5.1.4 Stopping a DG-Set in mânual mode via the BAT500 2-23
2.5.1.5 Stopping a DG-Set in manual modê from the switchboard . . . . . ....2-23
Starting ol a Diesel-Generator-Set in automatic mode '. .. '.. . ....2-24
2.5.2.1 Gêneral ...... ....2-24
Starting a DG-Set in automatic mode via the BAT500 . . ' ' . . 2-24
,-)q
2.5.2.3 Starling a DG-Set in automa'tic mode trom the switchboard . .
2.5.2.4 Stopping a DG-Set in âutomatic mode via the BAT 500. .. ' '. ...........2-26
2.5.2.s Stopping a DG-Set in automatiê mode from the switchbôârd. . . .._........2-?6
Parameterisation . 2-27
2.5.3.1 How to input the password. .. -.. . . 2-27
How to input or to change nominal data 2-28
How to change parameters 2-29
2.5.3.4 How to âctiÿate / deaclivate thê function codes. .. . . 2-51
2.5.4 Power Management System, load monitor (option)

3 Service.... ,, é-l

3.1 Safety notes ....-.. ,. 3-1

3.2 Care and Maintenance

Doc. 271.195 e99 BAW EN/ - (2005-03 / oo) ll


Nap-o5jblvz.lm / 01.0! 05
GPM 5OO
Li§t ot Co.rtents

.r-i,
3.2.1 Care
3.2.'1.1 Check ol sullicient ventilation
J-!)
3.2,1.2 cleaning the Surfâce of BAT500 ,

3-4
3.3 Fâllure identitication .. .

3.4 Component rePlacement


.......'..3-6
3.4.'1 Replacing tuse plugs . . ...
.,....._.. &6
3.4.2 Replacing dôfective modules
3.4.2.1 lnslallation in Gsnêral
.....3-7
3.4-2.2 Dismounting module§ ..'..' ....... 3-8
â-o
3,4.2.3 Mounling modules
Wiring ol th€ Modules
..-.-.. '. §-lz
3.4.5
3.4.3.1 Description of the Tsrminals
......... . 3-12
3.4.4 Fleplacing of tho BAT500
..,.....,.3"13
3.4.4.1 Dismounting of the BAT50O
....3-13
3.4.4.2 lnstallatioû ol the BAT500 ... ..
.......314
1-1'7
3.4.4.3 Connection of thê BAT500 opera tor Control and DisPlaY Panel
3-19
3.4.4.4 Jumper settings ol the modules

l
Doc. 271.195 g§9 BAW EN/ - (20os'03 / oO)
kap-OÉ-gbMatn / 0i-0a.05
GPM 5OO
üst ol Flgures

List of Figures

Fig. 1-1 Design of the GPM500 assemblies 1-2


Design of the Modules 1-3
t-tg, t-z
Fig. 1-3 Labelling ,ields ôf the sLE500 1-4
Fig. 1-4 Labelling fiêlds ot the uss500 -- l'4
Fig. 1-5 Design ol the BAT500 . .... 1-'10
Fig. 1-6 Figure: Connection of G6nêratôI, Busbar and Net Numbers . ,.. 1-20
Fig.2-1 Operating and displaying elements BAT500
Fig. 2-2 Struclure o{ msnues
Fig.2-3 Overviow page for operating the assigned unit (e,9. gênerator) ......
Fig. 2-4 Overview c.b. status indicâlions .. ,....2-6
Fig.2-s Page lor measured values ..,,.. .....2-7
Fig. 2-6 Alarm page .....2-8
2-9
Fig. 2-7 Setup
Fig.2-8 Numb€r block . 2-10
Fig. 2-S Menu Page Paramstèr -....... 2-11
Fiq. 2-10 ldenüty pags
Fig. 2-'l 1 Nominal Values page .. 2-14
z- tc
Fig. 2-12 Powêr Control pâgs . , .
Fig. 2-13 Protêction parameter page lnstantaneôus Ovorcurrent .......2-16
Fig. 2-14 Preferêntial Trip pâgê .......2-17
Fig. 2-15 Synchronism pug" -. ......
Fig. 2-16 "n""*
lnternal lailurês page ....... 2-19
Fig. 2-17 Overview...... ....2-21
o-oo
Fig. 2-18 Confirmâtion page
ODà
FIg.2-19 Overuiew .
Fig. 2-20 Overview -
Fig. 2-21 Confirmation page .....
Fig. 2-22 QveMew
Fis.2-23 setup .. . . ....2-27
Flg. 2-24 Number block
Fig. 2-25 Parameter . 2-28
Fig. 2-26 ldentity. . 2-29
Fig. 2-27 Number tlock ..., , .
. 2-29
Fig. 2-28 Parameler . 2-30
Fig. ?-29 lnslantaneous Overcurrent,.. .... . 2-30
Fig.2-30 Number block
Fig.2-31 Parameter . 2-31
Fig. 2-32 lnslantaneous Overcurrent
Fig. 2-33 Number block
Fig. 2-34 Parameter
Fig, 2-35 Power Manâgement ,.. 'l
Fig.2-36 PowerManagemênt2... . . 2-34
Fig. 2-37 DG Sei .
Fig.2-38 Meâsured values . .
Fig.3-1 Construction of Modules 3-6
Fig.3-2 Connecting lhe Modules Using Grooved Pin . .. .

Fig. &3 Position ol the lndividual Connectors .. , ' ,,


Fig. 3-4 Dismounting module . .
, 3-9
Fig.3-5 Môunting module . 3-9
Fig.3-7 Detailed View ol a Plug-and-Socket Connection 3-10
Connecting the Modules Using Grooved Pins . 3-10
Fig.3-6 ,

Fig.3-g Position ôlthe lndividual Connectors,,......

ooc. 271.195 g9g BA\,{ EN/ - (2005-03 / O0) IV


Kap 05 !bÀ\rz-lm / 0l-04.05
GPM 5OO
Llst o, Flgu.6s

Fig. 3-9 Stripping the Line Ends -.


Fig. 3-10 Bêar Sidê of the BAT500 .
3-14
Fig. 3-11 Filting thé Nanow Seal
3-14
Fig. é-tz Filting the Broad Seal .
. 3-15
Fig. 3-13 lnserling thê BAT500 into the l\lounting Culout
Fig. 3-14 Rêar Side ol thÊ BAT500
J- to
Fis. 3-15 lnserting the Memory Card
$16
Fis. 3-1ê Battêry with thê Bed Plastic StriP
3-',17
Fig, 3-'17 Ports on the BAT500
...- ÿ17
Fis. J. ID PowerSupply Conneêtors
.., §-t/
Fig. 3-19 Earthing
Fis. ZKG500 assembly jumPers . .'.... 3-19

Fig' 3-21 D10500 assemblyiumpers ....,....


Fis. 3-22 GOV500 assembly iumPêrs
Fig. 3-23 TRV500/501 assêmbly jumpers . ... ' .
ç24
Fig. S-24 TRV502 asserhbly iumpers ' ...
SLE500 assembly iumPsrs
......3-25
Fig. 3-25 ......
Fiq. 3-26 SLE510 a§ssmbly jumPêrs ...... .r-eo

Ooc, 2?1.1S5 899 8AW EN/ - (2005-03 / 0o)


Kâp-05-gbAvz,l.i / 0r .0i1.05
GPM 5OO
Llst ol Abbreviatioôs

List of Abbreviations
û'-t ur#{rÈl.PidJ {ùqtËll'{ffis{ii§tulc{r.eiÉ'l
tiüifl.rs#,§,ErêÀ3wI§r$ffiEi.trsffiEsÀr?:.1,. +i};iiË*s{&§Êû0;{âxr."}.d]#riiÈ.1:i,!:irilslidMi7;ill,iF:dt'i:';

AO Analog Output
AC Alternaling Current
AI Analog lnpul
ANSI American National Standards lnstitute
BAT Operating and indicating panel (Bedienungs' und Anzeige-Tableau)
CAN Controller Area Network
CPU Central Processing Unit
DG Diesel Generator
DO Digital Output
DC Direcl Current
DCC DC/DC-Converter
DI Digital lnput
DIF Ditferenlial-Current Detection (Differenzstrom-Erfassung)
Dto Digital-Uo card
GOV Governor-Motor Control
GPM Generator Protêction Module
IP lnternet Protocol
LCD Liquid Crystal DisPlaY
MBM Modbus master unit (Modbus Masterbâustein)
NEG Power supply unif (Netzgerâ1)
OV Objecf direclory (Obiektverzeichnis)
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PDO Process data obiect (Prozessdatenobjekt)
RMS Root mean square
RTU Remotê Transmission Unit
SDO Seruice Data Qbiect (Servivedatenobjekt)
SLE Current and Power Acquisition (Strom und Leistungserfassung)
SPS Storage-programmable logic controller (Speicherprogrammiêrbare Steuerung)
TCP Transmission Control Protocol
THV lsolated Voltage Acquisition (Trennverstârker)
USS Voltage Backup Ior Undervoltage Coils (Unterspannungsspulenstützung)
ZKG Central unit (Zentralkarte)
ZM Central Module (Zentralmodul)

ooi- 271.195 999 EAW EN/ - (2005-03 / 0o) vl


Kàp-osAKZ-Gêjn / 01 ,0'r'0i
GPM 500 Descriptlon

1,1 Puryose

1 Description
qlei,ei,qàrwrsiÊsË#94ffi {ir"*#ÊÈsIê'lÈst$Hi'i*l{llir4dss1Bff-ffi

1.1 Purpose

Th6 generator prolection modulo GPM500 is â system for protection of lolY-vollage and
medium-voltage generators and electrical power nets fôr ships and other âpplications.
The main task ol the protection equipment is to protect the nel and its capâbility to supply other
itêms of equipment-
ln case of a fâult in the nel the fault location is di§connected from the §uPply and the equipment
and nel items being not concemed remain supplied with power, The protection ol equipment is
a seco dary task.
Addltionally it provides important control and power management functions.

Ooc. 271.195 999 BAW Elü - (2005-03 / 00) 1-t


Kâo 05 Pa(1-6Elm / 01.04.1,5
GPM 500 Description

1.2 Design

1.2 Design

1.2.1 General Design

The GPM500 consists of a basic conliguration


of individual modules (1) being assembled to a
prolection syslem. Depending on the applice-
tion requirements this system can be extendêd
by adding further modules.
The modules are installed by "snapping" them
onto a top-hat rail according to DlN. The
internal connections (data bus and analog bus
respectively) are established via plug-in
connections at the sides ol the modules.
The operator control and display panel
BAT500 (2) is a louch screen display showing
an operalor environmenl with operating and
switching conditions as well as measured
values via process displays. Operating pages
are opened via navigation buttons and inputs
are made or Tunctions are called via function
buttons.

Fig. 1-1 Dèsign ot the GPMiqa assemblies

Doc. 271.19s 999 BAW Êtu - (20os-o3 / 00) 'l-2


Kzp Os Pa.tl-GBim / 01 04.05
GPM 500 Description
't2 Design

1,2.2 ModuleDescriptions
*fiôËrffif8*gir:É,iihi#.,]lii*i ii6Cj!;liisJtF*B-jh!iitâ-:{ô.?iftif:{i$jrTà.if:rP,*sÈisttâ

The basic mechanical design of the modules is described in the lollowing:


The casing (3) of the modules is made Jrom
polyamide plastic and is delivered in two
widths, namely 22.5 mm and 45 mm.
The 22.5 mm casing is equipped with one
electronic assembly (2) whereas the 45 mm
casing is equipped with two electronic assem-
blies (with the exception ot the USS500). 2
Dimensions and weight are listed in the tech-
nical data (section '1 .5).
Atter the wilhdrawal of the connectors (1),
unlocking the snap'in casing parts and
removal of thê casing cover including elec-
tronic assembly (2) the electronic assembly is
accessible. lt is connected to the data bus (4)
via a plug-in connection at the bottom of the
module,

Fig. 1-2 Design of the Modules

ldentitication ol the Modules


The individual modules of the GPM500 arê identitied by means of labels. Thê labels are glued
on the side and on the top side oT a module each.
The side labels are always glued on the slde with the protruding bus connectors. ln the follÔwing
table there are shown two labêlling fields âs êxamples.

The side label contains the The serial number label contains:
- Module designation - Manufacturer
- Terminal assignment - Manufacturer's code
- Module designation
The front label contains the - ldentity No.
- Terminal numbers - Serial No.
- LED status displays
- Notes on changeable tuses installed.

Ooc.27l.lss 9Sg BAW EÈU - {2005_03 / 0O)


t-3
Kâo Ds Pafll_G8,lm / 01,04-05
GPM 500 osscriptioh

1,2 Design

lvlodule Side Top side

sLE500
T -l LZ?!§§.2.Ê
SLE 5OO I '10 11 12 t3 14 15 18
27t,lsl0i!0
IryDOC CONTACT
U REF = lg/20
q l/2/3 IFô
usllfl=17 â
US2IN - 18 à
c,B. TflP t 7/6 Ë56E rl)
DBI I . ll/13 ut
J
Drt{2 È 1Sl,16 É553 o
DIN 3 . 21122
OlNl = BIA
C,B. RE|IEâSE -t2
c'a ôN É ærml31
ll = 2512t fl 18 1eæ21 2,n
t t2=2ll?a 2Aæz,2Aææ31
l__5=rzrrr I 3e

Flg. 1-3 Labs ing fields of th6 SLE500

uss500 _l
l- uss 500
ltr5 t z t
e7 E
I

21t.10t040

.
a
u1cr,l2l3) 14/15r 16
U2G1,l2r3} . l0r 1l,12
o
CCIL (+) " l/24 ct
ç
coll(-) = 3i
o
art
66 l
INPUT 1t H
Cotr.rÀCT 7 I J
L I l:r
I to I 1
14 15
12
'tô
_t
Fig. 14 Laboling tields ol the USS5oO

Doc. 271.1ÿ5 909 BAl4/ EIV - (2005{3 / OO) 1-4


Kap-06-Pâ.r1-GB.û! / D1 0,r,05
GPM 50O Description

1.3 Functional DescriPtlon

1.3 Funclional DescriPtion

used to
The generator protection module GPM500 is a microprocessor-controlled system being
protü low-voliage and medium-voltage generators and electrical power nets for ships and
combination with
tther applicationi. The GPM500 can bL olerated as "stand-alone" unit or in
otner dpUsoO devices (the communication taking place via a data bus)
etc')
Generally each protective application (e.g. generator, coupler circuit-breaker, consumer
requires an own GPM500.
A complete Power Management systern (PMS) is realized by connecting. all-related GPM500
are
via the GpM bus, i.e. Miredundant CAN bus systems. ln this way all main PMS functions
provided.
Thanks to the modular design ôl the GPM5oO its tunctions and possible connections can
be
easily extended because thJmodules are directly interconnected via plug-in connections'

Thê GPI/sOO can be connecled via an interface (Modbus) to external powsr mênagêment
*J (optionally) to the lntemet (Modbus / TCP). The authorisation for the external
"V.1u."
atcess to display and parameteri§ation can bs reslricted'
control
operation, parâmeterisation and monitorlng of the GPMSOO are effected via the operator
on the main picture enables the
anO Oisptay panel (BAT500). The graphièal represenlation
generator circuit-breaker
immediàte;;rvey oi the status ol e.-g. a generator and the connecled
including the relevant data such al cuirent, voltage and power. For control / modillcation
prrposÀ the paramelers arg combined according to the protection function (protected by a
acknowledged on the BAT500.
iassworo;. Faults are displayed in an alarm list and can be
An integrated programmable logic controller (PLC) -aJlows the free programming of additional
pioteoiàn lunitioÀs and switch[anel controls. Th^e pLC can be graphically programmed on a
i'C using functional blocks in accordance with lECl 131 '

(20q5'0? / 00) 1-5


Doc, 271.195 999 BAw ÉnU -
l(ap rE Parll-GB.h / 01.04.05
GPM 500 Dsscription

1.3 Functional Description

1.3.1 Functionâl Description of the Assemblies

GPMSOO Power Supply Module NEG5o0 / Combined Power Supply Module NEG501 + 510
(ldêntity No.:271.197 87S) and NEG502 Respectively
The NEG5oO is the standard power supply module for GPÀ/500 systems with less extension
modules. For higher porrer demânds in case of a larger number of extension modules the
combined power supply module NEG501+510 resp' NEG502 is required. The NEG501
assembly is a NEGsOO variant without (5 v) DC/DC converlêr. The NEG510 assêmbly oPerales
in combination with the NEG501 assembly to make available lhe 5 V.
The power supply modules perform the following tasks:
- Filtering of the 24 V supply voltage
- Supply of a second (19 V 3-phase) supply voltage
- Monitoring of the 24 V DC and '19 V AC supplies
- Making available ol a backed-up 24 V output voltâge
- Making available of a regulatôd 5 V output voltage.

Additionally thé NEG module provides the conneclors for data bus to BAT500

ZKG500 ldentity No.r 271.195 020


GPM500 Central Unit
The ZKGsOO assembly is the standard micro processor centrâl unit {or GPM500 systems
It performs the following tasks by processing the implemented standard program:
- lnitialisation of all internal assemblies via the internal system bus
- Acquisition of all data via the internal and exlernal busses
- Eveluelion of all data acquired
- Trânsmission of data and commands to all assemblies being connected'

D|O50O ldentity No.: 271.195 021


cPM500 Digital l/O Module
The Dlosoo is the standard digital l/O assembly for GPM500 systems.
It consists of thê following lunctional units:

- One CAN bus controller


- 8 digital input channels (isolated)
- 4 digital output channels (relays 250V/84)
- 3 x 4 light-êmitting diodes (LEDs) on the front panel (8 x Dl, 4 x DO)

Doc. 271.195 999 BAur EN/ {2005{3 / o0)


'1-6
xâD 05 Pa(1 GB,h / 01.Dd.05
GPM 500 Description

1.3 Functional DescriPtion

GOV500 ldentity No.: 271,155 022


GPM500 Governor Molor control
The GOVsOO is used lor the governor motor control ând as generâl l/o module in GPM500
systems. lt consists ol the lollowing lunctional units:

- One CAN bus controller


- 2 digital input channels (isolated)
- 2 diôitâl output channels (relays 25oV/8A for the molor control)
- 2 analog outputs (+/-10 V or +/-20 mA)
- 4light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the front panel (2 x Dl' 2 x DO)

TRV500 ldentity No.: 271.195 028


GPM5o0 Bulfer Amplifier lor Loltÿ-voltage Systems
Thê purpose ot the TRV5oO is the isolated voltage acquisition in GPM500 systems for low-
voltage systêms of uP tô 450 V.
The TFiVSO0 is equipped with 3 measuring channels which, as standard, are configured as
voltage inputs. ay Lslng other components (shunt resistors) the TRV500 can also ba used for
current measuring purPoses
or
TRV501 ldentity No.: 271.197 911
GPM50o Bufter AmpliTier for Medium-voltage Systems
For medium-voltage systems with voltage trânsformers with an output voltage o{ 100 v the
TRVSo1 module È used. Apart Trom the voltage adaptation this module corr6sponds to the
TRV500 module.
ory'and

TRV502 ldentity No.: 271.197 912


GPM500 Butter Amplifier for Eârth-fault Detection
Thè TRVSO2 module is available to detect displacemant voltages ând eafihJaull currents in
medium-voltage systems. lf it is installed without TRV501, the iumpering is to be adapted, see
section 3.4.4.4. The module is bàs6d on the hardware of the TBV500 module, too'

DCC500 ldentity No.r 271.195 O29


GPM500 DC/DC Converter
The DCCsOo assembly is a DC/DC convener (24 V) for the connection or devices which are to
be opereted on a lloating basis with respect to the 24 V mains.
The DCC500 makes available of an isolaled 24 V output voltage (relevant when connecting a
BATsoo).

Doc. 271.195 §99 BAw EfU-(?005'03/ 00) 1-7


l(ao 05 Parll 68.16, 01.0{.05
GPM 500 Description

1.3 Functlonal Descriptlon

SLE500 ldentity No,:271.195 030


cPM500 Current and Power Acquisition
The SLE5o0 assembly is used for the current and power acquisition in GPM500 systems.
This assembly is made up oi 2 boards namely sLE500 and sLE510 and is accommodaled in a
Phoenix double housing (ME45).
The SLE500 module converts the analog signals oT the analog bus (on the right) into serial data
on the internal CAN bus (on the lett). The internal CAN bus is used Tor the purpose of commu-
nication between the individual assemblies via CAN and is managed by the ZKG500. The
analog bus serves to acquire analog values (currents and voltages) o{ assemblies TRV500 and
DtF500.
The sLE50O can be used Tor undervoltage tripping ând open-circuit tripping, ln the latter case
the iumpering is to be adapted, see soctiôn 3.4.4.4.
The SLE500 board comprises the following ,unctional unit§:
- One processor (24 MHz,512K FLASH, 14K RAM, 1K EEPROM)
- One test and download interface (RS-232 / BGND)
- One isolated CAN bus terminal (sxternal
(intêrnal system bus)
- One isolated CAN bus terminal CAN bus)
- One watchdog relay
- 16 internal analog inputs (current and voltage measurement)
- 3 current transJormers: IA nominal current (assignedpanel
to 5 of the 16 analÔg inputs)
- 4 light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the front (Sync, Resewe, Breaker'On,
Breaker.Tripped).

The following ,unctional units are arranged on the SLE510 board:


- One autonomous overcurrent detection
- One overcunent relay ''Circuit-breaker off"
- One "Circuit-breaker on" relay with separate enable input
- 4 digital inputs (isolated).

The assembly performs the following tasks:


- Acquisition of all analog dala (internal and via analog bus)
- Evaluation of all acquired dâtâ (current and power calculation)
- Moniloring of the currenls and, if necessary, overcurrent shutdown
- Switching on and off ol a circuit-breaker via relay
- Communication with the ZKG500 (data exchange)

Ooc. 271-195 999 BAW EN/ - (2005_03 / OO) 1-8


Kâp_os_Pâill ÔB lm / ô1.04.05
GPM 500 Description

1.3 Funstional Dêscription

DtF500 ldentity No.: 271.'195 032


GPM500 Differential'current Detection
ThepurposeoltheDlFSOoistheisolated(difterential-)currentdelectioninGPiljsoosystems.
of them 6 currents can
The DIF500 is equipped with 6 current translormers 1A'/2omA' By means
be measured anà iwo three-pnase systems can be compared to one anolher respectively.
Bymeanso'aGPM50oincludingdifferentialprotection.aloadmonitorwilhthecurrentmeas-
protection: up to 6 big
uiement of up to three big consuriers can be realised (without ditlerential
consumers).

USS500 ldentitY No.: 271.195 040


GPM500 Undervoltage coil suPPlY
in
The uss500 module ensures the voltage back-up lor undêrvoltage coils of circuit-breakers.
is dêsigned lor lne
case oI short vohage dips (6.9. in the êvent of e short-circuit)' The USS500
voltages (e.g. lor the use with coupler circuit-breakers,
conne"tion of two Tndepenàent supply
shore-connections etc.).

(2005_os / æ) 1-9
Doc. 271.195 999 8AW ÉN/ -
K.p-05-Pârl!-Ga.frn / 01 .0i1.05
GPM 500 Description
'1.3 Functional Dêscription

BAT500 ldentity No,: 271.188 465


GPMSOO Operating and indicating panel

The BAT500 is a touch screen panel wilh a serial data bus according to lhe cANoPen standard.
The BAT500 offers the following information
and input possibilities to the operalor:
- The overview page wilh the status indica-
tion ol the respective circuit-breaker, DG
sel and generator with the essenlial
measured values as well as the output of
commands such as start, slop, selection
of the automatic mode etc. including the
corresponding check-back signals (see
Fig. 2-3).

- The measurement pages show the meas-


ured values of the respective generator
such as currenls, vollages and power. ln
addilion, speciâl measured values such
as earth-fault currents, displacement volt-
ages and excitation currents are displayed
with the aid of âdditionally optional Fig. 1-5 Design of the BAT500
assemblies (see Fig. 2-4).

- Thê setup page enables the adiustment of the screen brightness, the selection of.the
desired operatir and display language (English, German, other languages on request) as
well as the call oT the event list (see Fig.2-7). lvloreover. the password is entered hers so
that parameters can be changed.
- on the parameter pages the parameîers of the GPM500 are shown and can be changed
(protected by the pasJword). Furthermore, the protection functions can be observed via the
parameter pages (irom exceeding of the lrip value up to trip).
on the atarm page Taults âre displayed in an alarm list. They can be acknowledged there
-
as well as hardwired via contact (push button).
The operator can ôhange between the individual displays by actuating buttons in the (common)
lower navigation bar where an alarm message is displayed, too.

Ooc- 271.195 gss BAW EÀU _ (2005'03 / 0o) 1-10


Kâp 05 Pedl .Gs.lm / 01.Û4.05
GPM 500 Description

1.4 Funçtlon§

1,4 Functions

GEûs$im6i*#iTffiffiB1Rffi§âir@êEô!ÈÊ+irÉ:W;F(ÿ.&,4tftffi$W;B&hE-$ff:9ÈEfiwr:*d1!::À*É.&§4@ffiM!*&ffitr;iffi'æii

The GPM500 makes available the following iunctions:

Protection Functions tor:


- Diesel generators
- Shaft gênerâtors
- Emergency generators
- Bus tie breakers
- Transfer line circuit breakers
- Transformers
- l/otors
- Shore connection
- Filters
- High-resistanceearthing

Protection Functions in Detall are:


- Short-circuit
- Stator protection
- Overcurrent
- Phasê current asymmetry
- Under- and overvoltage
- Phase tailure
- Under- and overfrequency
- Revêrse power
- Circuit-breakerfailure
- Excitationmonjtoring
- Load shedding
- Ditferentialprolection(optional)
- Earth-faultprotection (optional)
- Voltaga displacoment protection (optional)

Control and Power Management Functions:


- Blackout start
- Automatic start and synchronising
- Monitoring ol start, stop, synchronising and c.b. status
- Start pass on / relay tÔ next available DG-Set
- Frequency control
- Power control incl.
- Symmetrical load sharing
- Asymmetrical load sharing
- Unloading bêfore shutdown
- "Topload" funclion
- Load monitoring functions (optional) with
- Load dependent diesel start
- Load dependent diesel stoP
- Load dependenl Start ot big consumers

Do.. 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (2005_03 / OO) r-11


Kàt 05 Padl-G8,lm / 01,04 05
GPM 500 Description

1.4 Functlons

1.4,1 ProtectionFunctions
Elir+ffi*lBltlfê6ffiÆ{æ!#ffitr.*ffi;tlliïI*r.}&#.îlintl1dfiBa*ffir{ù;ffirffi};i!:irï1i}*:Sfi$*3$!I#,qiif}rdÊfê§#&'{lË,@F1'f;rf

The GPM500 offers a variety of prolection lunctions {or which the tripping value, the delay time
and the iunction / eflect can be parameterised. The functions alarm, circuit-breaker tripping, de-
excitation, stop of the diês€l-generator sst (DG set), requirement of a local ecknowledgement,
blocking until acknowledgemenl, start passing-on to the next DG sel and a busbar blocking
against switching on can be adiusted via function codes ( see Table 2'15).
For almost all protection functions a pre-alarm can be parameterised in the seme way.
The basic configuration ol the GPM500 comprises the following basic protection Tunctions:

1.4.1..l Short-circuit Protection (ANSI 50)

Protection against short-circuits from line 10 line. The protection works as an independent over-
current-time protêction with extremly short time-delay tripping aftêr exceeding ot the high trip-
ping value. For the short-circuit protection two levels can be parameterised.

1.4.1,2 Stâtor Protection (ANSI 50)

Protects the generator in the evsnt of intemal faults (by de-excitation).


It is an overcurrent-time protection wilh reduced operating value, and becomes active, if a
current is detected elthough tho circuit-breaker is open. For this pul?osê, lhree current trans-
formers being inslalled at the star point ol the generator arê evalualed.

1.4.'1.3 lndependent Overcurrent Proteôtion (Definite Time (DT), ANSI 51)

Protection against overcurrent with delayed trip. Corresponds tô the short-circuit protection, in
principle, but with lower operating values and considerably larger delay times. Serves primarily
to protect an equipment.
With generators the shedding ol loâd, i.e. swilching ofl ol unimportant consumers becomes
normally active prior to the operation ol the overcurrent-lime protêction.

1.4.1.4 Dependent Overcurrent Protection (lnverse Time (IDMT), ANSI 51)

The dependent overcurrent-time protection trips after a period of time depending on the current
intensity (inverse characteristic/fuse characteristic).

Doc. 271.1s5 999 &Aw EN/ - {2005-03 / 0o) 1-12


Kap_os_Pan 1_GB.h / 0l .0,1.Ot
GPM 500 Descdption
'1,4 Functions

1.4.1.5 current Asymmetry (ANSI 46)


çffiStfi:§r*i$s-æeffiiiiffieffi€*mffi§8mr$mJ*&BqrÈÈ?./ii+i?I{',*iffiffitMisffi$âWË{r{'}ffiffi.4S§rTllcrMlll{&lrffiÿê#iPm'

To protect electrical machines from a too high asymmetry of lhe phase currents

1.4.1.6 Undervoltage (ANSI 27)


sEtr§r!

As net protection and Iess as equipmenl protection, too. ln case of generalors being operated
as stanà-alone unils this is important to disconnect an underêxcited generalor from ths net ând
to make it possible to connect a spare DG set.

1.4.1.7 Overvoltage (ANSI 59)

sêrves lo protect all generators and consumers, but is essentially used with equipment only
which can cause an ôvervoltage as e.g. generators and possibly capacitor groups and net
filtsrs.

1.4.1.8 Phase Fallure/Phase sêquence (ANsl 44

Monitors the three phase voltages {or

- Phase {ailure and voltage unbâlance: The r.m.s. values of the three phase voltages may
differ from onê ânother by mâx. 10%
- Correct phasê sequence: The three phase voltages lorm a positive cloôkwise rotating Tield-

ln case of this tault during the connecting process ôf a generatôr tho synchronisation is blocked
and starting is inhibited.
Further functions / effects can be parameterised via the function codes (see Table 2-15).
The limit value and the delay time are non-adiustable and cannot be changed by paramelerisa-
tion.

Doc. 271 195 99S 8AW EI\ü - (200s_03 / 00) 1-t3


Kâp*05-e..r1-GAtm / 0l 0r.05
GPM 500 Description

1.4 Functions

1.4,1.9 Underïrequency (ANSI 81L)


âtFid'ffif

This protection is almost exclusively used with generators in case oI overload or faults ol the
DG set.
NOTE
Switching off of the DG set should be the protection becomlng
eflective last after shedding load by switching off unimportant
consumers ln case of underfrequency first.

1.4.1.10 overtrequency (ANSI 81H)

This protection is to be used almost exclusively with generators in order to protect lrom or/erlre'
quency and overspeed (e.g. in case oT disturbed speed controllers or dynamioally also in case
of the disoonnection of large loads).

1.4.1.11 Reverse Power (ANSI 32)

This protection protects power sources Trom an excessive active power being fed back. ThiS
wây e.g. diesel engines can be protected from an excessive reverse power.

1.4.1.12 Underload (ANSI 37)

Prôtects a DG set trom falling below a cê ain minimum load for a longer period of lime. Espe-
cially for DG sets to avoid any unlavourable operating conditions (sutting).

1.4.1.13 Underexcitation (ANSI 40)

To protect from the faulty excitation of a generator or from the lâck ol excitation, if thê generator
does not output a suffitient lagging reactive power.

O@. 271.195 999 gAW El"y - (2005.03 / 001 1-14


ràp 0s,Pà,r1-GB.fû / 01.04.0s
GPM 500 Dêscriplion

1.4 Functlors

1.4.1,14 Load Shedding

ln case ol overload of a DG-Set due to overcurrent or underfrequency load shedding' i.e.


times
switching off unimportant consumers, is performed. The respective limit values and.delay
wilh current and one lrequency tripping value and one
are para-metrisabtà. Up to 5 levels, one
assigned output contact each are available. ln the basic configuration 2 levels are realised and
with-additional Dlo500 modules 5 adiustable levels can be realised at maximum.

1.4.1.15 Optional protection functions

Diflerential Proteciion (ANSI 87)


The diflerenlial protêction {unction compares tho currents at input and output (and internally
àspeaively, stai point) of an equipment and, in case ol inequaliÿ, it separates the equipment
from the net without delay.
For the purpose of current acquisition at least one additional set ol current transformers is
required.
The dif{erential protection is parameterised with the aid of several parameters characterising the
tripping characieristic and the detection of inrushes by acquisition of the §econd current
harmonic (harmonic restraint).
The reaclion can be parametrised by means o, the Tunction codes (see Table 2-15).

Earth-tault Protection (ANSI 51N)


Earth {aults in insulafed and high-resistance grounded medium-voltage nets are acquired
with
points and the ship's ground and/or
ttre aid of current transformers between the generator star
core-balance lransformers.
protection'
The earthJault current is monitored according to the independent overcurrent-lime
The reaction can be pâramelrised by means ol the Tunction codes (see Table 2-'15)'

Voltage Displacement (59 N)


The displacement voltage âs the sum of the three phase-to-earth voltages is used lo acquire
eanh taults (equal to ze;o in the undisturbed operation). For this purpose, voltage translormers
in an open della connection are evaluated
Thereactioncanbeparametrisedbymeansofthefunctioncodes(seeTablè2.15).

Ooc. 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (2005'03 / 00) 1-15


Kap-05 Pâ^1-Ga.h / 01 04.05
GPM 500 Description

1,4 Funôtions

1,4.2 ControlFunctions
üq@:î{1ê;{.1iftjràêû,qi,4q$!i§j!ffiff@ia1fi{,$,s$Sàbri$&l tTt$iii*dÿlüF:t§-:a}F?if,xpÉ1ffi§Æi*&{#r&

In addition to the protection functions lhe GPM500 pedorms control functions \,vhich are impor-
tant especially in the AUTOMATIC mode.

'1.4.2.1 Blackout Start (Mains monltor)

ln case ol a failure of the busbar voltage and closing of the blackout contact the GPM500 initi-
âtes an automatic blackout start:
The DG set with the highest resulting priority is started iÛ AUTOMATIC mode after the param-
eterised delay time. Thè resulting priority is calculated by each generatoÊGPM trom the priority
number (0..7j (highest intluence), the operating hours and a parameter to be manually set and
the device number (lowest influence).
When minimum voltage and minimum trequency have been reâched, swilching on i§ released
and the circuit-breaker is closed.
The DG sets for which the
- AUTOMATIC mode has been selected
- Readiness for start is available (DG set is ready lor operation, GPM500 does not have any
non-acknowledged laulls etc.

are available to the mains monitor.


A start passing-on in caso of fault can be parameterised.

1,4,2.2 Start Attempts

After a start command is given the start up sequence is activated and the prime mover runs up.
lf the Dc-set does not reach the pre-set speed limits, detected trom the engine salely system,
the start sequence will be interrupted by stopping the diesel engine. Aflsr.a pre-set delay time
another attempts are carried out onè atter another Up lo the specilied number of stârt attempts
resp, successTul start- After not successful âttempts a

- Start failure is indicated


- Stan signal is passed on to the next available DG-Set (ready, aulomatic and prioriÿ)
- stop signal is activated at the laulty Diesel engine to be sure thât the diesel stops

Doc. ?71.195 999 BAW EN/ - (2OOlo3 / oo) 1-16


Kao 6 Pâ 1 G8.lm/01C,1.0s
GPM 500 DescriPtion

'1.4 Functions

1.4.2.3 Stârt Failure (ANSI 66)


ffië6ÊiËJ\:ï1-i':j';{}'FüF@ffiS5 flffitrItÈ{ÉÈ;iàæ;üfr IÉ+gT#*!![i

lf, after a §tart command, there is no switch-on release wilhin the parameterised tlme due to an
insufficient voltage or frequency, the starting process is aborted and a start fault alarm is output.
Further GpM reactions such al an appropriate start passing-on can be parameterised.

1.4.2.4 Start Passing on/ relâY

Due to critical diesel failures which cause no instant switch off a passing of thê start-command
1o the next DG set can be parametrized by means of the function codes. The
âifected DG set
will be stopped after the started DG set is connected.

1.4.2.5 Automatic Start and Synchronising

tn AUTOMATIC mode an automatic start can be initiated in case of a failure from another
DG'
Set, by
- activating the Start button,
- order from thô IMCS or
- in case oI a load request.
An automatic start includes the running up ol the Dc-set, the synchronising, connecting the
generator breaker and carrying out load sharing.
ln case oT no blackout the automatic synchronising process is initiated for the DG set having
been started according to priority beior switching on. Actuating signals ârê translerred to the
corresponding speed ctntroller until net voltage and generator voltage are synchronous.
First the main criterion, reaching of minimum voltage and minimum frequency of the generator
voltage is checked (switch-on release).
AfteMards, the following criteria are checked
- Difierential voltage (RMS values)
- Frequency ditference
- Phase angle
- FMS value of the beat voltage
lhe latter being a redundant but independently computed criterion. lt {urthermore takes into
âccount the devietions of lhe wavelorm.
lf all above-mentioned criteria are fulfilled, the generator circuit-breaker is automatically
switched on.

oôc 271.1s5 999 BAW EN/ - {2005'03 / oo) 1-17


KÉp-os-Fàn l / 01.04.05
-Ga.rm
GPM 500 Description

t.{ Funêtlons

f .i,2.6 Synchronising Failure


ffiSmMffi[{.{iEdi&!grli',1iÉÈYii&1m;tE}+:i:i:,iiËi,ffiq{ f#tr:-a.:iflt#t5*]lf4.t;$é:; Sifl "È*rt

l{ switching on does nol lake place within the adjusted timê fotlowing a stan command and the
synchroni;ation release, lhen ihe synchronising process is aborted and the synchronislng lailure
is inltlated. Further GPM reactions can be parameterised (see Table 2-15)'

1.4,2.7 Circuit-breâker Failure

This monitoring unit ôompales the curr6nt actual status of the circuit-broaker with the desired
status preset b-y the GPtvi. lf they diifer from one another over a fixed short period of time, then
the circuit-breaker failure alarm is output.
The following pairs of check-back signals are similarly checked lor plausibility (non-equivalence)
by means oithis proteaion tunction in case oi the corresponding parâmeterisation'
- Circuit-breaker is open / closed
- Circuit-breaker is in the disconnected resp. test position/ operating position
- Trip coil has besn contrôlled / has an open circuit
- Earthing disconnector is open / closed
A circuit-breaker failure is initiated, il for one pair either nono or both check-back signals are set
within a specified period o, time (e'g' l20sec ror disconnected i operating position)'
Moreover, the failure is initiated, if the circuit-breakêr signals not wound up / ready in the oN
condition.

1.4.2.8 Slop Failure

lf switching off does not occur wilhin the adjusted time after a stôp command or if, with an open
circuit-breàker, the voltage value exceeds 10%, then a'stop tailure" alarm is giverr. The GPM
reactions are adapted to the application by parameterisation (function codes see Table 2-15).

1.4.2.9 FrequencyConlrol

Thè frequency is controlled to the nominal ïrequency under all operating conditions' Like the
other nominal data the value ot the nominal frequency is entered as paremeter at the BAT500.

't -'18
ooc. 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (2oo5_03 / O0)
Kap_05_Pâd1_GB lm / 01.04.05
GPM 500 Description
'1.4 Functions

1.4.3 Power Management Functions

ln its basic contiguration the GPM500 oflers some important power management tunctions
which are described in the further course.
But first some fundamental terms, definitions and structures are explained'

1.4.3.1 FundamentalTerms

Nelr
rÀe powe, management functions always exclusivelY .$er.to the limited range of a net or
an unequiv-
subnàt. n net is a;ection being limited bÿ opened switching devices. Each net has
ocal net number.
Subnet:
A subnet is a net section being limited by opêned switching devices'
Busbar:
ihi" tam relers to a section botween switching devices. ln this sense a transfôrmer with primary
and secondary cifcuit-breaker is a "busbar", too'
Nel Number:
ïÀà n"t nrro"r is dynamically determined depending on the positions ol the generator circuit-
permanêntly shown on
breâkers, coupler cir;uit-breaiers and transfet line circuitbreakers. lt is
prg; Z oi lhe'8AT560 for checking purposes. To e.ach net / subnet an unequivocal net number
is àssigned in the power management system (PMS)'

The net number is determined according to the tollowing rules:


-Thenelnumberisthelowestdevicenumbereacholthegeneratorswhichcanbe
got a net number'
connected to the net. Each device has
on only.
- The net number oT the devices ol a bustar is influenced by devices being switched
busbar by (closed) coupler cirÔuit-breakêrs
- The number is transmitted to the neighbouring
and lransfer line circuit-breakers only.
side with
- Open tie-breakers and transfer line circuit-breakers havê got the net number of the
the three-phase voltege acquisition.
Closed ring nets are, às standard, excluded but can be realised upon request,
if need be.
-

(2005'03 / 0o) 1-19


Doc, 2?1.19s 9Sg BAW EN/ -
kap-os-P ü-GBrû / 01.04.05
GPM 500 Description
'1.4 Functions

The following figure shows the formation o{ the net numbers in a system with three busbars,

1 1 4 4

(G2) (
G3) (sg)

Bus bar 1 : Bus bar 2 Bus bar 3


..__---_.-.--_--------.-_.----,,-,.,.!_-..,.

Subnet 1 Subnet 4
Fig. 1-ô Figura: Connection ol GeneraloL Busbat and Nel Numbers

1.4.3.2 Power control

The load Sharing takes place between all generators of one net number. Balancing is realised
by the GPM500 communication viâ the redundant CAN bus (GPM bus)'
The power control oflers the following functions:
- Symmetrical load sharing fôr diêsèl generalors
- Asymmetrical load sharing for shaft generators and turbine-driven generators
(with minimum power for diesel generators)
- Unloading of the generator prior to shutdown

ln the event ol an asymmetrical load sharing the following protective restrictions are ensured by
the GPM500:
- No underload or reverse po\yer of the other DG sels
- No inadmissible frequency increase in stand-alone operation (e,9. in case of maloperations)

Power can be individually presel tor eaÇh GPM500. The load sharing is controlled by the
GPM500 accordingly.
The presetting can be changed on the BAT5oo. The prêsetting can also be made via Modbus
from en external system (e.g. âulomation system, IAMCS).
For power distribution purposes the GPM500 transTers actuating signals via the Gov500
module to the speed controller of the DG set.

Doc. 271.19s 99!, BAW El'U - {2005-03 / 001 1-20


Kap_05-Pâdr_G3.rn / 01 04.05
GPM 500 Description

1.4 Functlons

1 .4.3.3 Topload Function

By means of the topload îunction the DG set can, upon request, be loaded with 80% of its
nôminal power, provided that this is possible without the inadmissible unloading of other DG
ssls.
This operating mode can be activaled by means of button "Topload" on the start page oT thB
BAT.

1.4.3.4 Load Monitor Functions (optional)

The following load monitoring {unctions are available:


- Load dependent Start oT a DG-Set
- Load dependent Stop ot a DG-Set
. Load dependent Start of big consumers (optional)
The load monitoring ïunctions are not performed by one individual device only. They are distrib-
uted among all GPMsOo systems being interconnected via the redundant GPM-bus. The basic
f unctionaliÿ is provided in each GPM500.

Operating Modes
The system knows three operating modes which, if necessary, are to be selected simultane-
ously:
- "No DG start": the load monitôr does not start addilional DG sets
(remark: a blackout start neverthêless takes place, il necessary!)
- "No DG stop": the load monitor does not stop additional DG sets
-Manoeuvre mode": additional reserve power is made available
-
(one additional DG sel)

Selection of the Operating Modes


These operating modes can, in principle, be selected via each GPM500:
The operaling mode is applicable to the respective subnet only.
The operating mode can be selected via
1. Digital inputs and outputs or
2. Modbus connection e.g. 1o an automation system or to a superior PMS system
The operating mode need not to be selected on every device because the individual inputs are
processed in parallel ÿia the GPM bus (oR logic)'

Dôc. 271.195 99S BAW EN/ - (2005-03 / 00) 1-21


kâp-05-Pan1-Gg.lm / 01 0.a.05
GPM 50O Description

1.4 Functions

1.4.3.4.1 Load-dependentDiesel Start


#4"1$rrffitt!':'.lil*ë!s:$. /113§9r. lëtri4':TÈ*Se.{r1ÿCr',r-tt!?S}f§i,$.'Pôfflfiffil*tiIl'd$SirÈ:

A DG-Set will be started if the limit value of one o, the two parameterisable minimum reserve
power limits has been exceeded for the pre-set time delay. The raled power output ol the
starting DG-Sot is taken into account.
Taking the calculated start order and the individual possible DG-Set power into accounl, the
DG-Set with the smallest nominal power output, which covers the minimum power reserve, will
be starled.
The DG-Set to be started next is the one wilh the highêst resulting priority, i. e. the §mallest
number. Each Generator-GPM calculated its individual resutting prioriÿ from the adiustable
prioriÿ number (0...7, highest influence), the ôperating hours and the device number (lowest
influence). Generally the start order is from the smallest (highest priority) to thô biggest (lowest
priority) number. The Stôpping order sequence is vice versa.
After diesel start the GPMsoO starts synchronising and connecting the breaker. Affer that load
sharing is carried out.

1,4,3.4.2 Loaddependent Diesel Stop

lTseveral of DG-Sets are leeding to the common bus-bar and the total power consumption is
decreasing, the total power reserve is increasing. ll the power reserve is too large one of the
supplying DG-Set will be stopped âutomatically. Atter stopping the DG-Set the power reserue
must be larger or equal the specified power reserve minimum power reserve after stop, see
Fig 2-35. Under special conditions it may also happen that a number of DG'Sets âre stopping
shortly one alter the other to reach speciJied minlmum power reserve.
The stop sequence is as follows:
- unloading lhe generalor to a very small amount of current
- disconnecting the generator breaker
- running in idle speed for a pre-set Time (cooling down)
- stoppîng the diesel engine
- the DG-Set is ready for start again.

Doc. 271.195 e99 BAW EN/ - (200s_03 / 00) 1-22


Xâp-05-Pâû1 GB,lf, / Dl.04.05
GPM 500 Dcscription

1.4 Funcllons

1.4.3.4.3 Load dependènt Start ot big consumers


ffia6ffis:6â@Égtû-5iïFiir,;4rT!ir":6$ral-iïis@!?sÈrïriall'Ë!'"t{s*À-{d!TÀ'rr*rr.iËfidË1§:
This lunction protects the feeding Dc-sets against overload. By means of this function it is
guaranteed that in case a big conéumer is selected sufficlent power is provided, i-e. a minimum
ol one DG-Set slarts autom;tically, if the momêniary power ieserve is too small. The start of
the selected big consumer takes place when a suffiÔient power reserve is available'
Consumers are switched on according to the Tollowing steps:
1. The GPMsOo to which lhe requesled swilch-on of a big consumer is available, communi-
cates the required power to the GPM bus, Switching on is delayed so as to be able to take
into account the reactions by the other devices.
power
2. The total power demand lor The subnêt is computed by all GPM500 systems f rom the
demands.
3. ln the same way the actual reserve power is comPuted'
4. The GpM5o0 systems of the generalors check whêther a start condition is Iulfilled for them
after evaluation of power deriand and reserve power, If this is the case, switching
on ol
consumers is blocked.
5. It is checkêd whether the respective start conditlon remains lulfilled when taking inlo
yes,
âcéount the nominal pôwer / maximum power oT generators being already started' lf
Iurther DG sets aro started according to their priority. The switching on ol consumers
remains blockêd.
6. From the DG sets with fullilled start conditions the set wilh the lowest number and highest
priority is started. (A DG set being shut down is preferred!)

7. ll the respectlve reserue power is suffioient, the blockage is reset and the switching on of
consumers is released.

Current Acquisition of Big Consumers


ln principle there are two different ÿpes of big consumers:. consumers laking the rated load
àirà61ty *t"n switching ON and coniumers which needs lheir rated load only
sequentially, like
bow thrusters.
gets the actual
For the second type ol consurners it is necessary that the respective GPM500
power consumptün input via assigned current translormers..only via this function.it is possible
power reserve is loo high. ln general all consumers
io avoia stopping of a bG-Set in Case the
witÀ variaOtà'poiver consumption are equipped with current transformers to signal the
actual
will not stop ln case of minimum apparent power
apparent power to the GPI\,,I. So the DG-Set
consumption.

Doc. 271.195 9€9 BAW EN/ - (200s-03 / 00) 1-23


Xap-05..Pàrl1-GB,lû / 01 0À.05
GPM 500 Description
'1.4 Functlong

1,4,3.5 NetSynchronisation
îfr'l:SÊlrif.in&t]:ilÉïltitjil[:trltr,;&lli.]r'gti.Erie!ËWÙ.ifÈltilâ4|ttsi*!èi,

The GPM500 is able to synchronise nets with one another. For this purpose the lie-breakers
GpM500 are equipped with synchronising and active-power load controllers according to the
devices ol the generators. For this purpose, the actuating signals are, however, not.oulpul at
the own device but they arê given as setpoint lrequêncy to the two nets involved. All devices
involved generate coresponding actuating signals for the speed controllers ol the DG sets. The
speed co;trollers of the DG setÀ involved should reacl slmilarly and the adjusting speed should
be adjusted accordingly.
Within the range of one subnet there is possible only one net synchronisation or net separation
at lhe same time.

1.4,3,6 Net Separation

ln case of an intended nel separation lirst of all the net numbers are recalculated such thal the
subnets to the right and to the left of the circuit-breaker are provided with ditferent net numbers'
This way the generators can be supplied with different actuating commands. within the range
of one subnet ihere is possible only one net synchronisation or net separation at the same time'

1.4.s,7 Connection to a Control System

A superior control system as e.g. a PMS or an automâlion system can intervene in the load
monitor in different ways:
1. Alteratiôn of the start priority
2. Selection of operating mode "No DG stôp"
3. Selection of operaling mode "No DG staft'
4. Selection of operâting mode "Manoeuvre mode"
5. Selection ol "Topload"
6. Requesting an additional pôwer reserve

The opêrating môde sêlection from the control system is always combined with the hardwarê
contaôts. lf ,'No DG STOp" has been selected via digital input, this cannot be cancelled via tele-
gram.

Ooc. 271.195 99s BAW EN/ - (2005-03 / oo) 1-24


NaO 06 Pân1,GB.im / 01.04,05
GPM 500 DescriPtion

'1.5 Technical Data; lnterlaÇe§

1.5 Technical Dala; lnterfaces


$tm$AsËi{&t§#@Ilpûî$*iitit'rt'Ei';:,i'*ti1i'l(flÉqffiB'r*Éi:1ô§iü§tt#§r${r.$Hrll

1.5.1 EnvironmenlalConditions
wer*'qi{'+@
Ambient temperature 5 "C to +55 'C
Rel. air humidiÿ 5 % 10 95 %
the lilm.
Do not expose the BATSOO to permanent sunlight; this might accelerate the ageing oI
Avoid any contact of the device with corrosive substances'

1.5.2 Mechanical Data o, the GPM500 Modules

plug'in
Top-hat rail modules with 16 and 32 terminals respectively (in the form of coded 4'pole
blocks) and a 12-pole plug-in connection to neighbouring modlles. The 12'pole plug'in coffec-
tion tirà intàrnàt CAN bus, the extemal CAN bus for the connection of the BAT500
"Ërpti"".
and contacls lor the control voltages.
Caslng 45
Assemblies lor mounting on top-hat rails' Dimensions (W x H x D):
45 x 1OO x 1.15 mm (combined power §upPly module NEG501+510 and NEG502, SLE500,
DlF5o0, US5500 resPectivelY)

F",j
tI
I

casing 225
Assemblies for môunting on top-hat rails. Dimensions (W x H x D)

ooc- ?71.195 999 AAW EN/ _ {2005{3 / 0O)


1-2s
K.o 05-Pa/t1-Ga-lm / 01 04.05
GPM 500 Desctiption

1.5 Technical oala; Interlaces

22,5 x lOO x 115 mm (2KG500, DlO500, DCC500, GOV500, TRV500/501/502)


glt - r22,1: :22,5-

I
15,a
I

1.5.3 BAT500 for Door Mounting

BAT5OO

Monochrome LCD monitor


Guaranteed minimum servicê life 50 000 h
Weight - 1,4k9
Monitor L x H 187 x147 mm
Graphic display 121 x 91 mm (5.6" diagonal)
Resolution 320 x 240 pixels
Data transfer ratê 9000 - 38400 bits
lntsrface RS-485
Memory 32 KB
Mains voltage
'18-30VDC
Max. power consumPtion - 600 mA with 24 V DC
Operating temPerature 0to55'C
Protection degree lP65 (front panel)

1.5.4 ElectricalConnectlons
$gmalelüetwÀw*liixl@tïÈird§*ts§',{irirï êrîÉrx.'{;*iiÈÀiullis&üÙrltrü@*s&Ii

The terminal assignment of the GPM modules is described in annex A.

Doc. ?71.r95 999 B^w EN/ - €005'03 / 00) 1-26


xaD 05_Pâ 1-GBlm / Dr.04.05
GPM 500 Description

1,5 Têchnlcal Oatai lntêrtacos

1.5.5 Dâta Bus Connections


}P§ri,ÿ", \'il({i*"!.1ÈÉ'hlt§*
ffitrffiffiIÉt§ffiôËiü &'. ïrçr$â§r{lj,da.efr§iiti.*riB,4isB"ar.j'.:§'!*e!la.:t'rr'-:r':i:i1:"' r,Ê*Fl,{Ê,*të:3#.iÿ(,itîjÎlrltliI$;ii.ri

1.5.5.1 GPM Bus


ffiwffiËli{§ejl
ffiefijr:!i!WI8s@!g:t$l4'rid?-!E$ëM-;1sËr'ü
For the purpose ol communication with other GPMsOo systems there are available two cAN
busses (CAN1 and CAN2) being redundant with respect to one another'

CAN1: ZKG500:2, 3, 4 (CANI- G, L, H)


CAN2: ZKG500:6,7, I (CAN2- G, L, H)

With the last ZKG5Oo ol a bus section the GAN busses are terminated by selting one iumper
each.

NOTE
The CAN busses âre looped through lrom statlon to station êâch'
Spur lines are avoided, i'e. the bus connection is made such that
the cores of the incoming bus section and thê cores of the
outgoing bus section are connected in parallel at thêterminals of
tne2xcsoo module and not at a têrminal strip to which a spur line
to the GPM500 is connected'

1.5.5.2 cANopenlnterfaoe

cAN bus intedace cAN4 being operated with a cANopen prÔtocol is used to connect the
BAT5OO (or lurther optional compononts).

CAN4: Combined power supply module, NEG501:13, 14, 15 (CAN4- H' L, GND)

1.5.5.3 Modbus
rM#r@Eiïiffiffi§*6fi5Ëffi?-E"tifl3sffiâm*eil§fiqffi?#Ml$Sr.4f#'*'l$ttrw
For the communication with external systems (e.g. automation syslem or superior PMS sy§tem)
there is available a Modbus interface. The Modbus is based on an RS'485 interface with two
transmission and receiving lines plug GND connection'

Modbus:ZKGSO0:13, 14, 15 (-S/E, +SiE' RGND)

Dæ. 271.lg5 999 BA!ry E[ü - (2005'03 / 00) 1-27


K.p-O6,Parl1-6g,lm / 01.04.06
GPM 500 Description
'1,5 Technical Data; lntetfaces

-ùr!t't-!l

1.5.5.4 Optional Redundant Modbus Connection


ii[iËtkrse*; un]iüËÈrE;:ï?Iâ:(4i,iÀ{}d1ffiffiiÿhi§IiËl§J#i*§*Siffi&'+']

With the aid of two additional ZKGsoO modules a redundanl Modbus connection ot an individual
GPMSOO or of an interconnected system of GPM500 devices to an external system can be reaF
ised, The interconnected system can consist of a maximum of 60 GPM500 devices being all
interconnected via the GPM bus.
These two ZKG500 modules which are equipped with the software for the redundant Modbus
connection are Working as "gateway computers" each between the redundanl GPM bus system
with the connected "terget GPM" and the Modbus to a superior external system ('host").
The gateway computer listens on the redundant GPM bus, i.e. CAN1 bus and CAN2 bus
respectively, and stores the data of up 1o 60 GPM500 devices. The host computer has access
to these dàta via the FlS485 Modbus interface. A command from the host computer is trans-
mitled to the gateway computêr. There it is converted into a cAN telegram and passed on to
the target GPM500 to be addressed.

Oo.. 271.1ss 999 BAW El'l/ - (?oO5'03 / oo) 1-28


&, 05 PaIt1-GB,lû / 01,04,05
GPM 500 operation

2.1 Salêty noteg

2 Operation
!q4F*se{r..?efffl*@iY}h:,!tris:it*li:+.{.{ȧi1'+l*f]§ie.lisq{4,:fi11"iqiiidql[Tfl.1ff!à§ig#1ffiæ{

2.1 Safety notes


ldffi iffi *§*"u@
@xgli{i*SèrërTlsEltffi

safety ând warning Notes concerning lnstallation and Gommissioning


Please read the complete instructions so as to ensure a safe operation ol the
unit and to be
able to use all lunctions!
qualified personnel
lnstallation and commissioning musl be performed by the Ôorrespondingly
(e'g' VDE, DIN) are 1o be observed'
ànty. tn ooing so, the relevanr nationâl regutalions
ln particular, prior to commissioning it is to bê ensured that:

- All connections have been professionally established!


- The protection against electric shock is guaranteedl
provisions of
- The unit can be lwitched under off-circüit condilions in accordance with the
EN 60950 (e.g' by the primary line protection)!
-_ All supply leaàs are sufticiently fused and dimensionedl
l ouiiü leads are dimensioned according to the max. output current of the unit or sepa-
ratelY {usedl
- A sutficient ventilation is snsured!

The Gplv!500 is a built-in unit. Atter the installation the terminal area must
be covered so as to
pafis!
ensure a sufficient protection against the inadmissible touching ol live

2-1
Dot. 271.19s 999 BAW Et.l/ _ (2005'03 / O0)

Kâo 05 Pâi2-GB lm / 01.04,06


GPM 500 Opsration

2., Operâting and displaylng êlêments o,

2.2 Operaling and displaying elements of the BAT500


6Fffi§*âL.ilii-qe!Êj#aa;*#,rÀit'1i§r&ÈTffiewr-hiÀ$qlsr++.tittuinl*rsrriÉti{îi j,iiy.6!ûiBiàrÉtilii*s},e$tdB*ÈqelBliÿiw}a$fN:f.-{âi,BfH{&

Fig.21 Opêruting and displaying elefients BATSOo

red OFF Nô hardwâre problêm detected


BLINK Battery low

6 green
ON
OFF
Hardwarê fault
No touch cell active
ON While any touct ôell is active (visual feedback)
red OFF No alarms
a BLINK Alarm requires aôknowledgment
^ ON Alarm active

a Green BLINK Communication error


ON communication OK
a green May bê user controlled as LED number 65 using the Macro Editor
.' Turirs ON when rêcipe/evenl backup is being performed.

a green OFF Hardware fault


O ON Unit in operation

Table 2-1 Operating and displâying elements BAT500

Ooc. ?71.195 999 BAw ErU - (2005{3 / O0) 2-2


Kâ, O5-Pà.12-GA.lh / 01.04.05
GPM 500 opêration

2.2 Operating and displaying elemenls of

2,2.1 Menu structure on the BAT5O0


ffi*Ë
@r?ffi,§ts',ffi5i,ii,?,Ërrsliiiii"irüÊflWq$lEgtæffi*îi!§9;!{.l1H$üÊ.*';iliÿtrS?*{r.
The main pages are ananged on one level and can be called up via the buttons in the naviga-
tion bar. Bufiàns in the page above the navigation bar open submenu pages to:
- starvstop diêsel generators (overview page),
- displaying measuring displays (Measured Values pages),
- selecting dovices (ldentity page),
- numerical input of password (Setup paga) and
- numerical input of dâtâ (Parameter pages).

The operation device BAT500 displays several types of pages:


Type of pâge Description
Overvie'fl pagê status indications, opêrâting element§, measuring values etc'

Alarm page prêsênlations of alarms

Setup page brightnêss, password etc'

Menu page leaps to parameter groups

Parameter pages lâccessible wilh Dassword) device number, bar allocation, detinition ot device
iype, iôÀnectlon'release, irotection parameters, function codes etc

Measurêment vôltages, cunents


pages

2-3
Doc- 27r.195 999 BAW EfU - (2005'03 / 00)
x2p-05_Pan2,GA.im / 01.04.05
GPM 500 operation

2,2 operating and displaying elements o,

OvervieY, (Home)

Alrm

Potler Menagemenl

Passâ,ord. Âet up
ir.nu Obplây
Pns PÀrâmsler
G.n6êtorllq ominrlV.lü63
Poworcertrol P[iS
-VOLIAGE - . CURREI{T.
. POWEB. -FREOUENCT.
synchrorlzlng -LOAD SHEDoDTG Gêrurâtor Xo.
Displacêûenl (59N) È.rlhlrült -INTÉRNALF ULt

Diff:€rEntial Potection (87)

. LOAD SHEDDI}IG. Stâtor Proteclion


Preferenuâl Trip

Oÿercünent, definits lims (51 )

Underiosd (37) Overcuft€nl, invêrse tims (51)

- POWER . Unbâlânced CurI6nl (a6)


Revêrsê Powor (32)

. VOLTAGE .
OverlÉquency (81 ) (25)

. FREQUENCY - ôÿerÿoltàse (5e)


llnd

Fig.2-2 Sttucture of menues

ooc.271.19s 999 BAVY EÀy - (2o05'o3 / 00) 2-4


l(a! ol Padz GBlm / 01 01,05
GPM 500 Operation

2,3 Oisplay pages on the BAT500

2,3 Display Pages on the BAT500

2,3.1 General

ln this seotion, the recurring fields and buttons arê descnbed in general. Each display conteins
a life sign for the communièation with the CPU via CAN bus (rotating slash). The buttons in the
navigation bar at the bottom recur in all pages. Exceptions are described separately.
ln general the pages contain thlee different types of elements:

I Indication
O Operating element
T Text (static)

ln the lollwing all operating elements which can be touched to modify rolated data are high-
lighted by different colours.
S-ubsequântly, the monitor pâges are described in the same sequence as stated in the menu
structure.

2,3.2 Overview Page

,| 2 3

Una ins U
10

5
ieEelgerErator
6

I B T34 Hl,l
0 rEac
Cuc/s 7
I U

Fig. 2-3 Overuiew page fot opeâting the assigned unit (e g- genentor)

Ooc, 271.19s 999 BAW EN/ - (200s_03 / OO) 2'5


Kao G5 Pàrrz-GB,lm / 01.04.05
GPM 500 Operation

2.3 Display pages on the BAr500

No. Description Possible condltlons / Remarks Type


Ghanges aulomatically when another operation
1 lndication ol operation mode mode is selected.
ls flashing during start sequence. A page with a
Operation element l0r initiating the start SïABT êlement opens It has to be pressed for o
2
sequence oI unit acüvating the start.
ls flashing during start sequence. A page with a
Opêration êlement for initiating the stop START element opens. lt has to be pressêd for o
3
sequênce of the unit activating tho sta]t,
4 Actual electrical data of lhe bus bar ï+l
Symbol "Beadyloroperalion" (wounded This symbol changes if the breâkêr is not
up) ol the breaker wounded uP.
Operation condition of the breaker This symbol signalizes lhe breaker status (on, ofl, I
6 (connecled). disconnected, undsflned etc., see fig.2-4).
Symbol of the assiqned unit (here
7 generator)
I Active CAN-Bus to the BAT lf tho ÇAN-Bus is active thê bar rotates.
Cân used for all componânts (GeneratoIs, Trans-
s Actual operatlon data ol the unit formers, Breaker, Consumers, êtc.)
I

't0 Bus bar will be shown whits the bus bar is not I
lndication if the bus bar ls âlive. alive

Table 2-2 Overview page for operating the assigned unit

ioGaistltctil x
m(Ecctütn(r{ x
PcE IIO{ FAI.IfE TISC/ARIH x x x x
EARI}ED x x x x
qscctfElE x x x x
I I I I I I
I I

ot I I I I I E=
T
t-J
I I

CN
T
I I

u\EtË
T
,- I
lRPPED
T

Fig.2-4 Ovotview c.b. slatus indicalions

Doc. 271.1e5 999 BAW EN/ - (2005-os / oo) 2'6


Kao 05 Pàrl?-GB.,m / l)1.04,05
GPM 500 operation

2,3 Dlsplay pages on the BAT50O

2.3,3 Measurement Page


]i ü't6j;tJi§'!. *@
iffiËla.ffl§ËËgi$*tf.ttY*JÉfw§f.1fi1..li{iTilt§wfl(rl.Iül{j{ ]t* ::FtÈrlii!Éii'l ti..l!§T9§rrdfi'Sâ&l#*lN§§Pf"

9É6 n 3 .ÀJ 2
I3 9Ê6 H
Itase lloenl2 {{s U
Uie{Us 44S U
Uüefl31 444 u
4 lrhatnsll 440 u
UpE 449 u
3
UI 96 U
U? E u

3rt ts4 td{


t{5 H'tr
?45

Fig. 2-S Pagê tor measured vâlues

Nô- on Essibla Conditions / Remarks Type


1 to tve I

ln e gênerator oper- Data are varying during opêration


ement I,T
2
ation data
p on eleme nt ng lhe exten Display ot measured voltâgês o
m sasu rom e nt st 1
4
Opei-tion elemenl seleêling the extended Display ot measured currents o
meâsurement list 2

Table 2-3 Display for measured values

Doc, 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (?005_03 / 0O) 2-7


xâo 05 Panz-GÊ.h / 01,04.05
GPM 500 Operation

2.3 Display pages on the BAT500

2.3,4 Alarm page

+
0uerc'uren[ I Pr+-Hlam 5l Hlarn'
4
lkercumenL I 5l

ACK
ffi
J 2

Fig- 2-6 Alarm page

No. Description Pôssible Conditions / Romarks TyPe


1 Àctive CAN-Bus to Dlsplay Flotates is âlivê I

a rms are the


operation el eme nt o
2 Acknowledge change over tô constanl nd icalion Ala rm
will distinguish.
resst n gth n ê ment you leavê ts
BACK display and l u mps back to the last opened o
Display.
The numbê r at the end of the Alarm is the ANSI- o
4 lndication ol active Alarms code (see section 3.3)

fab|ê 2-4 Alarm Page

The messages ol all possible alarms are shown in section 3 3.

Dôc. 271.19s ssg BAW El'U - (2005'Og / OO) 2-t


(ap_05_Part2-GB.in / 01 ,04.05
GPM 500 Opsration

2.3 Display PaEês on the BAT50O

2,3.5 Selup Page


-@ Ë.i'râêf,*fr #{É}æffi §ÈwJie*@

6
mm
5
ffi 2

4
3

Fig.2-7 Setuq

on PossiEle Condltions / Remarks Typô


No.
c sum -Bus to Botates if lhe CAN-Bus is alive
Display
2 oPe To list o
3 o elemênt
ent nu sr ock, see s.
4 Opêration êlêmsnt Password 4,1 will be opensd and the passwôrd has to b6 o
insêrted.
5 peration nt Event Event I be open o
6
elements selecting German or English o
Lânguagê
7 Peration ement lo adj ust Adjusting the Display brighlness o
ground illumi nation

Table 2-5 Setup

Doc. 271.tgs 99s BAW Ef|/ - (2005{3 / 00) 2-g


Ka! 05 Pad2-qB.,rn / 01 04.05
GPM 500 Operation

2.3 Dlsplay pages on thè BAT500

2,3.6 Number block

I 2

987654
Fig. 2-B Number block

No. Description Conditions / Bemarks Type


1 lndication elem€nt Gives the iniormalion of the momentâry lask I
-Possible rs are indicaled
2 lndicalion element, Data field ere selected nu
Numericâl operation êlemsnts rect on NU rs o
4 Operation element ENTEB Conrirms s num6 cal inputs o
Scrolls the courser position in the dala field to the o
5 Operation elêment, right right
6 Operation elemênt, downwards ênts the numerical inputs o
7 Operation êlèment, upwards lncrements the numerjcal inputs o
Scrolls the co urser position in the data field to the o
I Operation element, lett left
Clears lhê display and iumps back to the lormer o
Operation êlement CLEAR display

Table 2-6 Number block

To 1; The contents of this inlormation element divers with respect momemlary active dlsplay
menu.
Possible informations
Password
irlin., Max.
Name oT Device

Doc. 271.195 9q, B,qW EN/ - (2005-03 / oo) 2-1O


Hap,05-Pârt2-GB.lm / 01.04-05
GPM 500 Operation

2.3 Dlsplay pages on thê 841500

2,3,7 Menu Page Parameter


ffiiffi1w,-q:§!9jflil,trÉ,ia'trr&§4,çtwSgdiffi${itri}'ir'lirïE:rw$âî{:!914+ffiôlâff:rffi§EHm'#]:tll

Parameter
l3 ffi 2

12 ffiffi r
1t ffi I
,0 5

s mffi 6

E ffi

Fig,2-g Menu Page Paftmetet

ooc. 271.195 999 BÀw E§U - (2005-03 / 00) 2-11


kap-05 Pertz Ge.rn I 01 04-06
GPM 500 Opêration

2.3 Olsplay paEes on tho 841500

No. Description Possible Conditions / Bemarks Tvp


e

Check sum and active CAN-Bus to


1 Rotates if thè cAN-Bus is alive
Display

Nominal Values Electrical values oï the gene rator or trans- o


2
former raspectively, sêe Fig, 2-11
Protection Tunctions, ô submênus, 6eê Flg. 2- o
Currsnt 13

4 Frequency Protêction functions, 2 submenus o


5 Loâd Shedding Proteclion tunctions, 1 submênu, seê Fig.2-14 o
6 lnternal Faults 2 fautt lists, see Fig. 2-16

7 Operalion element to return lo Gener- Display for operalion the Diesel-Generalor, o


ator Mimic diagram see Fig, 2-3.
I Earthfault Protectlon lunctions, 2 submenus. o
Protection functions, 2 submenus,
I Synchronising see Fig. 2-15
o
10 Power Protecuon funclions, 3 submenus. o
11 Vollags Protêction ,unctions, 2 submenus. IJ
Nominal values for the speed governor, see
12 Po$/er Control
Fig.2-12
'13 Generator No. ldentilication Values for the Unit, see Fig. 2-10 o

lable 2"7 Menu Page ParaBeter

lf the Power Management Function Load Monitor is implementêd two additional pages are
provided (see Fig 2-35 and Fig. 2-36).

ooc. 271 -i 95 999 BAW EN/ - (20OtO3 / 0O) 2-12


Kap_C15_Pan2_GB,h / 01.04.05
GPM 500 operation

2.3 olsplay pages on thê BAT500

2.3,8 ldentity page


Miti:llôiffi',.§Epfiit;§riii]:"rÈïrr»l':5!È,.ÿ,iryrari;**XilFÀ&îÈi$&ÿi{$dl&{-tsffi4.4!"$iâçltslrs'F;E:

ldent§

ffi
ins{0,

ffi
S!,Yitch{n rêlisso
læIout-starl
iLdFffi relesE
ffi ffi
Un.uo

6 5 4 3

FE.2-1o ldenw page

No. iption Fôssi=ble


Corr<litione / Remarks TyPê
Check sum and CAN-Bus to Botates il the CAN-Bus is allve
1
Display
t th s eleme nts respeclive num es
ldêntificauon Valuos can be set âfter activaling Pressr n s the ln divi du al o
element

Table 2-B ldentity Pags

ln this page, the user can change the displayed device (atter password input). This occurs via
tapping oÀ "Diêselgenerator No," and a new selection ot the device via a selection page'

Dæ. 271.195 999 BAW EM - (2005_0s / 00) 2-13


Kâp-o5_Part2,GB.lû / 01 ,04,05
GPM 500 operation

2.3 Oisplay paEes on thê 841500

2,3,9 Nominal Values page


§ffi w,i!fi #wsÿRiffifiæfriÉniIffi !ffi #Éeætaff ffi;il'ë@

,|

Nominal Valuer
I faEe
CurfeüL
klt
Eucrs 2
lM'!sEÊ
sffi uilËE
Fr in/l
ïBU5E0
ssD
Hrl
6 /IsêD
Hrl
Fig.211 Ndninal values pagte

No Dæcription Possiblo Conditions / Remarks Typê


I
Check sum and active CAN-Bus to Rotates it thê CAN-Bus is alive
Display
At this êlements thê respeclive numbsrs/values
Nominal Values cân be set atler âctivating, pressing ths indi- o
vidual elêmenl

Table 2-9 Nominal Values pagê

Doc. 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (?005_03 / o0l 2-14


Kâo-05,Pà.t2_GB,lm / 01 .04.0§
GPM 500 Operation

2.3 Display pages on the BATSoo

2.3.10 Power Control page

Power Control
n 0uer
in (Freq) rl ii T
lg
I
2
lse uldl,Ir ii $ ai
tsl
)

) 5

Fig.2-12 PoweI Contol Page

No Description Possible Conditions ,/ Remarks TyPe


Check sum and active CAN-Bus to Rotates if the CAN-Bus is alivê
1
Display
At this elements the respeclive numbersfualues
Power Controller parameters ând stop o
can be sêt aftêr activâting, pressing ths indi-
delay (atter-run time) viduâl êlêment

Tâble 2-10 Power Control Page

Doc. 271.195 999 BA\,{ EÀv - (20Os-03 / 0O) 2-15


Kap_05_P{t2-Gê-tm / 01 .0405
GPM 500 operalion

2.3 Dlspley pages on thê BAT500

2.3.11 Example lor protection parameter page


l.si!È:i§É{§iiËSffi&ffi m$a1}iÈffi.$&R*i'--E:H,3l$iffijtr# vffi@

This is an example form all parameter pages or protection parameters. Other parameters pages
are build up very similiar.

lnstankneous éTercurent SO]

DEX STP LQ §PR BL IBBB z

5 ffi )
3
IJT IK DEX STP LO SPR BL IBBB

Fig. 2-13 Prctection parameter page lnslantanêous Overcuîenl

No. Description Possiblê Conditions / Rsmarks TyPe


Check sum and activê CAN-Bus to Rotatês if the cAN-Bus is alive
1
Display
2 Configuralion ot functlon code see section 2.5-3.4 o
At this êlom6nts the rêsoective numbersfualuês
3 Trip Vâlues can be set atter activatiËg, pressing the lndi-
vidual element
4 lndicâtion Value of the actual current
Function codes See list below t,o
At thls elàhents the respectivê numbèrs / values o
6 Trip values cân be set, see Fig. 4

Tade 2n1 Protection parameter pagè lnstan'laneous Overcurrent

Ooc. 271.195 999 BAW EtU - (2005.03 / 00) 2-15


K.p_05 PalrLGB.lû / 01 04,05
GPM 500 Operatiôn

2.3 Oisplay Pâges on thê BATsCo

2.3,12 Preferential Ïrip Page


5flÉtÿ.trÆf{{*ffi }ixll$Êi$4û§BHmBuigtitsrEÊs..'cf.ffi tlsffi {8

P rêferôntlal Trlp

ÏI n Tf,
3
ÏI n rf,
.,|f,
XI n
TI n ïf,
XI n ffi Tf',
2 5 ËË H Éü B ,ü §

Fig- 2-14 PrelerentialfuiP Page

EêsiEiEE6iiilions / Remarks Type


No.
sum and activê to Rotates iÎ the CAN-Bus is alive
1
Dlsplay
2 n ue of the actu current
con sumers are assigne d by ring
3 Unimportant Consumers, tripping values different DIO modules. The valu ars change- o
âblê alter log in

fable 2-12 Preferefltial TriP Page

2-17
ooc. 271.19s 9s9 BAW EIü - (2005-03 / o0)
(âp_o5_Pan2-GBlm / 01 .01,05
GPM 50O Operation

2.3 Displ.y pages on the BAT500

2.3.13 Synchronism check page


ffitg§gwFir*r'@

gynchronlsm chBck [25]

Èl Io
ffiï
s
æT B tfiur-
f 0
MI n
60.8
60,s 5
I ffi 2

3 TR DEX STP L8 SPRIBL IBBB

Fig. 2-15 Synchrunism check page

No, DÊscription Possiblê Çonditions ,l Remarks Typê


,l check sum and actlve CAN-Bus to Rotates i, the CAN-Bus ls alive
Display
2 Configurâtion o, funclion code with Hex- Opens thè number block to activale protection o
code ,unction
this êlsmênts the function codes for Engine
lndication oï tunction codes Fâilurês can be selected after activating function
code menu
at tnis elernents the respective numbers/values
4 Release values can be set atter activating, pressing the Indi- o
vidual êlêment

Table 2-'13 Synchronism check pâge

Doc- 271.195 999 AAW EN/ - (200s_03 / 00) 2-18


Xâo 0s Pa LGB,Iû / or-o4.os
GPM 500 operation

2.3 Displây pages on the 841500

2,3,14 lnternal failures Page

lntêmal fellurês 1

I I

l-Iril
3
rill
È
2

Fig. 2-16 lntêmal tailurcs Page

l,lo. Descrlptlon ToseiEleEonditiono / Rêmârks Typê


Check sum and activo CAN-Bus to Êotates if thê CAN-Bus is alive
1
Display
on ol with pêns the block to activate on
2
n ex-
tu nction
o
code
3
lndi-Aiiôn oiilternail
rradware and The function codes, OP, Protection I
respêctive lunction code§ Eunction is activated

Table 2-14 lnternal failures pâgê

Doc. 271.195 999 BAw EN/ - (2005'oa / 00) 2-19


Kap 05-PaÉ G&rn / 01.04.05
GPM 500 operation

2,4 Swltching on GP[4500

2.4 Switching on GPM500


ffiytrËg9iæ"r.r{È#"f,§n§*ilHilà*ffil!'(-.âffiÉfffit1f,1§]S$Silt fq':rir.'riq*;I.l[. {f5.fir#f§ffïilliif,:Èl'iÉ lt-}ri..îjâfiiMl'êJEii*Êù}

Prior to initial operation, the technical safety and operational safety regutations are to be
observed, sBe section 2.'1.

Switch on power supply for GPM500 on the switchboard panel.


A switch on test is running when booting up thê GPM500, the program softwarê of the ZKG500
module is started. ThB BAT500 initialises and its Comm-driver is loaded.
The Overview page (Fig. 2-17) appears.
At the ZKG500 Module the LEDS PWR and FIUN iluminate.
At the BAT500 the green LEDS "Unit in operation" and "Communication OK" iluminate.

LEDS on the modules:

zKG500
REL. Flelease Switch on release
PWR. Power Power supply of CPU (5V) is o.k.
RUN Running Programm ist running
ERR Error Summary failure

9to500
01 -04 Digital Output 1 - 4 lluminated if set
11 - 14 Digital lnputl -4 lluminated if set
15-18 Digital lnpul 5- 8 lluminated if set

GOV500
Dl r Dig ilal lnput lluminated iT set
Dt 2 Dig ital lnput lluminated i{ set
DO1 Dio ital Output lluminated if set
DO2 Diü ital Output lluminâted il set

SLE5OO
SYNCHBONIZING Synchronizing Synchronisation in progress
WATCHDOG Wâtchdog lliminated if alive and O.K.
c.B. oN Circuit breaker on Output command to c.b.
BREAKER.ÏRIPPED Circuit breaker tripped Failure

Doc. 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (2O05-O3 / 0O) 2-20


Xao OS P.n2 GB.iô / 0r,04.05
GPM 500 Operation

2.5 Operationsequêncê§

2.5 Operation sequences

ln the following the operation sequences are described lor a DG set. For other applications the
sequences are corresponding.

2.5.1 Starting and Stopping of a Diesel-Generator-Set in manual mode

2,5.1.1 General

Thê ready for slart condltions have to be fulfilled:


- The diesel engine has to be ready .for START and no fault has to be active. lndication
READY FOR STABT is shown at the BAT500.
- No lault has to be active.
- Thê operating môdê selector switch at the switchboard has to be set to the Position
MANUAL / AUTOMATIC respectivêly. See the indication at the BAT (upper left corner at
the display).
- The bar (Fig.2-1719) rotates and signals that the CAN-bus between the GPM500 and the
BAT500 is alive.

2.5.1.2 Starting a DG-Set in manual mode via the BAT500

The BAT 500 shows the mimic diagram lor operating the DG-Set, see Fig' 2-17. ln the upper
left corner the information element (1) shows MANUAL / LOCAL. lt is only possible to start the
diesel engine (prime mover) via the BAT:
Precondition:
Thêre is no blackoul at the swttchboard. The
diagram Operating the DG-Set (Fig. 2-17) is 1 3

shown- The DG-Set and generalor breaker ÿ ÿÿ


are ready to start (5, 6, 2).
- The ready for slart conditions have to be
tffiffi 4

{ulfilled, see 2.5.1. 1. UÉO 0


- Touch the operating element START (2), 5
lgslPPàLor
- The confirmation page opens (Fig.2-18)
e5Ê

- Touch the opèraling element START (2-


.18/3)
I c E
0 wg rEÈC
to contirm the start request. f ST ffiI 0. B ê 7

ffi ffi
fluczs

Fig. 2-17 Overview

Doc. 271.19§ 909 BAW EN/ (2005{3 / 00} 2-21


t(âr_05_Pa(2_GB,rm / 01.04.05
GPM 500 operation

2.5 OpoÉtlon soquênces

- The mimic diagram ol the DG-Set (Fig. 2-


17) opens again. The opereting element
START is llashing during run-up. The DG- I
set is starting.
- The display shows the actual operatjng Pleese Eonfirn
data, voltage, f requency.
- The generator-breaker l2-17/6J remains in
open position.
The start sequence is terminated. Synchro-
nising and closing o, the generator-breaker
ffi
have to be carried out manually from the
assigned switchboard panel.
3 2

Fig. 218 Confirmatlon page

2,5.1.3 Starting a DG-Set in manual mode from the switchboard panel

Precondition:
There is no blackout at the switchbôard. The ready for start conditions have to be furilled, see
2.5.1.1. To slart the diesel engine:
- Press the respective push button START at the switchboard.
- Tho diêsel engine runs up to idle speed.
- The generator does not synchronise, the generator breaker does not close.
- Synchronisation and closing the breaker as well as load sharing has to bs carried out
manually trom the swilchboard.

Doc. 271.195 999 BAW El.t/ - (2005{3 / 0O) 2-22


xàp o5 Pa.r2-GB.lû / 01.04.05
GPM 500 Operation

2.5 Operationsequences

2.5.1.4 Stopping a DG-Sel in manual mode via the BAT500


w3*B&NdliifiÈEi.#rqfii;§Sif$n#§ft!:i+E&rrriranêc,!i!.{,r}i{É!isarà{,:{rridt§.8§$&wftïJ:r13:
Precondition:
The diagram Operating the DG-Set (Fig' 2-19)
is shown. The DG-Set is running and the
generator breaker is closed (6,2). The BAT
500 shows in the upper left corner the infor-
+
lffiailÂrl
Lrocrr
t+
IEffi
mation element 0) MÀNUAL / LOCAL. lt is
I

only possible to stop thê diesel engine (prime lllaifls 440 U É8. û Cæ ls
mover) via the BAT as lollows:
- The generator should be manuâlly D lese lgeftr'at or
unloaded and the generator breaker
should be opened before. 1s 734 k
0 7
CAUTION lomEcted

In case these conditions are


nol fulfltled the generator-
breaker opens immediatelY'
8

E
Flg. 219 OveMiew

Touch the operating element STOP (3),


The confirmalion page opens.
Touch the operating element STOP to confirm the stop request.
The mimic diagram of the DG-Set (Fig.2-19) opens again. The operaling element sToP
(3) is flashing àuring the stop sequence. The stop command is given to the D6-set imme-
diatly.
The display shows the actual operating data' voltage, {requency.

2.5.1.5 Stopping a DG-Set in manual mode from the switchboard

Precondition:
No fauh is active. The analogue instruments are showing actual operaling values. To stop the
diesel engine:
- unload the generator manually with the rêspective operating devices at the switchboard.
- Open the generator breaker manually from the switchboard
- Press the respective push button sToP at the switchboard. The stop command is given to
the DG-Set immêdiatly.
- ln case oI emergency:
- lf available press the EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton, or
- press the respective push button sToP at the switchboard without unloading and
disconnecting the breaker.

Doc. 271.195 gm BAW Efü - (2005"03 / Û01 2-23


Kap-05-Pan2-CB,lfr / D1.0405
GPM 500 operation

2.5 Opergtlonsequence§

2.5.2 Stârting of a Diesel-Generator-Set in automatic mode


w1$isrrB$ïelEïÉfiFtîrJ§ôôqÊ.it,iir$EË.?ùüÊ.§t*.&:i+:inf'r1,,:Èf,{ï,6f,.irJiiiæi*itrj- rrÈ1si

2.5,2.'l General
W&1*:l&{ffiii?firgi§É&.Æ11#giil&ltïffiff;eeiiurëïiffi:3:ffi§#31§t§i!r*i;:;:*ii/i$;;Èff#tÆ;a;ia,}i"ÈÉ&5 .F§Æà4#â}6flSüIiijBs&tru1f#gl#

The ready for start conditions have to be fulfilled:


- The diesel engine has to be ready lor START and no ,ault has to be active. lndication
READY FOR START iS ShOWN At thE BATSOO.
- No fault has 10 be active,
- The operating mode selector switch at the switchboard has to be set to the Position
MANUAL / AUTOMATIC respectively. See the indication at the BAT (upper left corner al
the display).
- The bar (Fig. 2-2018) rotates and signals that the CAN-bus between the GPM500 and the
BAT500 is allve.

2,5,2.2 Starting a DG-Set in automatic mode via the BAT500

Precondition:
Therê is no blackout at the switchboard.
Diagram Operating the DG-Set (Fig. 2-20) is
shovÿn. The DG-Set and generator breaker
are ready lo start (5,6,2). The BAT 500 shows I__r_
Iffi§ENE
in the upper left comer the information
elemenl (l) AUTOMATIC / LOCAL. The DG-
68
Set will be stafted via the BAT as follows: 0

- Touch the operating element START (2), l} 1EÉÈlqEn€rator

- The confirmation page opens (Fig. 2-21)


ls 0
- Touch the operating element START (Fig. Reâdu f0 §InRT
I m0
0,0
2-2113) 1o confirm the stârt request. t t
- The mimic diagram ol the DG-Set (Fig. 2-
20) opens again. The opêrating element
Iffi
SIART is flashing during run-up. The DG-
set is starting
Fig. 2-20 OveNîew

Ooc. 271.195 999 BAW Eli/ - (20os-0s / 0o) 2-24


Ka§ os,Pan2 GÊ.lB/ oI M.05
GPM 500 Operation

2,5 Operâtion sêquences

- The display shows the actual operating


data, voltage, lrequency.
- The indication (Fig. 2-2015) signals that
the breaker is wounded up.
- The DG-Sel is now in the synchronising
Fleese mnfirrt
sequence.
- The (Fig.
generator-breaker
connects automatically,
changes into connected position.
the
2-2016\
symbol
ffi
The stari sequence is terminated. The system
carries oul load sharing.
I
Fig. 2-21 Confirmation page

2,5.2,3 Starting a DG-Set ln automatic mode from the s!ÿitchboard

Preoondition:
The be ready for start condilions have to be ,ulfill6d.
To stad the DG-Set:
- Press the respective push button START at the switchboard.
- The diesel engine runs up to idle speed.
- Watch the enalogue instruments, Voltâge and frequency ât the switchboerd panel.
- The generator synchronises and the generator breaker connects automatically after a
successf ul synchronisation.
- Load sharing is carried out automatically.
The start sequence is terminated. The system carries out load sharing'

Doc. 271.195 999 BAw EIV - (2oo5{3 / 00) 2-25


Kâo 05 P{t2 GB.lm / 0r.04.05
GPM 500 operation

2.5 Operâtlonsequênces

2,5,2,4 Stopping a DG-Set in automatic mode via the BAT 500,

Precondition:
Diagram Operating the DG-Set (FiS, 2-20) is shown. The DG-Set is running and the generator
breaker is closed (Fig. 2-20/6,2). The BAT 500 shows in lhe upper left corner the information
element (Fig. 2-2011) AUTOMATIC / LOCAL. lt is only possible to stop the diesel engine (prime
mover) via the BAT as follows:
- Touch the operaling element STOP (Fig. 2-2013),
- The con{lrmatrôn page opens.
- Touch the operating elemenl STOP to conlirm the stop request.
- The mimic diagram of the DG-Set (Fig. 2-20l'1) opens again. The operating element STOP
(Fig.2-2013) is flashing during the stop sequence. The DG-Set is automatically unloaded
and the generator breaker opens. The diesel engane runs in a cooling down soquence.
- The diesel enginê stops.
A restan is possible every time
The stop sequence is terminated. The DG-Set is ready fôr the next start.

2.5.2,5 Stopping a DG-Set in automatic mode ,rom the switchboard,

Precondition:
The DG-Sel is running and the generator breaker is closed. No fault is aclive. The analogue
instruments are showing actual operating valuês. To stop the diesel engine:
- Press the respective push button STOP at the switchboard.
- The DG-Set slarts dêgreasing its load down to a minimum.
- The breaker opens automatically.
- The diesel engine runs in a cooling down sequence.
- The diesel engine stops.
A restart is possible every time
The stop sequence is terminated. The DG-Set is ready for the next start.

Doc, 271-195 9S9 8AW EN/ - (2005{3 / 00) 2-26


KaD 05 Pan2 GÊ.tô / 01.04.05
GPM 500 opêration

2.5 Opêrationsequenoes

2,5,3 Parameterisation
WglùSÉB$:àsffiffiSgTrrf.fii1{&êJ:i1l]ilr/.1&S€tî;Ël*}.rk#F,;*ïr}i!Srdl**fi"ftïSH"-.11#rrÉr!*{t"STl[afi&

25.3.1 How to input the password.


reffi;È@
All values, nominal values , parameler or func-
tion codes âre password protected. To change
one of these values the password has to be
input before.
440 U 6[
Precondition:
The display shows the mimic diagram OpeÊ l€Êe lgH{erètor
ating the DG-Set (Fig. 2-22):
I 0 ?r4
- Multiple louching (3x) the right arrow 0
L,
element to open the page setup (Fig. 2-
23).
- Touch the oporating element Password.
Fig. 2-22 Overyiew
- The pagê Number Block (Fig. 2-24) will
be opened.
- lnssrt ths password using the numbor
blôck (3), or use operating elements (7,8).
rE
- Using the number block: the Pass-
word is input directly. The password
is not directly shown in the left upper
element (2). After entering the pass-
mm
word the operating element ENTER !
has to be Pressed and the Page nld t
setup (Fig. 2-23) opens again.
- Using the operating elements (Fig. 2- Fig. 2-23 sêtup
2417,8). With the operating elêmenl
(8) the lirsl digit oI the password will I 2
be selected and input. To input the
second digit lirst the oPerating
element (8) has to be pressed again,
than the element (7) has to be
touched as often as the value ol the
digit is. The third and all the other
digits have to be input in the same
way as explained before, first the
position ôl the number with element
(8), than the digit with the element
(71.
987A54
Fig. 2-24 Number block

Doc. 271.195 999 A,AW EiU - (2005-03 / 00) 2-27


KaP-05-Pdl2-GS.'m / O!,04.05
GPM 500 Operation

2.5 Operalion sequences

With the operating elements (Fig.2-2415,6) the setting is made in the opposite direc'
tion. After entering the password the operating element ENTEH has 10 be pressed
The page (Fig. 2-23) setup appears again and the Password is aclive.

NOTE:
An access lor not authorized persons has to be avolded by imme'
diate log out after parameter modifications,
An automâtic logout is performed atter some minutes without
touchingl

2. ,3.2 Hory to input or to change nominal data

The nominal technical data of the respective devices havs to be input during set to work, or after
a change of devices, Under normal operation conditions it is nol possible to change any data in
GPM500, they are Password protected.

CAUTION
The change of data may be dangerous. The operator has to know
thë concept ot the sy§tem.

Precondition:
The display shows the mimic diagram Oper-
ating the DG-Set (Fig. 2-22), the password Parameter
has 1o be input before:
ffiffiffi ffi;ffi
- Touch the operating element MENU, the
ffiffi
page Parameter (Fig. 2-25) opens.
- Touch e.g. the operating element "Genêr-
ffi!ffim
ator No." to open the page ldentiÿ (Fig. 2- ffi
26). ffi
ffi
Fig. 2-25 Parameter

Doc. 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (2005-03 / 00) 2-24


Kap_os_Parr2 GB.rh / 01.o4.o5
GPM 500 Operation

2.5 Operationsequences

Select one of the identification elements


(Fig. 2-2612) yôu want to change. The 1

page Number Block (Fig. 2-27) opens.


ldênüty

ins-llo,
il
iffi
tr
Switch{n râltaar
æt L-$tü't imffi
itdFüil rel€üe

Fî9. 2-26 ldentw


Using the number block you pui in ths
wanted value directly. The new set value 1 2
is shown in the upper left area (2). Here
you get also the inlormation about the
rangê ol the possible velues to be input.
The momentary set value is also indicated
herê.
3
After entering the set value the operating
element ENTER (4) has to be pressed.
The page ldentity (Fig. 2-26) opens again
and the new inserted value is visible at
the respective position and is active in the
process. s87A54
Fig. 2-27 Number block

2.5.3.3 How to change Parameters

Most of the parameters are parameters of thê protection functions. these paramelers are limit
values and tieir corresponding delay limes. The correct use ol parameters ensures proper and
save operation of the total system.

NOTE;
An access for not authorized persons has to be avoided by imme'
diate log out after parameler modificatiôns.
An automatic logout is performed âfter some minutes without
touching!

Dæ. 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (2005'03 / 00) 2-25


Kap_05_Pad2-GAh / 01 04.05
GPM 500 operation

2.5 Operation sequences

Precondition:
The display shows the mimic diagram Oper-
aling the DG-Set (Fig. 2-22), the password Parameter
has been inpul before;
LcltüüffiË-hffi mfitË;çf&eE
- Touch the operatrng element MENU, the
tffiffi}üe_n ffi*rffi-Etw
page Parameter (2-28) opens.
- Touch e.g. the operating element
trgfiffisl ,EJffi[H!*i*ffi
'CURRENT' to open the page Cunent ffi41
Instantaneous Overcurrent (Fig. 2-29) ffiffi'Ëffi{
ffi
Fig. 2-28 Parameter
Select one oI the identification elements
(2,7,9) you want to change by touching.
Th6 page Number Block (Fig. 2-30)
opens. lnst.trilEn.ous oYôrEunônt ËO)

STP Lq BL
) 2

v
EX §TP LQ BL

il

Fig. 2-29 Instantaneous Overcurrent

It is only possible 1o change one value in


the line at once (in this example the ,|
2

percentage of current or the valuê of the


delay time). Using the number block you
input the wanted value directly. The new
set value is shown in the upper left area
(2). Here you get also the intormation
about the range ol the possible values to 3

be input. The momentary set value is also


indicated here.
After entering the set value the operating
elêment ENTER (4) has to be pressed.
The page ldentity (Fig. 2-29) opens again s87854
and the new inserted value is visible at
the respective position and is active in the
process.
Fig. 2-3O Number block

Doc. 271-is5 999 BAW EN/ - (2005-03 / 00) 2-30


Xap_05-Pân2-GB.h / 01 0..05
GPM 500 operalion

2.5 Operation sequences

2.5.3.4 Horrv to activâte / deactlvate the function codes.


ffi.Kffi"tdtraÈtr[Eâtffitt ifii]l§§{aîfîtr*lâ&f;f1},i#Fiâ.liils§}rniill,:':{,t"i!r{.Êii§ïr*ïBxi§ÿ:l!ilt:#iii!8f&;l;}lfxrPitlts$s6l}l&#lg{ip

The function codes (Table 2-15) represents individual satety lunctions i.e. lhe consequence il
lhe limit value has been reached for the adiusted time. The tirst page which shows ïunction
codes is Çurrent, lnstantaneous Overcurrent (Fig. 2-29). There are 2lines each of them With 8
different function codes.
CAUTION
Generally, the functlon code OP has to be activated flrst, other'
wise the other function codes are not active.

Function codes:
Prolection functions actions may be parâmeterised to fit to the situation:

Code Description (hex)


ln OPe rotection nction ted. 01

TBip ould trip in casê fault. 02


EX : Generator n casê It
engrne
LO uil: must bê resêtted bY re input ( 10
Passi n s on e atte generâtor to be 20
SPB
stopped afte the ri me set lor
BL must bê 10 cease p command, deexcitation com mand êtc. 40
BBB Bus lôck: No uld be on this busbal

Table 2-15 Funclion codes

Precondition:
The display shows the mlmic diagram Oper-
aling the DG-Set (Fig, 2'221, lhe passwôrd Parameter
has been input beTore:
fffiffffim ffiffiffiffitr$
- Touch thê operating element MENU, the ffiffi ffi$el
page Parameter (Fig. 2-31) opens-
- Touch e.g. the operating element ffi ffiffiw
'CURBENT'. (3) to open the Page ffi
Current lnstantaneous Overcurrent (Fig. ffiEÏHffitrü
2-32)

,ln::-,1

Fig. 2-31 Parameter

Oo.. 271.195 999 BAW EÀv (2005-03 / 00) 2-31


Kap 05 Panz,G8.tm / 01.0a,05
GPM 500 operation

2.5 Opèrâlionsèquonces

Selecl one ol the conliguration elements


(Fig. 2-3212) of the line you want to intlu-
ence. The page Number Block (Fig. 2-33)
opens. lnstütËnêous ovËrcurênt (50)

6 t&\fl! \
slP LQ ;ËËfELFBB 7

3
ffiffi ffiry
OP TR DExlsrP LQ sPRl sL FBB
/

Fig. 2-32 lnstantaneous Overcurrenl

ln the upper left comer the momenlary


active hêx-code and the possible min/maY I 2
values are indicated. The area for the
next inputs is flashing.

NOTE
ln this menu all values are 3

hexadecimal values, To acti-


vate individual combination
ol function codes the respec-
tive value has to be calcu'
lated by adding the individual 98735'l
hexcodês,

Fig. 2-33 Number block

ln the function code list (Table 2-15) you see the column value, hex. This values are hexa-
decimal numbers. Each of the mentioned Iunction ôôdes have lheir own hex-code number.
The basic hexadecimal counting is, 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,8,C,D,E,F. The numbers 1 - I have
10 be input with the number block or using touch element (Fig. 2-33r). The letters A - F (10
- 15) have to be input only using touch element (Fig.2-33r). After entering the conligura-
tion code you leave the menu by prêssing the ENTER (Flg. 2-3314) touch element.
NOTE:
An access lor not authorized persons has to be avoided by imme'
diate log out after parâmeter modifications'
An automatic logout is performed after some minutes without
touching!

A ljst of all parameters incl. Iunction codes is given in Annex B

Ooc. 271.195 999 BÀW EfV - {2005'03 / 0O) 2-32


Kâo 05 Pan2,GB]h / 01 .04 05
GPM 500 operation

2.5 Operationaequencês

2,5.4 Power Management System, load monitor (option)


n*9iLti#§{tittw4imùi
æ*Èg{ÉÂÈT.{Èff

lf lhe optional powgr management load monitor function has been implemented, two additional
pages are available on the BAT5O0. ln addilion five pages already described under 2.3 with
supplements and slight amendments are also available.'
PMS function on the menu page (s. Fig. 2-34)
- tl§18t9
Touch the oporating element PMS, the Parameter
page Power Management (Fig. 2-35)
opens.
ffiffi
The PMS user inteface comprises two pages.
The first page shows the perlormance dala
ÊWffi ffi
and the stipulation of the start and stop limits ffi
for load-controlled starting and stopping ôl
dies€l generators (Fig. 2-35). Consumer-
W
Ëffi
specilic data are entered in the second page
(Fig. 2-36).
mmffi E
Fig. 2-U Parametêr

The maximum available power (Pmax), the


currently-available reserve power (Pres), the PorYâr llhfiegËmÊnt ct6/Ii[g
required consumer power (Pr"o) and the
current actual powar (P.") âre shown. Fnàx TEEû KIilWffi
The power reseryes and start delay times are
preset in the Startl and Start2 backgrounded
FME ztI HrF
kltfrïJPyT
5Ég làmsrult mdÊ
rut EB HI
areas. lf the limit of the pre-set reserve power
talls short beyond the pre-sêt delây period, the 5iüll M' lI 5
genêrator allocated will slart ffiH*, 5
furt2
ffi**
ffi m
SLm §

Fî9. 2-35 Power Managemênt 1

The power reserve in the stop backgrounded area is accordingly pre-set subsequant to the
conespondlng generator being switched off, and when the power resewe is excêeded beyond
the pre-sst delay time it will trigger a switch-oif of the corresponding generator'
The ACTIVE/inactive seledion item is used to stipulate for each generator whether it is active
under power management or not. The mode select l------ selection item is used to stipulate
whether special digital input and output (selector switch) is available lor selecting the operaling
modes (= mode select). Otherwise, i.e. on preselecting with the Modbus, --------- witl be indi-
cated.
ln the mânoeuvre mode indicator lield the operation mode of the manoeuvre modus is indicated

ooc. 271,19s 999 &qw EN/ - {2005-03 / oo) 2_33


Kar 05 PariLGB.ln / ot.o4.o5
GPM 500 Operalion

2.5 Opêrationsêquences

ln the powêr managemenl 2 page the rated


apparent power (Pres) of up to 6 consumers is Powêr MaflâgËment CIE/SE
entered.
In the câse of a positive value only one
Cors
Cors ?
1
ffi* ffiui
iffiH;* ffiffi
RI IR

impulse lasting one second will be generated f,t ln


for the switch-on release of a consumer. 3
Ëffi** ffiE
Entering a minus sign before the reserve
power figure will enable the oulput ot a
steady-rate signal for the switch-on release of
EorE 5
4
.ffi*% Hr ln
nr lf,
flr lR
a consumer, so that the switch-on release [du

mm m
6
nt lf,
signal will be put out until connection has been
made or until lhe reseru€ power is no longer
sufficient.
Fig. 236 Power Management 2
The second paramêter is the transmisslon
ratio of the cunent lransformer.
Since the load monitor function is spread over
several appliances, consumer entries can be
made on several GPM 500s, so that it will be 4/tS U 59
possible to conectly allocate the consumers to
bus sections. Die5ÊlgffÉràLor

On the homepage the priority cod€ number lor


the start can be inlluenced with the hêlp of a
t 0
lfl,l
"P+" and "P-" button. Comêct€d
/
Settings can be selected between 0 and 7.
The prioriÿ code has the greatest influence
when determining starting priority (besides
rmllàBfEr

m
operation hours and âggregate no.) Fig. 2-37 DG Sat

An operation mods ôan be selected with the


"topload'touch key in which the generator is
charged with up to 80% ol ils rated power. At
2
967
n
R
u:
lhe sâme time the other aggregates are th ltÉgê thênl1 4{t u

ffi
Uôâr23 4{2 U
unloaded up to the paramêterised minimum Uqen3t 413 U P-Llntt t2I
rltu4
'tiffil
output. lira lfis t2
r,ls
On the measured values page, thê available EM ul
ul
output of a generator ôan be varied between Ib$êr rct lue 7$ ldllHÆ#sl
100% and 0% of the râted power (90o/" in the reôot iue l{6 kuF
:ffiâFEnt ?19 kU[
example). The load monitor only uses avail- (-
able power for its calculations and the active
load is distributed accordingly. ffiffi
&Erelibh hFç E0u
ffim
I 23456NSn 0

Fig. 2-38 Measured values

Doc. 271.195 999 BAw Ehÿ - (20os{3 / o0) 2-34


Kap-05-Pa,E-GE / 01.04.05
'm
GPM 500 Service

3.1 Satety nôtes


.rd-E,'È@Àr-

3 Service

3,1 Safety notes

1. The GPM500 modules must be instâlled by the responsible, trained personnel only.
2. The applicable satety, environmental and operating safeÿ regulations must be obeyed'
3. The constructor must obserue the accident prevention regulations in accordance with the
statutory Provisions.
4. The repair work on and in the units must be carried out by the personnel only having been
specially trained for this purpose.
5. lt is to be ensured that the meâsuring inputs ol the GPM500 are voltagê-free and dead
respectively. special care is to bê taken in connection with the terminals marked red.
6, l, maintenance and repair work can be carried out only il parts of the unit / of the equipment
ars under tension, then at lea§t the following additional measures are required:
- lnsulating cover ol the parts being under tension.
- Presence ol a second, trainsd person who, in case of danger, can switch off the equip-
ment and provide aid.
- Use of insulated tools.
- Working on an insulaled standing surlace.
7. When replacing the assemblies the following salety regulations are to be obsêryed:

CAUTION
Eleetronic assemblies can be damaged, if they are replaced
during operation. Assemblies are to be rePleced only with powel
ofll
ln doing so, it must be borne in mind that the GPM500 has got two
redundant supplies.

Due to the fact that the installation of an assembly at a wrong mounting position might
cause damage to the equipment, the following procedure is to be applied:
- Heplaoe only one assembly each' BeIore inserting the new assembly it is to be made
suie that the iumpers of the new assembly are correctly set. For this purpose, the
Jumpêrs must be compared to the corresponding figures.
- Defective assemblies must be marked as such at the front panel, e g. by mean§ of an
adhesive label.

Doc. 271.195 999 BAW EN/- (2005_03 / 00) 3-1


XâD 05 Pa,l3 GB.tm / 0r-04.05
GPM 500 Service

3.1 Safety ngtes

CAUTION
THIS UNIT CONTAINS ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES.
OBSERVE THE PBECAUTIONS DURING HANDLING IN ACCORD.
ANCE WITH DIN EN 61 340-5-1!

The GPM500 modules contain components (MOS) being sensitive to electrostatic


discharges (ESD). They might be destroyed or pre-damaged in case of an improper
handling. The pre-damage does not necessarily lead to an immediate failure, but il might
permanently change a component and considerably shorten its life. ln order to avoid this,
they must be protecled by appropriate technical and organisational measures.
The corresponding handling rules as per DIN EN 61 340-5-1 are to be observed.
Further fundamentals with respêct lo the handling of electrostatic sensitive devices are
contained in DIN EN 61 340.

8. Fuses may be replaced only if the circuit has been switched off.
9. Spare fuses must have the same electrical values.
10. lf a fuse has been replaced or a miniature circuit-breaker has been switched on again for
the first time and the equipment fails again, then the cause of the failure is to be eliminaled
before re-staning the equipment.

Dô.. 271,1S5 999 BAw EN/ - (2005{3 i OO) 3-2


Kao oS Pa.l3 CIA im / O! 04 05
GPM 50O Service

3.2 Care and Mâihtenâncê

3.2 Care and Maintenance


. } ffii&ryjÉSj-,.Si4*.Iff;:jlia:*iâ$+4[trjfl{friwâ§Wllslij'"jiÉ415'}ii*! tl!rg§'t!§' è''ȧSff;mÀ&i
+i.rB'{4w{,*ffi!!''è it,{a64i

3.2,1 Care
ll1$I§B@iirffi
r +q*È,qæEæ'ffi æWrqFqlffijs@g*t,n{{irriryffi

3.2.1.1 Check ol sufficient ventilation

Periodica y (monthly) it is 1o chêck and to ênsure that the cooling of the modules end the
BAT500 is sufficient and not disturbed by dirl.

3.2.1.2 Cleaning lhe Surface of BAT500

A CAUTION
Thê BAT50O must be cleaned using a soft cloth and a neutral
cleaning agent only.
Do not use any solvents.

Doc. 271-195 009 BAW EN/ _ {2005_03 / 0O) 3-3


Kap-05_Ptl3_OB,tn / 01 .o4.o5
GPM 5OO servicê

3.3 Frllur6 idêntiticâlion

3.3 Failure identification


ü,rfi'gtï..*l{Er§:!*!Eg#i{i!:aliiffi]&1,*r;a$t*:l*gælui.wt$*

ln the following all possible alarm messages are listed:

Int. Messagè list ANSI code


Fail.
No,
001 Overcurrenl lnstantaneous 1 50
002 Ovêrcurrent lnstantaneous 2 50
003 Stator protection 50
004 Overcurrent 1 51

005 Overcurrent 1 Pre-Alarm 5l


006 Unbalanced Current 46
007 Unbalanced Current Pre 46
008 Undervoltage 27
009 Undervoltage Pre-Alarm
010 Ovên oltage 59
011 Overvoltage Pre-Alarm 59
012 UndeÉrequency 81L
013 Underfrequency Pre-Alarm 81L
014 Ovedrequency 81H
015 Overf requency Prè-Alarm 81H
016 Reverse Power 32
017 Rovorse Power Pre-Alarm 32
0.18
019 Prelerential Trip I -l-
020 Preferential Trip 2 -!-
021 Preferenüal Trip 3 -t-

022 Prelerential Trip 4 -!-


023 Preferential Trip 5 -t-
024 Earthfault 51N
025 Eârthfault Pre-Alarm 51N
026 Displâôement s9N
o27 Displacement Pre-Alarm 59N
028 Field failure 40
029 Field fâilure Pre-Alarm 40
030 Underload

Ooc. 271.195 999 BAW ÊN/ - (2005-03 / 0O) 3-4


K.D,o5 Pat3 66.1m I 01.04.05
GPM 500 Service

33 Fallurêldenliticalion

lnL Message list ANSI code


Fail.
No.
031 Underload Pre-Alarm 37

032 Diff erential Protection a7


036 Linebreak EMERGENCY-STOP
o41 Overcurrent 2(IDMT) 51

o42 Overcurrent 2(IDMT) PRE 51

043 Startlailure -l-


o44 Stopfailurô -!-

04s Blackout-Start -!-

046 Phase lailure / PSB -t-

o47 SYNC tim6 25


048 Breaker Failure 62BF
049 Voltage-NEc 1 27s
050 Voltagê-NEG 2 27§
051 CAN0 iailure -!-

052 CAN1 lailure -!-


053 CAN2 failure -!-

054 cAN4 failure -F

055 Checksum FLASH -t-

056 Çhecksum EEPROM -!-

057 Checksum Prolection SW -t-

058 Diesel tailure -!-

059 RS485-failure -t-

090 Eârthfault, ditlerential 87N


091 Earthfaull, ditf. PRE 87N

Rernark: Code -l- not defined clearly in ANSI

Doô. 271 .1€s s99 B,qW EN,/ - (2005"{3 / 0o) 3-5


Xâp,O§-Pa*3-GB,h / O ,0r.05
GPM 500 Service

3.4 Componenlreplâcemênt

3.4 Component replacement


{H*f.W.rTffi;ii?#+!ËllH{eEl*98*&g,ææÈS1frr,.r}-Frtu}:lr.!ai.i7.ieT*&g$!{ffi.§Sq$f;d$@tr,tN$îI*r mft*ir.ffiEJffiE4{tütü#3*m$§f,§

3,4.1 Replacing fuse plugs

WARNING
It avoidable, do not \4,ork with power ON!
Apart from that, obsêrve the regulations lor work on live parts.

1, Untasten connector (1) and pull out.


2. Unlasten and detach casing cover (2) with
the aid of a small screw driver.
B
3. Pull out casing cover incl. eleôtronic board
A
(2) Irom casing. o
4. Carefully unrasten and pull out luse plugs 1

D
on slectronic assembly with the aid ol
tweezers.
5. Carefully insert new identic Tuse plugs
with the aid of tweezers.
6. Attach casing cover.
7. lnsert connector, pay attention to coding
in doing so.

Fig. 3-1 Construcüon ot Modules

Ooc. 271-195 99s BAw El.U - (2005-03 / 00) 3-6


K.p,ô5,Pan3 G8-lm / 01.0a.06
GPM 500 Service

3.4 componentreplacement

3.4,2 Replacing detective modules

3.4.2,1 lnstallation in General


W&ffi{&-{-:jr,iô+rffii.ffi ,{$ihe&ffi!q#§}1I

Prior to the Beginning ot lhe lnstallation Work


- Disconnect the switchboard trom the supply'
- Provide â safeguard to prevent unintentional re-closing'
- Verify the safe isolation lrom supply.
- Earth and short-circuit.
- Cover or sateguard adiacent parts being under tension.
- observe lhe given mounting notes.
- With respect io this uniysystem operator action is allowed by the corespondingly qualified
personnel only.
'During
- the installaiion work attention is tô be paid that the personnel is statically discharged
berore it touches the switchboard'
- Connecting leads and signal lines are to be installed such that the Tunctions are not atfeoted
by inductive ând capacitive interferênce.
- Protective relaying equipment and its conlrols are to be instailed such that they are
protected against the accidenlal operation'
- To avoid thàt a break of a lead or of a conductor strand on the signal side can lead to unde-
lined conditions in the protection system, thers are 1o be taken Gorresponding safety
precautjons on the hardware side.
- Às far as the 24 V supply is concerned, a safe el€ctrical separation of the extralow voltagê
is to be ensured.
- variations and dêviations of the system voltage from the nominal value respectively mu6t
not exceed the toleranco limils given in the technical data. Otherwise, functionâl lailures
and dangerous conditions cannol be excluded.
- EMERGENCY-OFF devices in accordance with lEc/EN 60 204-1 must remain effective in
all operating modes of the protection equipment. unlocking ol the EMEBGENCYOFF
devices must not lead to an uncontrolled or undefined lestart.
- Take precautions so that after voltage djps and voltage failures the interrupted program
can be correctly resumed. ln this connection lhere must not occur any dangerous
"x""riion
operating conditions, not even lor shon time. ll necessary, EMERGENCY-OFF is to be
eniorced.

Doc, 271.1s5 999 BAW El'U - (200s_03 / 00) 3-7


kao 05-Pa 3-G8.in / 01.c4 05
GPM 500 Service

3.4 Componêntreplacement

3,4,2.2 Dlsmounting modules

WARNING
lf avoidable, do nol work with power ON!
Apart trom that, observe the regulations for work on live part§.

separate modules
1. Separale modules, until the deïective
module is accesslble.
2. Pull out groovêd pins.

groovêd
pin

Fig.3-2 Connecting the Modules Using Grooved


Pin

3. Pull ôut the tour connectors.

Fig. 3-3 Position of the lndividual Connectors

ooc. 271-195 999 BAW Ei.Ù - (2005-03 / O0) 3-8


xap 05 Pân3 GB i6 / 01 .04,05
GPM 500 sêrvice

3.4 ComponentiêPlâcêmênl

Dismounting:
1. Pull down to open the ctip'on catch with
the aid of a screwdriver.
2. Detach the module at lhe botlom edge oT

tha top-hat rail.

Fig. g4 Dismounting modulê

3.4.2.3 Mountlngmodules
"æ.€tËI

A
Mounting:
WARNING
lf âvoidable, do not work with power ON!
Apart ,rom thât, observe the regulations tor work on live parts'

1. Put the module with the top-hat rail guidê


onto the top êdge ot the top-hat rail.
2. Press the module down and let it snap into
Placê.

Fig. 3-5 Mountîng module

Doc. 271.1sS æ9 BAw ElÙ - (2005"03 / 0o) 3.9


r5p-06-P6 3 GB.lh/ 01.04.6
GPM 500 Service

3.4 Component rcplâcêment

Connecting the Modules


1. lnsert the grooved pins (DlN 1474 3 x 16
mm).
lnsert at least 2 grooved pins into the
upper two blind holes. lt would, however,
be better 10 insert 4 grooved pins into the
upper and lower blind holes.
2. Push each module against the neigh- grooved
bouring module untll the modules lie next Pin
1o onê ânôther.
When the modules âre connected to one
another, then the intemal CAN bus
connection is established, too.

Fig. g6 Connecting the Modulês Using Grooved

All GPM500 assemblies are equipped with a plug coding.


AII GPM500 modules are connected by mêans of 4-pole connectors. When coding with two
coding pairs each (clip/coding pin) the following 6 possible combinations are obtained:

Term inal
coding number 2 3 4
'I U U
2 R U U R \
R R U U e
4 U R U F
5 U R B U
6 R U R U

Fig. 3-7 Detailed View of a Plug-and-Socket


Çonnectîon

R = Clip on the board connector


U = Coding pin on lhe connector

Doc. 271.195 999 BAW Er.U - {2005-03 / 0O) 3-'10


Kap, 05-P..i3-GS.lh / 01.0t.05
GPM 500 §ervice

3.4 Companânl loPlacêinênl

ln the opposite figure the position ol the indi'


vidual connectôrs is shown.

Fig.34 Posîtion of the lndivklual Connêctots

ln the tôllowing table thê coding of the plug-and-sockel connections is given by the above-
mentioned coding numbers (l -6).
Ptugand NEG502 resp. SLE SLE
DCC 510 / 501 ZKG Dro GOV TBV DIF USS
socket connec- lett right
lion lêlt right
J 5 '1
5 3 1 5
A 1 I

B 2 D 4 2 o 4 D 4 2 b

5 3 I
c 1 5 3 1 3 1

4 6 4 6 4 2 o 2
D

3-',11
ooc. 271 .l 95 99e BAW EN/ - (2005_03 / o0)
(.! 0§ Pân3-6s.tÉ / 01 ,04.09
GPM 500 service

3,4 Componentrêplâcêment

3.4.3 Wiring ol the Modules


§là§{ffirlh"Éî}wt$iw8eeffirÉi,1?rr}EdtrEâi,#sfrrëùJlillm9ftfilri#â".i:1ii.t-È.}*i6!+@r?.i*s§wtitrriT}."'Ëiq1!1{.r&f§!,'}âê3*düÊiaiû1

WAHNING
Do never u,ork with power ON! Danger to lile!

The modules âre equipped with connectors. This uray the uhits can be quickly connected and
visibly disconnected in case oT need.

CAUTION
Conneclors musl be plugged or withdrawn in the dê-€nergised
condition only!

Use a screwdriver with ân appropriate blade


L [mm]
width of approx. 3.5 mm tor wiring.
Strip the line ends according to the f]gure to
obtain a reliable and shockproof connection. fl
Fig. 3-9 Sfipping the Line Ends

Cross-section of the flêxible linê Tightening torque Stripping length L


Imm'] AWG lNml [b in] lmml
o,2 - 2,5 ?4-14 - 0,6 4,4 - 5,3 7

3,4,3.1 Descriplion ot the Terminals

Modules ZGK500, GOV500, DlO500, TRV50015011502, DlF500, DCC500 and USS500 have
got 16 external terminâls each.
Module SLE500 and power supply module NEG502 and combined power supply module
NEG50.l/510 respectively have got 32 externâl terminals.
The detailed terminal assignment is given in Annex A.

Doc. 271.19s 99s BAW EN/ - (2005-03 / 00) 3-12


Kap-os-Pà.r3-GB.lô / 01.04.05
GPM 500 s€rvice

3.4 Compqnêôlreplâcsmrnt

3,4.4 Replacing oi the BAT500


ffiÀr#gËi*s

3.4.4.1 Dismountlng of the BAT500

WARNING
ll âvoideble, do not work wlth Power ONI
Apart from that, observe lhe regulations lor work on live perts.

1. Disconnect connectlons on the rear side of the BAT500.


2. Hold the BAT500 on thê front side and 1

unlastên the four clamps with fastening


screws. (Fig.3-10/1).
3. Detach BAT500.

o o

Fig. 3-10 Rear Sîde ot thé BAT500

Ooc. 271.195 999 BAw EN/ - (2006-0'j / Û0) 3-13


Kâo 06 Pârtlr-GÉ16 / 01.04.05
GPM 500 Service

3,4 Componentreplscêmenl

3.4.4.2 lnstallation of the BAT500


Mftflffimfi,li@,3'i.Siîfrlffi§r:iq].t,.;:rilr,G..{-4l4fi,3HF.,r"Irrg{ibl?,ÀT1{t:t#ii!t!ji',iLËir-Él$J.qB#tfiil$

CAUTION
Do not use any etching chemicals during the installation.

Do not use any tools (screwdriver or similar) to work on the


display ol the BAT500.

lnstelling the Seals


Two strips (1 x narrow, 1 x broad) of sealing material are used as seals.
Nanow seal:

This strip is inserted into the mounting cutout


into which the BAT500 will be installed later.
1, Start to fit the narrow seal approx. in lhe
middle of the lower edge.
2. Fit the seal in the clockwise direction.
Make sure that the seal has a sufficient 112
clearance.
3. The two ends of the seal must not narrow seal
overlap.
Fig. 3-11 Fitting the Narrow Seal
- Replace the seal every time the BAT500
is dismounted.

Broad seal:

This strip is fitted at the BAT500 directly


behind the bezel.
1. Start to fit the broad seal approx, at one
third of the lower edge.
2. Fit ths seâl in thê clockwise direction.
llake sure that the seal has a sufficient
clearance.
3. The lwo ends oT the seal must not b seal
overlap. Fig. 3-12 Fitting the Broad Seal

- Replace the seal every time the BAT500


is dismounted.

Ooc. 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (200s-03 / 00) 3-14


Kao 05 Pàrt3 Gg.lm / 01.0rr-O5
GPM 500 Service

3,4 Componell rêplacement

lnserting the BAT500 into the Mounting Cutout


1 . Insert the BAT500 with inserted memory
card into the mounting cutoul.

Fig. 3-13lnserting the BAT510 into the Mounting


Cutout

2, Attach the Tour clamps with faslening ,l

screws and tighten them. (Fig.3-14/1).

o
tÉs uE-u q-e o

Fig. 3-14 Boar side of the BAT500

tnserting the Memory Card


tf the BATSOO has not been dslivered with inserled, programmed memory card, attention is to
be paid to thê following when inserting the memory card:
- Handle the memory card with care when inserting it into the BAT500'
- Prior to the installation the contacts on the memory Gard must be clean. All impurities
câused by oil or grease must be carelully removed.

CAUTION
lmpuritles on the golden contâcts of the memory card can lead to
malfunctions ot the electrical contacts.

The memory card must not get in touch with any chêmicals
becâusè in case of contact this might cause a pelmanent damage.

The use ol synthetic cloth might cause a permanent damage to


the memory card because electrostatic discharges ere caused.

Do nol touch the contact surlace with your fingers.

Doc. 271.195 999 aaw EÀl/ - (2005'03 / 00) 3-1S


Ba9_05-Pân3_GS,fm / 01.04 05
GPM 500 Serÿice

3.4 Componant replacemênt

ll the memory card is to be removed and to be transported, the transpott is to be carried


out in an anti-static conlainer

1 . lnsêrt the memory card in the slot


provided tor this purpose on the rear side
of the BAT500 lrom below. ln doing so,
the contâcts must be visible from the rear
side.
2. Following lhe insertion the interlock of the
slot is to be closed. t
Fig. 3-lS lnseiing the Memory Card

Activating the Battery


ln the scope of delivery there is inoluded a battery. In the condition as delivered the battely is
deactivated by means of a red plastic strip.

1 . Remove thê red plastic strip.


This way the battery is activated.
2. When the 24V DC voltâge has been
applied, the red LED is illuminated twice
and then extinguishes.
ln casê the LED is Tlashing the battery is
tô be checked.

Fig.3-16Battery wilh the Red Plastia Strip

Removing thê Protective Film

NOTE
Thê BAT50O can be operetêd also with the protective film on it-
For this reason, do not remove the protective lilm until after
completion of all work steps.

1 Loosen the protective film at the front at the places marked with'REMOVE',and completely
remove il.

0o..271.195 9SO BAW EN/ - (2005-03 / 00) 3-16


(.p-05_Parl3_GB.'ô / 01 O.a.Os
cPM 500 service
3.4 Componêntrêplacement

3.4.4.3 Connection of the BAT50O Operator Control and Display Panel


rÈ&fl"4i,Êii3:ffi§i!ffiffii1üi§Bt#r&:d!:iâ:iflr&ti$,nT*as9&ltBl"EqiiriËft@-n?jE.s{4iÉ1§MiE8r*dx',f

On the rear side the BAT500 has got one


power supply connector (POWER) as well as
threê further ports:
tr
- AUX port (for the CAN bus connection to
the ZKG500)
o o
- PLC pôrt (not used)
- Pc/printer port (for programming)
H
=
AUX PORT PtC POBT PC PRINIER

Fig. 3-17 Pods on the 841500

The power supply connectors are shown in tho


opposite ligure.
The BAT500 must always be earthed.
+24VDC L+ o I Lr
Common M o 2 M

PE9 o o

Fig. 3-18 Power Supply Conneclors


The power supply must have a double or a N
reinforced insulation.
All electrical components o, thê system musl
be earthed.
I I
I
I
I
Earthing must be in âccordance with the valid,
I
applicable regulations.
NOTE
In case of non+erthed 24 v systems
I
the BAT500 is to be supplied on a
floating besis with a DcC500 because
the BAT500 establishes a connection
between M and casing.
Fig. 3-19 Ëarthing

Doc. 271.195 gsg AAW EfU - (2005-03 / 00) 3-17


Kâp_O5_Pà(3-GEln r 01 0,t 05
GPir590 gàrvièér
gr.{ crmponÊtt r!daËqtü!!

Gôtrnecthg thê AUX Rrt


TheAUil porrk a,g-polê sl.]b D pôrt. The cabte éf ttre §)lN bu§ (tq ttls NEG rnodule, 8AN4) te
to .bs pnil@tÊd b the AUX pqrt ThË hus ls to, §e teminatod via e 1â0 §l' rBsistB.t êt $e
EAT500"Thô u§§ of the pretandsited g/rNopen oablE{ldentiy No.9fi.1e$.464) with integrated
tenniridino resistor is lecornmends.d,.,

Pin As6i0Irqom
2 OÀN -L
6, iâAN . OND
7 gÀN -H

oori ê71.196.rthÈ'aAvÿ Én * (ffiû1lo0l riil8


(td-l,Crrl!Ç-qqInt I fl;0106
GPM 500 Service

3.4 Component replaêEment

3.4.4.4 Jumper settings o, the modules

ZKG500 assemblY ium rs

J11
c
DUIu
r-[r-T I n
l t3
E
mm fl- t
m I]
!J7 E
- -l
L]
ffi JÊ (

E J5
u! I E
EE
E !
12" EI
E! i,i J
E

EE
E

Flg. 3-2o ZKG500 assamblY iumqers

These iumpers are not set âs a standard.


J2 and J3 are the jumpers required to activate the RS-485 bus lermination impedances.
l{the RS-485 intedace is connected at the end of a bus, both jumpers must be set'
Setting the J5 iumper deactivates the monitoring lunction oI the watchdog lC'
This prevents the cPU, on downloading or in a test run, {rom ÔÔnstantly receiving re'set signals
lrom ihe watchdog lC. ln standard operation the CPU will generate cyclical signal changes for
the watchdog lC, so the J5 will not need to be set.
The connection of lhe RS-232 interface to the CPU is made wilh J6 and J7'
These lwo jumpers must be set for the program test via the RS-232 interface'
The connection between the debug/download interface (BGND) and the resel entry of the cPU
is made with J1o. These iumpers must be set for the program tesvdownload via the BGND inler-
face.

Doc. 27t,195 999 BAW EN/- 120o5_0s / 0o) 3.19


Kap os_PàÉ-GA-lm / 01 04.05
GPM 500 Service

3.4 ComponêntBplacement

The J1 1, J.12, J13 and J14 strips are used to impede the CAN buses (0, 4, 1 and 2) (120 ohm
bus termination impedance). To this purpose two iumpers must be set on each oT the respective
§trips.
While CAN0 and CAN4 are generally not impeded, the bus for CANI and CAN2 on th€ other
hand are to be impeded for the GPÀ/ bus if the GPM is at the end ol the bus.

D10500 assembly lumpers

J4
,ffil,
lE
ffi m fililililililililil
m ffi ffi
B ffi
JI
=
a\l : il rffiiFlr
ftd :.
Ë J3

o
L-J
E ffi !EL--1
U 5l
rE

Fig. 3-21 D10500 assenbly jumpers

The Js strip slipulates how thê DA relays react when the watchdog relay is released.
Pins 1-2 bridged: all of the DA relays are disconnêctad by the watchdog relay (supply ol
connectêd 24 volts). Standard setting.
Pins 2-3 bridged: no etfêct on the DA relay (supply of supported 24 volts).

Ooc. 271.195 999 BAIY EN/ - (2005-03 / 0O) 3-20


K:p o5-Pa 3-GB.lm / 01.0,1.05
GPM 50O service

3.4 ComponentrcPlacêment

The Jl, J2, J3 and J4 3-pole strip§ are used lo preselect whether a break contâct or a
make
contact for the resPectiva DA channel i§ made to the output terminal'
the make
Bridging pins 1-2 will lead through the break contâct and bridging 2-3 will lead through
contact.
terminals
The +pole strips J11, J12, J13 and J14 are used to presetect whether the DE channel
the purpose of monitoring line breaks of adiacent
t to 4 àre selt-contained or whether they serve
channel terminals (5-8).
monitoring
Pins 2-3 bridged: the respective DE channels are sell-contained without a line-break
device.
Pins 1-2 and 3-4 bridged: the respective DE channels are programmed lor line-break
moni-
toring.
ThecANbusisimpêdedwiththeJ6striP;thisishowevernotnecessaryfortheGPM.

GOV500 assem umpers

Jt0

I
I
tl
4 )
!tr, J I
i

J
t t
ffi Jll
!!n ffim
ffi
E
E
fJ5
lIIiEIalt
al
E !

Fig.3-22 GOV500 assemblY iumqeÉ

oæ 271-195 gss SAW Elü _ (?00t03 / 0O)


3-21
Kâo 05,Parr3 GÀlô / 01.0,1.05
GPM 500 Service

3.4 Componenl teplacênent

ln the case ot the bridged pins 1-2 of the 3-pole J5 strip {default §€tting) the higher/lower relays
are released when the watchdog relay is released (elay supply by means of connected 24
volts).
ln the case of bridged pins 2-3 on J5 the release ot the watchdog relay has no sffect on the
"higher/lower" relay (relay supply by means ol supported 24 volts).
Jumper lor configuration oI the analogue outputs:

Jumper name Channel 1: J3 (3-polê) Js (2-pole) J10 (2-pole)

Jumper name Channel 2: J4 (3-pole) J7 (z-pole) JB (2-pole)

0 bls +10 Volt termlnal: 1-? set 1-2 set 1-2 set

-'10 bis +'10 Voll terminal: 2-3 sêt 1-2 set 1-2 set

0 bis + 20mA lermlnal: 1-2 sot nothing set nothing sot

-2o bis + 20mA terminal: 2-3 set nothing sel nothing sêt

The intemâl cAN bus is impeded with the Jt 1 strip; this is however not necessary for the GPM.

Doa 271.1S5 SSg AAW Elÿ - (2oo5-o3 / 0O) g-22


(a, 05-Pân3-Oetô / 01 04.05
GPM 500 service

3.4 Compônentrêplacemênt

TRv500/501 assembly ium s

Ei Dt
E
ffi@ffi@
[üg ffiH C tl r--
8BJ9 rT-rÛ E
E
ffS lt L,UA
mJ7
mJ6
mJ5 ! E-
!
@J{ ftLl
mJs E
mJ2
ffiB Jl

Fig. 3-23 TRVSOO/âo' assembly iumryrs

Jumpers are used to connect lhe three output signals of the TRV500 wilh various bus connec-
tion pins or with external supply terminâls.
It is always necessary to ',chenge over" the output channels if several TRV500S arê operaled
together on the analogue bus.

Jumper namê: Function (iI the iumper is set):

J2 Connects channel 1 with X7.3/4 (U3) stândard setting

J5 Connêcts channel 2 wllh X7.1/2 (u2 ) standard setting

J8 Connects channel 3 with X6.10 (Ul )standard setting


J10 Connscts channel 1 with X3.2 (lerminal 3)

J11 Connects chânnel 2 with X3.3 (têrminâl 2)

J12 Gonnects channel 3 with X3.4 (terminal I )

ooc. 271.195 990 sAw Elu * {?005-03 / 0o) 3-23


xâp_os_Pâ'E Ga.lm / 01.04.05
GPM 500 Service

3,4 Component replacement

TRVs02 assembly jumpers

tr
E ! n
ffitfrfr
ffi,tg E
@.tt E
rrf:l
Lf.-l Br r[:]
r a-.1 LEl
@J7 ü
ffilr ! (
C
@.ts Dr
æEI J4 rlr
@J3
ffiJ2
@J1

Fig- 3-24 TRV502 assembly jumpeÆ

ln the case of the TRV502 module the iumpers are set on delivèry, so that channels 1, 2 and 3
are not connected tô the analogue bus, but to the respective output terminals (J10, J11 and J12
are plugged instsad of J2, J5 and JB).

CAUTION
lncorrect iumpering must be avoided since this could result in
damage to the connected modules. J2, J5 and JB must not be
iumpered on thê THv502!

Ooc. 271.rss S99 BAV/ EN/ - (2005-03 / O0) 3-24


XâE 05 Pad3 G8.lh / 01 04 05
GPM 500 Service

3.4 Compgnênlreplâcemânt

SLE500 assembly lumPers

J?
E!Û!@EE
E!![ EElu
!!t! nEE
!![u D[!
-
Etl E
Dt_l tl
J5 Dn
J E mm
I
E
ü
! E J2
4 liEr-----l -
,ffii-J
r
E
)

E
D

Fîq.3-25 SLE500 assemblV iumqe$

Setting ,umper J5 will result in impulses from an oscillalor being transmltted to the watchdog lC.
This wili deactivate the monitoring function ot the watchdog lC. This deaclivation prevents thê
CPU, on downloading or in a test run, trom constantly receiving rB-set signals lrom the
watchdog lC.
ln standard operalion the CPU will generate cyclical signal changes lor the watchdog lC so the
J5 will not need to be set. These jumpers are nol set as â slandard.
The connection of the RS-232 interface to the CPU is made with J6 and J7.
Thêse two jumpers must be set lor the program test via the RS-232 inlerface. These iumpers
ar6 nol set as a stândard.
The conneclion between the debug/download inlerlace (BGND) and the resel entry of the cPU
is made with J1. These iumpers must be set for program test/download via the BGND interface.
These jumpers are not set as a standard.
The CAN buses (O and 4) are impeded with the J4 and J2 strips, which is not always the case
with the GPM.

Ooc- 271.195 s9§ gA!^l EN/ - (20o5-o3 / 0O) 3-25


Fap-05-PârB-Ga.lû / 01.o,{.os
GPM 500 Service

3.4 Component replâcêment

SLE510 assembly iumpers

E D
E
E
IE
E fn

IEre'
J1
illt1lililLllillilill

fl
,im ffi J5
m3
I
JS'm
J6
Effi []
E
C E
J1
J2
J3
L
Fig.3-26 SLE510 assemblr iumPers

power
Jumpers J4, J5, J6, J7 and J8 are usêd to Set whether the output cÔntacl of the "oFF
switch" relay is to be a make contact or a break contact'
- All of the jumpers sel on 1-2: relay contact is a brêâk contact (for low-voltage \4,inding)
- All ol the iumpers set on 2-3: relay contacl is a make contact (for shunt release)

The release time ô1 the self-sufficienl excess current monitoring dêvice is set with iumpers J1 ,
J2 and J3:
- J1 set: release time = 200 msec.
- J2 set: release time = 360 msec.
- J3 set: release time = 510 msec.

DM 2?1.1s5 999 BAw EN/ - (2005-03 / oo) 3-26


xap_05_Pâ.r3 GB,lm / 01.04.05
GPM 500 Service

3,4 Componenl rèplacemânt

overview of relevant Jumpers


Equlppsd
Card Jump6r Functlon
Delivered
zKGs00 J2
aclivation of RS-485 bus te.minaling resistors
ül
J5 Disable Mon of watchd

lor connection of Rÿ232 interfacê lo CPU


J7
Jt0 for connedion between download interfâcê and cPU
J11 termineliôn ot intemal CAN bus
J't2 temination of extemal CAN bus 4
Jt3 1-2
for terminaton GPM bus cANl and CAN2
)14 1-2
NEGs00/501 J1 1-2.34 fôr termination of intematCAN bu§ 0
of internâl
NEG51O J3 eâ of htemal
Dlo500 J1 2-3
prcseleclion if in erch câse ot DA chanoel a normally closed contac,t or
2-3 normalty open contad is passed to the outputterminals
J4 2-3
1-2 determlnation of DA Éâctim dud gf vratchd rcl
J5
J6 termination of bus NO
Jll
J'12 2-3 presêlection if DE dÉnnel clamp§ I .4 are independent or gerÿe as \Nire

J13 control of its neighbouring .fiânnels clamps +8


J14
GOVs00 Jt
J2 1-2
2-3
conliguration ot analog outputs
J1 1-2
J5 1:2 settjnq if 'high€rlo$æi' relays drop out when watchdog relay drop6 out
J7
J8
configurâlion of analog oüputs

Jl0 't-2
Jll lor termination ol intêmal CAN bus 0)
TRV500/501 J2 1-2 conneals channel 1 with X7.ÿ4 (U3 )
1-Z connects cl|annel 2 with X7.112 lU2l
J8 connec{s &ânnel 3 \,/ilh X6.10 (Ul
J10 connests channel 1 with X3.2 rminal
J'l t aonnects dtànnel 2 v,lth X3.3 (terminal 2)
J12 connecls cnannel 3 r,rith X3-4 (termlnal '1 )
TRV 502
J5
J8
see TRV 500/501
J't 0
Jtl 1-2
J12 1-2
SLE50O J2
,t-3:24 for termi nâtion of intemal CAN bus {CAN 0)
J4 't-3,24 for têrmination ol intemal CAN bus (CAN 0)
sLE510 JI
J2 setüng fgr releasing the closed over-current control

J4 1-2
J5
setting if output contacl of"power swilah-ON"_relay is a nomally closed
J6 conlact or â normally open côntacl
J7
J8 1-2

*-;6æ--!l=æ

Doc.271.1es ees BAw Efÿ - (2005-03 / oo) 3-27


l(âp_05_Pan3_Ga.h / 01 ,04.06
ANNEX A

Terminal assignment
GPM 5OO

ANNEX A

NEG500 - Terminal Assignment


o Ass ment
'I +24 Volt DC supp
+24 supply voltage
3 0 t (-24v) supp vôltage
0 Volt -24 ) DC supply vollage
5 Volt AC y voltage (11)
19 supply voltage
7 'ls Volt sup voltagê
I a§si unussd
o +24 ôutput p
0 +24 output contacts )
1 0 Do-ouhut voltage
+24 ôutput (filterêd, )
13 CAN4.H
14 al
ND
16

Termlnal Assignment - NEG502 ând combined Power Suppty Module NEG50l/510


Respectively

NEG 5oZ Left and NEG'IO Respectlvely - Terminal Assignment


Nr. gnment
1 +24
+ Vâ stor-p
3 ,24 p
4 +24 Volt {var
5 +24 Volt
6 Volt (varistor-protected)
7 Voll
Volt r-protected)
9 + Volt stor-protected
10 4 Volt (varistor-prote cted)
11 (varistoÊprotecled)
12 +24 It (varisto r-protected)
13 +24 Volt (varistorp rotected)
-14
+24 varistor-protectsd)
15 isto
16 +24 Volt rp

ooc- 271.195 9s9 BÀw EN/ - (2005_03 / 0oI A-2


Kâ, o5-Ar.er_À GÊ,16 / 01,04.05
GPM 5OO

ANNEX A

NEG 502 Bight and NEG501 Eespectively - Terminal Assignment


No
1

2 +24 supply voltage


3 0 Volt (-24V) Dc y voltagê
4 0 Volt G24V) DC supply voltags
5 19 Volt Ac suppty voltage (11)
6 AÇ supply voltage
7 t9 t supp voltage
I Unassigned unused
I +24 Volt output backed-up
'10 ;241o-1ft u-putlordigiEf liputcontacts(varistor")
11 o voit (-e+v) oc output vottage
+24 to u
13 Extern bus: CAN+H
14 External s: CAN4-L
15 : CAN4-GND
16 nassigned /

ZKG500 - Terminal Assignment


No. Assignment
1 nostic contact rmally open contact )
CAN 1 ND
Extern bus: CAN1-L
4 Extern bus: CAN1
5 Diagn c relay contact rmally open co
6 External : CAN2-GND
7 rn L
I al
I og input c annêl 1 + (0-..+10
10 input c 2 + (O-..+1
11 alog lnput 3 + (0...+10V)
12 n ôg input channe -(G
85 bus:
14 bus: +S/E
15 bus: Ê ND
16 Dig output +24 V optocou pler

ooc.271.195 999 8AW EN/ (200s_o3 / O0) A-3


Kap,05-Ann.LÀ-GB.h / 01.0,{.05
GPM 5OO

ANNEX A

GOV500 - Terminal Assignment


o. ignment
1 motor cônnection (DC / Ac motoo
2 motor connection (DC / AC motor)
3 GOV motor conn on AC motoo
4 motor connEction motor)
5 +24 (internal, up)
6 0 Volt (inte
môtor y (+24V
I G motor suPP (0v / L2)
Digital put chann 1 +24 V) sensor contact connection
10 igilal input chann 1 Ein sensor contact connêction
11 gital input channe +24 v) sensor co ntact con n cti o n
tnp ut c annel 2 nPut) sensor contact ôonnêclion
13 output (reference Pôtential)
g output 'l (outpul)
15 oulput 2 re nce al)
16 An output 2

DlO500 - Termlnal Assignment


o. t
I rg output chan contact normally sed contacl or no rmally open contact)
2 output 3 contact (norm Iy contact or nor mally open contact)
output nnel 4 contacl (no closed contact or norm open contact
3
rg output c annel 4 contact ( closed contact or n open
5 Di output ch annel 1 contact norm contacl or n open contact)
6 Digita output chann
'l contact normally contacl or normally oPen contact
7 Dig output ch contact ly ôsed contacl or nor mally open contact)
8 Dis oulput contact norm contact or not open contact)
o '1 (or opsn rcuit c ann 1)
Dig input ch
10 Digil al np ut ch anne 2 o o Pen rcuit ch annel
cl
11 nput chann or opên rcu it channêl
12 Diqital input chan or open clrcu it channe 4)
13 Digilal ut channe 5 or input uê channe
14 lnpul channel 6 or input ue chan
 rg linput ânnel 7 or Inp ut valuê channel 3
6 lal input nel 8 or inpul value ânnel 4

A-4
Doc. 271.195 999 8ÂÿV EIU - (2005"03 / O0)
(rp-os-a.n.x A-O8.{d I 01.o4.o5
GPM 5OO

ANNEX A

SLE500 - Terminal Assignment


No Assignment
1 Watchdog relay contact (normally closed contact)
2 Watchdog relay contact (normally open contact)
trllarchOog relay contâct (common)
4 CANO-GND
5 - Not assignêd -
6 rmtn
7 Circuit-breakêr ON contact
Circuit-breâker ON conlact
9 - Not assigned -
10 - Not assigned -
11 lnternal current rmer lerminal K3
lnlsrnal current tranÿormer terminâl L3
li, Digital inpul channel 1 (+ 24 Volt)
14 Digitâl inpul êhannel I (input)
Dlaital input chânnel 2 (+ 24 Volt)
16 Digital input channel 2 (input)
17 USl (external vollage input o, buftêr ampliteo
18 US2 (external vollagê input ol bulfor amplifieo
19 2,5 Volt (anatog refêrence voltage)
20 2"5 Vol(analog refèrence voltage)
2'' Digital input channel 3 (input)
22 Digltâl input channel 3 (+ 24 V)
23 Digital input channel 4 (input)
nput annel 4 (+ 24 V)
25 lntern current transformer terminal L1
26 lntern current mer terminal K1
27 lnternal currênt transfolmêr terminal L2
28 lnternal current translormel terminal K2
29 Circuit-brêaker ON (normally closed contâct)
30 Circuit-breaker ON (common)
31 Clrcuit-breaker ON (normally open contact)
32 Circuil-breaker ON enabling

Doc. 271.195 tx,g BAW EN/ - (2005-03 / 00) A-5


Kâp 05-anôà-A-GB.Im /ol 04,05
GPM 5OO

ÂNNÉX A

TRV500 - Terminal assignment


No Assignment
output channel 1
Analog ôutput channel 2
Analog output channel 3
4 Fleferencê voltagê (2.5V) for analog outputs
- lnput channel 3 (V3)
6 - Unassigned -
7 - Ünassigned -
I + lnpul channel 3 (U3)
9 + lnput channel 2 (U2)
10 - unassigned -
11 - Unassigned -
'13 + put channel 1 (U1
14 nassigned -
t5 :nÀàssigned -
16 - lnput channel 1 (V'l )

DlF500 - Terminal assignment


No. Assignm6nt
1 Current tansiormer input Ll DlFl (11 = lD1)
2 nênt translormer K1 DtFl (11 = t
3 Current translormer nput L2 DlFl (12 = lD2)
4 rrent translormer input ( = tD2)
Currênt trans{ormêr input L3 DlFl (13 = lD3)
6 Current transformer input K3 DlFl (13 = lD3)
7 - Not con
I - Not con
I Cunent tran rmer input L6 F2 3)
10 Current lran nput K6 D
'tl - Not con
12 - Not conn
li, Currênt rmer input L4 DlF2 11 = 1
14 Çurrenl translormsr I nPut K4 DlF2 (ll = I 1

15 fiênt trân rmer rnp ut DtF2 (t2 = lE2


T6 urrênt lranstormer put DtF? (12 = tÉ2

Ooc. 271-195 999 AAw EÀV - (20os_03 / 00) A-6


Xap-o5-Ànnir-a-GB.lm / o1 .0d.05
GPM 5OO

ANNEX A

USS500 - Terminal Asslgnment


No Assignment
'1
U coil terminâl (+)
ndervoltage coil termin (+)
3 Und terminal (-)
sco
4 nderÿoltage coil ter n
lnput contact supply (-)
t) lnput contact sup
7 lnput contâst (coil side
8 (coi sids)
I - Not
10 systêm 2
11 L2 system 2
12
13 ot assigned -
14 Ll system
15 L2 system l
to system 1

DCC500 - Termlnal Assignment


No, AssEnmer*
1 +24 Volt external supply

0 t êxternal su
4 0 external su v
6 +24 external suppl}i
6 +24 external suPP|Y
7 0 Volt axte supply
0 exte supply
I 0 Volt
10 0 Volt outpul
11 +24 Volt output (wilh àt r)
12 +24 Volt i oulput (wilh ermistor)
13 ls output
14 isolated output
+24 isolated outpul
16 +24 output

Doc. ?71,195 999 BAW EN/ - {200s-03 / 0O) A-7


Xâp-06-a.nêx-a-G&lm / ol .04.05
ANNEX B

List of Parameters
GPM 5OO

ANNEX B

Param. Llmlt value Delay tlme Funct.


No r/"1 Isl codê
Limit / Set-
ANSÈ Mln" Itlin. Mâx,
Max,
dslay / Palameter description / tunction tlng Remarks
Code valuê value value valus IHEX,|
F-code
112J101 lostantaneous Overcurlent tep 1 50 0 800 0 10 I
3t4t',t02
5/6/103
lnstantaneous Overcunent (Siep 2)
Stdtor 50s
50 0
3
800
't00
0
0
10
10
II
lat104 Overcunent definite the 51 100 400 0 240 I
240 I
7
s/10/105 Overcurent defi.it€ timo PREAIARM 51 100 400 0
11h?,1c6, Unbalanc,ed Cunent 46 '10 120 0 240 I
13t14t107 Unbalanced Current PREALARM 46 10 120 0 240 I
'1ÿ16/108 Undervoltaqo 27 100 0 240 I
17t18t109 Undervoltaqe PREALARM 27 50 100 0 240
19/20r'1'10 Overvoltaoe 59 10 æ0 0 240
21n?l',11 59 10 200 0 240
23t24r112 underfrequenô1, ElL 200 0 240
25t26t113 PREÀ.ARM 811 0 200 0 240
27n8,114 overfrgquency 81H 0 20û 0 240 I
29/30/115 Owrfroouencv PREAIARM E1H
-200
0 200
0
0 240
0 240
II
31t32t116 Rèverse
3UUt117 Rêvsrse Power PREALARM 3? -200 0 0 240 I
35/36 spare
- 30 400 0 120 I
I
37t119 Prefàrontial TriD SteD 1
I
I

38/1 19 Preferentiel TriD Step 1 - f 0 100 0 120


39/120 Prêferential 2-l I 30 400 0 II
120
40t120
41t121
T
Fref€rential Trip Step 3 - |
II 0 100
4{}0
D

0 120 I
120

4i,121 0 1m 0
120 I
I
120
43t122
44t1?2,PEfersntial Trip Step 4 - f
4- t II 30
0
400
100
0
0 II
120
45t123 PrefrBrenual Tnp Step 5 - I
46t123 f
I 0 100
400 0
0 120 I
1ZO

47 t48t1?4 Earthtault 10-014I 51N 0 s000 0 2400 I


49t5U125 Earthfault PREALARM lAl 51N 0 5000 0 24@ I
51t5?J126 5SN 0 120 0 24û I
53t541127 Voltaqo Disdacement PREAURM 59N 0 120 0 2400 I
55,/56/128 Field Failure 40 -200 0 0 240 I
57t58t129 Flêld FailuÉ PREALARM 40 -200 0 240 I
0
59/60/1«) Underload 3? 0 '100
0 100 30«)0 I
0
I
0 3000€
61!62113'l Underload PREIAI-ARM
63,/64 Shrt condition 1: Power Limit IkW 0 10000
0 0
0 3600
0 0
I
6ÿ66 rt on 2: Power Limit
67/68 Stop condition: Power Limit kwl 0 30000 0 3600
69 Consumer 1r Max Power [kVA] -30000 30000
70 Consumer 1: Current Trânsf, ratio [1] 0 10000 I
71 Consumer 2: Max Pover lkvAl
Consumer 2: Curent Ïransl. ratio [1]
-30000 30000
0 '10000
II II
72
consumer 3: Max Power -30000 30000
0 '10000
II
II I
74 Consumer 3: Current Transf- ratio [1]
Consumer4: Max Power [kVAl -30000 30000 II II
Constrmer q: Ôunent Transf. ratio ['1] 0 't 0000 II II
Cgnsumer 5: Max Power JkVAI
Consumer 5: CurrentTransf. ratio [1]
-30000 30000
0 10000
II
II
79 Consumer 6: Max Power IkVAI -30000 30000
0 10000
II
II II
80 Consumer 6: cunent Transf. ratio [11
81/82 Overcurent I 1omsl 0 30000 0 3ô0
0 3600 I
I
63 Startfailure
84 Stopfailure 0 3600
0,01
I
85/86 sparê 1 1 1

Doc, 271.19s 9{,9 BAw EN/ - (?OO5.O3 / oo) B-2


Kêç 06 Annex B GB,m / 01,04.05
GPM 5OO

ANNEX B

Param Lirn il valuê Delay time FuncL


No. t"nt lsl codg

Limlt.l Set-
ANSI. lüin. Max, tr4in. tJla[ RenrarkE
delay I P.rameter description / function tlng
cod€ vâluÊ value value valus fl.tExl

87 re 0 240
88._9? sDars
93 Loaa sharinq: Ramp [0, 1 %/secl 0 1000
94I1132 oifferential Protsa. (2,Hamon'rcs 10.1 %l) a7 0
æ 132 Ditferenüal ProtBction ('tu' ) 87 0 800
132EiFerental Protectiôn ('a1" ) t00 800
971132 oitrsrential Protection ('u" ) -800 800
9Ut132 Protredion E7 -600 800
æ 132 Difbrêntial Proteclion ('!2' ) 87 -800 800
100 Stad block s{vst Lr 0 300
133 1 -1000 1000 râted=rc(x'0.01V
2 -2000 2000 rated-oqx'0.01V
134
135 Bltm 0 iFFFF
136 Em 0 SFFFF
't37 §palE 0 0
138 spare o 0
13S spaIE 0 0
'140 sDare 0 0
'141 Stad Att€mpts/ Overcurrent IDMT -Funcl ô6/ 51 0 IFFFF
in Min.
142 Overcumrrent lDlttt PREALARM -Fund 51 0 FFFF
'143 / Stârfâilurê 66 0 iFFFF
114 0 $FFFF
'145 sDar9 0 §FFFF
146 Phasèfailure / NeE. Function 47 0 rrff
147 Svnct[onis. mode / synchronls. failure 0 rTFF
MA Breâker6iurê -FGctlôn 0 SFFFF
149 EG.I unclion 0 $FFFF
150 0 rrrr
151 CrN0 failurê 0 $FFFF
'152 CANl lailurê 0 irrrt
153 CAN2lailure 0 iFFFF
154 CAN4 failurê 0 SFFFF
155 FTASH 0 FFFF
156 EEPROM failurô 0 §FFFF
Protection SOItl,ltAIE lailure 0 iFFFF
157
158 Ememenc"ÿ§toD - Fun 0 iFFFF
159 sparê 0 0
'160 Rated ô 0 15000
161 Devlce No. ,/ Devicè 0 $FFFF
162 Uo No. / Down No. 0 $FFFF
't 63 ttated Cunent lAl 0 32767
1U Reted Powêr KW 0 32767
165 Râtêd FreauencY [0.1 l-lzl 150 1000
Tran - ratio .01 1 16000
166
167 cunent Translormer -râtio [1] prim S 1 30000
168 diiEnt transformer -ratio Ill sec,1 D 1 3«)00
169 urrent r -ratio I sec.2 E 30000
170 Load distrlb. Amplification Power control 0 t 000

171 Load disttib- Amplifi câlion Freq. con!@L 1000


0 '10@
172 Load diskibution Oeadband [0.'t%]
173 Load Pulse 32000
(4 s displayed)
174 I;;a distdbution 0-5 Puhe inteNallmsl 32000
't75 ( static l 0

Dô8. 271.19s 999 BAW EN/ - {2005{3 / 00)


8.3
Kàp,o5-Ann.x-8,êg.lm / 01 .0,4.05
GPM 5OO

ANNEX B

Param Llmit value Delay tlme Funct


No. rÂl ls! code
Limlt / Set.
ÀNSI- Min. lrlâI. lrin. Max,
ting Remârks
delay / Parametêr descriptlon / tunction vàlus valu€ vâlue valus
Cod6 mExl
176 n 'ls 32767 0
1'17 Disolacem. ânole Secondarÿ coil 1 I0,1'l 0
174 ,a coil2 0
179 coil 1 0 1s000
180 0 1500
'181 svnchronisâtion - Phâss Anoh I'l 0 30
182 25 0 s9
183 Svnchronisation - Freq. Differonce [%] 25 0
184 Leütâtion ?5 0
185 -200 200
186 Analoo oubut I SCAIE 9999 rahd=xro«'0,01V
197 Anâloo Oubut2 SCALE ratêdâooq'0.0'1V
18E TF0y' contiouration 0 rÈiF
'189 Bhckout Shrt 76 0 IFFFF
190 Bhckout Start 0.1si 76 0 999
CufientT , ratlo 1 0 1@(
192 conro 0 100
193 EEPROM ûêck sum 0 SFFFF set üa BÀT only
194 of an val 0 32767 set via BAT only
195 §para 0 0 set via BAT only
196 soaIe 0 0 set via BAT only
157 soâre 0 0 set via BAT only
',98 Po{er set value 0 '1000 sst via BAT onv
199 spare 0 0
200 spane 0 0 set vb BAT only

Dô.- 271.195 999 BAW EN/ - (2005_03 / 0o) B-4


Kæ 05 B-GB,ln / 01.04.05
^nôêr
C,.00l

ChapterG. USEHS MANUAL


CIIECK SYNCHROSCOPE
TYPE CSQ-3

TIMSUN
User manual
Check synchroscope type CSQ-3
11893402638 (Utg

lOO *ow o
o
?

Y* EI

. Mufti function, precision LED synchronoscope


. Easy push-button programming of all set points
, Very high user safeÿ
. High immunity to harmonic distottion
a
q
. Dead bus functionality
. Specla/ versio n for marine applications
lJ- . UL approved
tu C(
a NS
DEIF
Fti;enborgvej 33, DK-7800 Skive
Denmad<
lel.:
Fax:
(+45) 9614 9614
(+45) 9614 9615
E-mail: deif@deil'com ffi
List of contênts

1. Warnings, lêgal lnformatlon ând notês to CE'marklng and UL approval.... 3


2. Applicaüon and functionality summary',....,..........'... 3

3, operallon of dlEplay, push-butlons and LEDS 6


7
3.2 Settlngs.........,-.........

Page2ol20 T€1.: (+45) 9614 9ô14. Fax (+45) S614 9615 ' E-mail: [email protected]
User manuâ!. Check synchroscope CSQ-3

1. Warnings, legal information and notes to CE.marking and UL


approval
This mânuâl gives general guidelinês on how to lnstall and operate the CSQ-3'
lnstâlling and operating ths CSG3 implies work with dangerous currenb and
voltageC. Therefore this should only be done by qualified personnel. DEIF FÿS takes
no relponsibiliÿ for operation or instâllation. If thers is any doubt about how b install
or operâte the system on which the CSQ-3 is measuring, the company responsible ,or
the installâtjon or thê operation must be cDntactêd.

The cSQ-3 is CE-mark8d \,ÿith respect to the EMC directiva for residential, commercial
ând light industry plus industrial ènvironment. This covers âll environment types t'ÿhere
the CSQ-3 can normâlly bâ used.

The CSQ-3 is CE-malked with respecl to the low-voltage directive for up to 600V
phâse to ground voltage, installation câtegory (overvoltage cateqory) lll and pollution
dêgres 2.

The CSQ-3 is approved by UL. Please refer to the section "Têchnicâl data' for
inslâllâtion information as requirêd by the UL.

The packâge contains the following items:

. Check synchroscope cso-3 unit


. User manual
. Two fixing clamps
. A plugable connection (mounted on thê unit)
. Cablo for system stâtus output (only marine version)

2. Application and functionality summary


The CSQ-3 check synchroscops is a microprocessor-based synchronising unit
providing measurement of all relevânt values for synchronising a generalor to a net
(busbar). lt is used in any kind of installation where manual or semi-auttcmaüc
synchronising is required,

ln the CSQ-3 there is â possibility of âdjusting the following synchronising


requirements: The voltâge differencs betweên GEN and BB, th€ size oT the phasa
window and thê length of thB synchronising pulse.

ln addition to that there is an indicâtion oJ'Ueer,r TOO HIGH' or'Ueel TOO LOW (red
LEDS), phase difference within the preset window '9OK' (yellow LED), ând finally
syncfironising output active, 'SYNG-' (greên LED).

41893402638 (UK)
Displâv/readino
thâ-Git-mêEures the two inputs voltages: Generator (GEN) and busbar (BB)'
resoectivelv. The ohase ditference from GEN's zero-crossing to BB's zero-crossing is
catàutateo'by lhe processor and is shown on the LED circle, consisting of 36 red
LEDs.

The red LEDS are only lit one at a lime ând lts position indicates the phâse diffêrence
between GEN and BB. The lit LED simulates the pointer tip of an analogu6 pointer
inslrument. LED is lit In the 12 o'clock position, the phâse dilterence is 0
lf the
degrees. tn the 6 o'clock position, 180 dBgrees 6tc. With 36 LEDS the resolution is 10
degrees.

The movament of the lit LED's position indicates the frequency difference between
GEN and BB. lf thc indication ls turning clockwisê (too fast)' thÊ GEN frequency is too
high in proportion üc lhe BB frequency" lf E]e indicalion is tuming countsr'clÔckwis€,
thà profortion is invêrsod. Tha ratê of the motion tell§ âbout the lrequency difference'
Thê fastsr thê rotâtion, the biggêr the frequency difference, €-q 1 rotiation per second
right, the GEN frequency '/'/ill
= 'tHz. lf the BB lrequenry is SbHz and the rotâtlon turns
be 51Hz in this examPle.

lf the frequency diflerenca between GEN and BB is becoming too big (>3Hz)' the
circular niotion stops and a LED \rÿill be lit at the 'too fast' or 'too slow mark,
dependênl on whlch direction thê GEN frequency has to be adjusted to'

Normal svnchronisino
The urlüutomatically calculâtes the synchmnising parameters to check if therê is the
required spacs for tha synchronising insidê the preset. phase. window' These
caliulationi compare the liequency difference with tR ând the sizB of thê phase
windôw. When tR is set to -, td can be set by the user ând is then included in lhe
câlculalions insteâd of tR.

f the window is set symmêtrically, both undêrftoquency synchronising and oveÊ


^e synchronising is possible.
frequency

Under- or overfreouencv slrnchronisino


Wt en the A9 window is set asymmetricâlly the follo\'Ying functionality is possible:

lf the window is set âsymmeÙically wlth a higher positive than negative


^9
ohly synchronising with the generator input at lower frequency lhân the
value, ^e
busbar input is possible (underfrequency synchrÔnising).

lf thê windoÿ, is set asymmetrically with a lo'.ÿer pÔsitive- than negative Âq


oirly synchronising with the generator input ât higher frequency than the
value, ^S
busbar input is possible (overfrequency synchronlsing),

Notê:
This Junction is not active with tR set to -

Page 4 oI 2B Tet.: (+45) 9614 9614 . Fâx: (+45) 9614 9615 . E-mail: [email protected]
Ussr

tleâd bus svnchron'hsino


Wtren trà àead bus function ls set, the §ÿîchrmising rstôy wlll bs âctivated end ths
Srdên I,Fll (§YNCI wTl bo,llL lrhen ths bu§bar voliage ls bdûv the dÊâd iti§Ëar'
prèsÉt lâ&il arü ths tENiettagg $Ge§.d§ ô0$6 af iDminal fc.ltlÊ'

Fo$guD rcsêt
Eâ-ffii tirhate,ûlrs! üle, Ell \,d@iê ëttàôd§ 809ô of thê noninalveluo' Eglot{
thi§ lsvd notndtônâlily i§ 9tÉâiied.

uP êupêrvlglon oubut
6'Cî6 oqnanos fron rhe clasqfli:âfiülf sdetoliè§ {GLl â§peüal opbcoupG.r aÈlFut
has bcÊn added on the @dnê v6|slon.

FiDm 'É s ousut & is, po**blerfu $+€I!!h* [rÊ irjtÊrnal rittox§pr-oæs§ÔI l!P).

.lf an enor ts proeon! *rê 6uhut 0haûgæ $âtê fum âJdÿi s a hlgh tl1rPodânca (o'pêtl
ælhdor outpUt .

(UK]
3. Opêration of display, push-buttons and LEDs

ô
loo..§r o

To get access to the settings, rsmove lhe front frame and the front foil'

,,.

o
o @.

The CSG3 can be operated in two different modes: 'Normâl mode' and '§etting
moàe;. Normat mode is used to display measudng values, and settlng mode is used to
view the settings or change them lo tho desired functionality'

Page 6 ol 20 Tê1.: (r45) 9614 961{ r f31; (+45) 9614 9615. E-mall: [email protected]
User manual, Check synchroscope CSQ-3

3.1 LEDS
The CSQ-3 has the rotlowing LEDS on the fronts showing ditferent operâting
informâtion.

LEDS on primary front (normal mode):

LED Colour Functlon

Circle Red The lit LED ln thê circle shows the phâse difference betweên
ând BUSBAR
SYNC. Green All preset sync. parameters are OK, and the output relay is
activated
eoK Yellow The phase differenco between GEN and BUSBAR is within
tho window
User Red ThB volEgs difference bêtween GEN encl BUSBAR is
TOO HIGH outslde the e. UGEN is too h
UeEN Red The voltagB differênce between GEN ând BUSBAR iS
TOO LOW outside the U is tco

LEDS on secondary front (setting mode):

LED Colour Funslion

Circle Red Parts of the circlê ars used as scâles lor the different
setti s
Yellow Shows that the scâle is active
^q ^e
td Yellow Shows that the ld scalê is âctive.
Ploase notice that td on becomes acüve \,vith set to *
Yellow Shor,rÿs thât the tRscale is active

Yellow Shows that the^U scale is active


^u
Uou" Yellow Shows thal the Ubus scale (deâd bus) is active

For turther information about the settlngs, please seê appendix 1.

41893402638 (UK)
@
3.2 Settingü

MODE

E
E

tr
E

§E MEW E
E]

§g,vlEÏl' E]
Àq tlE§ E

gE ivtB,ÿ E1
L
E

YËS

SEIMEW E]
!6 E
SEI/ÂOIIVAIE
DÊS€IJS
tr
E

Pâge I of 20 Tel.: (+45) s614 9614 ' Fax: (+45) 9614 s615 ' E-mâil: d€if@deif'com
Us€r manual, Check synchroscope CSQ-3

Ooeration
ftre opeiation occurs via the secondâry foil accessible when the primary foil/front
frame is removed. The opêration occurs by means of 3 push-buttons: Mode (togglB),
up arrow (,l ) and down ârrôw (V ).

Contrcl of seftinos
ttre rnoae Uutton is freu down for about 2"3 secônds to obtain tho setting mode. This is
confirmed by th€ fact that the LED is lit at th6 scale and thât lhe setting of the
max. paramôter can be rÊâd on the matching scale.^U With ând V tha setting cân ^U be
changed. ^
For every subsequênt push on the modê button, a change to the next parâmêt€r occurs.
These én bê read and changêd in a mnesponding way. When mode is pushed after
the last parameter, one returns to normal mode,

When leaving the lâst setting menu, the LED circlê 'rotates' to indicâte thal the clrnent
setting hâs been automatcally saved.

PIêâse notics that the preset window, and is divided into two separatê sett ngs,
^U
making asymmetdcal seting of this palameter ^9,
possible.

Also please noüce thât if the settings are changed unintentionelly, thêse âre saved vÿhên
the setting môdê is lefr"

Chânûe of rano8
rang8 of Ag is -20'...-5" and 5'...20" in '1" stêps.
The normal^Q

This can be changed to -40"..,-10'and 10'...40'in 2" stops.

Step down to the 20" point with the down arrow button. While pressing the do\,,/n armw
bution, press the up arrow button and the §cale will change from normal rângê to the
scale 2 x normal rânge. Press the uP anow button to retum to normal range. While
pressing lhe up ârrow button, press the down arrow button, and lhe scale will change
irom 2 i normal range to normal Énge. Please notjce that the 2 x normal range mode
is indicated on the LED circle by aclivation of 2 LEDS each time is changêd.

Factorv settinos
WtreÀ1ne product is delivêred fmm the fiactory, thê following basic settings will be set:

AU 5% of lUBs
0.5 sec
AQ: 110"
Dead bus: OFF

Restôrâoe of faclorv settinos


Àctivâte the two arrow buttons simultaneou§ly While doing this hold down the mode
button for approximâtely 5 seconds. Then the LED circle will light up and rotate to
indicâte that the fâctory settings have been restorêd.

41893402638 (UK)
4. Terminal list

4.1 OverviÊw ol the terminals

Tsrminal Slgnal §ignal name


no. svmbol
1 R Ll} Busbar Yoltaqe
x Not used
2 S (12) Busbârvoltaoe
x Not used
SYNC. Rslav output
4 SYNC. Relav output
x Nôt used
R (L1) G8nerâtôr voltaso
x Not usêd
6 S (12) Generator voltaqe

Only on marine version:

§ystêm status circuit off + open coll€ctor


= fâilure - open collector

Rear view ofthe unlt:

Land version Marine version

ô o o o

@(( @ (€ l"o-
l"@* "*, I rdiÈÉiù,t

olEr: ud.
rïl
ar{c 2!ôqc/ ,.ve.
I .C I
i"ii/rli,.i
CEI{

è ô À

www dàdddwd
o o o o

Page 10 of 20 Tê1.: (+45) 9614 9614 r Fax: (+45) 9614 9615 o E- mâil: [email protected]
user mânual, Check synchroscûpe CSQ-3

5. Wiring diagrams

5,1 AC input connoctlons


When ordoring the CSQ-3, the conêct rengê of voltâgè inputs must be sp€cified. They
must be connec,ted âs shown bâlow (unused têrminals are not shown).

5.1.1 connêBtion dlagram

L1
BUSBAR L2
L3
CSQ
r '1
tu
o
o
o
o
tI e onal
O
z t'_.-È* _ _
L
CB
1l' .SYNC.' L----J
:{
o
t! OK
I(J
sl.1
Note L2 L3
SYSTEM STATUS +

Circult oulput

L J

Note:
lf the CSQ-3 is âpplied to emit a ready signâl in connection with closing of a üê
breaker, the contact S1.l must be added. This contact (S1.1) must be activated
simultjaneousty with the emis6ion of a rêquest signal for clo§ing of the üe breâker. Thls
procedure is necessary, as the CSQ-3 only chëcks in connêction with enteling the
phase window. As long as the phâse remalns within^U
the set phâse window, AU is not
checkod additionâlly.

418S3402638 (UK)
@
6. Commissloning
Bofore commissioning; Check phases lor conect vôltage and conect phâse
sêquenca,

Waming: lnconect voltage may lêâd to malfunctôn and


damage of thê unit,

7. Technical data
Accuracy: t2' (electricâl degrees)

Rêsolution: 10' (36 LEDS)

Sêttinqs, rângs: À9: *5...20' in l'steps or


+10....!0'in 2' steps
11...10% in 1olo stêPs
^l.J: 0...1 sec. in 0.1 sec. steps ol -
td: 0...1 sec- ino.1 sec. steps
Urus offset: Ofl or 4 lêvels of noise suppression
(dead bus)

Mâx. frequency diftgrence: No llmit

lnput range (UN): 100...127V AC (115VAC) or


220...240V AC (230V AC) or
380...415V AC (415V AC) or
440...400v Ac (450v Ac)

Busbâr input: Loâd: 2kQlV

Generator input: (Max. zVA). Also supply for thê unit

Max. input voltage: 1.2 x UN, mntinuou§ly


Abovê 450V: 1.1 x Ux, conlinuously
2 x UNfor l0 sac.

Frequency range: 40...70H2 (supply)

Relay contâct 1 SPST-NO-Corltact

Relay contacl râtings: Resistive loâds: AC1: 8A, 250V AC


(Gold plate sllver alloy) DC1: 84,24V DC
lnductive loads; AC15: 3A, 250V AC
DC'13: 3A, 24V DC

Mechanical life: 2x107

Electrical life: 1 x 1Os (nominal vâlue)

Page 1U of 20 Tel.:(+45)96149614rFax: (+45)96149615r E-mail: dê[email protected]


User manual, Cheêk synchroscope CSQ-3

Optocoupler ouhut: System status off = failure


NpN optocoupler ouFut
Mâx. 40V, 1omA
2 wires AWG 20 (red/black)
30 mm length
(Only in marine version)

Tâmperature: -10...55'C (nominal)


-25...7(lC (opêrâting)
40...7trC (storage)
Temperature drill Set points:
Max.0.2% offull scâlê pêr 10"C

Galvanic separatbn According to EN/lEc6l01Gl


All inpuUoutput groups to ground: 3.75kV
Bet^reen all lnpuvoutput gmups: 3.75kV
Test conditions: 50H2, 1 min.

CIimâte: HSE, tD D1N40040

EMC: CE-marked according to EN5008l-1/2, EN50082-1/2


and lEÇ255-3

Connections: Max. 2.5 mm2 (singl€-stranded)


Max. 1.5 mm' (multi-skanded)

Materials: AII plâstic pârts âre sef-extinguishing to UL94 (V0)

Protection: Front 1P52. Terminals: lP20


According rô lEC529 and EN80529

Typs approval: For cunent approvals please see www.deif.com


(Only valid for mârinê verslon)

UL approval: uL508, E230690


T** 50'C, polluliondegree 3, type 1
Wire: 2+12 AWG, use 60r/5'C wire
Terminal scrsw torque: 4.4-5.3 ltsin.

CAUTION: Risk of electdcal shock. More than one


dlscùnnoci switch may be required to de-energlze
equipmont bBfor€ ssrviclng

Dimensions: Please see dratÿing in section 8

Pânel cut-out: 91 x91 tl mm

Wêight: < 0.40 kg

41893402638 (UK)
@
8. Dimensions

l-,*
Y Y

ffi
@(( l.ù lliSî
#;" i*:EË
l.-.rrl,-,1
l. . . i r L . , ôl

!t
hErwffirrl

All dimensions in mm

9. Order specifications
lnpul voltagê and type must be specified when orderlng the CSG3

Order specification for thê qSO-3 consists of thê following:

cSQ-3-UN-type

where UN ând tYPe aro as follows:

Code Function Options


Ut lnput voltage '115\r: (100...127V AC input rang e)

'230\r: (220...240V AC input range)

'415\r: (380...415V AC inPut range)


'450v 480V AC in
TyPe 'Lând': Meâns the land veEion without GL
approval. This is the standard verslon.

'Marine': Means thê madne version with GL


approval and equipped with an additionâl
for surveillance

Example of an order specification for the CSQ'S

cSQ-3 -415V - Marine

Pege 14 of 20 Tel,: (+45) S614 9614 Fax: (r45) 9614 9615 . E-mail: [email protected]
'
User manual, Check sÿnchroscopo CSQ-3

Appendix 1 : Settlng and parâmeters for synchronising

Settinos

AU
Here the allowed relâtive voltage difference between GEN and busbar is adjuslêd.
Thê regulating range is t1...10% in steps of l%. The adjustment is made individually
for ÀUM|N and ÀUrvrax, so asymmetricâl ad.iustment is possible. The setting is done
according to the following formulâ:

(Ueeu-UsusBAÀ)x100
ÂUurx, ÀUl,lex =
Ususean

lf th6 preset value is exceeded, one of the two Uerx LEDs will emit red lighl, and
synchronising is not po§sible.

lf the generator voltage is too low, the UGEN too low LED wlll be lit.
lf the genêrator voltage is too high, thè UoeN too high LED will be lit.
lf both the UseN LEDS are lit simultaneously, there is ân overvollage enor on the inpul
ln this case, disconnBct the unit and check the applied voltage level!

A9
Here the phâse window is adiusted, in which synchronising cân take plâce. The
âdjustmônt starts from f5" and thê window cân open symmêtricâlly or asymmetrically
around this value.
The regulating range is -20'...-5" ând 5'...20", in 1" steps or
40"...-10" and 10"...40", in 2'steps.

h
H€re the length o{ the pulse for thê synchronising relay is adjusted.
Ths regulating range is 0.,.'1 sec. in steps of 0.1 sec. or -.
This function makes it possible to âdjust the synchronising pulse according to the
extemal breakers demands (closing tlmê).

- (infinite), This setting will (aftsr


For special purposês it is also possible to adrust tR to
td hâs expired) provide a synchronising pulse âs long as the following conditions are
m€t:

. Phase is inside the phase \,ÿindow


r Voltage > 70ÿo of Llr.rourlr

Here the time is adjusted, in which the phase difference must be inside the preset
synchronising window to allow SYNC. The regulâting range is 0..,'l sec. in steps of 0.1
sec.
td is only activâted if tR is set to -.

41893402638 (UK)
@
Dead bus
-ttra possiUility of closing tha circuit breaker even ttrcugh thâ busbar voltage ls
missing. Therê is ân extrâ adjustment, UBUS, where the level of dead busbar can bê
set. This faciliÿ makes dead bus synchronising possiblB, èven lhough thera is noisê
on the busbar. Thê regulating range is offor 10..,40% of Ur.r in steps of 10%.

Settino Deâd bus function UÈus


OFF Dêadivatêd
10 within the ra 15-2 of acfual > 7Aÿo
,'^ Acllvated withln the 2$300Â of ênerator vo > 70yo
30 within tha 3040% actual vo
40 Acüvated within tho of âctual nerator > 70aÀ

Please noticè that this setting is a coarsê stsp regulâtion for supprsssion ol possiblê
noise on the busbar. The scâle 1G2G3G40 should th€refore be considered more as
â 4 level noise suppression than a§ an aceurâte measudng setting,

Page 16of20 Tel.: (+45) 9614 9614. Fâx: (+45) 9614 9615'E-mail; d [email protected]ôm
User manual, Check cso-3

Guidêlines for setting of the CSQ.3

Visual representation of the parameters


The figure below shows the diff€rent pârameters:

Commissionino
ttonnatty t* i" àO;usted so it equals ths circuit breâkers closing time and to
mâx. allowed synchronising êror. ^(P/À9+

Pleaso notice that thê CSQ-3 calculates spaco lor tR (breakêr closing time) within the
chosen window at the aÇtual Âf (slip frequency). Thêrefore the max. synchronising
^q
enor will nsver Bxceed th€ chosen window.
^Q
Calcillation exâmole
The breâker closins time is 20oms, and tR is càosen to 200mS. The phâse window is
sêt symmêtrically to i10' (electriaal degrees). Then the max. Àf can bs calculatêd
using the following tormula:

(À(È) + (aç+) 10+10


=........"....- = 0-278H2
^r= 360 x lR ^f 360 x 0.2

Synchronising relây pulse will not be emitted if exceeds 0.278H2


^f
41893402638 (UK)
@
The n€xt exarnples apply to situaiions wher€ lR is set in the range 0.1...'l sec.

E)€mple:
With à slip frequency (ÀD of o.1Hz the phase changes with â râte of 36"/sec lf is
^9
sel to t1ô" anO to ii set to 0 2 sec. = brêâker closing time, the actual synchronising
error cân be calculaled.

Thê moment the phase is wilhin the set phase wlndow (^q) the relây of thê CSQ-3 is
âctivated on condltion that lhere ls space for the chosen tR, in this cass 0 2 sec lf Àf is
too blg lt will cause lack of spacê for the chosen lR time within th€ chosen window'
^q
Exâmple 1:
W,it â phà". of 36'/sec. ths phâsê will change 7 2' during the 0 2 sec This
means ihat we"tcan now calculate the phase displacement at ths gxâct moment when
"nge
the breâker closes- is set to -10'and +10". The CSQ-3 relay will be activated -10"
^e po§ition), ând afrer 7 2" the breaker closes which means that
tJf." top (12 o'clocli
tt'" Uààiàicroses 10' - 7.2" = 2 8" bêfore top, that is an âctuâl synchronising enor of
-2.8', Applying the formula on page 17 the max. At wilh the shown settjngs Gan be
calculated to bè O.277Hz-

Example 2:
tt-* âssur" that the slip frequency in thê actuâl case i§ 0'2Hz thê phase changes
with a rate of 7z'lsec. Witn a itrasè change o1 72"/sec. the phase will change 14 4"
àriing lh" 0.2 sec. which gives a synÇhronising error o1 1O' - 144" = 4-4'' The
i""urt means thal the breâker closed 4,4' after top, that is an actual
"àoàfiuà
syichronising error of +4.4"-

Example 3:
ihè sâr" as examples 'l and 2 but 'flith a slip ftequensÿ of 0.3H2 = 108"/sec At tR =
0.i sec. the phase will change 21.6", As the Àq windo]/./ is set tÔ t'10", the CSQ-3 will
tnai tn.re is no bnàer spaca for â h pulse of 0'2 sêc' and therefore no rÊlay
"àlcrtate
pulse is emited,

General formula for the above-mentioned:


Actual synchronising error = (^(È) - 360 x x breâker closing time (tR)'
^f
Alternalively at negative slip frequency:
Actual syncÎronising eror = (À9+) - 360 x x breaker closing time (tÊ)'
^f
lf the result is negâtive the synchronising will take place after top (0') provided lhat
there is space for tR within the window.
^9
lf you want to avoid synchronising after top, is set asymmekically' At positive slip
freouencv (af) as in th€ shown example a setting of^q to '10' ând to +5" would
t àui as â iesi.,lt tt at synchronisilg aft€r top of more ^q
than 5' would ^9+
not be possible'

Pagê '18 of 20 Tel.: (+45) 9614 9614. Fax: (+45) 9614 9615. E-mail: de [email protected]
User manual, Check synchroscope CSQ-3

The length ot the rêlay pulse tR can nevel be §et to a lower value thân the breaker
ctosing iime, whereai in can be set to a higher value lf you want the max slip
frequJncy (^fl to be lower to limit the rush of current of thê breaker (the generators) in
connêction with the synchronising.

Exâmple;
ln the light of the âbove-mentioned examples h is changed to 0.4 sec. With â slip
frequenJy (afl of O.1Hz = 36'/sec. and tc = 0.4 sec the phâse changes 14 4" during
ttre'0.4 sàc. f Aq is set to llO" the CSQ-3 will catculate thât there is space for tn' With
tfris ietting lhe synchronising error will be identical with the synchronising error in
example 1'C2-8')'as the breàker closing tim€ is the same {0 2 sec')' But.ths mâx'
can now oniy teb.t38Hz and not, as in example 1' 0.277H2- The max slip frequency ^f
(40 could al'so be controlled by setting diffêrently lf was.set to f5" instead of
ttô' t" ,o. Af would bê o.138Hz at tR^q
+2.2'.
^P
= 0.2 sec. With this setting ând â
the breaker ^f
now
of 0'1Hz
closes
the aclual synchronising enor will be Please notice that
â.i" atter toi ,na not, às in example 1 , 2.8' before top. The choise-of sotting must bs
oaieU on rde knowleàge of the aàtual installâtion in \flhich the CSQ-S i§ applied But
the examDles ar€ to show thât tR and aq âre inextricabty connected and influence th€
iàrnà pri"r"ær", but with difforent iesults as Ùc the calculation of the actual
synchronising ermr-

lf h is set to infinite (.) the max. allowable Àf can no longer be conlrolled by means of
t*. Wt t* is set tà inflnite thê setting of td is automatically activated' lnfinite h is
àiiruritv ,ià"0 where the cSo-3 ia applied as supêrvision of anyou
"n âutomatic
want to
lrnchrôisino svstem or in conn8ction with closing of a tie breaker Yvtlere
ünràf t *qrénév, phasê ând voltagè to be within certain values beforê the braeker is
closed.

Thê settinq o, td is to bo câlculâted from and thê estimated max' allowable


^9 ^f'
(^P) + (49+)

360 x
^f
Example 1:
aq is sat to lz", and a max. ôf O.O5HZ at the moment of synchronising is estimated
to be allowable, ^f

l-7 I+7
360 x 0.05

td = 0.77 sec. - 0.8 sec.

Please nôtice that when h is set to infinitê (-) the synchronising pulse (thê relay
ot tt CSQ-3) is interruptod thê moment the phase is outside the set phasê
"oniàA as the
*lndà*. " timer td sta s the moment the phâse is within the sêt phase window
Àg, ând is to expire in the period the phase is still within the phase wjndow betore the
sÿnchronising pulse is emitted, it means in the shown example thât with an actual
^f
41893402638 (UK)
of 0.049H2 thê synchronising pulse would only be 18 mssc. To âvoid transmission of
suet a snort synitrmnlsing puise, ths cSQ-3 performs a calculâlion based on Âf and
t-Ë il;;ipü.;; windoütà make room for'â svnchronising Puls€ ot at leâst 100
àiec. neiening to 6)cample 1, 1OO msec must be subtracted from the calculated td to
allow â max. Âf of 0-05H2.

Function in pârtjcular situâtions:


in connàaiJ,n wittr test "on desk'the CSQ-3 is nomâlly connocted to lhe same supply
ooùt sothat lrequency and phase are compl8tely identical on the generator input ând
ihe busbar input. At this test lorm the fotlowing must be nolic€d:
the Âq
The first time thê CSQ-3 is connêcted, synchronising pulse is emittod whether
ünOo, i" sêt symmetrically or asymmetrically. lf only the b-usbar input is intârrupted
;È;;ir;.tly ttÉà cso-s ii supplied with auiliary voltage from
lhê senêrât'or input)'
srnchànisino oulse is ontv smitted if tho interruption has lead to the rssult that the ÀQ
*'inàà* *."iuh in *nneéion with the intenuption (occurs if the int8rruption msult§ in
a nolse pulse).

lf Ào is set asvmmetricâllv so thât only e.g. Posltive Âf is âccepted and Âf changês


generator and busbar is within thg
linueo" direction) after the phâsê between
"ign.
pËasè *inOow, the synchronising pulse is not intêrrupted until the window is left'
sven iT af has changed sign tro negâtivo Âf, ^9

lf Âf is chânged to conect direc'tion o, rotation âfter the phâse is within ths


phase
(the synchronising pulsê), and in
*inOo* tft" CSO-3 calculate§ if there is space tor tR
that câse synchronising pulse is êmitted.

Enors and chânges excepted

Page 20 oJ 20 Tet.: (+45) 9614 96'14 . t21; (+45) 9614 9615


' E-mail: deif@dêif.com
H-001

Chapter H. USER'S MANUAL


OTHERS EQUIPMENT
(rrME& Erc....)

,TMS UN
SAMST,ING HEAVY INDUSTRIES CO., LTD.
omROn
Solid-state Timer
HSCR

pleâsè Éed ând undeEtand lhis cata,gg belore purchâsing the products, Please consult your OMRON representative il you havê any queÊllons
or comnênt§- Refer to Wa ïanly and ApPlicalion Conslrorârbrs (pags 52), aod Saleÿ Preêaulions {pagê æ, 44' 51).

DIN 48 x 48-mm Multilunclional Timer Series


. Conforms lo EN61812-1 and 1EC60664-'l 4 kV/2lor Low . UoyddNK approvals.
Voltagê, and EMC Directives. . Sixlanguage instruction manual Provided
. Approvèd by LIL and CSA.

I Broad Line-up of H3CR Series


HSCR

H3CR.F H3CR.G HsCR.H

MultitunctionalTimer TwinTimer star-deltaTlmer Powêr OFF-delay Timêr


H3CB.A H3CR.F H3CR.G8L \.o-P'n too"' H3CR-HRL-'l l-Pin model
H3CR-AS 11-pin model H3CB-FN H3CR-cBEL,l HSCR-H8L )s-oin model
11-pin mod€l
H3CF.AP H3CR-F-3OO H3CH.HSRLI
H3CB-48 H3CB-FN-300
HsCR-A8S ) 8"pin model H3CB.F8 \
H3CR-ABE- 8.pln with H3cR-FBN I
8.pin model
instiantaneoLrs HscR.re-soo I
conliact oulPUt
model Hgcn-reN-goo,,J

Note: H3CR-AS, H3CF-A8S: Ilansistor output models

Contents
Solid-state Timer
H3CR-À.,.........-.---.-,......-.....-........ 2

t-t3cB-F....---...-.......................,,.... 24

HscR4 .....--........ 30

H3CR-H 37

Common to ALL Ïmers


Ope,ation ........ 45

4ccessoties...,..,........,.,...,. 47

Sâlety Precauiions..........-. 51

soiio"state timer HSCR 1


omRon

Solid-state Multi-functional Timer

HSCR-A
DIN 48 x 48-mm State'ot'the-art
Multifunctional Timer
. A wider power supply range reduc€s the number ol timer mod-
els kept in slock
. A wide rang€ ol applcations through six or four operatlng
modes.
. B6duced Power consumption
(Exceptfor H3CR'ABE)
. Enablss easy sequence check§ through instanta eous outputs
lor a zero sel value at âny lim€ rangê,
. Length, when panel-mount8d with a Sockel, of 80 mm or Iess'
. Time Setting Bings enable consistent sêttings and limil the set-
ting rânge.
c€ s(DCi
. Panel Covers enable various pansl designs.
. PNP input models availâble.
. Rich variety of inputs: Slart, reset, and gats lunctiÔns (11-pin
models and -AP models)

Model Number Structure


IModel Number Legend gfor avail-
ordering, pl€a§ê cheok th€ I'ritt of Modere on Page
Noter Thistttodolnumb€r hgend inctudes combinalions that arg not aÿailaHo, Belore
abilily.

fficR-AnEE-ntr
3 45 t 2
1- Number ot Pin3
Nonê: 11-pin modds
8i 8+in mod€ls
2. lnput TyPo ior 1 1'Pin uodê13
Nonei No-vottâge input (NPN type)
P: Voltag€ inpul (PNP IYPÊ)
3. Ourpü
Nonê: Belay outPul (DPDT)
S: Trânsistor output (NPN,4rNP universal use)
E: Rêlây oulpul (sPDl) wilh instÈntanêous relay Ôutpul (SPDT)
6. sulllx
30o: Oual mode modêls (§ignal OtÙOFF-dêlay ând one-shot)
3O1r Doude time scale (tange) mod6ls (0,1 s to 600 h)
5. §uppty Voltage
1OO-24OAC/100-l25DC: 1OO to 240 VAC/Io0 to 125 VOC
2+4aÀC^24goc: 24 to 48 VAC/12 to 48 VDC
24-48AC/DC: 24 to 48 VAC.NDC (only lor H3C8-A8E)

? solid-state MultiJunctional rimer H3CR-A


omRon
Ordering lnformation
I List of Models
Note: 1. Specity both thê model nurnber and supply vollage when orde ng
Example: H3CR,A 1 00-24oAC/100-1 250C
L supply voltagê
2, The operâtlng modes are as iollows
A: ON.delay D: SignalOFF.delaY
B: Flicker OFF slârt El lntewal
82: Flicker ON slart G: Signal ON/OFF-delay
C: Signal OtüOFF-delaY J: One'shot

11-oin Models
Outprrt Supply votlâge lnputtype Timo rânge Opêrating rnode Model
(Seê note 2) (Se6 not€ 1,)

Conlacl I 00 lo 240 VAC (50/60 Hz)/ No-vollâgê input 0.05 s to 30O h Six multi-modes: Â, B, H3ÔR.A
1 00 to 'l 25 VDC B2,C,O E

24 to 48 vAC (5d6o Hz)/


'12 to 48 VDC

100 to 2,r0 VAC (5C/60 Hz)/ Dual-modes: G. J H3CR-A-300


100 to 125 VDC
24 to 48 vAC (50/60 Hz)/
l2 lo 48 vDC
I ü] to 240 VAC {50/60 Hz)/ Vollaga input Six mulll-modes: A, B, H3CR.AP
100 lo 125 VDC 82, C, D, E
24 to 4a VAC (50/60 HzY
12 to 48 VDC
100 lo 2,10 VÀC (5C|/6O Hzy No-voltage input 0.1 s to 600 h H3CR-A-301
100 to 125 VDC
24 to {8 VAC (5ô/60 Hz)/
12 tô 48 VDC
Tranaislor 24 to 4a VAC (s0/6o HzI o.05 s ro 300 h H3CR-AS
(Photocouplêr) 12 to 48 VDC

8-pin Models
Output Supply wlt gê hput tYP. ïmê râtlgê Opêaaling mode Model
(See notÉ 2) (Ses not6 1,)

Conlad 1oo to 240 vAc (50/60 Hz)/ No-input aÿailabl€ 0.05 s to 300 h Four mufti-modesi A, H3CR.A8
1oo 10 125 VDG B2.8, J
(Power supply slad)
24 to 48 VAC (50/60 Hz)/
12 to 48 VDC
1 00 to 24o VAC (50/60 Hz)/ 0.1 s to 600 h H3CB-A8.301
10O to 125 VDC
24 to 48 VAC (so/60 HzY
12 to 48 VOC
Tlansistor 24 to 48 VAC (50/60 Hz)/ 0.05 s lo 300 h H3CR.A8S
(Photocoupler) 12 to 48 VDC

TimÉlirhlt contaêt and 100 to 240 VAC (50/60 Hz)/ H3CB-A8E


lnstântan6ous contact 10O lo 125 VoC
24 b,$ VAC&OC (50/60 Hz)

Solid-state Multi-funclional Timer HSCR-A


omRon
I Accessories (Order Separately)
NarDê./spacilicalion6 üodelt
Flurh ilountin g Adapter Y92F-30
Y92F-73
Y92F-74
lrounüng Track 50 cm (4 x 7.3 mrn (l) PFP.SON
1m(4x7,3mm(t) PFPNOON
1m (l) x 16 mm (l) PFP.lOON2

End Plato PFP.M

SpacEr PFP-S

Protêêtive Cover Y924.488


Trâck trlountingy' s-pln P2CÉ.08
Frorl Connectlng Sockel &pin, flnger sâle typê P2CF48-E
11-pin PzcF.11
l1.pln, Iingor sale tYPê P2CFn1-E
Brck Cônnqctlng Sockêt &?in P3G{8
P3G48 wlth Y92À-48G (Seê note 'l
8-pln, lingêr sâlê type
ll+in P3GA.,I1
11fln, ffnger rEle typo P3GÀn I üth Y92A.48G (Soo note 1)
llme Setting Rlng S.ltlng a .Pêêlltc iime Y925-27
Limltlng the lcttlng rângê Y325-28
Pânrl Cover {SêÉ nots 2) Llght gray (sÿrtl) Yÿ2P-4AGL
BlÊck(Nt,5) Y92P48GB
ll!dium (5Y5/1) Y92P-48G t\,r

Holddorÿn Cllp (Soe note 3) For PLOE ând PLI 1 sockêt§ YgZH-7
For PF085A Soèkqt Y92H-8

Noteil.Yg2À-48Giôâffngersaleierminâlcc,!,/orvrhichisanachedtotheP3G{8orP3GA-1lSockel
2- Th6 Timê Setting Ring and PanelOovor aro sold together,
3, Holdiown Cllps Ere gold ln sets ot two

Specifications
I General
H3CB.A/.A§ H3CR.AP H3CR-AU.A8S H9CR.A8E
llêm
Operding mode A: ONdday A: ONdday (power supply etârt)
B: Flickor OFF start 82: nlcker ON start (powor supdy slart)
82: Flickêr ON $an E: lnlerval (potYer suPPlY §ta.l)
C: Signal Ol,ÿOFF-delaY J: Oneshot (powêr sùpply stârt)
D; Sisnal OFFdehY
E: lntalvâl
c: Signal OlYOFF.delaY (OnlY lor H 3CR-A-30O)
Jr One.shol (OnlY lor H3CR-A-30O)
11fin 8-pin
Pin type
Input typo No-vofragê input \troÿrÀge input

H3CB-tu-A&-AP: RêlaY output (DPDT) Belay output (SPDT)


Tlmo-llmlt ou'tput tyPe
H3CR-AS/-ABS: Trânsistôr oulput (NPlüPNP univorsal)'
Rêlây oulput (SPDT)
lhslanta.reous output tYPs
Mounling meûod D IN trac* m ounting, rtaca nting, and flush nti n9

Approvêd rtsndards U L508 c SA No. 4, N K Uoyds


Co nto tm to EN 6 I 2- and EC60664- (V DEOl 0) t2,
Oulput category accordl ng to EN60947 for Timêrs with Contact Oulpnê.
Output categ o ry accordi ng to EN6094 7 lor T mers wlth Transisto outputs.
.Îhê lnte,nat circuits aro optically isolaled from the outpû. This enables univêrsal application âs NPN or PNP transislor

4 Solid-state Mulli-lunctional Timer H3CR-A


omRon
ITime Ranges
Notc: When the time s6 ing knob is turned below "0" uôtil the point wherê the time seltinq knob stops. the oulpul $rill opêràte instantaneously ai
all time range settings.

Standard {0.05-s to 300-h) Mode ls


Tlme unil s (sêc) min (mln) h (hrs) xl0 h (r0 h)
Full 6câle 1-2 0.05 to'1.2 O.12 to 1-2 1.2 to 12
sêfllng 3 0.31o 3 31o30
12 1.21a 12 12 to 120

310 30 30 tô 300

Double (O.1-s to 600-h) Models


Ti]rlr unit 3 (eêc) min (mln) h (hr3) xl0 h (10 h)

Full acâl§ 2.4 0.1 10 2.4 O.24lo 2.4 2.41o 24


§eiling ê 0.6 to 6 6to60
24 2,41o 24 24 to 240

60 6lô 60 60 to 600

I Ratings
Rstèd supply ÿûhags (§es not t |,2, ànd 5.) 100 lc 240 VAC (50/60 Hlyloo to'125 vDC,24 ùo 48 VAC (50/60 Hz)/12 b aa VDC (24 to4a VACI/DC ls. H3CC-
,àaE) (seê nots3.)

Opêrrting voltagÊ rlngê 85% lo 110% ol !êtod sùppty vohage (Sodæ lo 11096 al 12 voc)
Minimum power-opêning lirne:0.1 s
lnput Ncr.olâcellgd
1 l{r ma)(.
ON r6slôrâl vollâgs:
OFFtûp€danca: 100 m min.
\ârlteo6 lnnul
ü;ffi6;blê caoacilanc. beti€en inputs lirss (tsrfinnals 6 and 7): 1,20opF
Load coînêciabl€ in parallelwitt inputs (lèrmlnâb 6 and 7J-
. 1001o240 VÂ(ÿloo 1(} 125 VOC
Hkrh rboh) l€\iet: 85lo 26a VAC/8r5 to 137.5 VDC
rciv (icç-rc) te,.st o !o 1o vAc/o to lovDc
. 2abaSVAC/12to4tVDC
Hioh (loolc) 16/êl: 20.4 to 52.8 vAc/'10.8 to 5?.8 VDC
Ldi (l"dlci lsv6l: o lo 2.4 vac/o to 1.2 VDc
P€wer conrumplion H3CR.^./-AA
. lm b 240 VACJ1OO 10 125 \,DC
.when al 24o VAC. 60 Hz)
' BelEyON:âppio;.2.0 vA (1.6!'V) Helay OFF: âpprox- 1-3VÀ{1 Iw)
.241048V4C/l2lo48VDC
lwtEn âl 24 VoC)
' RsbyôN: app'ôx. o-8 w Belsv OFF: apo.ox 0.2W
E!QBâe (See nols 3)
. 100t0240 VÀCYIoo 10 125 VDC
' -
rwhên â1240 VAC. 60 Hz)
nooy ô1. app'ror. 2.5 vA (2.2 W (sêe nolê 4.) Relav OFF: agprox. 1.8 VA (1.7 W) (Ses nots a.)
. 24 to 48 VAG/12 lo 48 VDC
lwhen al 2{ VoC)
Bel.y ON: apomx. 0.9 w lS€€ note 4.) BelayOFF: approx. O.3W (Seê note4.)
H3CF.AAE
. 't oo tD 24O VAC/1oO lo 125 VOC

(When at 240 VAC,60 Hz)


' Rehy Oit/OFl-. spprox. 2 VA (0.9 wl
. 24 to 48 VACWDC
(wnen â! 24 VDCI
' Relay ÔN/oFF: âPPtoÉ 0.9 w
H3CR.AS/-AsS
. 24lo 48 VAC/12 lo aB VDC
Oubul'oN:o.3 W OutpuiOFF:0.2 W
,|
llfilt 5 at 250 DC. 0. 15 al 25 DC, load (
ope (N 00 30 DC
residuâl lrltaoe: 2 V max.
5 Aar250VAt 30VDC.0.1 5 1 25 VDC loâd

Notei 1- DC rippte rate: 20% mâx. il the power supply incorporates a singlè-phase. fulÈwave reoüfier-
2. Do nol usê an invener ouiput as the power supply. nefer to Power S uppliesln Satety Prccaulions lot All Timers on Page 51 lôr dêtâils.
3. Models with 24-to-48-VAC or l2-to-48-VDC power supply have inrush cunonl. Caulion is lhus required whên turning ON and OFF pow6r
to the Timer with a non{ontâct output lrom à device such âs a s€nsor (lllodêls with an inrush current ol apploximately 50 mA and a 24_
VDC power suFply are âvailable (thê H3CR-A-3o2 snd H3CR-48-302).)
4. The values are for when thê terminals 2 and 7 and iêrminals lO ând 6 are §horl-circuited, ând includ€ ihe consumplion cÜrrenl of lhe
input circuil.
S, Relet to power Supptiesin Salety P@cautions lot All TimeÉ on page 51when using lhe Timertogether with a 2-wkê AC ptoximity sensol

Solid-state MultÈlunctional Timer H3CR'A 5


omRon
I Characteristics
AcÊuracy ol opsrâting 10.2% FS max. (Jo.2"/"tlo ms mar. in a rang€ of 1.2 s)
limê
Satüng errcr 15% FS t50 ms (566 not6 1)
Rosot limê Min. power'opening lim€: 0,1 s ma.x,
Min. pulse width: 0.05 s (H3CF.A/.AS)
Rêset voltâgê 10% max, ot râted suPPlY voltage
lnfluence ol voltagê t0.2% FS max. (t0 .2%t1O ms max. in a range of 1,2 s)
lnlluênce ot lsmPeaature t1% FS max. (i 1%t10 ms mâx. h a range ot 1,2 s)
lnsulatlon resiStâncê 100 MO min. (at 500 VDC)
2 ,ooo vAC (1 ,000 vAÇ for H3CR-AtrS), 50/60 Hz lor 1 min
(belÿJeen curre nt{arrylng melal parls and exposed non'
DIêlêctric st.ength
cun€nl-carrying metal Palts)
ând ope rati ng circuit)
2,m0 VAC (1 ,0O0 VAC for H3C R-AaS) 50/60 Hz for mrn (belween conhol oulPUt terlhinâls
2,000 VAC, 50/6Ô Hz fot 1 min (betï/êen conlaol§ dirferent poladliê§)
1,000 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min (between conlect§ not Iooated next lo each oüed
circuit) lor H30
2,ooo VAC, 50/60 Hz loiI mln (betwes n input and control outp ul terminals ând operation
P

terminals) lor 00 to 240 VAC/,1 00 to 25 DC, lor 24 to 48 VACN 2 to 48 vDc


lmpulEe 'rrithstând 3 (belY'/e€n
m lo
vollâse (bêtween c! Iren t-carrying terminal and êxposed non.currênt Érryi ng mê1âl parts) lor o0 io 240 VAC)i1
DC, .5 lor 24 to 48 vè§t1 2 lo ,|a VDC and to 48 VAC,^ÿDC

Noise lmrnunlty tl.5 kV (beln€en power terminah) and 1600 V (bêtweên no.voltÊgê input terminals), squars_wave nol§ê by nolse
simulator (pulse width: 100 ns/l |r5, l-n§ riso)
Stâdo ilnmunily Mâlfunction: I kV
Destruction: l5 kV
Vlb.ation ruâ:6tâhêc D EStrUCtiOn 0 to Hz with o_ 75{nm single amplitudâ êâch tn 3 direclioûs ior 2 hou rs each
M altu nctign: 0 to 55 H z with 0 s.mm amplilude eac*r ln 3 di recüons br 0 minutês each

Shock rsglslânca Desùuclion: 1,Ooo m/sÊ 3 time§ each in 6 dirêcdons


Mâllunction: l0O nÿs'z 3 üm€E eech in 6 direclions
Ambi6ôt têmpêtsturô Operâting -.lo'C lo 55'C (with nô icirlg)
Slorâge: -25'C to 65'C (with no icino)

Ambient hlmldlty Opêrallng: 35% to 85%


Lite expectancy Mechanicq!: 20,000,000 opêraT o ns mln (u ndê no load âl 800 opêratlon$rh
Eleêtrical: 00,000 op6ratioûs 5 ât 2û vAc, resistiYe load at 800 opêrations/h) (See note 2l
EMC (EMD EN61812-t
Emission Enclosurcl 8N55011 Group t clâss A
Êmlssion Ac Mahs: EN55o11 Group 1 class A
(EMS) EN61812-1
lmmunity ESD: lEC6lOO&4-2: 6 kV contacl dischargs (level3)
0 kv air discharge (l€vel3)
lhmrnirv FlF-interturenc€ from AM Badio Waves: 1EC61000-+3: 10V/m (80MHzto l GHz) (level S)
iil;;;ii ;;-;;i;'{";;; rrom Pulse'modulalêd Radio wav€s:lgc6looo-4'3: 10 v/m (90ûrs MHz) (lêvel3)
i--r'iÉ Conauaeu oisturbance: lÉc610otF44: 10 v (0'15 to 80 LlHz) (lêvêl 3)
ilil;iü À;"i, tEc6tooo-4-4: 2 kv po'der-line (level3)
2 kV VO signâl"llne (level4)
lmmunlty Surge: tEc61 00&.6-s: 1 kV line lo llne (level S)
2 kV line lo ground (level3)

Ca3e côlor ught gray (Munsêll 5Y7l1)


Degrcô ol protêction lP40 (panêlsurtace)
Approx. 90

Notê:l.ThevatusistS%Fs+loomsto.omsmâx.whenthec'D,olGmodesignalo,lhêH3CR-APisoFF
2. Refer to the L,ilé-lesl Cu.Ya.

6 solid-state Multi-{unctional Timer H3CR-A


omRon
Ilife,test GUrve

Ê
N
o f,efulBacs:
-2$\4ÂÊ/10!p6
lù!
) -k,lr,=o , --
oI \ù il-. lsv€l:

§tlitÉ i('('r +{
l@{ ourlent {A)

§didsHe Mutii-tuhdtional Ttrner HSGH{ 7


omRon
Connections
I Block Diagrams
HSCR.AiAS
Zero sêlting
AC (DC) input dêteêllon i
circuit
I

Por,vsr slrpply Osclllation Counting


circuit circuil Outpll circuil
circuil

lndicator
Beset input stârt input, and ate input lnput circuit
cirÊuit

PowerON Output4N
indicêlor indicâtor
rrr::t-t:t-;:i:i::t,-.",::-
H3CN.AP
Zerq settinE
Timg range/ Op€rating
det€ctioo mode sêloctor
circuil unit soloctorc

Power supply Osclllaüon Counling


circuit circuit Ouiput circuit
circuit

lndicetor
Start lnFut circu;t
circuit

Power{N Outpul-ôN
lndiôalor indicator

ct solid-state Multi-functional Timer HgCR-A


omROn
HsCR.AC/AES
AC (DC) input
ir;;""ind
i deleclion
i
]lme range/ Opêrating

.
I
unit selectors mode seleclor
i:rlnl l

I
Power supply Oscillaliofi Counting
outDUI circuit
circuil circuit circuit

lndicâtor
circuit

PowerON OutsuloN
indicator indicâtor

H3GB.A8E
Zero s€tting Timê ange/ Oporadng
AC (DC) i dsl€cüon unit sêlecto,s mode selector
circuit

Powe. supply Oscillâtion Counting


circuil Output circuil
oirouit circùit

Indicator
Çircuit

Power-ON OutputoN
indicalor indlcalor

ln§lântaneous
output circuit

I UO Functions
lnputr (ror -A.l Stârt stârls tinê.measurement.
-AS ûod.l6) Rêest lntonupls time-meâgrrÊmenl and rosot§ timefi €â§uremml !âlue No llme-m easurêmenI made and
control oulput is OFF whilo tho resêt input is ON.
Gsto Prohibits time-measurêmênt.
Outpute Control output Oulputs ârê turnêd ON accord tn lo dêsignated oulpul modê wheo prêsel valuê is rêâch ed

Noie: H3CB-AP incorporates start input only

Solid-state Multi-tunctionâl Timer H3C R-A I


omRon
ITerminal Arrangement
Notêr The dêlâysd contacl o, convenlional ljmeIs was indicated as tio
Ths conlact symbol ol the H3CR-A is indicated as
c;l because its opereting môde is sir müllÈmodes ifour mulli_modes for the HSCR-AB)

11-oin Models 8'Pin Models


H3CR-A/-A-300ÊA-301 (Contact Output) H3CR-A8ËA8-301 (Contact Output)

o/
(-)
.E
.ç §
! G)
(E ü) o _._l

(*X-) H3CB-ABS (Transistor Output)


H(-) _.l
f
H3CR-AS (Transistor Oulpul) oo
o
T__- o
2
.E
L _J
Polver supply

É o Notc: Têrminals 1, 3, 4, and 5 aro êmplÿ Terminals 2 ând 7 âro the


same as tor the H3CB.A8.
L _l H3CH-A8E (Contact Output)
H(-) (*X-I

Note: Termirials 1,3,4, and I arê emply Terminals 2, 5,6,7, and 10


âro thesame âs lortho H3CR-A

H3CH-AP (Contact OurPUt)

H
(-)
L I
o

L
(-)(-) (*X-)

Noter '1, Terminal 5 is omPly-


2. S€paÉlê powsr supPliês êan be used tor the Tiûer and in-
puts-

1o solid-statelvlulti-functionalTim"rHSCR'A
omRon
I lnput Connections
H3CR -Al-AS
ThB inputs of the H3CB-A,/-AS are no-voltagê (§hort'Çircuit or open) iûputs

No-voltage Inputs
No-oonta€* Inpul Contâct lnput No{ontacl lnpul
(Connection to NPN open (Connection to a voltage
collector outpul sensot) or.rlput sensot)
12 to 24 VDC

--t
)

I
I Sensor
is Garê

2 lnpur l0

opêrâùes {ith trân§tslor oN Op6.â1âs wirh llâns§lgr ON

No-voltâgê lnput SlgrEl Llvêle


Norontact l. Shod{ircuit levêl
inFrt TEnsiêtor ON
Residualvoltage: 1 V max.
lmpêdance when ON: 1 l@ max.
2. open level
Transistor OFF
lmpedâncê when OÊF: 100 kO min
côhtâct Use contactg which can adequate_
input ly ÿritch 0,1 mA at 5 V

solid-state Multi-tunctional rimer H3CR-A 1 1


omRon
HSCR.AP
Th§ start inpul of the H3CB-AP is voltage input, (Voltage imposition or opên)

Voltage lnputs
No-conlâct InPul No-contact lnpul Contact Input
(Connection to PNP oPen (Connectlon to NPN open
colloctor output sênso0 collector output sensor)
12rô24vDC 12lo ?4VDC
{s€.sor p6€r suFPlY)

(+)
E

6 $ân 6
lupply {+)
Starl
+
II 6
suppry (+)
& T
Slarl
(-)
2 2

opùarês rYrlh ?NP lr.rlslslor oN Op§râi6Ê wrTl §PN lrân§i$ôr oN

Note: The input circuit is isolated llom the Note: Flerêr to the signal levels in the lol-
Dowêr suPPlY circuil.Thus, an NPN lowing table aôd be aware ol lhe
trâôsistor oên bê coônêcted. minimum applicable loed ot fle relâÿ

Vottâge lnpul Signal Levet6


No-contaèt l.TransistorON
input Residualvoltaqe: 1 Vmax,
The voltage b;tween terminals 6 ând 7 musl be 10-8 VDC min

2. Transislo. OFF
Lêakaqe drrrenl: 0.01 mA max.
Thê vollage between terminels 6 ând 7 must be 12 VDC max,

Conlâct Use contacls that can adequâtely Eÿrilch 0.1 mA at each oper'
input âtino volhoe.
The-voltao; betÿrêên têrminals 6 and 7 with contacls ON or
OFF must satisfy lhe specified value.

oN
c,onlacts
iooto-zao-vec ano t oo-to-l25-VDC models: 85 lo 264 VAC
or 85 to 137,5 VDC
24{o-48'VAC and 12-to-48'VDC modêlsr 20 410 52-8 VAC or
10.8 to 52.8vDC

contact§ oFF
loo-to-240-VAc and 1OO-io-125-VDC models: 0 lo 10 VAC or
0 to 10 VDC
24-to'48-VAC and 12.1o48-VDC models:0 to 2-4 VAC or 0 to
1.2 VDC

12 sôlid-slate MultÈIunctional tlmer H3CR-A


omRon
Operation
ITiming Chart
Nole:1, Theminimum power-opening time ("81") i§ 0.1 s.
2. The minirn!m input pllsê widlh (lor slârt, resel) is 0,05 s.
3, Thê lêtler "f in the liming charts stands rorthe sel time and'l-a'means that thê period is less than thê timê set.
4. Power supply start in mode J is âlso possible lor B3CB-A8ÊABE/-A8S|A8-301 models.
5. Rerêr to page 19lor âpplication examples.

H3CR.A/.AS/.AP-
'H3CR-AP model incorporates slart input only,
Operating Timing chart
modê
Ar ONdelay
IlEEmrfiIâmrrl

Sla.l §t IM §I!
E
Ê11

l-_ I _______r

&$é*sr&iE#*

Note: Stârt input is invalid while lhe


E EE III BNI Ig[itE!t!! Timsr is in opeÉtion,
'
B:
Fllckêr OFF
l:EEl6rtTlîr.ril
a
start
I
!I
l+l-l+l
oüPUr l€lay (Nc)
MM
§Btit a BETII 5I{! d; Nots: Starl irput is invalid while
theTimêr is in operation.
82:
Flicker ON
start
§ w
I IB
I
t

Nole: Sla.l input is invalid while the


r Ei ÉHn E E BIIt r Emt Ellt Timer is in operaïon,
'E
c:
Signel ON/
OFF.
delay

Nolê: Start inpul is vâlid and re-


t r 6tIEt B E NtrJI ttt E E d g !id triggerable while ihe Timer is
in operaliôn.

Sôlid-state MultÈlunclional Timer H3C R-A IJ


omRon
Opêratlng Timing chârt
lnode
D: lEâirc-6oEËlloô I
Signal OFF- EA
delay
SEn Po*.,ffiM

Oulpll êlây {NC)


à §an
ffi_-.
M
Note: Sîart inpul is valid and
,E rê.triggerable while the
Timer is in opêration.

E: f6sr- operaffiill
lnterval
& E ü E TI
t I
T T f d
§ârt
a
OuFut iÉlây (NC) olnM
Note: Slart input i6ÿâlid and
r+t ggêrâble while
I lllt !t tt t tt l6llt thêl]mor is in oPera-
'I tion.

fEasfc-fn6Eiiol
Signâl ON/
OFF-
dolay §ân
Starl

olnoü l€l* (tlol


Note: Slart input is valld and rê-triggera'
bls while theÏimerlê In operation.

Ji lEasiT6FraTonl
One6hot out-
put
Sian

sÂn m
I-- r ---+-{- 110.6 â
outpul l€lay (NC)
Ouip!l E (FrEd)
NoiÉ Stan input is ÿalid and re-
triggerâble vrhile the Timer
is in operalion.

Gate Signâl lnPut

ON

sa'r !f.
ON

aeea $f,
Outpur Ol'l

Note: 1. This tjming chart indicâlês thê gat€ input in op-


eIaüng mode A (oN-d€lay operation).
2. The set timê is the sum ol h and t2.
3, H3CR-AP model incorpolatê§ §tart inpul only.

14 Solid-slate Multi"f unêtional Timer H3CB'A


omRon
H3CR-48/-A8S
Opêratlng Timing chart
modE

ON{elay
ffa=iô!oe-raii6fi.l

(Nc)

(No) (ô!lpùl

EHF] BEITI a6tit E6.1 N

B":
Flickêr ON
slârt fEâ§'rc- ooeÉiidn-l

lNc)
t
{NO)(oùlÊn

E:
lnterval
IEâsic o6EEiiôn I
(NC)

(NO) (odpù! â61MPæ


sEmHBut EnEÉtslll gç

J: il
One-shoi oul-
pd
fBâC1E6o6râii6n- l
lNc) MM -6
---l-
æ@
Ndl (ourpil
d
(Fed)
hE E HIII EEE EB H B!!I ouipul E

Nolê: l, The minimum powêr-oponlng timê ("Flf') is 0-'l s-


2 Thê lettêr 't' in tho Tmiûg charis stands lor the sêt üm€ and "t-4" means lhat the Psriod is lêss than thê tims §et.

Solid-state Multi-functional Timer H3CR-A 15


omRon
HSCR-A8E
Oper6ting Tlmiflg charl
modê

ON-dslay

iNCl

lNO) (oulput
ffi tu E,:li;]iâià16it 1t§Edtgrs,iv.i-:!l| i;irr
ll!jll]l.]!]À]lnilil.EliE4l4:l!.-ir:È
r,-- r
I
W -1 ffi4'ffi
k ar§E!t! @A !E

FlickBr ON
slârt
(NC)
IE§iE opeEûtnl
(NÔ {outpüi

r -tl
I
t6M EB II! E tà t at!! EE EI! ,§

lntârval

(NC)

(Nd) {ourrùl Mffi EM fE-a§çi-Effi-il|


I

oL'tpUt êhY {NO


Mi

rEt!llll t8
J: R ft
OnÈ.shot out.
put 1L!i:r:

{NÇ)
a :':l i ,-'; .::-',:l'il:i ri

Û,1O) (oijp,lr [BE'ôîEeraiioîl

-'-Er
ffi
(Firêd)

AE E §III ENB lE a Eti!


Notê: l. Thê rninimum power-opening lime ('R$ i5 0.1 s.
2. Tho letter
.f in the timing chartÊ stands for lhe set tilne ând 't-4" meanô lhàt lhe pe od is les§ thân thê time set,

1 6 solid-state Multi-{unctional Timer HSCR'A


omRon
Nomenclature
Power indicator (grêon) (Flashes whenTimer
operaies; lit tÿhen Timer stops operaling)
Operating rnode display windoÿÿ

Op€raling mode selector


Output indicalor (orange) Sel€ct a mode from:
(Lit wheô output) A, 8, 82, C, D, and E (H3CF-A, -Ae and -AS)
A,82, E and J (H3CR-48, -AgS, and .ABE) G
and J (H3C8-4"300)

Scqle rsng6 displây window8

.Tlme
unit disphy wlndou,
Time range selector (selêct onê
flom 1.2, 3, 12, and 30 al lull
sçale; wilh thê HSCB-AG3ol. Timê uôit selector (selêct one
select from 2,4, 6, 24, or 60 at ïim€ sefing from sec, min, hrs, and 10h)
full scale.) kflob (set lim6)

Solid"§tats Multlfunctional timer H3C R'A


omRon
Dimensions
Note: All unils are in anillimêtêrs unless otherwise indicâled.
H3CF.A
HsCR.AP
H3CR.AS

E
39 dia.
m I I

11Pin3

H3CR.A8
H3CR-A8S
HsCF-ASE
5?.3
o.7

Dimensions with Set Bing

0
ffi 0

rne Sotlra FddcovÊr


Fhg

Dimensions with Front Cênnêcting Socket Dimensions with Bâck Connêcting Socket
P2CF-08.tr/P2CF-1I-tr P3G-08/P3GA-11

81,5 81.5
15 15
75

B3CR.A
H3CB-AS H3Cf,-A H3CF,ÆO
ga.5 5 H3CB.AS
HsCR.AP

P3G
YS2F-30 (When
fwhen
P2CF-08 Y92A-48G Y924.48G
P2CF.11 2.3'
P2CF-08.E mounted) mounted)
P2CF-,11.E

*These
dimensions vary with the kind ol DIN track (reterence value)

1 I solid-state Mulli-functional Timer HSCR-A


omRon
Application Examples (HSCR-A)
A Mode: -del
ON{elay operation (A modê) is a bâsic modo,

1, Power-ON StârUPower.OFF Beset 3. Control of lntegrated Time with Gate


The Pow€r-ON starÿPowêr-OFF rosêl operalion i§ a stândaId opêr' Signal
ating melhod. With â oâle sional, tho Power-ON starl operation and Signal sta
operetlo-n cen bt controlled (thg oporation can be intsruptêd)
n

Suri (2 .nd 6) ME
Srail (2 End 6)

' Nc ll ffi Giiê {2 and 5)

ând 1l) conirol oulpur: Nc (8 and 11)


and 3) NC (1 and 'l)
IHEEBIE Conrrol @tour. NO {9 and 11)
NO {t 6nd 3)
Lir
Pmr hdcâi3r IB § [Bts
LI
Gers 6lNl iThE @râ oi la klt€rruored wlih llrs
q{e slü,âl ù. T[n€r
il ddâcrâ ân abnotmâl si!|].l )

2. Signal starUSignal Beset


The Slgnal slârl./Signâl reset opomtlon is uêElul lü rêmote control o,
theTimer, B/82 Moder Flicker
Thê flicker operation in lhe B and 82 modes can b€ efledively
apptied to lenip or buzzêr (ON and oFF) dams or lhe monitodng o{
an imemltt€nl operation wllh a di6play.
Sta( (2 and 6) i
1. Power-ON StârUPower-OFF Rêset (in B
B6ssr (2 ând 7) Mode)
Contolodpur Nc 18 and 11)
NC {1 and 4)
côîùol ôulpùi: NO (9 end 11)
No 0 ând 3)
Powêr indic€lor rtr§t!§[t §an (2 ônd 6)
LN Lh (8 ând 1ll
Conrloloutprit NC
NC (1 âôd 4)

conlrcloulDur NO (9 and 11)


r.lo (1 âid 3)

(Powér @.hnuo'Jsly suppled)

solid-state Multi-tuncüonal Timer HSCR-A 19


omROn
2. Signal StaruSignal Beset (in B Mode) 2. SignâI-ON-OFF Starulnstanteneous
ll there is an abnormal signal, flashlng slarts. when the abnormal Operalion/Time-limit Reset
condiliofl is restored, a rg§et signal §tops the displây flashing

M ET # É ffi @ IEE srâlt (2 ând 6,

Sla (2 and6) ! conloloulout NC (0.nd 11)


NC 0 a.d 4)
co.,rrolouroul, NO{9 and 1rl
NO {1 ând 1)
Côorlôl ourÀri: NC lE and l1)
' NC 11 ând 4)
Cùr,ôlol,Dul. NO19ândll)
NO{1ênd3)
lt II II t! EI E' EI E' 5,â
-{ -g

ut Lir

frhe ôÉrâüû1 slr4s wth rh€ s gnâr oN or OFF)

(Pov,€r.§nlhu@sly suPPlled)

(Ftr/€l conlillrousÿ §WPli.d)


Mode: Si nel FF-d
C Model Si qnal Oi,UO FF-delav Sionât OFF-delay operalion (D mode) can bê Éfiecllÿsly u§ed to kê€9
-load
a operatinô lôr a cortain Fêriod. For example, lhis luncdon
Thê Signât ONJOFF.dêlây opereton (C modê) i§ uselul tur the côî.
onables tho coolng fan lor a lamp o' heater to operste for a cerlain
trol ol A§nhnioû of producl§ on a Production llnê lnto boxe§ by lhs
pêdod âtler tho lamp or hÉatgr is swltched OFF,
speclf ed number or time.

1. Power-ON StarUlnstantaneous OperatiolV 1. Power-ON Starulnstantaneous Operalion/


Time-llmlt Resel Time-llmit Resêt
À set ot lhêse functiom is uselul lor lhe oPerâtbn of a machine lor a
PdwEl (2 and 10)
speclri€d period when po.,{€r is ON.
§€d (2 a.d 0)

conlrol.urDul: Nc I8 and 11)


NC l18id4)
$an (2 and 6) ' tlo
carol d]lDuti 19 ând 11)
t.a:'1.r, I 1r1::r,lrêfil :
i-:TilIT
No{1and 3l
conrrctouto'n: Nc (c.nd 11) PowÉr rndicstcr
NC {1 .nd 1)
Lit Lit
' llo
cMlrol NIDUI: ۈnd 11)
NO (18nd3)

20 Solid-state Multi-lunctionat Timer HSCR-A


omROn
2. Signal Starulnstanlaneous Operation/ 2. Signal Starulnstantaneous Operation/
Time-limit Reset Time-limit Reset
This tunclion is us6lul lor the repelitive conlrol such as lh€ lilling ol

æw liquid for a spscifiod period aflsr each Signâl start input.

SIâd (? à6d 6)
P.{e, (z and l0)
Çontrolouipur: NC {8sd 1i)
od
w
NC (1 4)
S'Érl {2 anr 6)
Conrol.urglr l'.€ {9 and r 1)
flo {r and 3) ConkoloulDll. NC 18 and I ll
Pose.hdlcalor tlrti NC(l and 4)

ConrroloulDul NC € and 1r)


NO (1 .td 3)

ùo NC ùo No)

iPower conlinuously supFli€d)


{Poær cônthuôlsly suppl,Ed}

E Mode: I rval
1 - Power-ON Starulnstantaneous Operation/
Time-limit Reset
This func{ion is usêful icr the oFrerâtion of a mâchine for â §pocillêd
pedod afier power is oN.

Fo6 (2 ând l0)

Slad (2 a.d 6)
Conrolorrput NC (8 8nd 11)
NC (1 4d a)
CdrÉldtDut NO 19ând 11)
NOlr Md 3)

Solid-stâte Multi-tunctional Timer H3CR-A 21


omRon
Safety Precautions (H3CR-A)
Nole: Thê undermenlioned is common for all H3CF_A models.

I Power Supplies I lnpuU0utput


For thê powêr supply ot ân inpul dwiÇ€ ol tho HSCB-AD'A-S/-Ae
use ân holaling transformêr with the primary and secondary wind- Belationshi p betwee n lnout and Power
ings mutuâlly isolatod and the sêcondary winding not grounded
Suppl ci rcuits (ex ceot for HSCR-48 EI
Correct The HSCR-A (except for H3CR-A8E) u§ês hansformêd€ss power
sumlÿ whên connecling a retay or transistor as ân ext€rnal signâl
input device, pây attention to lhe fouowing points to prevenl short.cir_
G ,s, cuitino dus to a sneak cunénl lo the traflsformerless power supply. lf
10
a relay or transistor is connected to two ormore Timerc, the inpulier
minals ol lhose Timêrs must be wired properly so thâl they will not
?
2 difler in phase, otherwi§e the lerminâls vÿill bê shorl'ctcuited to one
another.

lnêorrêct
CoirâEl nr tÊnsislo/ lor

t hobrion tânslormê. is equûed.

lncorrecl

'q
-
2

Correcl

t'
__i___
lnpul dsvicê
t
bolalroo

Thê H3CR-AÜ/-AD9AP'S power suppÿ terminal2 is â common ler-


minattor input signals to the Timer. Do not di§ôonaect the wires on
terminâl 2. otheMis€ the inlêrnal circuilry of the Timer will b6 dam_
aged.

10 It is imFossible to prôÿlde t\ro independent Power switchês as sho\rm


5,6,7 b€lo!ÿ rBgardless ol whelher or not thê Timels are differeot in phase.
u9-s-B;

Make sure thât the voltâge is âpplied within the specilied rânge, oth'
erwisê lhe inlernal elements ol thÉ Timêr may tle damaged

22 Solid-slate Multi-functional Timer H3CR'A


omRon
Relationship between lnput and Power lf a r€lêy or transistor is coûneclec, to two or mor€ Timers. the input
terminals of those Timet§ musl be wired propêrly so that they will not
Su Circuits H3CR-Ary-AtrS be dilferont in phasê or lhe lêrminâ16 wjll be short.ckcuited lo oflo
another (refer lo lhe figures belolr/).
A^ âppropriâtê inpul is âppliêd to th€ inpot signâl termiôêls of lhê
H3CR-A .-/.AI]S wheî onê ol thê input terminals is short-circuitèd lnêolleêt Conlaclorrrans'srorror
lrllh the common terminâl {terminal 2) for lhe input sigôals. Never exlBrn.lLn!ul sional
ùsê te ninal 10 as the common lerminal tor this purpose, othêMiso
the inlemal circuit of the Timer will be damaged.

lncorreol

5.6.7
! G. s.il-, 10

Cor6ct 2

5,6,7 Côrreêt Conlacl or trânsiEtor lor


r!.§.!r exlffnàl inpul signal

aC or DC 10
6

2
f

0o nol connêct a relay or any other load belween input terminals,


otheMise thê intornal cirouit ol the Timer will ba damaged due to the
high-tensjon vollâgo applied to the inpul terminali

H3CÊ.A
5,6,7
r q.§.!-'

Common to All HSCR-A Models


With thê HgCR-Àe input wires musl be as shon as posslus. lf the
lloaling capacily of 'riros o(csods 1,200 pF (appro)c 10 m for cablês
Relationship between lnput and Power with 12O pF/m), lhe opeÉtion will be aflecied. Pây parliculâr attên-
tion when usino shielded cables.
Suoplv Circui ts [H3CR-AP) Ihe H3CR-,iI.]S transiglor output is isolaled lrom the ir ernal cir.
cuilry by â photocoupler. Therelorc, eilhêr NPN or PNP output is
possible.

Since the input circuil and the power supply circuil €re canfigured
independêntlÿ the input circuitcan be tuhBd ON or OFF irr€spective
ôt thê OiùOFF stats ol lhe power supply.
It musl be noted lhat a voltage equivalenttolhe power supply voltage
is applied lo the input circuit.

sôlid-stâte N,lultl-f unctionâl Timer H3C R-A 23


omRon
Operation (Common)
Nolê: Tho undermentotêd i§ common for all HSCH rnodels-

I Basic Setting
. H3CR-F Twin lmer§
A time rangg (O to 1.2, o to 3, O lo 12, or o to 30) is selecled br ON--
and OFF-dn€ using lhêtime rang€ selêctor atthe low€r loft corner ol
Settinq of Selectors tho lront panê|, and thê soleoted timô langê appears withiî lh€
plastic framê ottho tims setting knob (= scale range display
The seleetors can bê furned clod§vise and çounterclockwise lo windows).
selêct the desired timê unil, time Êngê, Ôr operating mode.
Each selector has a snap mechani§m ihat §eculas the seleqtor at a
oiven oosiüon- Sêt Ülo soloctor at â positlon at which il is seqrred. Do
iot sei rt mtdway uetween two secJdng positions or a mâlluncllon
could rosult trom improper seüing.

Se lection of Operatinq Mode


. H3CR-A Multlfuncllonql Tlmêr
Turn the opêrâting mode selector wllh a screwdriver qntilthe deslred
operating mode (H3CR'A/AP/AS: A, B, 82, c, D' or E' H3CR-48ÿ
Â:8S,lA8Ër A, 82,'E or J, HOCR-A-9oo: G or J) appea6 in the display
window located âbow tho seloctor.

For ON4ime, the dÀsia€d lims unit (sec, i o s, mir, ând hr§, or 10 s,
A 1 O min. hrs. and I O h) l§ lndlaEtêd ln thê ÔN-tlme unil dl§play
v!dndo',
êl tho lowsr dght Çorner of lhê tront Fanot and can b€ changed by
tuming the ON-tims unit sêlector looated b6hw tho ON'time unit
display window.
€D
(l.e-. HêCF"À)

Selecti on ol Time Unit and Time Ranqe


. H3CÊ.A iil uldtunctlonal lmor
The deslrêd time unit (geq, min, hrs. or'10h) ls displayêd in the
tÿindow betow the timo sotting knob by furning lhê llme unit selector
located atthê lowêr rlghtcomer of the ,ront panel. Atimê range.$,ith
(1.2'
3, 12, ot gol2-4, 6, 24, or 60 br HgCR'4tr-301) i§ §electèd the
üm e ranq6 sêlector at tho lowêr l6h comor of lhe tront pânê|, and the
sebaed time range appÊars (in tho wihdow at lhe tot'/er dght Fart)
within lhe plâstic rramê of the timê 6ettlng knob.
For OFF-time, lhe desired time uîit (sec, l0 s, min, and hrs, or 10 s,
10 min, hrs, and lO h) is indicâêd in thê OFF-timo onil displây
window at the upper dght comer ollho llod pânelând can bg
chahgêd by tuming the OFF-time unil selêc{or located below lhê
OFF-tlmo unit display windo\,r.

Tiôe unil d+hy sindou

sorid.state Timêr HSCH (Gommon) 45


omRon
. H3CR-G Stardêltâ Timers . H3CR-H Pow.r OFFdelâY Timer§
'12) is selected vrith
A star oporation time io 6, 0 lo 12, 0 to 60, or 0 to 120
range (0 A ùmê rânge 10 to 0,6, O to 1,2, 0lo 6, ànd 0 to
seconds) is selecled 'rilh lhe stâr operation time range §eleclor at the tlms m-noé sebctor at lhe lower lell comer ol lhe koni panel. No
thê lovÿfi lott oorner ol lhe lront panel. t me unrt sel;ctor i6 availabl€ WhÊn odering the HSCB-H, spêcity S
(rorthe second unit)or M (for he mhute unh) foryour H3CR-H-

Thê ùmo rêquired tor r {itching (0.05.0.1, 0.25, or 0.5 §€cond) ttom
thê star operaüon to thê dêlta opelation of lhê H3CB'G can be Setting ol Time
seleotsd with thê star{elta lÉnslgr ümo sêlectorattho lower right
U6B ths time §etling knob to §et the deslred time
comerot the tront Panêl

I Using the Time Setting Ring for HSCR'A/'G


Setting a Specific Time Limlting the Setting Rang€
Mount the Pânel cover on the Imer, sêl the desirod tlmê with thg Examplo: To sst â Éfigê ol I 0 âni, æ s.
time seliinq knob, and place Time Solling Bing A onto lhe timê Mount lhe Panel Cover on the Timer, set the tlme selting l(,l!ù t'o 10 s
settinE knob so that lhe lime settlng nolch ot Îrne S€tling Ring A ls (lhê lower limltotthe sefling rângê), and placs Tim€ Sotting Fling C
in th€ cenler ol lhe reset lock position ol thê Panel Cover. onlo the üme sêting l(nob so thal lhe sloppêr ot lrne Setting Flng C
is on lhê right edge ol tho reset h.k posiÙon ol the Panel côÿêr. Next,
lime setting knob to 20 s (the upper limit ol thê setting ,ange)'
sêt thê.l.im6
place Sdling Ring B onto lhe timê setling knob 5o that the
ilopoêr of Time Selting Ring B is on the lelt edge ol thê rêset lock

g'" position ol the Panel Cover.

sIoppêr Fesêr tock positio.

l"l
ao
Timê Sêtling Flir! a Panil6t$r
+ m
H'"t
B Fing c§ening

Erample:To sot lhe timo lo 10 s

46 Sotid-slate rimer HSCR (Common)


omROn

Accessories (Order Separately) (Common)


Notê: Ths undermenlloned is oommon lor âll H3CB models.
Nols; All units are in millimeters unlesê olhêrveisê indicated.

Flush Mountin o Adaotor


P.3G
Bact Coi.€c1ino So.ket
Y92F-30

{, .\
\

Pânêl Cutout

Notc: or morê timers mounted in a vêrticâl line are ditleteûl in


\F- rs{'
Tho adâPtêr§ Tor two
orientatiôn from thoso mounted in a horizonlâlline. (N)

N can be oblainsd as follows {n: th€ numbet o, HSCR models arranged side by slde)
1/{
T_
Without a Co\ror: N = (48n - 2.5f
Wllh lhs Proteclive Cover: N = (51n - 5.5)"/{
With lhe Pansl Coverr N = (50n'4.5)*'i'o L
\92F-701-73
Panol Cutout
P3G

4510. 5

65 66

45iO,r5
5a 5?.3 (63.

Nolê: The vâlue shown in


parênlheses is for Not.: The mounting panelthicknêss
rhê Yg2F-70, should be 1 to 3.2 mm-
YE2F-711-74

0
I


I
L
Note: Ths mounting panel thickness
52.3 (63.7) should be 1 to 3,2 mm.
soi9'

Noler The value shown in


parenlheses is for
theY92F-71.

solid-srate Timer HSCR (Common) 47


omRon
Track Mountinq/Fronl Connectinq Socket
P2CF-08
:iqht, 3 4.5
7.8

70
4.5 dia-
Terminal Arrangement/
lnlsrnql Cgnnêclions
(Tôp ViÊÿv) Surface lrounting Holes

Tÿo, d5 da. or iwô, M,l

pzcF-08-E (Finger Sâtê Terminal Type) TTJT b)


Conlom ing lo V DEOI 06/Pl 00 x1-"x YÏ
Ell" 't.a 5 45
ffiÀ
3

1g
20.3

Track Mountinq/Front Connectino Socket


P2CF-11
4.5

Terminal ArrEngêmenU
70 lntêrnal Conneclions
(Iop VlêrY) Sûrtaca ltouh ng Holes
]uq 4.5 dlâ- or t/io, M4

-ÿ---t,
o f,,,*., J
PZCF-I1-E (Fing€r SateTerminalTyp€)
Conlorminq to vDE01 06iPl 00
7.4

1,2
70 35_4

48 sotid-state rimer H3GF (Common)


omROn
Back C onnectino Soc ket
Terminal Arrangemenu
P3G-08 27 4iâ- lnternEl Connesiiong
(Bottom Viê!Y)
.-filà. !
GOaO
\#^;fi/
I lo^v^ql-

45 49
éô1À

P3GA.11 Têrminal Arrangemenl,/


21
lntemal Conneêtions
(Bonom vleû)

a5 4.'
1EL3

Fln Sale Terminal Cover


Conlorm tovDE0t o0

Y92A-{8G
(Attachment tor P3G-o8/PSGAn l
Socket)

Mountinq Track
PFP.1OON, PFP6ON PFP-tOON2

4 éÇ é-
êa2

35iO.3 2l
l5

1,@0
I.oo0 (50o)

NotGi The value shown in parentheses are ,or the


PFP.50N,

End Plate §paccr


PFP.M PFP.S
t0
6.2
1,8

35.5
50 1.6

1.3
10
16.5

solid-staté Îmêr HSCR (Common) 49


omRon
Protective Cover Hold-down Clip
Y92A-488 Hold{own clips arê sold in sêts ol two.
The protective rover protecls the front pânê|, pârticulady the time
Y92H-71-1 Y92H4/-2
ssting section, âgâinst dust, dirl, and M/âtêr- ll elso prevents the set
vâlue lrom bêing allerêd due to accidenlâl contacl with the time
For PL08 and PL11 Sockets For PF085A Socket
setting kîob.
Not€: l. The Y92A-488 Frolêctive Cover is madê o, â hard plaslic
and therêfor€ il must be rêmoved to changê thê timer sêt
vâlue.
2. The Protoctivê Cover cannot be mountod il the Panêl Cover
(sold separately) is used on the Tirner

Y92A-488

Time Settinq Rinq/Panel Cover lor HSCH-A/-G


Th€re arethreê lypss ot Panel Covers (Y92P-48GL, Y92P-4aGB. The Tim€ sslting Bing and Pânêl covêr should bo used a§ a pair
and Y92P-48GM), all ol which are avqilablo in throe coloê lJso th€
mqst suilâbl6lype of Pan€lCovgr e,,ith the d€sign oflhe scallng plate Sotting a spêcillê ]]ms Setting Ring A (Y92S-27) and Pân€l
âccording to the application. lime Cover (Y92P-48GL, -4gGB, or -4aGM)
.l.imer,
When sotling a given lime forthe us€ of lhs Yg2S-27 or Limiùh9 thê setting tlmê Sêttlng Rlng BorC (Y92S-28), and
Yg2S-28 Tjmê Sotting Ring lacililates thelimê setiing opêÉlion ând l.ngê Panel Co/er (Y92P-48G1, -43G8, or -48GM)
minlmlzês posslble settlng erErs bÿ operatols.
Ths Y92F"73 or Y92.F-74 Flush Mounting Adapler orlhs Proteolive
Cover cannol be used.

Y92S-27 YS2S-28 Y92S-28 Y92P.48GL Y92P.48GB Y92P-48GM


Tims Sotting Time Sening Time Sêtting C Light Gray Black Medium Grây

50 sotid-state rimer H3CB (Common)


omROn

Safety Precautions for AllTimers


Notei The undêrmenlioned is common jor allH3CR models.

I Precautions for Safe Use Precautio ns for EN61812-l


Do not use lhe Timêr in ihe lollowing localions.
Conformance
. Locations wth tâmperaturê changes. The H3CR Series a6 a built-in limeroonforms to EN61812-1
'adicêl
. Locations with high humidity that may result in condênsalion, prolided that thê lollowing conditions ârê sâtisliêd-
. Localions vrith excessivê vibrâtion or shock. lllakê sl.,rê that no voltagê is aPpliod to anytêrminals belorê
. Locâtions with coûosive gas or dust. dismounting lh6 Timor (rom lhe Socket.
. Locations whore the Timer is êxposêd to sprayed water, oil, or The output seclion o, thê H3cR is providêd only with basic isolalion.
chemicals, Ih6 HSCB ilsell is dgsigned underthê rDllowing condilionsl
Orgânic solvents (such as paint thlnner) as well as strong acid or . Overvoltage category lll
alkalisolüions willdâmage lhe outer casinq ol the Timst . Pollulion degree 2
ll the Timeris usêd in an area wilh excessivê elêctrcnic noise, be lsolalion
sur€ to separale the Tlmer, wires, and input device asfaras pos§iblê '
lrom the noise sources. Furlhermore, ll ls rccommended thâl the Operation partsl Reinforced isolation
input signal',viring bê shielded lo prevent electrônic interference -Wilh clearânêe ôf 5.5 mm and creepage distânce ol 5.5 mm et
230 VAC
Using a surg€ âbsoôer is recommended il suEB loltages oocur'
Oulput Bas'o isolâtion (See note)
Pay the ufnosl attedlion not lo make mistakes in polarity whon YYiring
-Wilh cloarance ol 3 mm ând creopago distance ol 3 mm ât
theTimêt 230 VÀC
The H3CR Sêries usè6 e trânslôrmedess Power suôplv Dô not touch Hote: The t'i-pin model ensures bêgic isolatlon by itself ând âlso
lhe input leminâls whilê ths suFply voltâgê ls âoDlied. olherwisê ân ensures basic isolaUgn with the 1l_pln model mÔunted to the
eleciric shôck mâv bê rêceived- OMBON P2CF-1'1-a or P3GA-1t Sockel

I Precautions for Correct Use Connoçllh€ lwo output contâcts difierent in polarity totho loads §o
thâl thoy ,,vill be the same in polêniial-

Chanqinq the Settinq Others


Do nolchange the lime unit, time rangê, or operation mode u/hile the lf lhe Timerls mounled lo a conlrolboard, dismountthê Timerfrcm
Timsr is in operation, othe.wigê lhe Timer may malfunction. thê control board or short-circuit lhe conlrol boad circ1itry bêtore
carrying oul a vohag6 withstand test betweBn thê electnc clrcu,try
The time unitand tlme lange can b€ s€t wllh lhe respective selaclors and;on-chaGed mêtat pa ofthe Timêr. ThÉ protects the inlernal
fu m6d clockwise or counterclockwisa. circuitry ol theTime,llom dâmage-
The selêclors are of notched so lhat they lvill snaP ÿÿhen they are
properly set. Do noi sel lhe sêleclols midway bêltÿêen notches,
othôrwisetho Tim6r mây broak or malfuncÙon-
Do not use H3CR.A models (except tor HgCR-AES) in {icker modê,
or H3CR.F models althe lowest sêleclor setting. Dôing so may resull
in dâmage lo cohlâtts.

Power Su Iies
A DC power supply can be connected il its ripple fâctor is 2O7o or
less and the meân voltâge is within the rated operaling vollage reng€
of the Timer.
An AC power supply can be conîectêd to lhs power inpul torminals
yyilhout rogard to polarity. A DC power supply must be connected lo
the powerlnput têrminals as designated according to the polarity ol
lhe terminals.
Make sure thal thê vollage is app:ied wilhin the specified langê,
otherwisê thê internal elements of lhê Timer may be dâmagod-
Conn€ctlhe powersupply roltagê through a relây or swilch iÔ such a
wây thal lhe voltâge reâchês a fixed value al once, olherwise the
Timer may not bê resel or a timel error may result,
Be aware üat thê operating vohage '.ÿill rise by 5'Â if the rated
voltâgê is applieo to the Timer conlmuously while the ambicnt
lemperature is close lo ths maxlmum perm ssible âmbienl
lemperalure.
fhe power supply crrcuil ol any H3CF'A model (excePt fol H3CR'
AnS), H3CR-F 100-to-240-vAc model, and H3CB-G modelis a
sM/ilchiflg circuit. ll thê power line connected to the power supPly
circull has a trans{ôrmorwilh hiqh induclânce, a cÔunter_
€lêctomotive voltage willbe induced by the inductânce. To suppress
the voltâge, apply a CR tilter to the power supply line.

sotid-state rimer H3CR (Common) 5t


omRon
Warranÿ and Application Considerations
Warranly and Limitations ol Liability
WARRANTY
OMBON'S exclusive !ÿarranty is that the products are freo lrom defects in materials and workmanship for â period ol one year (or
olher period il specified) from date of sale by OMBON.
OMRON MAKES NO WARHANTY OR BEPRESENTATION, EXPRÉSS OH IMPLIED, REGARDING NON.INFRINGEMENÏ
MEFCHANTABILITT OR FITNESS FOÊ PARTICULAR PURPOSE OFTHE PRODUCTS, ANY BUYEF OR USER
ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETEFMINED THAT THÉ PRODUCTSWILL SUITABLY IUEET
THE REQUIREMENTS OF THETR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WAHHANTIES, ÉXPHESS OR
IMPLIED.

LIMITAIIONS OF UABILITY
OMRON SHALL NOT BÊ HESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIFIECT, OR CONSEOUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS,
OH COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS. WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON
CONTRACT, WAFRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OH STRICT LIABILITY.
ln no event shall ths rssponsibiliÿ ol OMFON lor any act exceed lhs indiüdual prico ot the producl on,rvhich liabilitÿ is assened
IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANW, HEPAIH, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE
PRODUCTS UNLESS OMHON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPEFILY HANDLED, STORÊD,
INSTALLEq AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, i,IISUSE, OB INAPPROPHIATE
MODIFICATION OR REPAIF.

Applicâtion Considerations
SUITABIUTY FOR USE
OMBON shall not be responsible for contormity with âîy standards, codes, or r€gulations that apply to the combinalion of
products in lhe custom€/s application or use of the products.
Take all necessary steps to determine the suitability ot thê product lor lhe systems, machines, and equipment with which it will
be usêd-
Know and observe all prohibitions ol use applicable to this product.
NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SEHIOUS HISK TO LIFE OR PHOPERTY WITHOUT
ENSUHING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMHON
PHODUCTS AHE PROPEHLY RIfl'ED AND INSTALLED FOH THE INTENDED U§E WITHIN THE OVERALL EOUIPMENT OB
SYSTEM.

Disclaimcrs
CHANGE IN SPÉCIFICÀTIONS
Product specifications ând accessoriss may be changed at any time based on improvements and oth€r rêasons. Consult with
your OMRON representatiw at any timê to conli.m actual specifications of purchased product.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS


Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be ussd lor manuracturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown

ALL DIMENSIONS SHOWN ARE IN MILLIMETERS,


To convêrt mlllimolers into Inches, multiply by 0.03937- To clnven grams into ounces. muftiply by 0.03527

cat, Nô. 1084-E1-064 ln rhe o, Droducl improvement, soecilications are subiect to chanos tvithoul nolice,
OMRON Corporation
lndustrial Automation compâhy

ôôntrol Devices Olvision H.Q.


Ànâlog Controller Division
shiokojl Hodkâwa. Shimogyo-ku,
Printed in Japan
Kyoto, 600{530 Japan
1106-0.3M {069€) (C)
T6t (81)75-344-7080/Fax: (81)75-344-7189
TeSys control relays
TeSyè d control relays and add-on blocks

LÀO N

LAD N, LAD C

LAD AN
CAD ..

LA1 DX, DZ

LAD N-3 LAl DY


CAD ..S

LÂD T, LAO S
LÂD N.r3 LAD F
LAD C..3

LAD 6K

LÂD T.3. LAD R.3, LAO S.3

Seo pag€ opposite for mounllng po§sibilities


accoding to control rêlây type and rating

7120 @@
TeSys control relays
TeSys d control relays and add-on blocks
Control circuit: a.c., d.c. or low consumption

Control relays tor connection by screw clâmp t6rminals

lncEl't€olE s 50.r fs) BL 0.580

3 2 c^D32- (3) 87 P7 BD BL O,sM

(ao 50t Control relays lor connêction by Epring lerminalg


lnslarü.lEl.Rs 5 - CAD 503r. B7 P7 BD BL O-5AO

2 cao 323.. E7 P7 AD BL 0.580

l4stantp..leortË-"q.qxiliary contag{. blocks lorconnection by scrur clqhp:termldale


For ula ln nolrnal n9 rnvlronmanta

cAD 32.. 2 LÂD i|l I 0,030


! on LH sids LAD 8t{t | (6.) o-060
0.0$
- 1onLHsids s - LAD8 20 {6J 0.0æ

I on LH sidê 2 LAD t}{!2 (6,, 0.0«t


1(4) LAr, t{22 0.050
13 LAD 1I1I 0.050
4 LAD }f'O 0.050

3 LAD N3'I 0.050


1(4) 1 - ? 2
hdl,dirE 1 l,UO and 1 tùC makê Dêlore bÉak.
Ulllh dust and damp protècÈd contaêt!, for uaô ln partlcu hrrBh indurtrid ênvironmâôl'
CAD 503..

2 2 LÂl DX2O 0-040


2 LÂt DXoa 0.o40
2 2 LA1 DYzO 0.040
2 2 LÀ1 DZ'O 0.050
2 LÀl DZI' 0.050

lnstantBnêous auxiliary contact blocks ior conneclion by spring terminals


Tiis typ€ ol conneclion A noi po*§ü€ lo{ cmlad Dlod{s LAD I and bloctê tvih du§ ând dânp poteclâd contaclÀ For al ot'€r
inslaîtaneôus auxllary cô.üact blocks, âdd t'ls dkjt 3 l0 h€ er'd ol ü'o rclolEnces selecled atrove.
Exarnple: LAD N1l b*orn€§ LÀD M lA,
(1) Slandad contol cir.uit ÿoltaqês (lot olhe( voltaqes. pleasê co.rsufi your Regiohal Sales O,li.a).
..c, suFplÿ
Vohs
- 24 42 4t 110 l1t 7?'o a30 240 380 400 415 {40
50/60 7E7F7 7 P1 U7 07 V7
d-c, .'+ply (ccih wilh inte$âl suppres§oô dêvicê litted as stEndâ.d)
Voft,§
= 12 24 36 4! 60 72 1t0 125 ÿO 250 4,[0
U oJto1.2sucJD ao FD GO MD
Loyr êônsüErprioh lêdls $ith integâl supprê§sion device frtied âs stândârd)
Vons: 5 l2 20 2a /ra llo 22O 250
ÀL JL ZI BL EL FL ML I]L
12) LC low cohsunpion.
(3) Io odet coniol rctays ÿik connæû@ by lugs, âdd lhê dtgù a b be end ol the setêctàd Efânnca.
Evamde: CAO50.. becomes CÂD506...
(4) Blocks qith 4 auxitiâry .întacts cannot ùe ùsad on lotu consumpton cantrct Êhys.
(5) Ptoduct hfled w)th l ear1h screen .ontinuit/ letninâls
16) Thesa contact blocks canîot be ùsêd on lot consumpti» côolrol rclays

@@ 7t21
TeSys control relays
TeSys d control relays
Add-on blocks

Time delay auxiliary contact btocks lor connection by scrsw clâmPterminals flJ

l lUC.nd 1 N/O 1 on{slay 0.t...3 6 (?,) LADm 0.060


ol «rB LAD T2 0.080
io,..1Bo s LAD 14 0.ô60
f3)
1...30 s LÀD S2 0.060
Off-dêlay 0.1...3s lz) LAD B0 0.060
0.1...30 § LAD 82 0,0ô0
(Sêâling cover: s6ê pâgs ÿ78 10...1E0 s LAD n4 0.060

LAD T
Ilmc d3dài àLülllâry ooirtact blocks for connectqn by spring teminâlt
Àdd û!€ digit ! 10 lhe rêl6rênc6§ 6€lsctsd abow, Emmpl€: LAD T0 b6dnnæ LÀO T03,

icâl,làtêh Ë

ll.rxd ot LAD AKIO. 0.070

:§ùlprêssgt
lnod1l-e-t : r: : ':"'. - ''.'ir.::ï i ,, ,,:t , ' r, ..;....,1. t
TÏ..ê rilo(l|lhs cllp onto thâ lop ol tlÊ mnltol talay ând tha êl€clrioal cof|ngübn h inslantlv lllâdo. Filing ol an inp'.i
lriodulê is sü posslbls.
t-AD 6K10 RC drEuitt (P.rl.toFoâpaoltor)
r Efhcli\ê prctêclion lor cTculis highly s€miliv€ lo 'hEh lÉqumcv' hiârfâ.Êncâ.
r Vohâgs lhitèd to 3 Uc mârimlm 8nd Àçcflating lr€qusncy limitêd lo 4(EHr mânmulrl
lirne on droÊoul {1 .2 t§ 2 timoa ih6 normtl tin€),

CÀD ^- ! 24.../AV LTD 0.012


& 1to_..2rto v L 'RCE
D4aCU 0.012

vailetorr (p.ik lf niitlngl


.ProEcnon plovicl€d by UnllirE th6 rânsism vollaq€ valuê to 2(]c m§ximum.
rMa.xrnum rgduction or trônsbnl voÏag€ p6axs.
.Slight tjm€ d€lay I lo 1.5lim6s ths norm.l ti!rô).
GÀO & r
2{...48 V LAO 4VE 0.012
!
50-.127v LÀD 4VG 0.012
! 110,..250v LÀD4VU 0.012

F rowhril dlod.
. No ovarhlrâgE or o§cIâtlng lr€qusncÏ,
. lncrs.§e in drcp.oui limÊ {6to t0limes ülef,omallim8).
: ,i:'tf. r PohrÈ6d componsnl,
LÀD4DOL 0-012

Bldlrccdorul pÈk llmltlng diod.


rProtêclion providsd by finiti.g lho tmnsisnt ovsr'æftâg€ ÿalue lo 2Uc rnaximum
.Mârimum reduclion o{ tlansiêfi1
CÂD a LÂD /tIB 0
LAD 4T§ Ô.012
72V
- LÀD 4TBDL 0,012
LÂD 4TSDL 0.01?
U\D 4TGDL 0.012
LÂO /ITUDL 0.0r2
L,TID 4TXDL 0.0r2

hlocks aaînol bs æad on lo1È ûn*mpüon @nïol telays.

LÆ 4DDL ou L@ 4T.DL

(6) CAD .. d.c. aad tow c,onsunp on cnntol .slays drê fiîêd wn\ a bùilqn bi4irêctional peak liniting diodê suwrêssot
as slardaÉ|, ok conlblrclsys ptoducsd afiet 15lh July 2001, lhb dlode is onovable. ft eaû lhêtêlôtê ba redâcèd t'y
tl\ê uset (ss. .etetqces tÀo 4T...
above)- tt can aho be rcplaced hy a lreewhæl diode LAO 4DDL l, a d.c or
l6w consunption cont@t rcptay is æed wlhout supptê'sion, thâ stèndad sùppÊsso, shoulcl bê roplaced with a
bla'lkihs plog LAD gDL

eI@
TeSys control relays
TeSys d control relays
Accessories and spare parts

Accessories 1to tc ordêred r.parat ly)

For ln!tti6!
sheel ol 64 blark lsgends. cAD, L-AD (4 contact§) LAO 2I 0.020
s€[.adhesive.8r«]mm
Sheâi o, t 12 Ua lsgênds, LAo (2contacrs), LAO 22 0.020
s.lf'âdhesiv., Ax 12 mm LAO T
Sl,iÈs otùlant, sell€dhesi/ê A[ producls 24 0.200
lêgsnds ,or prinüng by plou€r
§et§ o,5 stli
'SlS Labd' labeling 2U 0,100
sofiÿaralorleo€.rds LÀD21 English, Fr€ôôh, German,
snd LAD 22, supplied on ltaliâô, Spânish
CD.Fom
L€gEnd hol{r€r, snÂÊin, LC1 D09...38 LAD 90 0.001

XBY 2U ar 1E lrlm LC I DT20.-rro


LAON {4 contacts)
tAD T, I.AD B
Fol protacdon
T.AD T, LÀO B LÀ911901 om5
Sâtêty covsr pl€vmùng CÂD LÀO gETI 0.004
æco§e lo th6 movnlg corflac,t

§È.!çg!g.rts.i.ppt!s' i i ='t'., :.
Sp.aifcaliona
u9 D90t a Avêlaqe oonsumPtion at 20 "C:
. inrùsh {crs e . o.7s} 50,/60 Hz 70 VA si 50 Hz,
- s€al€d (cos - 0,3) 5u6o H:: I vA â160 Hr,
I
< 60 'C): 0.&5 to 1.1 Uc

12 §! 0.2Ê LXOtJT 0.07Ô


21 (2) t8 0.24 LXD 127 0.070
ô'ls 026 LXD I 87 0-070
32 12.3 046 LXD tC7 0.070

uo gËft s LXD rcgt 0.070


a 19.15 o.f7 LXD 1D7 0.070
{t 25 LXD 'I E7 0-070
60 LXD TEE/ 0,070
to0 LXO 1K7 0.070
110 130 5.5 LXO 1F7 0.070
1'16 LXD 1FE7 tr070
120 159 ô7 LXD 1G7 tr070
1!2.5 LXD IFCT
L7
200 1'17 16 LXO ILET 0.070
220,/230 639 LID IM7 É) o070
iê0 5S5 21 LIO I P7 0.070
LXD I æ0t240 645 25 L XI, 1W (1) 0.070
zn 741 30 LX9 1W7 0.070
310/4m 1580 60 LXD I q7 0.0io
/tOO is10 a4 txD lw 0.070
419 193{r 74 LXD.IN' 0 070
tt40 ù42 79 LXD TR7 o.070
4AO 2æO 85 LXD IT7 0It70
500 2499 LXO rS7 o070
5t5 3æ4 LXO 1SC7 ù070
6lt0 3600 135 LXD 1X7 0.070
aolt 5600 100 LXD,1Y7 0.070
(1) thê lÉsr 2 dlgtts it1 ttê Eference rcüasent bê voftNp code.
(21 Voltage bt spêdat cols lfièd ii, æAtrol rulays with saàal tin,er nodule wilh 21 V supply
(3) fhis coil can be usêd on zllQ V al60 Hz
(4) thi' coil can be used on 2&/210 V al 50 Hz and on 240 v otly at 60 Hz.

@@ 1123
TeSys control relays
TeSys d control relays and add-on blocks

Dlmenelons
CAD ç CÀD: or LC 0ow consumption)

o
(râD €)

b 77 89 b 99
c rltlplll cov€r or âdd-on bbcl, 84 84 ê wlthdrl .ôvêr or âd+on Uocks 93 93
ffth cover, lx hou ad+on blocka 8Ê 86 wlth cor,êr. wi$ool 8dd{î bba}s 95 s5
cl nilh L D N or C {2 o.4 contacts) 117 cl with LÀD N or C (2 o. a cc.riÈds) 126 126
ê2 *ith L D 6K10 12e c2 wilh LAD 6K10 138
cS *lù IÀD I R, S '137 137 c3 wilh LAD Ï, R, S 146 146
,a.ith LAD T, n, S and s€aling cover 11tl 141 ùilh LAO T, R, S and seaflE corâr 150 150

CAD

"t !ÿ,: 86 95 c IAMI D?zoot (2) 8a 97


.,i.l ê (ÀUl 0P200) fz.i ea !05

:.;.1"1.

r--l
,]

',:*s,-;!i*'i''E;i'i;"i.':rret$. #rlgffi-

#*-ffiÊ..*liÇ!#.ni';rsii
95

7t24 @@
TeSys control relays
TeSys d control relays and add-on blocks

Schemes
h3tânlânaou3 !urlllgry corrtact!
üiffi
cÀ0
Ws€§{$'-fr}.9.i}lffi
50 caD 32
§ffi #*

#I*L3LBIEI
rl :l *l sl sl ;l
ln3tintrncous auxill6ry contrcl hlock3

LÀD I{I LÂD 8r.r11 (r) LÂD N2O LAD 8N2O T,) LÀD 8NO2 LÂD IIO2
'
slsl ô àt èt ëlo êla
Ela Ële ;t-'6t!
_L- _L- sLBL
È-r -J:__ir*
*l *l rla llE 9lE -t^
^l^ 9lr *[-l
(l ) tho frgttês in bÂckêls ar. lot lhs dovhc nountd on ttlE RH s|da ol the ôontrd êtay,

ffi
LÂD I{22 talr t{13
ËffiffiWW
N'O
LÀD LÂD }III' LAD N31

itsLFLst BtBL:LBL Él sl Él rl
-l-FË -J;fËf,t,
fitElÊtËt
-jïiT;l]
El31313l
L1: I :l
sleJr[*[ J;l:\l

LAD C22 LÀI DX2O LJtl DXn2 LA' DYzO LÀT DZ'O LAl DZI1

il+$ $rl{ $
Ël :l Ël Bl
rELrh
-EFf;) B§ -f# tu:l{l$
(2) Ploduct liled ÿih 1 êath sct6@ cdtiNitt tehi.as.

Iim! del.y auxlll.ry contact blo.ks ilêchânical lrtEh bbcks


wffiriffi§{rmr'§.ftrr,i
LADÏ LADS LÂO N LAD 6K1O

91 9l zl zl at 9t

é+{
Èt El
*l *l ' Ë[-H

§rlry{5 7/25
Power Re{ay SZR-MY Series

FEATUEES
. A'r,/ide range ol âpplications
lrom power to seque0c6
cofltrol
'
ffi
Designed smâll, 2-pole types
brêak 5A loads and 4-pole
lypes, 3À
. High rôliability and long life
. Uhra high sensiüvity with
qüick response .i.!,:;
. High vibration aod sho{r(
rېistancq
. LEt for output
indrêâto(Nl , Xl type)
. Dlodo to absorb SZB-MY Ss,iss are gBnErêl ,purpos€ relâys dêsigned lor aod a wide
cor.mlar olerlroflotivg raûgê ol appllcations lrom poÿÿer to ssquoîce conkol6 in variouô
YatÊgB(Dr, Xr ÿpo) laqiory madrinâs and conü61 pansls.
. UL, CE ApprovÊd Ihsy ars $fiall size ot W2l.5 x H36 x L28, have two contâol lype6 2 -
. Co6t efrêctivê Pole(DPDT) veEion break 5A hêd and 4 Pole{4PDT) version brôak 3A
' Othff Éart numbers and load. l
, oÊlôns âre avâihblê - I Onê stândaû type and threè sFecial indicator Vpss are avàilàle -
LED sslf-contained: Dloda solf-containêd and LED & Diode.s6ll-
cohlained. lhese optjonb âflqw tis cuslomfi to selgcl ih9 apprù$b'
TYPICAL APPLICATJOÀS
bâÉd onthbirîsed§. -.: ..'.:.'
A rapjd rêsponss ând excellsnf suppo ;i§ €î6ur6d ÿla Hoflêÿwslli§
. Coov€iyor gbbal salss and dist buiion ch nêls.
Te6t
I
ORDER GUIDE
i:: I Panet
:
[4ùnft'g l'radèl côniE r
sÿts Type §ardsrd LED Eiod. tÉD & N&
Gûrilsined

Sl,Ân{âd SZB-UY PIW-h DPDT MY2-1 MY2.N1 ilY2.01


trrEl
Tncir E Soldor 4PDT HY4.1 MY4.N1 l,lY+0t i,ry4-xl
l[tsunù'! MY2,IP
PCE DPÔI
4POr

SZR.MY4.Ol F
iL 1

ltldllslDr typâ I

2 Polg 2 Plùg.in t soklsing lyp€


:t P.C B llFe
D
. LED (orltdined ll
. LÊD & d4oe conr,hêd x

Scnsing ard Control


Power Helay SZF-MYSeries

SPECIECAT|O S

' Coil Ratings


Coil
ô0Hz
e 2r4.t tE3 12.2 0.û8
12 1I8,5 1â 0.i7 0.!B
24 53.S -!L
46
-_
160 1.30
22 7€A
AC t0 11.fk2.9 ldir 3,750 14.a4
11ü1æ 9,tl/l0.8 e,49.2 4,440 10.2 3ê.1
200820 626_8 5.35,6 1?,950 54,15 94.0t
22û.lza0 n a/5.3 a.?]1ô 18.79û 83.50 136.4
15û 40 0.17 0.31t
2 160 om t.37
oc 21 s8.9 §50 320 _3.72 Min.10%
{a l&5 2.6@ 10.m 2t.cD
10d110 9.t/t0 1r,000 45 80 86.?0

. Cont el 8âün§t
DPDT

EGsstiE lordPCôr!1| Reîlsttê load loQS t =11

'r1...- Bârodloâd Ào220ÿ 6À DCtaV 5À Àc220v 2À 0câ4v 2A Àaâ[6A Éav 31t lâczsr/ o.ûA ritz,iv r,BÀ
t: ;' Cûryq[rB.n 3â
: flt.eèadFÇ{dtâq. AC 250Y m 1a5V
"{c â60v,.lr uâr,
td,siaE{t0 6r[q$ 3À
.l,lx._u'ûd'i'!i E p&* ,{{ovÀ t$,Y ô60lla 7âr --T--- J?avâ 3êrY .
ih. rÉdîhsli€ bsd (I!l, Ys[,6) SbJdâd: msv l.lt s,lsldùd I aslv lolÀ
hhlù Tcrpôrillrli .10-r{'C
. Ar islllHü?liûÿ 46.#*§H

- Charaçterlstlc8

50m a lda(
ôEr8le tule æfts l,lâx

opeeh!
1,8C0 eër

hL1St01 têshlânaê mh-lmir 500v


ti6hdrr AC 2,&Ol,/ tu 1 mituo 6c l,æov bdlw€€î lï)r...nlia,oüs co.la.l§J
'ot{tl] 1S,55tÈ i.ftmdoublè
1G65Hz 1.ùnn &irblâ aÂDlitxle
1,0(Oli (approx. lo{C)
Sh.É{

rc : sûfl*dl [email protected] qryaiia l,§mil dt l§,ml6|rddr§lbù


Àlû
00 10ûtÉs ope,,È::àr ordàril9 lj6}ry-0t l!g!lÈ3l!"!!y.
luô.
Lfu
- 2 pd.! . ùlû 6«J,û0iq#ddq .l qidrtr{ tqudc/ d 1 9t0.pp,E1d}&ns
É]€.tical .od.i.l i. aNgJo G?dùr ar.o{rùu§

2 Sensing and Conkol


Power Relay SZB-MYSenes

CHAFACTEHI§TC DATÀ
. SZR.MY2N

' Max. Switching capaclly ' Eeclicel service life . ElêcTricâl sêrvicê lilo
(Resislive laEd) (lndu0liv6 loêdl

3 i
È, ,
t.. §r
I
I I
I t,"

. szF.MY+1

' Max, SlyttÇhbE capqdty EldrioBl$^,hÉ lltê ,gÈctiiÈa] asdioê É


(He§slivs kad) (hûilive bd)

Ë !
t
I
i-
I"
r !
,I j,

DIi]lENSIONS
. szB.i,rY2-l

fi- -:-t
-

rl-1 iii
L':',j

3 Sensing and Control


Power Relay SZR-MY Sertes

DIMENSIONS
. szfi.ÀtYêI

r-;-;1
i??ii?l
ffiî"
Ë#]_-
l-1-'j
. PCB T6rmlnàl SZR.l,lYz-1P
'SZÊ- Y,L1 P (PCB holê slae)

ffi
§PECIÀL TYPE
. LED Sett rûntalnqd.tÿpô " szFt-lrtYll-N t
. sæüYIl-Nl
TTÈ LEO hdÈalù l3 ss[-conrÉ4aêd rhkn rürl3 ôn ùhén ÉlÂÿ
0p0$t$. TàE luftrhn lho§ F, l6d lâlkllê dêiadhh.
. hÀ-tlNc§
gâm. vith Ê1âi!i,ârd h,b€. Ïhè o.ly diëênæ ii Ùlo Éled dlrsl.
OC !!0:3-&rÀ gh; nlsn il,ltû(hld tÿDô
n?€ ' OélnA hlgh.r ihân st!îdàrd !pà
^C
, DIMÊN§ON
IlrrEnÈiod b râmÈ ün dâfihrd r!!e

. Dlode S6lt-cûnlÂlned lypa ' szF-MYEÆ1

' szÂ.MYD-D]
Tho diode l€ sall,conlâined whlcà absorbs thÊ revÊrs€
electdrotw brceo ,{00V). Ilrs lypo h DC pol{êi .lodcarod ,I\d
l- -r"l
d{oG t th. 2oru 6sr rlm.
- BAT§iêS
i,l 'li
S€n. wilh $ândardt e
. DIMENSION
O,ncniùr iB sflle wih slihdârd type

. LED & Diod€ SêlÈcontaired type . szF.MYû.X1

. SZA- YI-Fx1
Ti']8 Vp€ has bolh LEI] aM Dode sall-co.lâDed-

. fta]lNGs ;t:r:
srme w lr sBn$rd t)?e rir+ rirl i

' orMÉNStct{
Din.nsir,r is snln wilh sltr,ùsrC Vp!
,*' ]

Sensing and Control 4


Power Relay SZfr-M)/Senes

COHNECTING SOCKETS
t?d ns §ocket
lùm

4PDT 14N r4P

1:.

T,HÀCK MOUI{TING SOCKET

T dnâl arargenlàd lroudÿE hd{s

rfï
. sMF-08, 14 .,L il
tll
ilt
--I iT

T nhd enârBgnsnf
tA rfilr8 holEs

. sMF.osN, 'l4N

I
ô
o
(icP vrfl[,)

BACK CONNECTING SOCKET

-*9* o oo
oo F,E=.' a O Or
. sM&08 co . stüB-14

mt"'ffij-
t'li lr"
6t
C'
Fji
,.l.LJ l-
L-- l-1
ffiË- a oo1
oi

-I
. SMB-08P . SMB.I4P

-i tr-'"
2.pole

. Panel culout . L4ounting helght of relây with socket


Power Relay SZR-MY Sertes

WARRANTY/HEMEDY SALÊS AND SEFVICE SE Asla Heqion


Honey well warrants goods o, i1s For application assistâncê,cur€nt lndonesla
manufacture âs being freâ ol spêcilicâtions, pricing. or name ol Phône: {62) 21 §21 3330
d8fÊctivÊ materials and faulty thë nearest Arjthorized Distibutor, FAX: (62) 21 521 3735
wôrkûanship, Commencinq with contact the nearest sales o,fice.
dalg of shipment, honêyr ell's llalaysia
waranfÿ runs for 18 mônth§. lf INTEHNET Pl'|one; {60ê) 758-4988
wafantod good arê rolurned to htter/i,rww.honevwâll.côm,sensinq FAX: (603) 7s8-8922
Honey'flêll durjng thât pÊtlod ol 6mail:
coverag€, Honeywe]l wilt ?êpair or s&c-âp@singâpore.honeWell.côm Paklstan
râplac6 ,nilhout charge thoss itêms Phone: (92) 21 455 5173
it flnds dÊfsalive. TheToregoing ls SALES OFFI§ES FAX: {S?) 21 455 5194
Eqyor' s sols rerrledy anü is ln lleu Çhlnq Begion
ol all gthâi Iÿà?üntlçt, Boillng lndia
êr(F 9§§Ad frl i{t!prÉi.i, includlng Phone: (86) 10 65Ê1 0208 Fhèn€: (91) 20 675 §3?
tha€s.dl ra chàfiàhllity and FAX: (86) 10 656'1 0ô19 FAX: (91 ) 20 675 992
tllnesô lûf a..psrIlcülar purposê.
Spe$liàBilons mây charçe at Chergdu Phlllpines
âny fiÉ Vrithbut nôric€. The Phonê: (86) 28 6786 3a€ Phon€; (§3) 2 ê36 1â4S
lnforûiâlto! 1{€ supdy iB betievêd FAX: (86) 286 7 061 FAX: (63) 2 6361650
to be ecêurato srd reliablê as 01
this.pri ing. HowÉv6., v,e §ualtgzhou Slngâporè / SE Ark fÈglrnal
assume Êo JêÇpo'r.lsibillty for irs Phqlq; (86) 20 3879 1169 otfleÇ
FAX: (â6) 20 À479 126s Ft'onê: (65) 355 2s2s
Whilè we provide Apllhâtiôn FÀx: {65) 455 nmg
aslrqad.cjilpür8oBâIy and lhrough liong Kong ri:
.ôur jlisqbire; lt
is ùÈ tô tns Phofls: (852) 2S§3 6413 Thâllsnal
6ÈstoErer lo determinsr lhê FAX: (S§2) 295s 6787 Phofie: (6ôâi 6sq soge
süihmqri"of the produd io the FAX; (662) 693 3085
âpIdâüôn, Shim0hdi
Phong: (Bô)21 6354 9181 Xofêâ
FAX: (86) 21 6354 2248 Phons: (82)2 æ9 6167
FAX: (82)2 7È2 s013
Shênzhen
Phone: (86) 755 518 1226 Pacific Beglon
FAX: (86) 755 518 1221 Austratiâ
Phonê: (61) 2 9370 4500
Tâlwan R.O.C FÀX; (61) 2 9370 4525
Phonê: (886) 2 2245 1000 Toll Fres: 1300 363 936
FAX: (8e6) 2 2245 3242
New Zealand
Phone: (64) I 623 5050
FAx: {64) S 623 5060
Tôll Freê: 0800 202-(EB

lloneywell
§uLsirB & Cootrol
Honcl1,€llKoæâ.
llunlGroùp tlldC. l ltttr È-lort
19 1.HIll)srnsro-l 63. Yo[§san-Cu
Se(nrt I l(t-?0.2 Korrx
*$tr,hûû{} ÿétl.cort n nsing
cmâil Sù( Pii,)riinSa tx)r: huflcÿ\!clli:crn

@
2i)t!4tt 0:.!ri rr:,ca tirlF:r.r!.rn!r I !.r{â
^{

You might also like